Pioneer S-DV700ST Operating Instructions
XV-DV900 NS03_ZFL.book 1 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
CONGRATULATIONS ON YOUR PURCHASE OF THIS FINE PIONEER PRODUCT. Pioneer is on the leading edge of DVD research for consumer products and this unit incorporates the latest technological developments. We are sure you will be fully satisfied with this system. Thank you for your support. Location: underside of the unit Operating Environment H045 En Operating environment temperature and humidity: 5 ð C â 35 ð C ( 41 ð F â 95 ð F); less than 85%RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ⢠Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ⢠Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly ventilated location VENTILATION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 28 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 15 cm at each side ). WARNING: Slot and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, to prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. H040 En The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. IMPORTANT CAUTION: [For Taiwanese model] TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. H002_En RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION NS03_ZFL.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH Only multi-voltage model is provided with this switch. Always check that selector are set properly before plugging the power cord into the wall outlet. 1. Disconnect the power cord. 2. Use a small-sized screwdriver. 3. Insert the screwdriver into the groove on the voltage selector, and adjust the VOLTAGE SELECTOR. 240 V VO LTA GE SELECT OR 220V âÂÂ230V 110V âÂÂ120V CAUTION 240 V Power source voltage is factory adjusted at 240 volts. If your area is different, change the voltage selectorâÂÂs setting. H039En On the inside cover of the unit. Wall-mounting the center and surround speaker system Before mounting ⢠Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that its weight could cause the wood screws to work loose, or the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to mount the speakers on is strong enough to support them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls. ⢠Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws that are suitable for the wall material and that will support the weight of the speaker . ⢠If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the walls, consult a professional for advice. ⢠Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or damage that result from improper installation. W ood screw Pr otrusion: 5-7mm 5 mm 5 mm 10 mm NS03_ZFL.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION These labels can be found on the DVD/CD tuner rear panel and bottom panel and on the powered subwoofer rear panel. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. This player is not suitable for commercial use. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En Energy-saving design This system is designed to use 0.55 W of electricity when power is switched to standby. Installation precaution ⢠Install components so that there are no obstructions above or either side, and nothing blocking ventilation holes. ⢠Leave at least 5 cm of free space around the subwoofer and at least 28cm above and 15cm to the left and right of the DVD/CD Tuner, as shown below. Remember to also leave 15cm of space at the rear. ⢠Use a vacuum cleaner periodically to clean the port of the subwoofer to keep it free of dust. 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm Powered subwoofer unit (S-DV900/700SW) 28 cm 15 cm 15 cm DVD/CD Tuner unit (XV-DV900/700) [For Taiwanese model] NS03_ZFL.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference . Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . 9 General disc compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CD-R/RW compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DVD-R/RW compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PC-created disc compatibility . . . . . . . . 10 Compressed audio compatibility . . . . . . 10 JPEG file compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 02 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 03 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the Room Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . 21 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Resume and Last Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 24 DVD disc menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus . . . . . 26 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . 28 Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . 29 Listening to other sources . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 04 Home theater sound Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . 31 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Listening with headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Advanced Surround effects . . . . 32 Adjusting the Advanced Surround effect level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enhancing dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Listening with a virtual surround back speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . 35 Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Muting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 05 Playing discs Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 39 Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Using the display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using the unit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Clearing the program list . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Playing DVD-Audio âÂÂBonus Groupsâ . . . . . . 47 Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Switching DVD-Video audio language . . . . 47 NS03_ZFL.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
6 En Switching DVD-Audio audio channels . . . 48 Switching Video CD/Super VCD audio channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . 49 OSD disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Display unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 06 Viewing JPEG discs Playing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Using the JPEG Disc Navigator and Photo Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 07 Using the timer Setting the wake-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Turning the wake-up timer on/off . . . . . . 55 Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 08 Surround sound setup Setting up surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . 57 System Setup menu options . . . . . . . . . 57 Setting the channel levels . . . . . . . . . . . 59 09 Video Adjust menu Video Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Creating your own presets . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . 62 Digital Audio Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Dolby Digital Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DTS Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Linear PCM Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 TV Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Component Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 S-Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Subtitle Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 DVD Menu Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Subtitle Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 OSD Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 On Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bonus Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Auto Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Group Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DVD Playback Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 SACD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 11 Other connections Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . 72 Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . 72 Reducing the TV and line signal levels . . 73 Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 74 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 12 Additional information Switching off the demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Changing the clock format . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Changing the frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Setting the TV format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Watching NTSC on a PAL TV (MOD. PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Using and taking care of discs . . . . . . . . . 78 Titles, groups, chapters and tracks . . . . . 78 DVD Video regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Discs to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Proper installation and maintenance of this system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Problems with condensation . . . . . . . . . . 80 Moving the system unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Power cord caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 NS03_ZFL.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 En Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DVD/CD/Video CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 MP3/JPEG discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . 87 Widescreen TV users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Standard TV users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selecting languages using the language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 NS03_ZFL.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features DVD-Audio and SACD compatible Experience the super high-quality audio performance of DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD). The on-board 24-bit/192kHz DAC means that this player is fully compatible with high sampling-rate discs, capable of delivering exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic range, low-level resolution and high- frequency detail. Excellent audio performance with Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II *1 and DTS *2 software Built-in Dolby Digital and DTS decoders let you enjoy true discrete multi-channel home theater sound with Dolby Digital and DTS encoded DVD discs. Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II decoding adds excitement to two-channel source material with surround sound playback. Simple Room Setup for surround sound Setting up basic surround sound is made a simple two step process with the Room Setup feature. Tell the unit the size of your listening room and your listening position, and the system automatically configures the surround sound. Picture zoom While a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD is playing, you can zoom in on any part of the picture at up to 4x magnification for a closer look. See Zooming the screen on page 48. MP3 compatibility This system is compatible with CD-R, CD-RW and CD-ROM discs that contain MP3 audio tracks. See also Compressed audio compatibility on page 10. Graphical on-screen displays Setting up and using your DVD home theater system is made very easy using the graphical on-screen displays. Energy saving design This system is designed to use 0.55 W of power when in standby mode. *1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. *2 âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. NS03_ZFL.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Introduction to home theater You are probably used to using stereo equipment to listen to music, but may not be used to home theater systems that give you many more options (such as surround sound) when listening to soundtracks. Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to create a surround sound effect, making you feel like you're in the middle of the action or concert. The surround sound you get from a home theater system depends not only on the speakers you have set up in your room, but also on the source and the sound settings of the system. DVD-Video has become the basic source material for home theater due to its size, quality, and ease of use. Depending on the DVD, you can have up to six different audio tracks coming from one disc, all of them being sent to different speakers in your system. This is what creates a surround sound effect and gives you the feeling of âÂÂbeing thereâÂÂ. This system will automatically decode Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround DVD-Video discs, according to your speaker setup. In most cases, you wonâÂÂt have to make changes for realistic surround sound, but other possibilities (like listening to a CD with multi- channel surround sound) are explained in Home theater sound on page 30. General disc compatibility This system was designed and engineered to be compatible with software bearing one or more of the following logos: ⢠KODAK Picture CD ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. Other formats, including but not limited to the following, are not playable in this system: DVD-RAM / DVD-ROM / CD-ROM * * Except those that contain MP3 or JPEG. See also Compressed audio compatibility and JPEG file compatibility below. Video CD F ujicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW DVD- Video DVD-R DVD-RW DVD-Audio Super Audio CD VIDEO CD Super Video CD (Super VCD) NS03_ZFL.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En DVD-R/RW and CD-R/RW discs (Audio CDs and Video CDs) recorded using a DVD recorder, CD recorder or personal computer may not be playable on this system. This may be caused by a number of possibilities, including but not limited to: the type of disc used; the type of recording; damage, dirt or condensation on either the disc or the playerâÂÂs pick-up lens. See below for notes about particular software and formats. CD-R/RW compatibility ⢠This system will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or JPEG files. However, any other content may cause the disc not to play, or create noise/distortion in the output. ⢠This system cannot record CD-R or CD- RW discs. ⢠Unfinalized CD-R/RW discs recorded as CD Audio can be played, but the full Table of Contents (playing time, etc.) will not be displayed. DVD-R/RW compatibility ⢠This unit will play DVD-R/RW discs recorded using the DVD-Video format that have been finalized using a DVD-recorder. ⢠This unit will play DVD-RW discs recorded using the Video Recording (VR) format. ⢠DVD-RW shows in the display when a VR format DVD-RW disc is loading. ⢠When playing a VR format DVD-RW discs that was edited on a DVD recorder, the screen may go momentarily black at edited points and/or you may see scenes from immediately before the edited point. ⢠This unit cannot record DVD-R/RW discs. ⢠Unfinalized DVD-R/RW discs cannot be played in this player. PC-created disc compatibility ⢠If you record a disc using a personal computer, even if it is recorded in a âÂÂcompatible formatâ as listed above, there will be cases in which the disc may not be playable in this machine due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. ⢠Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Compressed audio compatibility ⢠This unit will play CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW discs containing files saved in the MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) format with a sampling rate of 32, 44.1 or 48kHz. Incompatible files will not play and the message CanâÂÂt play this format will be displayed ( No Play in the Display unit). ⢠Fixed bit-rate MP3 files are recommended. Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are playable, but playing time may not be shown correctly. ⢠The CD-ROM used to compile your MP3 files must be ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. ⢠Use CD-R or CD-RW media for recording your files. The disc must be finalized (i.e. the session must be closed) in order to play in this unit. This player is not compatible with multi-session discs. Only the first session of a multi-session disc will be recognized. ⢠This player only plays tracks that are named with the file extension .mp3 or .MP3. NS03_ZFL.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 11 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠When naming MP3 files, add the corresponding file name extension (.mp3). Files are played according to the file extension. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for other kinds of files. ⢠This player can recognize up to 999 files (MP3/JPEG) and up to 499 folders. If a disc exceeds these limits, only files and folders up to these limits will be playable. Files and folders are read/ displayed in alphabetical order. Note that if the file structure is very complex, you may not be able to read/play all files on the disc. ⢠Folder and track names (excluding the file extension) are displayed. ⢠There are many different recording bit- rates available to encode MP3 files. This unit was designed to be compatible with all of them. Audio encoded at 128Kbps should sound close to regular CD Audio quality. This player will play lower bit-rate files, but please note that the sound quality becomes noticeably worse at lower bit-rates. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.1* still image files up to 8 mega-pixels are supported (maximum vertical and horizontal resolution is 5120 pixels). (* File format used by digital still cameras ) ⢠The CD-ROM used to compile your JPEG files must be ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. ⢠This player only displays files that are named with the file extension .jpg or .JPG. NS03_ZFL.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 12 En Chapter 2 Controls and displays Front panel 1 VOLUME buttons Use to adjust the volume. 2 î Press to stop playback. 3 î Press to switch to the DVD/CD function. Also press to start/pause/resume playback. 4 Timer indicator Lights when the wake-up timer is set (page 54). 5 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on or into standby. 6 Disc tray 7 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 8 PHONES jack Headphone jack. Display unit 9 Remote sensor 10 Display See Display on page 13 for detailed information. TIMER ST ANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE î î 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NS03_ZFL.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 13 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Display 1 Tuner indicators Lights when a broadcast is being received. Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 2 î Lights when a disc is playing. 3 MIDNIGHT Lights when the Midnight mode is selected (page 34). 4 QUIET Lights when the Quiet mode is selected (page 34). 5 PGM Lights when a program list has been programmed (page 43). 6 RPT and RPT-1 RPT lights during repeat play. RPT-1 lights during repeat one-track play (page 40). 7 RDM Lights during random play (page 42). 8 V.PART Light when playing a video part of a DVD disc. 9 ATT Lights when the input attenuator is active for the currently selected analog input (page 73). 10 REC MODE Lights when Rec Mode is active (page 74). 11 Timer indicators Lights when the wake-up timer is set (page 54). Lights when the sleep timer is active (page 56). 12 2 PRO LOGIC II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic decoding (page 30). 13 2 DIGITAL Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 30). MIDNIGHT QUIET PGM RPT - 1 RDM ATT V. PA R T REC MODE kHz ADV .SURR. DIGITAL MHz PRO LOGIC PRGSVE 16 15 17 18 19 20 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 10 11 12 13 14 NS03_ZFL.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 14 En 14 Speaker indicators These show which speakers are being used to output the current source. The illustrations below show some example displays. 15 PRGSVE Lights when progressive scan video output is selected (page 64). 16 ADV.SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 32). 17 DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 30). 18 kHz / MHz Indicates the unit of the frequency shown in the character display ( kHz for AM, MHz for FM). 19 Character display 20 Lights during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc (page 49). 5.1 channel surround sound Stereo (2.1 channel) sound 3.1 channel sound with Dialogue enhancement on the center channel 5.1 channel surround sound with Virtual Surround Back mode active NS03_ZFL.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 15 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Remote control ⢠Functions printed in green on the remote control are accessed by switching the MAIN / SUB switch to SUB . 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on or into standby. 2 Function select buttons Press to select the source you want to listen to ( DVD (CD) . TUNER , TV , LINE ) 3 DISPLAY Press to display/change disc information shown on-screen (page 49). 4 Disc playback controls î Press to start or resume playback. î and îÂÂ/î Use for reverse slow motion playback, frame reverse and reverse scanning. î and îÂÂ/î Use for forward slow motion playback, frame advance and forward scanning. î Press to pause playback; press again to restart. î Press to stop playback. 5 î Press to jump to the beginning of the current chapter/track, then to previous chapters/ tracks. 6 DVD MENU Press to display a DVD disc menu, or the Disc Navigator if a VR format DVD-RW, CD, Video CD/Super VCD, MP3 or JPEG disc is loaded. 7 Cursor buttons, ENTER and tuning buttons Cursor buttons Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to navigate on-screen displays and menus. ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command. TUNE /â Use to tune the radio. ST /â Use to select station presets when listening to the radio. ST TUNE ENTER TUNEâ MASTER VO L UME STâ ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN/CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î î î î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 11 12 13 14 22 NS03_ZFL.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 16 En 8 MUTE Press to mute all sound from the speakers and headphones (press again to cancel) (page 36). 9 MASTER VOLUME Use to adjust the volume. 10 TV CONTROL (page 20) î Press to switch the TV on or into standby. INPUT Press to switch the TV input. CH /â Use to select channels on the TV. VOL /â Use to adjust the volume on the TV. 11 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 12 î Press to jump to the next chapter/track. 13 RETURN Press to return to a previous menu screen. 14 SOUND Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust the DSP effect level, bass and treble, etc. 15 Surround sound mode/sound enhancement buttons (In MAIN) AUTO Press to select the default decoding for the current source (page 30). SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 30). ADVANCED Use to select an Advanced Surround (page 32). (In SUB) BASS MODE Use to select a Bass Mode (page 35). DIALOGUE Use to select a Dialogue mode (page 33). VIRTUAL SB Press to switch the Virtual Surround Back speaker effect on/off (page 34). 16 DVD/CD buttons (In MAIN) AUDIO Press to select an audio channel or language (page 47). SUBTITLE Press to display/change the DVD subtitle display (page 47). ANGLE Press to change camera angle during DVD multi-angle scene playback (page 49). (In SUB) PROGRAM Use to program/play a program list (page 43). REPEAT Use to select a repeat play mode (page 40). RANDOM Use to select a random play mode (page 42). 17 (In SUB) ZOOM Press to change the screen zoom level (page 48). TOP MENU Use to display the top menu of a DVD disc in the play position (this may be the same as pressing DVD MENU ). NS03_ZFL.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 17 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch HOME MENU Press to display (or exit) the on-screen menu for Initial Settings, Play Mode functions, etc. 18 (In SUB) SYSTEM SETUP Use to make various system and surround sound settings (page 57). TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 59). CH LEVEL Use to adjust the speaker level (page 59). 19 (In SUB) DIMMER Press to dim or brighten the display. QUIET/MIDNIGHT Use to select the Quiet and Midnight modes (page 34). TIMER/CLOCK Press to display the clock and to access the timer menu (page 19 and page 54). 20 (In MAIN) CLR Press to clear an entry. ENTER Selects menu options, etc. (works exactly the same as the ENTER button in 7 above). (In SUB) FOLDER â Press to jump to previous folders. FOLDER Press to jump to the next folder. 21 MAIN / SUB Change from MAIN to SUB to access functions printed in green. (In MAIN) ROOM SETUP Press to start Room Setup (page 20). 22 (In MAIN) Number buttons Use the number buttons for selecting titles/chapters/tracks from a disc directly. NS03_ZFL.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 18 En Chapter 3 Getting started Switching on and setting up After making sure everything is connected up properly, youâÂÂre ready to switch on. The first thing to do is to tell the system what kind of TV youâÂÂre using, standard or widescreen. After that you can set up the surround sound for your room, and set the clock so that you can use the timer features. 1 Press î STANDBY/ON (on the remote or on the front panel) to switch the system on. Also make sure that your TV is switched on and that the video input is set to this system. You should see the welcome screen displayed. 2 Press ENTER to move on to the next screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select either âÂÂWide screen (16:9)â or âÂÂStandard size screen (4:3)â according to the kind of TV you have, then press ENTER. See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 87 if youâÂÂre not sure which one to choose. MASTER VO L UME CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER We lcome to Pioneer DVD! Thank you for pur chasing this Pioneer DVD player . Before using, please take a little time to setup your D VD player Put the batteries into the remote control Next, press the [ENTER] b utton on the remote control and start the Let's Get Started Menu Next Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) NS03_ZFL.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 19 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 4 Press ENTER again to finish setting up. ⢠Use the î (cursor right) button to select Back then press ENTER if you want to go back and change the setting you just made. ⢠You can also use the function buttons ( DVD/CD , TUNER , etc.) or the î OPEN/ CLOSE button to switch the system on from standby. Setting the clock Setting the clock allows you to use the timer features. 1 Press TIMER/CLOCK. ⢠If you are adjusting the clock, rather then setting it for the first time, press TIMER/ CLOCK again. 2 If âÂÂClock ADJ?â isnâÂÂt already showing in the display, press î or î (cursor left or right) until you see it. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the hour. 5 Press ENTER. Let's Get Started Menu Setup complete If you're finished setting up, ch oose [Complete], to start again choose [Back] Complete Back MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ 9 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 20 En 6 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the minute. 7 Press ENTER to confirm. The display flashes to indicate the clock is set. ⢠Press TIMER/CLOCK anytime to display the clock. ⢠If you unplug the system from the wall outlet, or there is a power outage, you will need to set the clock again. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can set up the supplied remote to control your TV using the TV CONTROL buttons. 1 Switch on your TV. 2 Find the name of the manufacturer of your TV in the Preset code list on page 89 Next to each manufacturer is one or more three digit codes. These tell the remote what kind of TV you have. If the name of the manufacturer of your TV does not appear in the table, you wonâÂÂt be able to set up this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote at your TV, hold down the CLR button, then enter the three digit code for your TV. The remote transmits an on/off signal to the TV. If youâÂÂve entered the correct code, your TV should switch off. If your TV doesnâÂÂt turn off, repeat the procedure using the next code in the list until your TV switches off successfully. Once set, you can then use the individual TV controls shown below. ⢠The default setting is for a Pioneer TV. Using the Room Setup Before using your system to enjoy surround sound playback, we recommend you spend a few minutes using the Room Setup. This is a quick and easy way to get good surround sound for your room. Depending on the distance of the surround speakers from your main listening position, choose between S (small), M (medium), or L (large) room, then depending on your seating position relative to the front and surround speakers, choose Fwd (forward), Mid (middle), or Back . Button What it does î Switches your TV on or into standby. CH /â Changes the TV channel. VOL /â Adjusts the TV volume. INPUT Switches the TVâÂÂs input between the built in TV tuner and an external video source. MASTER VO L UME TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT REPEA T RANDOM PROGRAM BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED TV CONTROL INPUT CH VO L NS03_ZFL.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 21 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch it on. 2 Press ROOM SETUP. ⢠If you have previously set up the room type and seating position, the display will show the current room settings. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a room type then press ENTER. Choose one of the following depending on your room size: ⢠S â Smaller than average room ⢠M â Average room ⢠L â Larger than average room 5 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a seating position setting, then press ENTER . Choose one of the following depending on where your main listening position is: ⢠Fwd â If you are nearer to the front speakers than the surround speakers ⢠Mid â If you are equal distance from the front and surround speakers ⢠Back â If you are nearer to the surround speakers than the front speakers ⢠The Room Setup automatically sets up both channel level and speaker distance. If you have already set the channel levels manually (see page 59) or speaker distance settings (see page 58), you will see Room Set? in the display when you first press the ROOM SETUP button. ⢠Using the Room Setup will overwrite any previous settings you had for channel level and speaker distance. ⢠For a more detailed surround sound setup, see Setting up surround sound on page 57. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this system makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). You should get used to the way these work as youâÂÂll need to use them when setting up the system, using some of the playback features, such as program play, and when making more advanced settings for audio and video. All the screens are navigated in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( î , î , î , î ) to change the highlighted item and pressing ENTER to select it. ⢠Throughout this manual, âÂÂSelectâ means use the cursor buttons to highlight an item on-screen, then press ENTER . NS03_ZFL.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 22 En ⢠The button guide at the bottom of every OSD screen shows you which buttons youâÂÂll need to use for that screen. Playing discs The basic playback controls for playing DVD, CD, SACD, Video CD/Super VCD and MP3 discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in the chapter 5. Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means any kind of DVD disc (DVD-Video, DVD-Audio or DVD-R/RW). 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch it on. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). Button What it does HOME MENU Displays/exits the on-screen display îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Changes the highlighted menu item ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item (both ENTER buttons work in exactly the same way) RETURN Returns to the main menu without saving changes MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 12 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î RETURN MENU HOME ENTER 3 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 23 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 4 Press î (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD, a menu may appear. See DVD disc menus on page 25 and Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus on page 26 for how to navigate these. If youâÂÂre playing an MP3 disc, it may take a few seconds before playback starts, depending on the complexity of the file structure on the disc. If you loaded a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEGs, a slideshow will start. See Viewing JPEG discs on page 52 for more on playing these discs. ⢠See also PhotoViewer on page 71 if the disc contains both MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files. 5 Use the MASTER VOLUME â / button (or the top panel VOLUME buttons) to adjust the volume. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs. You can find other playback features in the chapter 5. Button What it does î Starts playback. DVD and Video CD: If the display shows Resume or Last Mem playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see also Resume and Last Memory below.) MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM CLR MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ î î î î î î FOLDERâ FOLDER ENTER î 123 456 789 0 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 24 En ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Track skip and number buttons for track selection do not work with unfinalized CD- R/RW discs. Using the top panel controls The î OPEN/CLOSE , î and î (stop) buttons on the top panel work the same way as the remote control equivalents. Resume and Last Memory When you stop playback of a DVD or Video CD disc, Resume is shown in the display indi- cating that you can resume playback again from that point. If the disc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows Resume and playback resumes from the resume point. For DVD discs only: If you take the disc out of the player, the play position is stored in memory. When you load the disc next time, the display shows Last Mem and you can resume playback (this works for up to five discs). If you want to clear the resume/last memory point, press î (stop) while Resume or Last Mem is displayed. ⢠When a Video CD is loaded, the Resume point is lost if the system is switched off, or switched to a function other than DVD (CD) . ⢠For the Last Memory function to work, you must press î (stop) to stop playback before opening the disc tray. î P auses a disc thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. î Stops playback. DVD and Video CD: The display shows Resume . P ress î again if you want to cancel the resume function. (See also Resume and Last Memory below.) î P ress to start fast reverse scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î P ress to start fast for ward scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î Skips to the start of the current track or chapter , then to previous tracks/chapters. î Skips to the next track or chapter . FOLDER /â (SUB) Skips to the next/previous folder when playing a JPEG or MP3 disc. Numbers Use to enter a title/track/group/ chapter number . P ress ENTER to select (or wait a few seconds). ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title/ group (for DVD- Video/DVD- Audio) or track number (for SACD/CD/Video CD/Super VCD / MP3 ). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected chapter or track (within the current group for DVD-Audio). Button What it does NS03_ZFL.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 25 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠Resume and Last Memory are not avail- able with DVD-Audio discs. ⢠The Last Memory function doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-RW discs. ⢠With MP3 format discs, playback does not resume. Instead, playback begins of the first track of the folder containing the file that was playing when playback was stopped. ⢠After I load a DVD disc, it ejects automatically after a few seconds! Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for your system. The region number should be printed on the disc; check it against the region number of the system (which you can find on the rear panel). See also DVD Video regions on page 78. If the region number is OK, it may be that the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean the disc and look for signs of damage. See also Using and taking care of discs on page 78. ⢠Why wonâÂÂt the disc I loaded play? First check that you loaded the disc the right way up (label side up), and that itâÂÂs clean and not damaged. See Using and taking care of discs on page 78 for information on cleaning discs. If a disc loaded correctly wonâÂÂt play, itâÂÂs probably an incompatible format or disc type, such as DVD-ROM. See General disc compatibility on page 9 for more on disc compatibility. â¢I have a widescreen TV so why are there black bars at the top and bottom of the screen when I play some discs? Some movie formats are such that even when played on a widescreen TV, black bars are necessary at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. â¢I have a standard (4:3) TV and set the system to show widescreen DVDs in pan & scan format, so why do I still get black bars top and bottom with some discs? Some discs override the display preferences of the system, so even if you have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those discs will still be shown in letterbox format. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Why canâÂÂt I hear DVD-Audio and SACD audio through the digital outputs? DVD-Audio and SACD audio is only available through the analog outputs. This is not a malfunction. ⢠My DVD-Audio disc starts playing, but then suddenly stops! The disc may have been illegally copied. DVD disc menus Many DVD-Video and DVD-Audio discs contain menus from which you can select what you want to watch or listen to. They may give access to additional features, such as subtitle and audio language selection, or special features such as slideshows. See the disc packaging for details. Sometimes DVD menus are displayed automatically when you start playback; others only appear when you press DVD MENU or TOP MENU . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a bonus group. To access this group you have to input a password which you can find on the disc packaging. See page 69 for more information. NS03_ZFL.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 26 En Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback control) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD without having to navigate the PBC menu by pressing î (stop) then starting playback using a number button to select a track, rather than î (play) (or î on the top panel). Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD discâÂÂthis varies with the disc. DVD MENU Displays a DVD disc menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen. On some DVD-Audio discs featuring browsable pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (MAIN) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select (or wait a few seconds). MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP MASTER VO L UME î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î RETURN HOME MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 27 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. 2 Press TUNER to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the AM or FM band. The display indicates the tuner band and the frequency. 3 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modesâÂÂmanual, auto, and high-speed: Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers Selects a numbered menu option. î Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). î Displays the next menu page (if there is one). ENTER P ress to select highlighted menu option. MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 NS03_ZFL.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 28 En ⢠Manual tuning : Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to search for other stations. ⢠High-speed tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving poor FM reception If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Tune to an FM radio station. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose âÂÂFM Mode?â then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂFM Monoâ then press ENTER. The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto- stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station. For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset. MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 NS03_ZFL.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 29 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose âÂÂSt. Memory?â then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the station preset you want. There are 30 preset locations; each can store one station preset. 5 Press ENTER to save the station preset. ⢠If the system is unplugged from the power supply completely, saved stations will remain for several days, after which youâÂÂll have to save them again. Listening to station presets 1 Make sure the TUNER function is selected. 2 Use the ST /â buttons to select a station preset. Listening to other sources You can connect up to four external sources (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) to this system, including one digital source. See also Connecting auxiliary components on page 72. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Select the source you want to listen to. ⢠Press TV to select the TV input, or use the LINE ( L1/L2 ) button to select the LINE 1 ANA, LINE1 DIG or LINE 2 ANA input. 3 If necessary, start playback of the external source. ST ANDBY/ON L1/L2 CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER î î î îÂÂî î î î TV LINE NS03_ZFL.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 30 En Chapter 4 Home theater sound Using this system you can enjoy listening to sources, analog or digital, in either stereo or surround sound. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. ⢠Press AUTO to select the âÂÂAutoâ listening mode. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the 2 DIGITAL or DTS indicator on the display unit lights. ⢠Any previously active Dolby Pro Logic or Advanced Surround mode is canceled when Auto listening mode is selected. Listening in surround sound You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannel, analog or digitalâÂÂin surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources (except SACD and DVD-Audio) using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode (or press SURROUND then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons). The listening mode choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. ⢠Auto â Auto listening mode (see above) ⢠Dolby Digital / DTS â Dolby Digital or DTS decoding (depending on the source). For a multichannel source, this will be the same as Auto . ⢠Pro Logic â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source ⢠PL II Movie â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, for use with any two- channel source TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE AUTO MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 31 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠PL II Music â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two- channel source (see also Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below) ⢠Stereo â See Listening in stereo below ⢠See also Using the Advanced Surround effects on page 32, for further stereo and surround playback options. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Surround modes with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. ⢠When headphones are connected, only the Stereo option is available. ⢠When listening in Dolby Digital / DTS mode, two-channel material will automatically be played in surround sound using Dolby Pro Logic decoding. ⢠Dolby Digital / DTS sources that use only the center channel cannot be played back in surround sound. Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. Default Settings: C Width: 3 Dimen.: 0 Pnrm.: Off 1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂC WidthâÂÂ, âÂÂDimen.â or âÂÂPnrm.â â¢ C Width (Center Width): Makes the center channel wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings) ⢠Dimen. (Dimension): Makes the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings) ⢠Pnrm. (Panorama): Creates more spacious surround sound 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the setting. Center Width is adjustable between 0 and 7 ; Dimension between âÂÂ3 and 3 . Panorama is On or Off . 4 Press ENTER to confirm. Listening in stereo You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannel, analog or digitalâÂÂin stereo. When playing a multichannel source, stereo sound is created by downmixing all channels to the front left/right speakers and the subwooofer. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly until âÂÂStereoâ shows in the display. Any active Advanced Surround mode is canceled. TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 32 En ⢠See also Using the Advanced Surround effects below, for further stereo and surround playback options. Listening with headphones When headphones are connected, only the Stereo (default) and Phones Surround (virtual surround sound for headphones) modes are available. ⢠With headphones connected, press ADVANCED to select âÂÂPhones Surroundâ or SURROUND to select âÂÂStereoâ . Using the Advanced Surround effects Advanced Surround effects can be used with multichannel or stereo sources for a variety of additional surround sound effects. ⢠Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode (or press ADVANCED then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) bottons). Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠Adv. Music â Gives a concert hall-type sound ⢠Adv. Movie â Gives a movie theater-type sound ⢠Expanded â Creates an extra wide stereo field ⢠TV Surr. â Designed for mono or stereo TV broadcasts and other sources MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 33 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠Sports â Designed for sports and other programs based on commentary ⢠Game â Creates surround sound from video game sources ⢠ExPwrSurr. (Extra Power Surround) â Gives additional energy and width to stereo sources ⢠Virtual â Creates the impression of surround sound from just the front speakers ⢠5ch Stereo â Designed to give powerful surround sound to stereo music sources ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Advanced Surround modes with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. ⢠You can use any of the above Advanced Surround modes with any type of source. The descriptions are given only as a guide. ⢠When headphones are connected, only the Phones Surround option is available. Adjusting the Advanced Surround effect level You can emphasize or reduce the effect of the Advanced Surround modes as you like. For each Advanced Surround mode you can set the effect level independently. 1 With one of the Advanced Surround modes active, press SOUND . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂEffectâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the effect level. The effect level can be adjusted from 10 (min) to 90 (max). 4 Press ENTER to confirm. Enhancing dialogue ⢠Default setting: Dialog Off The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make the dialog stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. ⢠Press DIALOGUE to select the amount dialog enhancement. Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠Dialog Off â No dialog enhancement ⢠Dialog Mid â Moderate dialog enhancement ⢠Dialog Max â Strong dialog enhancement ⢠You canâÂÂt use Dialog Enhancement with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED DIALOGUE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 34 En Listening with a virtual surround back speaker ⢠Default setting: Vir. SB Off The Virtual Surround Back feature can be used when listening in surround sound to simulate an added surround back channel. In a real theater the surround back speaker would be directly behind you, creating more cohesive and realistic surround sound. ⢠Press VIRTUAL SB repeatedly to switch between âÂÂVir. SB Onâ and â Vir. SB OffâÂÂ. ⢠You canâÂÂt use Virtual Surround Back when listening in Stereo or Virtual listening modes. ⢠You canâÂÂt use Virtual Surround Back when headphones are connected. ⢠If there is no surround channel, Virtual Surround Back has no effect. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Virtual Surround Back effect with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes ⢠Default setting: Off The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. You can use this feature if the music is a little bit harsh and you would like a smoother sound. The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. The effect automatically adjusts according to the volume at which youâÂÂre listening. ⢠Press QUIET/MIDNIGHT repeatedly to switch between âÂÂQuietâÂÂ, âÂÂMidnightâ and âÂÂOffâÂÂ. When the headphones are connected, you can't set Quiet/Midnight in the following cases: ⢠When an SACD or DVD-Audio disc is loaded. TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED VIRTUAL SB MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 79 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MIDNIGHT MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 8 NS03_ZFL.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 35 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Adjusting the bass and treble ⢠Default setting: Treble: 0 , Bass: 0 Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. Bass and treble adjustment is not possible when the Quiet or Midnight modes are active. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂBassâ or âÂÂTrebleâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the sound. The bass and treble can be adjusted from âÂÂ3 to 3 . 4 Press ENTER to confirm. When the headphones are connected, you can't adjust treble/bass in the following cases: ⢠When Recording Mode is ON ⢠When an SACD or DVD-Audio disc is loaded. Boosting the bass level There are three bass modes you can use to enhance the bass in a source. ⢠Press BASS MODE repeatedly to choose an option that fits the source youâÂÂre listening to. ⢠Music â Can be used with music to give a deeper bass sound ⢠Cinema â Good for action movies or movies with lots of sound effects ⢠P. Bass â Can be used with music sources to bring the beat of the music (or soundtrack) to the forefront ⢠Off ⢠You canâÂÂt use the bass mode with SACD and DVD-Audio sources. ⢠You can't use the bass mode when the headphones are connected. MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SOUND ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 36 En Muting the sound Use the MUTE button if you need to momentarily turn off all sound from the speakers. ⢠Press MUTE to mute the volume. To cancel, adjust the volume or press MUTE again. MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER MUTE NS03_ZFL.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 37 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Chapter 5 Playing discs Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. For an expla- nation of how to navigate these, see Using the on-screen displays on page 21. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD and SACD discs, Video CD/ Super VCDs, CDs and MP3/JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. Some DVD discs restrict the use of some functions (random or repeat, for example). This is not a malfunction. When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the functions are not available during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. ⢠To access functions printed in green on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB . Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the contents of a disc to find the part you want to play. You can use the Disc Navigator when a disc is playing or stopped. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, if a VR format DVD-RW, CD, Video CD/Super VCD or MP3/JPEG disc is loaded, you can press DVD MENU , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select what you want to play. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different. The screen for DVD-Video discs shows the titles on the left and the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter within a title. For DVD-Audio, select a group or a track within a group. Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Title 1-10 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 DVD Disc Navigator Chapter 1-3 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Group 1-3 DVD - A u di o Disc Navigator Tr a c k 1-36 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 NS03_ZFL.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 38 En For SACD, select a track within the current playback area. For a VR (Video Recording) mode DVD-RW disc select beween the Playlist and Original areas of the disc, or a title. Press î (cursor right) to preview the title. ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to switch between Orig- inal and Playlist during playback. ⢠Not all VR format DVD-RW discs have a Playlist. The screen for CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs shows a list of tracks. (The screen below shows a CD loaded.) The screen for an MP3 disc shows the folder names on the left and the track names on the right (note that if there are more than 16 folders or names that contain accented or non-roman characters, tracks and folders may show up with generic names â F_033 , T_035 , etc.). Select a folder, or a track within a folder. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠The Disc Navigator is not available unless there is a disc loaded. ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD/Super VCD in PBC mode, or an unfinalized CD-R/RW disc. ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use one of the search modes. See Searching a disc on page 46. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at various different speeds. 1 During playback, press î or î to start scanning. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scan- ning speed. ⢠MP3 tracks can only be scanned at one speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. Tr ack 1-14 Tr a c k 001 Tr a c k 002 Tr a c k 003 Tr a c k 004 Tr a c k 005 Tr a c k 006 Tr a c k 007 Tr a c k 008 2ch Area Disc Navigator Title(1-3) 01. 3/31 FIRST LEA GUE 02. 4/28 SECOND LEA GUE 03. 4/29 FINAL R OUND Original Play List Disc Navigator DVD - RW Tr a c k 1-10 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 CD Disc Navigator Folder 1-17 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead 007. Thermo 008. Missing Man MP3 Disc Navigator Tr ack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube NS03_ZFL.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 39 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs, SACD and MP3 discs. ⢠When scanning a Video CD/Super VCD or MP3 track, playback automatically resumes at the end or beginning of the track. ⢠There is no sound while scanning DVD- Videos and Video CD/Super VCDs, and no subtitles while scanning DVD-Videos. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD-Video disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW and Video CD/Super VCDs at four different forward slow motion speeds. DVD-Videos and DVD-R/RW discs can also be played at two reverse speeds. 1 During playback, press î (pause) ( î on the top panel). 2 Press and hold îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î until slow motion playback starts. ⢠The slow motion speed is shown on- screen. ⢠There is no sound during slow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. ⢠The slow motion speed is displayed on- screen. 4 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Video CD/Super VCD only supports forward slow motion playback. ⢠The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up DVD-Video or VR format DVD-RW discs frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î (pause) ( î on the top panel). 2 Press îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play) ( î on the top panel). ⢠The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. ⢠When changing direction with a DVD disc, the picture may âÂÂmoveâ in an unex- pected way. This is not a malfunction. NS03_ZFL.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 40 En Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track (CD and Video CD) or title (DVD-Video and DVD-RW) that form a loop which is played over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with MP3 discs, DVD-Audio, SACD, Super VCD discs, Video CDs in PBC mode or unfinalized CD-R/RW discs. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 4 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end point. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. ⢠The minimum loop time is 2 seconds. 5 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Creating a program list on page 43). ⢠You canâÂÂt use Repeat play with Video CD/ Super VCDs in PBC mode, or unfinalized CD-R/RW discs. A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 41 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select a repeat play option. If program play is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. For DVD-Video and DVD-RW discs, select Title Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). For SACDs, CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). For MP3 discs, select Disc Repeat , Folder Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). Using the display unit ⢠During playback, press REPEAT to select a repeat play option. Press repeatedly until the repeat play option you want is shown in the display. The repeat options are the same as those available from the OSD (see above). ⢠If youâÂÂve created a program list, Program Repeat is also available. ⢠During playback, you can cancel repeat play by pressing CLR . ⢠You canâÂÂt use repeat and random play at the same time. ⢠If you switch camera angle during repeat play, repeat play is canceled. Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Group Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Folder Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 42 En Using random play Use the random play function to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), groups or tracks (DVD- Audio), or tracks (SACD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD and MP3 discs) in a random order. You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select a random play option. For DVD-Video discs, select Random Title or Random Chapter , (or Random Off ). For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Random Track (or Random Off ). For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. For MP3 discs, select Random All (all folders) or Random Track (current folder only), (or Random Off ). ⢠You can also use the RANDOM button on the remote to select a random play mode. The random mode is indicated in the display unit and on-screen. The random modes available are the same as when choosing from the Play Mode menu. Press ENTER to start random play. ⢠To stop the disc and cancel random play- back, press î (stop). Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Group Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode On Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random All Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 43 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠To cancel random playback without stop- ping playback, press CLR . The disc will play to the end, then stop. ⢠During random play, the î and î buttons function a little differently to normal: î returns to the beginning of the current track/chapter. You can't go back further than this. î selects another track/chapter at random from those remaining. ⢠You can't use random play together with program or repeat play. Creating a program list This feature lets you program the play order of titles/groups/chapters/folders tracks on a disc. ⢠You canâÂÂt use Program play with VR format DVD-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. The Program edit screen that appears depends on the kind of disc loaded. On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a list of titles (if a DVD-Video disc is loaded), groups (for DVD-Audio), tracks (for SACDs, CDs and Video CD/Super VCD), or folder names (for MP3 discs). On the far right is a list of chapters (for DVD-Video) or track names (for MP3). 4 Select a title, chapter, group, folder or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter within a title to the program list. ⢠To add a title, select the title. Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program NS03_ZFL.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 44 En ⢠To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press î (cursor right) and select a chapter from the list. For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠To add a group, select the group. ⢠To add a track, first highlight the group, then press î (cursor right) and select a track from the list. For an SACD, CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. For an MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a track within a folder to the program list. ⢠To add a folder, select the folder. ⢠To add a track, first find the folder, then press î (cursor right) and select a track name from the list. After pressing ENTER to select the title/ chapter/group/folder/track, the step number automatically moves down one. 5 Repeat step 4 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/group/folders/tracks. Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1-38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1-4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1~38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 Tr a c k 1~4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1-38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 T rack 1-4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack 1~12 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 Program Program Step 01. 001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube Program Program Step 01. 001-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Program Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube NS03_ZFL.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 45 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 6 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player or switched to a function other than DVD (CD) . ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting play- back, press HOME MENU . (DonâÂÂt press RETURN â your program list wonâÂÂt be saved.) ⢠During program play, press î to skip to the next program step. ⢠Press CLR during playback to switch off program play. Press while stopped to erase the program list. Editing a program list using the OSD After creating a program list, you can add, delete and change steps. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. 4 To clear a step, highlight the step number and press CLR. 5 To insert a step in the middle of the program list, highlight the step where you want the new step to appear, then select a title/chapter/group/folder/track to add. After pressing ENTER , the new step is inserted into the list. 6 To add a step to the end of the program list, highlight the next free step then select a title/chapter/group/folder/ track to add. ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting play- back, press HOME MENU . ⢠If you want to exit the program edit screen without saving the changes you made, press RETURN . Other functions available from the OSD program menu As well as creating and editing a program list, you can start program play, cancel program play, erase the program list, and memorize a program list from the Play Mode menu. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select a program play function. ⢠Create/Edit â See above ⢠Playback Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playback Stop â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off program play Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 46 En ⢠Program Memory (DVD-Video only) â Select On to save the program list for the disc loaded. (Select Off to cancel the program memory for the disc loaded) ⢠Program lists are saved for the DVD disc loaded. When you load a disc with a saved program list, program play is automati- cally turned on. ⢠You can save program lists for up to 24 discs. After that, the oldest one is replaced with the new one saved. Using the unit display Even though the OSD is available for SACDs, CDs and MP3 discs, the Display unit provides enough information to make a program list easily. If a disc is playing, stop it first. 1 Press PROGRAM. YouâÂÂre prompted to enter a track or folder for the first step in the program list. 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a track or a folder, then press ENTER. ⢠For MP3 discs only: To select an individual track within a folder, use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the folder, then press î , then use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) to select a track. Press ENTER . Wait for the display to prompt you after completing each selection. If you make a mistake, press CLR to delete the last (most recently) programmed track. 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 steps. 4 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you press î (stop), clear the playlist (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Clearing the program list You must clear the program list to program a new one. 1 If a disc is playing, press î (stop). 2 Press CLR. Searching a disc You can search DVD-Video discs by title or chapter number, or by time. DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track, or by page. SACDs, CD/Super VCDs can be searched by track number, and Video CDs by track number or time. MP3 discs can be searched by folder or track number. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the list of functions on the left. The search options that appear depend on the kind of disc loaded. The screen below shows the DVD-Video search options. P0 -0 0 0 0 P0 -1 5 3 7 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 47 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 3 Select a search mode. 4 Use the number buttons to enter a title, group, chapter, folder or track number, or a time or a page. ⢠For a time search, enter the number of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD-Video/DVD-RW) or track (Video CD) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have play- back start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 5 Press ENTER to start playback. ⢠You can only use time search with DVD- Video and Video CD discs. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. ⢠Search functions are not available with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or unfinalized CD-R/RW discs. ⢠With more than two SACD discs you may not be able to select the first track of discs after the second disc. Playing DVD-Audio âÂÂBonus Groupsâ Some DVD-Audio discs have an extra âÂÂbonusâ group that requires a 4-digit key number to access. See the disc packaging for details and the key number. When you try and play the bonus group, the player will automatically ask you for the key number. 1 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit key number. ⢠ItâÂÂs also possible to enter the key number from the Options menu. See page 69. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are avail- able. You can switch subtitle language during playback. ⢠Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 65. Switching DVD-Video audio language When playing a DVD-Video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal NS03_ZFL.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 48 En ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language option. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 65. Switching DVD-Audio audio channels Depending on the disc, you may be able to switch channels when playing DVD-Audio discsâÂÂsee the disc box for details. 1 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio channel option. When you change the audio channel, play- back restarts from the beginning of the current track. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio channel from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 65. Switching Video CD/Super VCD audio channel When playing a Video CD/Super VCD you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. ⢠Press AUDIO repeatly to select an audio channel option. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD-Video, DVD-Audio or Video CD/Super VCD. 1 During playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor. ⢠Normal ⢠2x ⢠4x ⢠Since DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor buttons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely during playback. Au dio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH 1/2 Current /T otal Audio Linear PCM 192kHz24bit 1 2CH Digital Out Converted Au dio Stereo Zoom 2x Zoom 4x Normal Zoom 2x Zoom 4x NS03_ZFL.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 49 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠If the navigation square at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. ⢠We do not recommend using DVD disc menus when the screen is zoomed as menu options will not be highlighted. ⢠If you are displaying subtitles, these will disappear when the screen is zoomed. They will reappear when you return the screen to normal. Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Angle Indicator on page 67). ⢠During playback (or when paused), press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chapter and title information, as well as the video transmission rate for DVD discs, can be displayed on-screen while a disc is playing. OSD disc information ⢠To show/switch the information displayed, press DISPLAY . When a disc is playing, the information appears at the top of the screen. Keep pressing DISPLAY to change the displayed information. ⢠DVD-Video displays ⢠DVD-Audio displays ⢠VR format DVD-RW displays ⢠SACD displays (During multichannel playback only) Audio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH Angle Subtitle English 1 Title Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Tr. Rate 8.6Mbps Chapter Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Audio 1 Linear PCM Angle Subtitle - - 1 T rack Play DVD-A udio î 3.20 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 2.41 Remain 6.01 T otal 192kHz 24bit 2/0CH Tr . Rate : 9.5Mbps Group Play DVD î 3.21 1/3 Current / T otal Elapsed 53.20 Remain 56.41 T otal -Audio Audio Dolb y Digital 2/0CH 1 Subtitle - - Title Play DVD-R W Original î 0.08 1/32 Current / T otal Elapsed 30.22 Remain 30.30 T otal Tr . Rate 4.3Mbps Chapter Play DVD-R W Original î 1/1 Current / T otal T rack Play SA CD î 0.13 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.21 Remain 4.34 T otal Audio 3/2.1CH T rack Play SA CD î 0.22 1/9 Current / T otal Elapsed 3.38 Remain 4.00 T otal Disc Play SA CD î 0.05 Elapsed 73.00 Remain 73.05 T otal NS03_ZFL.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 50 En ⢠CD and Video CD displays ⢠(During PBC playback only.) ⢠Super VCD displays ⢠MP3 disc displays ⢠JPEG disc displays ⢠You can see disc information (number of titles/chapters, tracks, groups, folders and so on) from the Disc Navigator screen. See Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc on page 37. T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.40 Remain 5.47 T otal Disc Play CD î 28.00 Elapsed 30.20 Remain 58.20 T otal Play VCD î T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed Play MP3 î T rack T rack Name Outernational 0.18 1/17 Current / T otal Elapsed 12.42 Remain 13.00 T otal Play MP3 î Folder Folder Name ACP 2/7 Current / T otal Play JPEG î File File Name FL000001 1/40 Current / T otal Play JPEG î Folder Folder Name Holiday 2/6 Current / T otal NS03_ZFL.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 51 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Display unit information Limited disc information also appears in the display unit. Press DISPLAY to change the displayed information. ⢠DVD-Video / DVD-RW displays Title no . Chapter no. Elapsed title time Title no . Remaining title time Title no . Chapter no. Remaining chapter time ⢠DVD-Audio displays Group no. T rack no. Elapsed track time Group no. T rack no. Remaining track time Group no. Remaining group time ⢠SACD / CD displays T rack no. Elapsed track time T rack no. Remaining track time Remaining disc time 22 8 4 9 2T T L 1 0 70 0 22 0 4 2 22 8 4 9 22 3 1 5 2 1 47 00 GRP 41 1 6 43 2 0 53 15 Disc ⢠Video CD displays T rack no. Elapsed disc time Remaining disc time T rack no. Remaining track time ⢠Super VCD displays T rack no. Elapsed track time ⢠MP3 disc displays T rack no. Elapsed track time T rack name F older name ⢠JPEG disc displays File name F older name 41 1 1 6 53 15 Disc 43 2 0 41 1 6 20 3 5 EVE R YB O D BE S T _ O F_ TI G E R _ 0 1 ZO O _ TR I P NS03_ZFL.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Viewing JPEG discs 06 52 En Chapter 6 Viewing JPEG discs Playing a JPEG slideshow After loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG pictures, press î to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. Pictures are automatically adjusted so that they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is different to your TV screen you may notice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: ⢠The î , ANGLE and ZOOM buttons do not work while the display shows Loading . ⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. ⢠Up to 999 files are viewable on a disc. If there are more files than this on a disc, only the first 999 files are viewable. Using the JPEG Disc Navigator and Photo Browser Use the JPEG Disc Navigator to find a particular folder or picture by filename on the disc in the play position; use the Photo Browser to find a picture within a folder by thumbnail image. 1 Press DVD MENU to display the Disc Navigator screen. The left column shows the folders on the disc, the right column shows the files in a folder. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to navigate. When a file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed. Button What it does î P auses the slideshow; press again to restart. î Displays the previous picture. î Displays the next picture. ANGLE P auses the slideshow and rotates the currently displayed picture 90ú clockwise. P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the screen (see below). P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). DVD MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). FOLDER / FOLDER â Skip to the next/previous folder when playing a JPEG disc. Folder 1-2 001. F_001 002. F_002 JPEG Disc Navigator File 1-40 001. FL000001 002. FL000002 003. FL000003 004. FL000004 005. FL000005 006. FL000006 007. FL000007 008. FL000008 NS03_ZFL.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Viewing JPEG discs 06 53 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠When a folder is highlighted you can press ENTER to open the Photo Browser screen for that folder. See below for more on using the Photo Browser. 3 To resume the slideshow from the highlighted file, press ENTER . Using the Photo Browser The Photo Browser displays nine thumbnail images at a time from the current folder. 1 From the Disc Navigator screen, highlight a folder to display then press ENTER. The Photo Browser screen opens with the first nine pictures displayed as thumbnails. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to highlight a thumbnail picture. ⢠Use the track skip buttons ( î and î ) to see the previous / next page of thumbnails. Keep the button pressed if you want to skip several pages; release when you reach the page you want. ⢠To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN . 3 Press ENTER to display the selected thumbnail full size on screen. The slideshow resumes from the selected picture. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while viewing pictures from a JPEG disc. 1 During sldeshow playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor. ⢠Normal â¢2 x â¢4 x ⢠The slideshow is paused when the screen is zoomed. ⢠Since JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality may deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely. 3 To resume the slideshow, press î (play). Photo Browser 2 / 40 Live at Soft Normal Zoom 2x Zoom 4x NS03_ZFL.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 07 54 En Chapter 7 Using the timer Setting the wake-up timer Use the wake-up timer to set the system to switch on at any time and start playing whatever source you want. ⢠The clock must be set to the correct time for the wake-up timer to work properly (see Setting the clock on page 19). 1 Select the source you want played. For example, press TUNER to select the radio as your source. 2 Prepare the source. For example, tune in the radio station you want to wake up to. 3 Set the volume. 4 Press TIMER/CLOCK twice to reach the timer menu. 5 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂWake-Up?â then press ENTER. 6 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTimerEdit?â then press ENTER. 7 Set the switch-on time. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. 8 Set the switch-off time. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. After pressing ENTER this last time, the wake- up indicator lights, and the switch-on, switch- off times, the function ( DVD/CD , etc.) and volume are confirmed in the display. 9 Switch the system into standby mode. The wake-up timer will not work if the system is left on! ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM L1/L2 CLOCK TIMER/ DVD TUNER TV LINE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER M ASTER V OLUME 9 MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 07 55 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠You can check the timer settings in standby by pressing TIMER/CLOCK twice. (Press TIMER/CLOCK once to display the current time.) Turning the wake-up timer on/off If the wake-up timer is on, it will switch on the system everyday at the time you have set. 1 Press TIMER/CLOCK twice to reach the timer menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂWake-Up?â then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTimer On?â or âÂÂTimer Off?âÂÂ. ⢠You must have the timer set (see above) to select ON . The wake-up timer switches on and off according to your previous settings. 4 Press ENTER. ⢠The wake-up timer will automatically be canceled if the clock is reset. NS03_ZFL.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 07 56 En Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the system after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. ⢠If you set the sleep timer while either the wake-up timer is active, the earlier switch off time takes priority. 1 Press TIMER/CLOCK twice to reach the timer menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂSleep?â then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a switch-off time then press ENTER. Choose between the following options: ⢠Sleep Auto â System switches off automatically after the currently playing SACD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD or MP3 disc has finished. ⢠Sleep 90 â System switches off after 90 minutes ⢠Sleep 60 â System switches off after an hour ⢠Sleep 30 â System switches off after 30 minutes ⢠Sleep Off â cancels the sleep timer 4 To check how much time is left, repeat steps 1 and 2. The remaining time is displayed momentarily. ⢠Sleep Auto will not work with Video CD/ Super VCDs during PBC playback or CDs in repeat play. MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ ENTER 9 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound setup 08 57 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Chapter 8 Surround sound setup Setting up surround sound The Room Setup feature (page 20) is designed to give you a basic surround sound setup, however you can make the more detailed settings that may improve the surround sound in your listening room. ⢠When you change speaker distance and channel level settings, these settings will override settings you made in the Room Setup. 1 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the setting. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to make other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the System Setup menu. ⢠The System Setup menu is exited automatically after 5 minutes of inactivity. System Setup menu options Below are all the available settings in the setup menu. The first setting in each section is the default. See also the notes in each section for additional information about the settings. MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SETUP SYST E M ENTER 4 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound setup 08 58 En Front speakers distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to the front speakers: ⢠Front 0.3 m ~ Front 9 m â Distance can be set in increments of 0.3 m. The default is 3 m. Center speaker distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to the center speaker: ⢠Center 0.3 m ~ Center 9 m â Distance can be set in increments of 0.3 m. The default is 3 m. Surround speakers distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to the surround speakers: ⢠Surr. 0.3 m ~ Surr. 9 m â Distance can be set in increments 0.3 m. The default is 3 m. Dynamic Range Control Specifies the amount of dynamic range adjustment to Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks: ⢠DRC Off â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) ⢠DRC Mid â Mid setting ⢠DRC High â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) ⢠This setting works only with Dolby Digital and some DTS soundtracks. For other sources you can create a similar effect using the Midnight mode (see Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes on page 34). Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with two separate soundtracks. ⢠L-Ch1 R-Ch2 â Both channels are played through the front speakers ⢠Ch1 Mono â Only channel 1 is played ⢠Ch2 Mono â Only channel 2 is played ⢠On the Ch1 Mono and Ch2 Mono settings the sound comes only from the center speaker (or from the front speakers if listening in STEREO mode). ⢠This setting works only with dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks. See the disc packaging for channel information. LFE attenuator setting Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as needed to prevent the ultra-low bass from distorting the sound. ⢠LFE ATT 0 â The LFE channel is played with no attenuation ⢠LFE ATT 10 â LFE channel is attenuated by 10dB ⢠LFE Off â LFE channel is not played NS03_ZFL.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound setup 08 59 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Setting the channel levels You can set the relative channel levels from your main listening position for each listening mode, including all the Surround and Advanced Surround modes. If you used the Room Setup feature (page 20), the channel levels for each listening mode will already be set. However, you can still fine- tune the levels here if you need to. 1 Press SURROUND or ADVANCED repeatedly to select a listening mode. 2 Switch the remote control to SUB, then press TEST TONE to hear the test tone. The test tone is output in the following order (from the speakers active in the current listening mode): ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠RS â Right surround speaker ⢠LS â Left surround speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer 3 Use the MASTER VOLUME /â button to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the speaker levels in turn. You should hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker when seated in the main listening position. The channel level range is ñ 10 dB. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to exit test tone setup. ⢠The speaker volume can be adjusted while listening to any sound source you want by pressing CH LEVEL and then using the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the channel levels. After youâÂÂre finished with one channel, use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to move to the next. ⢠Since the subwoofer produces ultra-low frequencies its sound may seem quieter than it actually is. ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND îÂÂî î î î ENTER TEST TONE 5 SURROUND M ASTER V OLUME ADV ANCED MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Video Adjust menu 09 60 En Chapter 9 Video Adjust menu Video Adjust ⢠Default setting: Standard From the Video Adjust screen you can select the standard video presentation or define presets of your own. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on-screen display. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a preset. ⢠Standard â Normal ⢠Memory1âÂÂ2 â Use for saving your own presets (see below) 3 Press ENTER to make the setting and exit the Video Adjust screen. ⢠Depending on the disc and the TV/ monitor, you may not see the effect clearly. Creating your own presets You can create up to two presets of your own. 1 Select one of the Memory presets (see above). 2 Press î (cursor down) to select âÂÂDetailed Settingsâ then press ENTER. 3 Adjust the picture quality settings. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the current setting. ⢠Press DISPLAY to switch between full and single view. ⢠You can change the preset number from the Recall Settings menu item. Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Standard V ideo Adjust Memory1 Detailed Settings Video Adjust Recall Settings Contrast Brightness Chroma Level Memory1 Memory1 min max min max min max NS03_ZFL.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Video Adjust menu 09 61 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch You can adjust any or all of the following picture quality settings: ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark. ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall bright- ness. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appear. 4 Press ENTER to save the preset and exit the Video Adjust screen. NS03_ZFL.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 62 En Chapter 10 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu gives you complete control in setting up your DVD system, including video output settings and parental lock settings, among others. If an option is grayed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually because a disc is playing. Stop the disc, then change the setting. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial Settingsâ from the on-screen display. 2 Select the setup category from the list on the left, then select an item from the menu list to the right. 3 Make the setting you want. ⢠The language options shown in the on- screen display illustrations on the following pages may not correspond to those available in your country or region. Digital Audio Mode Settings Make these settings if you connect an external digital component to the optical digital output. Note that DVD-Audio and SACD audio is not output through this jack. Dolby Digital Out ⢠Default setting: Dolby Digital If the connected component is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital , otherwise set to Dolby Digital > PCM . Check the manual that came with the other component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible. DTS Out ⢠Default setting: DTS If the connected component has a built-in DTS decoder, set this to DTS , otherwise set to DTS > PCM . Check the manual that came with the other component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is DTS compatible. Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital > PCM Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out DTS DTS > PCM Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 63 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠If you set to DTS with non-DTS compatible equipment, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠DTS-CDs are always output as DTS digital audio regardless of this setting. Linear PCM Out ⢠Default setting: Down Sample Off If the connected component is compatible with high sampling rates (96 kHz), set this to Down Sample Off , otherwise set it to Down Sample On (96 kHz audio is converted to a more compatible 48 kHz). Check the manual that came with the other component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is 96 kHz compatible. ⢠Even when set to Down Sample Off , some discs will still output down-sampled audio through the digital outputs (you only get full sampling rate audio through the analog outputs). Video Output settings TV Screen ⢠Default setting: 16:9 (Wide) If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 (Wide) settingâÂÂwidescreen DVD software is then shown using the full screen area. When playing software recorded in conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will determine how the material is presentedâ see the manual that came with your TV for details on what options are available. If you have a conventional TV, select either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . In Letter Box mode, widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even though the image looks larger on the screen, youâÂÂre actually seeing less of the picture). See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 87. Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Down Sample On Down Sample Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 64 En Component Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this system to your TV using the component video outputs. ⢠Default setting: Interlace If you have a progressive-scan compatible TV, set this to Progressive for flicker-free video output. If your TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video, set to Interlace . Check the operating instructions that came with your TV if youâÂÂre unsure about its compatibility. When setting to Progressive , you have to press ENTER once more to confirm (or RETURN to cancel). See also below for important information on progressive scan video. About progressive scan video Compared to interlace video, progressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free image. Progressive scan video is available only from the component video output. ⢠When Component Out (above) is set to Progressive , there is no video output from the VIDEO and S-VIDEO jacks. If you want to display video on more than one monitor simultaneously, make sure that it is set to Interlace . ⢠If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the system to progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î STANDBY/ON to put the system in standby, then press and hold the front panel î (stop) button for about 8 seconds until the display shows Mem.Clr.? . Press the front panel VOL â or button so that the display shows Interlace? . Press the front panel î button to set to interlace and switch the system back on. Compatibility of this system with progressive-scan TVs. This system is compatible with progressive video Macro Vision System Copy Guard. CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE âÂÂSTANDARD DEFINITIONâ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER. This system is compatible with the following Pioneer displays and monitors: PDP-503HDG, PDP-433HDG progressive scan-compatible TVs. Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Interlace Progressive Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 65 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch S-Video Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this system to your TV using an S-video cable. ⢠Default setting: S2 ⢠If you find that the picture is stretched or distorted on the default S2 setting, try changing it to S1 . Language settings Audio Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD-Video discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the system automatically plays the disc in that language. The DVD-Video format recognizes 136 different languages. Select Other Language if you want to specify a language other than those listed. See also Selecting languages using the language code list on page 87. ⢠You can switch between the languages recorded on a DVD-Video disc during playback using the AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.) See Switching DVD-Video audio language on page 47. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs set the audio language automatically when loaded, overriding the Audio Language setting. ⢠Discs with two or more audio languages usually allow you to select the audio language from the disc menu. Press DVD MENU to access the disc menu. Subtitle Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD-Video discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the system automatically plays the disc with those subtitles. The DVD-Video format recognizes 136 different languages. Select Other Language if you want to specify a language other than those listed. See also Selecting languages using the language code list on page 87. Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options S1 S2 Initial Settings TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Aud io Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 66 En ⢠You can usually change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD-Video disc during playback using the SUBTITLE button. (This does not affect this setting.) See Switching subtitles on page 47. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs set the subtitle language automatically when loaded, overriding the Subtitle Language setting. ⢠Discs with two or more subtitle languages usually allow you to select the subtitle language from the disc menu. Press DVD MENU to access the disc menu. DVD Menu Language ⢠Default setting: w/Subtitle Lang. Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several languages. This setting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting for menus to appear in the same language as your Subtitle Language âÂÂsee above. The DVD-Video format recognizes 136 different languages. Select Other Language if you want to specify a language other than those listed. See also Selecting languages using the language code list on page 87. Subtitle Display ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the player displays subtitles according to the Subtitle Language setting. Set to Off to switch subtitles off altogether. Display settings OSD Language ⢠Default setting: English This sets the language of this systemâÂÂs on- screen displays. On Screen Display ⢠Default setting: On Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Lang. English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD Menu Lang. Subtitle Display On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options English fran ais Español OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 67 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch This sets whether operation displays are shown on-screen ( Play , Resume , Scan and so on). Angle Indicator ⢠Default setting: On If you prefer not to see the camera icon on- screen during multi-angle scenes on DVD discs, change this setting to Off . Options Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ⢠Default password: none ⢠Default Country code: us (2119) Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If the player is set to a lower level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. This gives you some control about what your children watch on your DVD system. Some discs also support the Country code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country code you set. Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country code you must register a password. As the password owner, you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code whenever you like. You can also change the password. ⢠Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the system to its factory settings (see Resetting the system on page 77), then register a new password. Registering a new password You must register a password before you can change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter a 4- digit password. The numbers you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: Register Code Number Initial Settings ** * * Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 68 En 3 Press ENTER to register the password and return to the Options menu screen. If you forget your password, you can reset the system then register a new one. See Resetting the system on page 77 for how to reset the system. Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂPassword ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password, then press ENTER. The numbers appear as asterisks as you enter them. 3 Enter a new password. 4 Press ENTER to register the new password and return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock level 1 Select âÂÂLevel ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a new level. Press î (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will require the password); press î (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lock level 1. 4 Press ENTER to set the new level and return to the Options menu screen. Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: P assword Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock: P asswor d Change Initial Settings ** * * ** ** Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pass word Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Parental Loc k : Level Change ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock : Le vel Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 69 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Setting/changing the Country code You may also want to refer to the Country code list on page 88. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Country code. There are two ways you can do this. ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to change the Country code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor right) then use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country code (you can find the Country code list on page 88.) 4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code and return to the Options menu screen. ⢠Changing the Country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Bonus Group Some DVD-Audio discs have an extra âÂÂbonusâ group that requires a 4-digit key number to access. See the disc packaging for details and the key number. Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k Change: Country Code ** * * Pas s wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 P arental Loc k: Country Code ** * * Pass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k: Country Code ** * * P ass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer î Off (us) î On î Single î DVD-A udio î 2ch Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Bonus Group : Key Number Input Initial Settings _ _ _ _ NS03_ZFL.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 70 En When you play a DVD-Audio disc that has a bonus group, the key number input screen appears automatically. You can also access the same screen here. ⢠If you eject the disc, switch the power off, or unplug the player, you will need to re- enter the key number. Auto Disc Menu ⢠Default setting: On This specifies whether the menu (Top menu) is automatically displayed after loading a disc. Set to On if you want the menu displayed automatically, or Off if you donâÂÂt want it displayed. ⢠Some DVD discs display a menu automatically regardless of this setting. If you press î while a disc is loading, this setting is ignored. Group Playback ⢠Default setting: Single DVD-Audio discs can have up to 9 groups of tracks. When set to Single , the selected group plays and then the disc stops, or returns to the menu screen. Use the search function (page 46) to select the group to play. (You cannot use the track skip î / î or scan buttons î / î in this mode.) Set to All if you want to play all the groups on a disc consecutively. ⢠Even if the player is set to All but you select a group to play from the disc menu, only that group will play. If you stop playback, all groups will play again when you restart playback. DVD Playback Mode ⢠Default setting: DVD-Audio Some DVD-Audio discs contain DVD-Video content in addition to the DVD-Audio. Set to DVD-Video to play a DVD-Audio disc as if it were a DVD-Video disc. Note that in this case only the DVD-Video part of the disc will play. Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer All Single Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer DV D-Audio DV D-Video Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 71 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠This setting reverts to DVD-Audio when the function is changed, the disc tray is opened, or the power is switched into standby. SACD Playback ⢠Default setting: Multi-ch Area SACD discs can be divided up into several different areas â stereo audio ( 2ch Area ), multi-channel audio ( Multi-ch Area ) and, for hybrid SACDs, standard CD audio ( CD Area ). Select which you want to listen to. ⢠If you select an area that isnâÂÂt on the disc loaded, a different area will play. For example, if you choose standard CD audio but the disc loaded is not a hybrid SACD, the stereo SACD area will play. PhotoViewer ⢠Default setting: On This setting is important if you load a disc that contains both MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files. The default On setting allows you to view only the JPEG files on this kind of disc. Set to Off to be able to play the MP3 audio files. ⢠Changing the PhotoViewer setting does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer 2ch Area Multi-ch Area CD Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options On Off Initial Settings Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Di sc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer NS03_ZFL.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 72 En Chapter 12 Other connections Connecting external antennas External AM antenna Use 5âÂÂ6 meters of vinyl-insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the AM loop antenna connected. External FM antenna Use a 75 ⦠coaxial cable to hook up an external FM antenna. Connecting auxiliary components This system has both stereo analog inputs and outputs, as well as one optical digital inputs and one optical digital output. Use these to connect external components, such as your VCR, MD or CD-R recorder. ⢠Connect the TV (IN) jacks to the audio outs of your TV (or VCR). This will enable you to hear the TV (or VCR) through this system. Connect using RCA pin- plug stereo cables. See also Reducing the TV and line signal levels on page 73. ENNA BAL AM LOOP ANTENNA Outdoor antenna Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire) 5âÂÂ6 m ANTENNA FM UNBALî 75 AM LOOPî ANTENNA 75 ⦠coaxial cable S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L INE1 L INE1 OUT TV IN VIDEO L R AUDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT XVâÂÂDV900 / XVâÂÂDV700 NS03_ZFL.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 73 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠Connect the LINE 1 (IN) jacks to the analog outputs of an external playback component. These include components such as a VCR or cassette deck. Connect using RCA pin-plug stereo cables. See also Reducing the TV and line signal levels below. ⢠Connect the LINE 1 (OUT) jacks to the analog inputs of an external recording component. These include components such as a cassette deck, VCR, MD or another recorder with analog inputs. Connect using RCA pin- plug stereo cables. ⢠Connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT jack on the rear panel to the optical digital input of an external recording component. ⢠Connect the LINE 1 (OPTICAL IN) jack on the rear panel to the optical digital output of an external playback component. These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system. Connect using a optical digital cable (not supplied). Reducing the TV and line signal levels ⢠Default setting: ATT 6dB Some sources may produce a high signal level which may produce unpleasant distortion from the speakers. In such cases, you may need to reduce the signal level of the auxiliary source (connected to the TV or LINE 1 or LINE 2 analog inputs) by switching on the attenuator. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTV ATT?â or âÂÂLINE1 ATT?â or âÂÂLINE2 ATT?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂATT OffâÂÂ, âÂÂATT 6dBâ or âÂÂATT 10dBâÂÂ. If the ATT 6dB setting still results in distorted sound, try the ATT 10dB setting. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. C AL T AL N S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L R LINE1 LINE1 OUT TV IN A UDIO VIDEO L R AU D LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT T ape deck, etc. XVâÂÂDV900 / XV â DV700 OPTICAL DIGIT AL OUT LINE2 OPTICAL DIGIT AL IN LINE1 NS03_ZFL.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 74 En Recording mode The Recording mode allows you to make analog recordings from the LINE 1 (OUT) jacks. When Recording mode is on, most sound- related functions (including SURROUND , ADVANCED , AUTO , SYSTEM SETUP ) become inactive. The display will briefly blink RecMode On if you try and use a prohibited function while Recording mode is on. When Recording mode is off, the audio from the analog output may be interrupted, depending on the operation. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂRec Mode?âÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂR.Mode Onâ or âÂÂR.Mode OffâÂÂ. ⢠When Recording Mode is On a stereo downmix of multi-channel DVD-Audio and SACD discs is output from the speakers and from the analog audio jacks. Note that with some DVD-Audio disc, only the front left/right channels are output. When set to Off , multi-channel DVD-Audio and SACD discs are played through all the speakers, but front L/R audio is output from the analog audio jack. ⢠When R.Mode On is selected while playing SACD, the unit will loose speaker SW output and bass will become inaudible. Connecting using the S-video output If your TV has an S-video input, you can use this instead of the standard video output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-video input on your TV. Line up the small triangle above the jack with the same mark on the plug before plugging in. ⢠The S-video ouptut is switchable between S1 and S2 formats for compatibility with all TVs. See S-Video Out on page 65 for more on this. S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT E1 N E1 U T TV IN VIDEO L R A UDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN FM UNBAL 75 AM L ANT E ANTENNA P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT TV XVâÂÂDV900 / XV â DV700 S-VIDEO INPUT NS03_ZFL.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 75 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Connecting using the component video output If your TV has component video inputs, you can use these instead of the standard video output to connect this system to your TV. This should give you the best quality picture from the three types of video output available. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to a set of component inputs on your TV. ⢠The component video ouptut is switchable between interlaced and progressive formats. See Component Out on page 64 for more on this. AUDIO E1 N LINE2 IN P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA COMPONENT INPUT XVâÂÂDV900 / XV â DV700 NS03_ZFL.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 76 En Chapter 12 Additional information Switching off the demo ⢠Default setting: Demo On This system has an automatic demo feature that starts when the system is plugged in for the first time. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂDemo Mode?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂDemo Off?â then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠After setting the clock, the demo mode switches off automatically. However, if you unplug the system from the wall outlet, the demo mode will revert to Demo On (and the clock will be reset). Child Lock ⢠Default setting: Lock Off This system has a child lock feature that makes the front panel buttons and controls inoperative. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂChild Lock?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂLock On?â or âÂÂLock Off?âÂÂ. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. Changing the clock format ⢠Default setting: 12-Hour You can choose to display the clock in either 12 or 24 hour formats. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂ12/24 Hour?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select either âÂÂ12-Hour?â or âÂÂ24- Hour?âÂÂ. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. Changing the frequency step ⢠Default setting: FM 100 AM 10 If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/region. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂFM AM Step?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂFM 50 AM 9?â or âÂÂFM 100 AM 10?â then press ENTER to confirm. NS03_ZFL.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 77 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Setting the TV format ⢠Default setting: AUTO The default setting of this system is AUTO , and unless you notice that the picture is distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If you experience picture distortion with some discs, set the TV system to match your country or regionâÂÂs system. Doing this, however, may restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. The table below shows what kinds of disc are compatible with each setting ( AUTO , PAL and NTSC ). 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTV System?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Auto, PAL or NTSC, then press ENTER to confirm. Watching NTSC on a PAL TV (MOD. PAL) Most models of the newly developed count- down PAL TV system detect 50 Hz (PAL)/60 Hz (NTSC) and automatically switch vertical amplitude, resulting in a display without vertical shrinkage. However, in some cases, the image may appear without color. If your PAL TV does not have a V-Hold control, you may not be able to watch NTSC discs because of picture roll. If the TV has a V-Hold control, adjust it until the picture stops rolling. On some TVs, the picture may shrink verti- cally, leaving black bands at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunc- tion; it is caused by the NTSC to PAL conver- sion. Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings (except for station memory) to the factory default. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press and hold the top panel î î î î (Stop) button for about 8 seconds until the display shows âÂÂMem.Clr.?âÂÂ. 3 Press the top panel î button. The systemâÂÂs settings are now reset, and you should see the âÂÂWelcome to Pioneer DVD !â screen. Dimming the display ⢠Default setting: 3 The display has three brightness levels ( 1âÂÂ3 ). 1 Press DIMMER to change the brightness level of the display unit. Disc Player setting T ype Format NTSC P AL AUTO DVD NTSC NTSC MOD.P AL NTSC P AL NTSC P AL PA L Video CD NTSC NTSC MOD.P AL NTSC P AL NTSC P AL PA L CD/no disc â NTSC P AL NTSC or PA L NS03_ZFL.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 78 En Using and taking care of discs Titles, groups, chapters and tracks DVD discs are generally divided into one or more titles. Titles may be further subdivided into chapters. DVD-Audio discs are divided into one or more groups that can each contain a number of tracks. CDs, SACDs and Video CD/Super VCDs are divided into tracks. CD-ROMs contain folders and files. MP3 files are referred to as tracks. Folders may contain further folders. DVD Video regions All DVD Video discs carry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the disc is compatible with. Your DVD system also has a region mark, which you can find on the rear panel. Discs from incompatible regions will not play in this player. Discs marked ALL will play in any player. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 1 T rack 1 Tr ack 2 T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 4 T rack 5 T rack 6 F older A Folder B Folder C T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 1 File 1 File 2 .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .jpg .jpg NS03_ZFL.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 79 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below. Wipe lightly from the center of the disc using straight strokes. DonâÂÂt wipe the disc surface using circular strokes. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp- tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the player at a time. Discs to avoid Discs spin at high speed inside the player. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it in your playerâÂÂyou could end up damaging the unit. This unit is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. NS03_ZFL.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 80 En Proper installation and maintenance of this system Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the system. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Problems with condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Moving the system unit If you need to move the main unit, first remove a disc if thereâÂÂs one in the player, then press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the system off. Wait for Good Bye to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift or move the unit during playbackâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. ⢠Unplugging the unit before Good Bye disappears from the display may cause the system to return to the factory settings. NS03_ZFL.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 81 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Power cord caution Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or an electric shock. Do not place this unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. NS03_ZFL.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 82 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on. ⢠Connect the power plug to the wall outlet. ⢠Disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and insert again. ⢠Make sure there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. No sound is output when a function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 72). ⢠Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off. ⢠Adjust the VOLUME . No image is output when playing discs. ⢠Make sure the TV is connected correctly (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠Reset the video output to interlace (see Component Out on page 64) No sound from surround or center speakers. ⢠Refer to Setting the channel levels on page 59 to check the speaker levels. ⢠Check that you havenâÂÂt selected the STEREO sound mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30). ⢠Check that the Virtual mode is not on ( Using the Advanced Surround effects on page 32). ⢠Connect the speakers properly (refer to the Setup Guide). CanâÂÂt operate the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠Operate within 23 ft. (7 m), 30ð of the remote sensor on the display unit (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the display unit to direct light. No display ⢠Make sure everything is connected properly. NS03_ZFL.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 83 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch DVD/CD/Video CD player Timer indicator is blinking and the system will not switch on. ⢠Unplug the unit, then plug back in. Wait for one minute then switch on. ⢠Make sure the fan at the AMP section of the unit is not being blocked. ⢠Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ⢠If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy The disc is ejected automatically after loading. ⢠Clean the disc. ⢠Align the disc properly in the disc guide. ⢠If the region number on a DVD-video disc does not match the number on the player, the disc cannot be used (see DVD Video regions on page 78). ⢠Allow time for any condensation inside the player to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. Playback is not possible. ⢠If the disc is loaded upside down, reload the disc with the label side face up. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠Press î (stop), then î (play) to start playback again. ⢠Switch the power off once, then on again using the front panel î STANDBY/ON button. Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to power failure or by unplugging the power cable, settings will be canceled. No picture/No color. ⢠Check that connections are correct and that plugs are inserted fully. ⢠Check the instruction manual of the TV/monitor to make sure the TV/ monitor settings are incorrect. ⢠If your TV/monitor is connected using an S-video cable, try changing the S-Video Out setting (see S-Video Out on page 65). Screen is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen setting is incorrect. Set the TV Screen option to match the TV/monitor you're using (see TV Screen on page 63). When recorded on a VCR or passed through an AV selector, there is disturbance in the playback picture. ⢠This system uses copy-protection technology which may prevent recording or cause picture problems when connected through a VCR or AV selector. This is not a malfunction. NS03_ZFL.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 84 En MP3/JPEG discs Picture disturbance during playback or dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Discs respond differently to particular player functions. This may result in the screen becoming black for a brief instant or shaking slightly when the function is executed. These problems are largely due to differences between discs and disc content and are not malfunctions of this player. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠DVDs and CDs use different recording methods. This is not a malfunction. Incomplete sound from headphones when listening to a DVD- Audio disc. ⢠Some multichannel DVD-Audio discs only output the front/right channels through headphones. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy CD-ROM disc is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure that the CD-ROM was recorded using the ISO 9660 disc format. See General disc compatibility on page 9 for other disc compatibility information. Files don âÂÂt show up in the Disc Navigator/ Photo Browser . ⢠The ï¬Âles on the disc must be named with the correct ï¬Âle extention: .mp3 for MP3 ï¬Âles; .jpg for JPEG ï¬Âles (upper or lower-case is OK). See General disc compatibility on page 9 for other disc compatibility information. JPEG ï¬Âles appear , but MP3 ï¬Âles donâÂÂt show up. ⢠Set the PhotoViewer menu option in the Initial Settings menu to Off to be able to access the MP3 ï¬Âles. See PhotoViewer on page 71. NS03_ZFL.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 85 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Tuner Error Messages Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the antenna (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠F ully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. ⢠Connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 72). ⢠Adjust the direction and position for best reception. ⢠Connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to the Setup Guide and Connecting external antennas on page 72). ⢠T urn off any other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it away from the main unit. ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your countr y or region . T r y switching the tuning inter val (frequency step) (see Changing the frequency step on page 76). Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. F or more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Sound is mono only . ⢠Check that the tuner is not set to FM mono (see Improving poor FM reception on page 28). Message Desciption Child Lock ⢠This message appears when the front panel buttons are pressed when the child lock feature is active. See Child Lock on page 76 for more on switching on/off the child lock. Rec Mode On ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because the Recording Mode is on (see Recording mode on page 74). Phones In ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because headphones are connected. 96K Stereo ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because the source is digital 88.2 or 96kHz PCM. No Surr. SP ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because there is no surround speaker output. Muting ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because the sound is muted (see Muting the sound on page 36). Exit ⢠Appears brieï¬Ây when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity . NS03_ZFL.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 86 En DVD-AUDIO ⢠Blinks rapidly when one of the below buttons is pressed while a DVD- Audio disc is loaded. ÷AUTO ÷SURROUND ÷ADV ANCED ÷DIALOGUE ÷VIRTU AL SB ÷BASS MODE SACD ⢠Blinks rapidly when one of the below buttons is pressed while a SACD disc is loaded. ÷AUTO ÷SURROUND ÷ADV ANCED ÷DIALOGUE ÷VIRTU AL SB ÷BASS MODE Message Desciption NS03_ZFL.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 87 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspects, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions also come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV users If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen setting (page 63) of this system should be set to 16:9 (Wide) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format, you can use the TV controls to select how the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. Please note that some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even though you have a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletterboxâ style with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Standard TV users If you have a standard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 63) of this system should be set to 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you donâÂÂt actually see the whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the systemâÂÂs settings so that the disc is shown in letterbox format regardless of the setting. ⢠Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. Selecting languages using the language code list Some of the language options (see Language settings on page 65) allow you to set your prefered language from any of the 136 languages listed in the Language code list on page 88. 1 Select âÂÂOther LanguageâÂÂ. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code number. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See the Language code list on page 88 (next page) for a complete list of languages and codes. NS03_ZFL.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 88 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Dutch (nl), 1412 Russian (ru), 1821 Chinese (zh), 2608 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swedish (sv), 1922 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Country code list Country, Country code, Country code letter Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821 , ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Switzerland, 0308, ch Sweden, 1905, se Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb United States of America, 2119 , us NS03_ZFL.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 89 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. MANUFACTURER Code(s) ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH /PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 NS03_ZFL.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 90 En SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 NS03_ZFL.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 91 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Glossary Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD-Audio discs that requires a key number to access. See also Bonus Group on page 69. Browsable pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. See also Slide- show . Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . Dolby Digital 1 Using a maximum of 5.1 channels of audio, this high quality surround system is used in many of the finer movie theaters around the world. The on-screen display shows which channels are active, for example showing 3/2.1. The 3 being the two front channels and the center channel; the 2 being the surround channels, and the .1 being the LFE channel. Dolby Pro Logic / Pro Logic II A matrix decoding system that extracts 4.1 (Dolby Pro Logic) or 5.1 (Dolby Pro Logic II) channel surround sound from a two channel source. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system different from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format for movies. Dynamic range The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are capable of a very wide dynamic range, deliv- ering dramatic cinema-like effects. R NS03_ZFL.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 92 En EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manuafcturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indi- cate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indi- cates an MP3 file. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A file format used for still images, such as photographs and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ or âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂ. Most digital cameras use this format. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂ. MLP / Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD- Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. This system can convert MPEG audio to PCM format for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV amplifiers. See also PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . MPEG video The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD uses the older MPEG-1 stan- dard, while DVD uses the newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard. PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only) A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs that you would normally not watch from beginning to end all at onceâÂÂkaraoke discs, for example. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. See also Digital audio . Regions (DVD-Video only) These associate discs and players with partic- ular areas of the world. This system will only play discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your system by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). S1 S-video output This S-video signal format includes aspect ratio information (4:3 or 16:9) within the video signal. S2 S-video output S2 is an enhanced version of S-video which, in addition to aspect ratio information, contains letterbox / pan & scan information. Widescreen TVs which are compatible with S2 S-video automatically switch to the appropriate mode according to the signal. NS03_ZFL.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 93 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality, but the more digital information is generated. Stan- dard CD audio has a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio . Slide show (DVD, Video CD/Super VCD) A feature of some DVD discs and Video-CD/ Super VCDs in which still pictures recorded on the disc cycle automatically as the audio is played. See also Browsable pictures . Super Audio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accomodate high sampling rate stereo and multi-channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. NS03_ZFL.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 94 En Specifications Amplifier Section Continuous Power (RMS) . . . . . 75 W / channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1 kHz, THD 10%, 6 ⦠) Disc section Digital audio characteristics . . . . . . . . DVD fs: 96 kHz, 24-bit Type . . . . . . DVD system, Video CD system and Compact Disc digital audio system Frequency response 48 kHz sampling . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz â 22 kHz 96 kHz sampling . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz â 44 kHz 192 kHz sampling . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz â 88 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 dB Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.005 % Wow and Flutter . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W.PEAK) or less (JEITA) FM tuner section Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 - 108MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced AM tuner section Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz (9 kHz step) . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz (10 kHz step) Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna Miscellaneous Power Requirements . . AC 110âÂÂ120 V/220âÂÂ230 V/240 V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 W Power Consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 W Dimensions: DVD/CD Tuner . 360 (W) x 74 (H) x 270 (D) mm Display Unit . . . . . 274 (W) x 44 (H) x 35 (D) mm Weight: DVD/CD Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 kg Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 kg Accessories Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Setup guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Video Cord (yellow plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable (gray plugs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable A (blue plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable B (black plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Speaker cords (5 m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Speaker cords (10 m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Non-skid pads (center speaker) (S-DV700ST only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Non-skid pads (subwoofer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Speaker stands (front/surround speakers) . . . 4 Speaker stand (center speaker) (S-DV900ST only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Large screw (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Medium screw (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Small screw (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cover plate (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Satellite Speaker System (S-DV700ST) Type Sealed, antimagnetic Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 cm (cone type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2 cm (cone type) Nominal impedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 â 20,000 Hz Max. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 W (JEITA) Front / Surround speakers Dimensions . . . . 110 (W) x 59 (D) x 284 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 kg Center speaker Dimensions . . . . 284 (W) x 59 (D) x 110 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 kg NS03_ZFL.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 95 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Satellite Speaker System (S-DV900ST) Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat panel type bookshelf Speaker Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 cm exciter x 3 Tweeter . . . . . . . . . 2.6 cm (semi-dome type) Nominal impedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 â 35,000 Hz Max. input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 W (JEITA) Front / Surround speakers Dimensions . . . . 120 (W) x 30 (D) x 450 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 kg Center speaker Dimensions . . . . 420 (W) x 32 (D) x 120 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 kg Powered subwoofer (S-DV700SW/S-DV900SW) Type . . . . . . Bass reflex floor type, antimagnetic Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm (cone type) Nominal impedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 â 2,300 Hz Max. input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 W (JEITA) Dimensions . . . 192 (W) x 436 (D) x 395 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 kg ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. T he S-DV900ST satellite speakers are flat-panel- type units that use NXT î speaker technology . T hese slim style speakers allow for easy installation anywhere. NXT and the logo are registered trademarks of New T ransducers Limited. This product includes F ontAvenueî fonts licenced by NEC corporation. F ontAvenue is a register ed trademark of NEC Corporation. NS03_ZFL.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
XV-DV900/700.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
XV-DV900/700.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm 28 cm 15 cm 15 cm 00Cover & Anki.fm 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 ChH æÂÂè¬Âæ 購å ÂéÂÂç¢åÂÂã è«ÂéÂÂè®Â使ç¨說æÂÂæ¸以äºÂ解æÂŒÂÂèÂÂçÂÂæ£確æÂÂä½Âæ¹æ³ÂãÂÂéÂÂè®Âå®Âç¢å¾Âï¼Âè«Â妥åÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以åÂÂæÂ¥å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂã ç®é 01 éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå åÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 家åºÂå½±é¢使ç¨說æ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CD-R/RW 堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DVD-R/RW 堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PC 製ä½Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 å£Â縮é³頻堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 JPEG æÂÂ件堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 02 æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 顯示å¹Âè£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 03 éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ éÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 è¨Âç½®æÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 è¨Âç½®éÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 使ç¨è¢å¹Â顯示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 åºæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ§å¶æÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 VCD/ 趠素VCD ç PBC é¸å® . . . . . . . . . 26 æ¶è½æ¶é³橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 æ¹åÂÂä¸Âè¯ç FM æÂ¥æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 è¨Âæ¶éÂȏº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȏº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 æ¶è½堶ä»ÂæÂÂæ¾溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 04 家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ èªåÂÂè½é³模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡Âæ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . 31 以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ç¨è³æ©Âæ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 調ç¯Âé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 å¢Âå¼·å°Â話 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . 34 使ç¨å®ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âè½é³模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 調ç¯Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 å¢Âå¼·ä½Âé³çÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 éÂÂé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 05 æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç ä»Âç´¹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 使ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ覽ç¢ÂçÂÂ堧容 . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 æÂÂæÂÂç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²î¿éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 循ç°æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â段 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 使ç¨ OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 使ç¨顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 使ç¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 使ç¨ OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 使ç¨ OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 使ç¨æ¬æ©Â顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 渠é¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 æÂÂç´¢ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 æÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢Âç âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Ââ . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ã¥ÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂ訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ã¥ÂÂæ DVD å±ç¢ÂçÂÂé³頻è²é . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ã¥ÂÂæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD çÂÂé³頻è²é . . . . . . 48 æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè¦Â觠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 XV-DV900/700.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
6 ChH 顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 OSD ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 顯示å¹Âè³Â訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 06 è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç æÂÂæ¾ JPEG ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 使ç¨ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ . . . . . . 52 æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 07 使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ è¨Âç½®åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 è¨Âç½®ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 08 ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® è¨Âå®Âç°ç¹Âè² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 系統è¨Âå®Âé¸å®é¸頠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 è¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 09 è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 åµ建æ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10 Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 使ç¨åÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® . . . . 62 Digital Audio Mode Settings ï¼Âæ¸ä½Âé³頻模 å¼Âè¨Âå®Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Dolby Digital Out ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â輸åº＠. . 62 DTS Out ï¼ DTS 輸åº＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Linear PCM Out ï¼Âç·Âæ§ PCM 輸åº＠. . . 63 Video Output settings ï¼Âè¦Â頻輸åºè¨Â置＠63 TV Screen ï¼ TV å±Âå¹Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸åº＠. . . . . . . 64 S-Video Out ï¼ S è¦Â頻輸åº＠. . . . . . . . . 65 Language settings ï¼ÂèªÂè¨Âè¨Â置＠. . . . . . 65 Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ . . . . . . . 65 Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ . . . . . 65 DVD Menu Language ï¼ DVD é¸å®èªÂè¨Âï¼ 66 Subtitle Display ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示＠. . . . . . . 66 Display settings ï¼Â顯示è¨Â置＠. . . . . . . . 66 OSD Language ï¼ OSD èªÂè¨Âï¼ . . . . . . . 66 On Screen Display ï¼Âè¢å¹Â顯示＠. . . . . 66 Angle Indicator ï¼Âè§Â度æÂÂ示å¨＠. . . . . . 67 Options ï¼Âé¸頠＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Parental Lock ï¼Â家é·éÂÂå®Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bonus Group ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Auto Disc Menu ï¼ÂèªåÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®＠. . . . 70 Group Playback ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ¾＠. . . . . . . . 70 DVD Playback Mode ï¼ DVD æÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ 70 SACD Playback ï¼ SACD æÂÂæ¾＠. . . . . . . 71 PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠. . . . . . . . 71 11 å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé»平 . . . . . . . . . . 73 éÂÂé³模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 使ç¨ S è¦Â頻輸åº端é²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 使ç¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 12 éÂÂå è³Â訠éÂÂéÂÂæ¼Â示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 ç«¥é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 æ¹è®ÂæÂÂéÂÂ格张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂçÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 è¨Âç½®é»è¦Âå¶张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 å¨ PAL å¶é»è¦Âæ© ï¼ MOD.PAL ï¼Âä¸Âè§Âç NTSC ç¯Âç® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 éÂÂç½®æ¬系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 調ç¯Â顯示å¹Â亮度 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 使ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç« åÂÂæ²ç® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 æ¿åÂÂç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ã¥ÂÂå²ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 ä¸Âå¯使ç¨çÂÂç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 æ¬系統æ£確å®Âè£ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¶Âè· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 渠æ½Âæ¾åÂÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 éÂÂæ¼çµÂé²åÂÂé¡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 æ¬移æ¬橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 é»æºÂç·Â注æÂÂäºÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 XV-DV900/700.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 ChH æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 ä¸Âè¬ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DVD/CD/VCD æÂÂæ¾橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 MP3/JPEG ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ格张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 寬å±Âé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 æ¨ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂ訠. . . . . . . . . . . 87 èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Ã¥ÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代碼åÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 é Âè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 è¡Â誠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 è¦Âæ ¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 XV-DV900/700.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 8 ChH 第 1 ç« éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå åÂÂè½ DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD 堼容 使æ¨å¯é«Âé© DVD å±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂ趠素CD å±碠ï¼ÂSACD＠趠å¡çÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質é³頻æ§è½ã æ¿輠24bit/192kHz DAC çÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂå³èÂÂæ¾ÂÂæ¾ æ©ÂèÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣çÂÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå®Â堨堼容 ï¼ å¾ÂèÂÂå¨åÂÂæ Â篠åÂÂã ä½Âé»平解æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«Â頻細ç¯Âæ¹é¢è½夠æÂÂä¾Â極佳 çÂÂé³質ã éÂÂç¨æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸你ã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯 ã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥Âé 輯 II *1 å DTS *2 è»Âé«ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¶Âé³頻æ§è½ 堧置å¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âå DTS 解碼å¨è®Âæ¨è½夠享åÂÂå° 帶æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âå DTS 編碼ç DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå ·æÂÂçÂÂç æ£ç¨ç«Âå¤Âè²éÂÂ家åºÂå½±é¢è²é³æÂÂæÂÂã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯åÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯 II 解碼æ¹å¼Âé éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ çºéÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂè³ÂæÂÂå¢Âæ·»äºÂ極 大çÂÂéÂÂæ¼åÂÂã ç°ç¹Âè²é³æÂÂçÂÂç°¡æÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® éÂÂéÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®åÂÂè½ ï¼ å 使ç¨堩åÂÂæÂ¥é©Âå³å¯è¨Âç½® åºæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²é³æ ã åÂÂçÂ¥æ¬æ©Âæ¨è½é³æ¿éÂÂçÂÂ大 å°Â以åÂÂæ¨çÂÂè½é³ä½Â置徠＠系統å³è½èªåÂÂé Âç½®ç° ç¹Âè²é³æÂÂã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¾大 å¨æÂÂæ¾ DVD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼ æ¨è½夠æ¾大 Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂä»»ä¸Âé¨ å ä»Âç´°è§ÂçÂÂï¼ æ 大å¯æ¾大 å° 4 Ã¥ÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 4 8 é  â æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢â ã MP3 堼容 æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âå¯堼容å«æ MP3 é³頻æ²ç®ç CD-Rã CD-RW å CD-ROM ç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 10 é  â å£Â縮 é³頻堼容æ§ â ã åÂÂå½¢åÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示 Ã¥ÂÂå½¢åÂÂè¢ 幠顯示è®Âæ¨ è½夠å å 輠é¬Âå°訠置 å 使ç¨æ¨ç DVD 家åºÂå½±é¢系統ã ç¯Âè½è¨Â訠æ¬系統èÂÂæ¼徠æ©Â模å¼ÂæÂÂçÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂçº 0.55 W ã *1 ç¶ÂæÂÂæ¯Â實é©Â室æÂÂæ¬ÂçÂÂç¢ã âÂÂDolbyâ ã âÂÂPro LogicâÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé D 樠èªÂæ¯æÂÂæ¯Â實é©Â室çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã *2 âÂÂDTSâÂÂÃ¥ÂÂâÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ çºæ¸ 碼 å½±é¢系統堬å¸ ï¼ÂDigital Theater Systemsï¼ÂInc.ï¼ÂçÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã XV-DV900/700.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 9 ChH Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 家åºÂå½±é¢使ç¨說æ æ¨å¯è½ ç¿ æ £ æ¼使ç¨ ç« é« è² è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾ æ¶ è½ é³ æ¨Âè å¾Âä¾Âæ²ÂæÂÂç¨éÂÂ家åºÂå½±é¢系統 ï¼ å¾Âè å¯以å¨æ¨æ¶ è½æ²ç® æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ æ ä¾Âæ´夠ç å¯é¸頠ç® ï¼Â妠ç°繠è²＠ã 家åºÂå½± é¢ æ¯ æÂÂå©ç¨ 夠é³ è» ä¾Âåµé 丠種 ç° ç¹Âè² æÂÂæ ＠è®Âæ¨æÂÂå°èª己æ£èÂÂæ¼åÂÂä½Âå ´æ¯æÂÂè é³樠æÂÂçÂÂä¸Âå¿Âä½Âç½® ã ä¾ÂæºÂæ¼家åºÂå½±é¢系統çÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ä¸Âå åÂÂ決æ¼æ¨å¨æ¿éÂÂå §æÂÂå®Âæ¾çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æ 泠＠éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ決æ¼æÂÂæ¾æºÂ以åÂÂ系統çÂÂè²é³è¨Âç½®ã ç±æ¼堶尺寸 ï¼Â質éÂÂ以åÂÂ使ç¨ 便æ·ç ç¹é»Âï¼ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå·² æ çº 家 庠影é¢ç åº æ¬ æ æ¾ æºÂè³Âæ ãÂÂ覠DVD èÂÂå®Âï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¾Âä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç²å¾Âå¤Âé 6 種 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé³軠＠èÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé³è»Âå°Â被ç¼éÂÂå°æ¨系統ç åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ è² å¨ ä¸ÂãÂÂé 就 æ¯ç°繠è² æ æ ç åµé æ¹ å¼Âï¼Âå¯以給æ¨以身è¨堶å¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æ¬æ©Âå°Âæ ¹æÂÂæ¨çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æ 泠＠èªåÂÂå°ÂæÂÂ毠æ¸你＠DTS æÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âç°繠DVD å½±ç¢Âé²è¡Â解碼ãÂÂå¨ 大å¤Âæ¸æ æ³Â丠＠æ¨å°Âç¡éÂÂæ¹è®Âå³å¯ç²å¾Âé¼çÂÂç ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âä½Âå¨第 3 0 é  â 家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æÂÂâ 丠å°Âå°Âå ¶ ä»ÂæÂÂæ é² è¡Â說æ ï¼Âå¦Âç¨ å¤Âè²é ç° ç¹Âè² æ¶è½ CDï¼ ã ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ æ¬æ©Â訠訠çºå¯èÂÂ帶 æÂÂ以丠丠å æÂÂå¹¾å 樠誠ç è»Âé«Â堼容︰ ⢠KODAK Picture CD ⢠æ¯F uji Photo Film å ¬å¸çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âæ¯æ IEC ä¹Â趠素VCD æ¨Â溠ã èÂÂå½±é³ CD æ¨ÂæºÂç¸毠ï¼Â趠素VCD å¯æÂÂä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¶ÂçÂÂç«質 ï¼Â並å¯ é²è¡Âå ©æ¢Âç«Âé«Âè²é³è»ÂçÂÂéÂÂ製 ã 趠素VCD éÂÂæ¯æ 寬è¢å¹Â尺寸ã 堶ä»Âæ ¼ å¼ ï¼Âå æ¬ ä½ ä¸ÂéÂÂæ¼ 丠åÂÂ格张ï¼Âä¸Âè½ å¨ æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾︰ DVD-RAM / DVD-ROM / CD-ROM * * é¤é£äºÂå«æ MP3æ JPEGçÂÂ以夠ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå£Â縮 é³頻堼容æ§ å JPEG æÂÂ件堼容æ§ ã VIDEO CD XV-DV900/700.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 10 ChH 使ç¨ DVD éÂÂ製æ©Âï¼ÂCD éÂÂ製æ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ人é»蠦éÂÂ製 çÂÂD VD-R/RW å CD-R/RW ç¢Âç ï¼ÂCD å±ç¢Âå VCDï¼ å¯è½ä¸Âè½å¨æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂå ¶åÂÂå å¯è½æÂÂç¾å¤Âï¼ å æ¬ä½Âä¸ÂéÂÂæ¼ï¼Â使ç¨çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ éÂÂ製é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âæ¾åÂÂé¡é ÂçÂÂæÂÂå£Âï¼Â塵å¢æÂÂçµÂé² ã æ éÂÂå°Âç¨ è» é« å 格 å¼ÂçÂÂ注 æ 亠頠ï¼Âè« å è¦Â丠æÂÂã CD-R/RW 堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾以 CD å±ç¢Âæ VCD æ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製ç CD-R å CD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âå ¶ä½Âçºå«æ MP3 æÂÂJ PEG æÂÂ件ç CD-ROM é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂä½Âæ¯＠任ä½Âå ¶ä»Â堧容é½æÂÂ使ç¢ÂçÂÂç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂ使輸 åºç¢çÂÂåªé³î¿失çÂÂã â¢ æ¬æ©Âç¡æ³ÂéÂÂ製 CD-R æ CD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ä½ÂçºCDå±ç¢ÂéÂÂ製çÂÂæªç¶ÂæÂÂçµ å®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âä½Âç¡æ³Â顯示堶å®Âæ´ çÂÂç®é ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂï¼ ã DVD-R/RW 堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾以 DVDå½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製並ç¨DVD éÂÂ製æ©ÂæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂç DVD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ç¨è¦Âé »éÂÂ製 ï¼ÂVRï¼Âæ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製 çÂÂD VD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ è£Âå ¥ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂ徠＠顯示å¹Âå°Â顯 示 DVD-RW ã â¢ æÂÂæ¾ç± DVD éÂÂ製æ©Â編輯ç VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RW 碠çÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå¨編 輯é»Âè è¢å¹Âå¯è½æ« æÂÂè®Â黠＠並丠/ æ è æ¨å¯è½æÂÂçÂÂè¦Â編輯é»Âä½Âç½®åÂÂé¢ çÂÂç«é¢ã â¢ æ¬æ©Âç¡æ³ÂéÂÂ製 DVD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾æªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂçÂÂDVD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã PC 製ä½Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨ç¨åÂÂ人é»蠦éÂÂ製ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âå³使該ç¢Âç æ¯以åÂÂè¿°ç âÂÂ堼容格å¼ÂâÂÂéÂÂ製çÂÂï¼Âä¹Âå¯è½ ç± æ¼製ä½Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂç¨ç¨Âå¼ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®åÂÂé¡ÂèÂÂç¡ æ³ å¨æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂéÂÂå°æ¤é¡Âæ æ³Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè»Âé« ç¼è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨詢詳æ ã â¢ 檢æÂÂ¥DVD-R/RWæ C D-R/RW è»Âé«Âç¢ÂçÂÂå è£Âç ＠以ç²å¾Âæ´å¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ堼容æ¹é¢çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã å£Â縮é³頻堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾åÂÂ樣çÂÂçº32 ã 44.1æ 48kHz丠堶ä¸ÂæÂÂå«æÂÂ件以 MPEG-1 é³頻層 3 ï¼ÂMP3ï¼ æ ¼å¼Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç CD-ROMãÂÂCD-R å C D-RW ç¢Âç ã ä¸Â堼容çÂÂæÂÂ件å°Âä¸Âè½æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ ä¸ÂæÂÂ顯示 Can't play this format ï¼Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ¤格å¼Âï¼ ç è¨Âæ¯ ãÂÂ顯示å¹Â丠顯示 â No Play â ï¼Âä¸Âæ æ¾＠ã ã â¢ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨è¦æ¡ç¨åºå®Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂçÂÂMP3 æÂÂ件 ã å¯讠ä½Âå  ç ï¼ÂVBRï¼Âç MP3 æ 件è½夠被æ æ¾＠ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂå¯è½ç¡æ³Âæ£確顯示ã â¢ ç¨æ¼編輯 MP3 æÂÂ件ç CD-ROM å¿ é Â符å ISO 9660 Level 1 æ 2 覠池ãÂÂC D ç©çÂÂæ ¼å¼Â︰模 å¼ 1ï¼Â模张2 XA Form 1ãÂÂæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå ¼ 容R omeo è Joliet æÂÂ件系統ã â¢ è«Â使ç¨ CD-RæÂÂC D-RWç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂ製æ¨çÂÂæÂÂ件 ã 碠çÂÂå¿ é ÂæÂÂçµÂå®Âæ ï¼Âå³çÂÂ段忠é ÂçµÂæÂÂ＠以便 è½ å¨æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸Â堼容å¤ÂçÂÂ段 ç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂæ¬æ©ÂåªèÂÂå¥å¤ÂçÂÂ段ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ第 1 å ç 段ã â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âå æÂÂæ¾æÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº .mp3æ . MP3 çÂÂæ²ç®ã â¢ å½åÂÂMP3 æÂÂ件æ ＠è«Âå ä¸Âç¸æÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ件æ´å±Âå ï¼Â.mp3ï¼ ã æÂÂ件根æÂÂæÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾ã çº亠é² æ¢åªè²åÂÂæ éÂÂï¼Âè«Âå¿å°Âå ¶ä»Â種é¡ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件 使ç¨éÂÂäºÂæ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂã XV-DV900/700.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 11 ChH Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂæÂÂå¤Âå¯èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 999 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件 ï¼ÂMP3/ JPEGï¼Âå 499 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件夾ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ 件æÂÂæÂÂ件夾æ¸趠éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå¶ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤Âåªè½ æÂÂæ¾éÂÂå¶æ¸ç®堧çÂÂæÂÂ件æÂÂæÂÂ件夾ãÂÂæÂÂ件å æÂÂ件夾以åÂÂæ¯Âé ÂåºÂè®Âå / 顯 示ãÂÂè«Â注æÂÂï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂ件çµÂæ§Âè¼Âçºè¤ÂéÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯è½ä¸Âè½è®Âå /æ æ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ件ã â¢ æÂÂ件夾åÂÂæ²ç®åÂÂ稱 ï¼Âä¸Âå æ¾ÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ å°Â被顯示ã â¢ å°ÂM P3 æÂÂ件編碼å¯æÂÂ許å¤Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂ製ä½Âå  çÂÂãÂÂæ¬ æ©Âè¨Âè¨Âå¯èÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¨é¨堼容 ãÂʊȴ 128Kbps 編碼çÂÂé³頻æÂ¥è¿Â常è¦Âç CD é³質ã æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ä½Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ件ï¼Âä½Â諠注æÂÂï¼Âå¨ä½Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂæÂÂé³質å°ÂæÂÂ顯ä¸ÂéÂÂã JPEG æÂÂ件堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âæ¯æÂÂæÂÂé«Âçº 8 ç¾èÂŒÂÂç´ çÂÂåº締JPEG å EXIF 2.1* éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件ï¼ÂæÂÂ大åÂÂç´åÂÂæ°´å¹³å 辨çÂÂçº 5120 Ã¥ÂÂç´ ï¼ ãÂÂï¼ * æ¸ä½Âç¸æ©ÂæÂÂç¨æ 件格张＠⢠ç¨æ¼編輯 JPEG æÂÂ件ç CD-ROM å¿ é Â符å ISO 9660 Level 1 æ 2 覠池ã CD ç©çÂÂæ ¼å¼Â︰模 å¼Â1 ï¼Â模 å¼Â2 XA Form 1ã æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå ¼ 容R omeo è J oliet æÂÂ件系統ã â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂåªæÂÂæ¾æÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº.jpgæÂÂ. JPG çÂÂæÂÂ件ã XV-DV900/700.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 12 ChH 第 2 ç« æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ 1 VOLUME æÂÂé ç¨æ¼調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã 2 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã 3 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ DVD/CD Ã¥ÂÂè½ãÂÂä¹Âå¯以ç¨æ¼ éÂÂå§Âî¿æ«åÂÂî¿æ¢復æÂÂæ¾ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ示å¨ å¨è¨Â置好å éÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨徠亮起 ( 第 5 4 é  ) ã 5 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統æÂÂå°Âå ¶åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 6 ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ 7 î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂéÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ã 8 PHONES æÂÂå è³æ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 顯示å¹Âè£Âç½® 9 éÂÂæÂÂ窠10 顯示幠詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 1 3 é  â 顯示å¹Ââ ã TIMER ST ANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE î î 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 XV-DV900/700.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 13 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 顯示幠1 調諧å¨æÂÂ示å¨ æÂ¥æ¶廣æÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 以èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼ÂæÂ¥æ¶ç«Âé«Âè²FM廣æÂÂæÂÂ亮 èµ·ã FM å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起ã 2 î æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 3 MIDNIGHT Ã¥ÂÂå¤Â模å¼Â被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 34 é  ) ã 4 QUIET å®ÂéÂÂ模å¼Â被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 (第 3 4é  ) ã 5 PGM ç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表被編åºÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 43 é  ) ã 6 RPT å RPT-1 å¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂé RPT 亮起ãÂÂå¨å®æ²éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ æÂÂé RPT-1 亮起 ( 第 40 é  ) ã 7 RDM å¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 42 é  ) ã 8 V.PART ç¶æÂÂæ¾ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂè¦Âé »é¨åÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 9 ATT Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸 å ¥ è¡°æ¸Âå¨以 é²è¡Âç¶ å æ é¸çÂÂ模 æ¬ 輸 å ¥ æÂÂ亮起 ( 第 73 é  ) ã 10 REC MODE éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ製模å¼ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 74 é  ) ã 11 å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ示å¨ è¨Â置好åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨å¾Â亮起 ( 第 54 é  ) ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ亮起 ( 第 56 é  ) ã 12 2 PRO LOGIC II å¨æÂÂ毠PRO LOGIC 解碼æÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 30 é  ) ã 13 2 DIGITAL å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂæÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 30 é  ) ã MIDNIGHT QUIET PGM RPT - 1 RDM ATT V. PA R T REC MODE kHz ADV .SURR. DIGITAL MHz PRO LOGIC PRGSVE 16 15 17 18 19 20 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 10 11 12 13 14 XV-DV900/700.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 14 ChH 14 æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ示å¨ é äºÂæÂÂ示 å¨ 表 示æ£ç¨ æ¼ 輸 åº ç¶åÂÂæ æ¾ 溠çÂÂæ è²å¨ãÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表示è¥干顯示實ä¾Âã 15 PRGSVE éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Â頻輸åº被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 64 é  ) ã 16 ADV.SURR. ä¸Â種é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²è½é³模å¼Â被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 3 2 é Â) ã 17 DTS å¨æÂÂæ¾ DTS æÂÂæ¾æºÂæÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 3 0 é  ) ã 18 kHz / MHz 表æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ符顯示å¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂ顯示çÂÂé »çÂÂå®你＠kHz ç¨ æ¼A M , MHz ç¨æ¼ FMï¼ ã 19 Ã¥ÂÂ符顯示幠20 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âåºç¾å¤Âè¦Âè§Âå ´æ¯æÂÂ亮起 ( 第 4 9 é  ) ã 5.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ç«Âé«Âè² ï¼Â2.1 è²éÂÂ＠帶ä¸Â央è²éÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼·ç 3.1 è²é è²é³ Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂèÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âç 5.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè² XV-DV900/700.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 15 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ éÂÂæ§å¨ ⢠é æ§å¨丠å°製å 綠è² çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ å¯éÂÂé 尠MAIN / SUB éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ SUB ç²å¾Âã 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 Ã¥ÂÂè½é¸æÂÂæÂÂé æÂÂéÂÂäºÂæ éÂÂé¸æ æ¨è¦Âæ¶ è½çÂÂæÂÂæ¾ 溠ã DVD (CD) ï¼ TUNER ï¼ TV ï¼ LINE ã 3 DISPLAY æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示î¿æ¹è®Âè¢å¹Â顯示çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠( 第 49 é  ) ã 4 ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ§å¶æÂÂé î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¢復æÂÂæ¾ã î å îÂÂ/î ç¨æ¼é²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âæ ¢æ¾ ï¼ éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ ã î å îÂÂ/î ç¨ æ¼é²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ¢æ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²以åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æÂÂã î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæ«åÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼ åÂÂ次æÂÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã 5 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå°Âè·³è³ç¶åÂÂç« î¿æ²ç®çÂÂéÂÂå§Âè ＠ç¶徠跳è³åÂÂä¸Âç« î¿æ²ç®ã 6 DVD MENU å¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥äºÂä¸Âå¼µ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RWï¼ÂCDï¼ÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂMP3æ JPEG ç¢Âç ï¼ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯 示D VD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âèªå¨ã 7 å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ ENTER Ã¥ÂÂ調諧æÂÂé å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂé 使ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¢å¹Â顯 示åÂÂé¸å®ã ENTER æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæÂÂä¸Âé¸頠æÂÂè å·è¡ÂæÂÂä¸Âå½ 令ã TUNE /â ç¨æ¼調諧æ¶é³æ©Âã ST TUNE ENTER TUNEâ MASTER VO L UME STâ ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN/CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î î î î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 11 12 13 14 22 XV-DV900/700.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 16 ChH ST /â æ¶è½æ¶é³æ©ÂæÂÂç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂéÂȏºã 8 MUTE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ使åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨åÂÂè³æ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³ éÂÂé³ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂé³＠( 第 36 é  ) ã 9 MASTER VOLUME ç¨æ¼調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã 10 TV CONTROL (第 2 0é  ) î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã INPUT æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©Â輸堥ã CH /â ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé »éÂÂã VOL /â ç¨æ¼調ç¯Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé³éÂÂã 11 î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ã 12 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè·³è³ä¸Âä¸Âç« î¿æ²ç®ã 13 RETURN æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âé¸å®ç«é¢ã 14 SOUND æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂé²堥è²é³é¸å® ï¼ æ¨å¯以å¾Âä¸Â調篠DSP æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´Âï¼Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂé¸頠ã 15 ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âî¿è²é³å¢Âå¼·æÂÂé ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠AUTO æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂçºç¶åÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂé¸æÂÂé Âè¨Â解碼æ¹张(第 3 0é  ) ã SURROUND ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张( 第 30 é  ) ã ADVANCED ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè² ( 第 32 é  ) ã ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠BASS MODE ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂä½Âé³模张( 第 3 5 é  ) ã DIALOGUE ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂå°Â話模张( 第 3 3 é  ) ã VIRTUAL SB æ 該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂèÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè² å¨æÂÂæ ( 第 34 é  ) ã 16 DVD/CD æÂÂé ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠AUDIO æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂé³頻è²éÂÂæÂÂä¼´é³èªÂ訠( 第 4 7 é Â) ã SUBTITLE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示î¿æ¹讠DVD Ã¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示 ( 第 47 é Â) ã ANGLE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¨é²衠DVD å¤Âè¦Âè§Âå ´æ¯æÂÂæ¾æÂÂé æ¹è®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ©Âè¦Â觠( 第 49 é  ) ã ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠PROGRAM ç¨æ¼編åºÂî¿æÂÂæ¾編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ( 第 43 é  ) ã REPEAT ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾模张( 第 4 0 é  ) ã RANDOM ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾模张( 第 4 2 é  ) ã XV-DV900/700.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 17 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 17 ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠ZOOM æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæ¹è®Âç«é¢縮æ¾æ¯Âç ( 第 48 é  ) ã TOP MENU ç¨æ¼顯示æÂÂæ¾ä½Âç½®èÂÂç DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé Â層é¸ å® ï¼ÂéÂÂå¯è½åÂÂæÂÂ丠DVD MENU çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂç¸ Ã¥ÂÂï¼ ã HOME MENU æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示 ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂåºï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½®ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ 模å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½çÂÂé  ç®çÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示é¸å®ã 18 ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠SYSTEM SETUP ç¨æ¼é²衠å¤Â種系統 Ã¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè² è¨Âç½®(第5 7 é  ) ã TEST TONE ç¨æ¼輸åº測試é³ ï¼Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂè²å¨ç¨＠( 第 5 9 é Â) ã CH LEVEL ç¨æ¼調ç¯ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç´ ( 第 5 9 é  ) ã 19 ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠DIMMER æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ使顯示å¹Âè®ÂæÂÂæÂÂè®Â亮ã QUIET/MIDNIGHT ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂå®ÂéÂÂ模å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Â模张( 第 3 4 é  ) ã TIMER/CLOCK æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ï¼Â第 19 é  åÂÂ第 5 4 é Âï¼ ã 20 ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠CLR æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ渠é¤輸堥ã ENTER é¸æÂÂé¸å®é¸頠çÂÂã ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ丠æ 第 7 æ¢Âä¸Âç ENTER æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå®Âå ¨ä¸Â樣＠ã ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠FOLDER â æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè·³è³åÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ件夾ã FOLDER æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè·³è³å¾Âä¸ÂæÂÂ件夾ã 21 MAIN / SUB å¾ MAIN æ¹è®Âè³ SUB å¯é²堥éÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âå°製å 綠è²çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠ROOM SETUP æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå§Âæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® ( 第 20 é  ) ã 22 ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠æ¸åÂÂæÂÂé 使 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç´æÂ¥é¸æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç« ï¼Âæ²ç®ã XV-DV900/700.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 18 ChH 第 3 ç« éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ éÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® å¨確èªÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æ£確徠ï¼Âå¯æºÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã 馠å ÂéÂÂ確èªÂæ¨使ç¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â種é¡Âï¼Âæ¨ÂæºÂæÂÂ寬屠ã å¨æ¤ä¹Âå¾ ï¼Âæ¨å¯çºæ¨çÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â並å¯ è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂ以便使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂè½ã 1 æ î STANDBY/ON ï¼Âå¨éÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ ä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ系統ã å æÂÂè«Â確 誠é» è¦Âæ©Âå·² æ é 丠è¦Â頻輸 åº å·² é£è³ æ¬系統ã æ¨æÂÂçÂÂå°顯示æ¡è¿Âç«é¢ã 2 æ ENTER 移è³ä¸Âä¸Âç«é¢ã 3 æ ¹æÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â種é¡Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³ å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Wide Screen ï¼ 16:9 ï¼Ââ ãÂÂ寬屠＠16:9 ï¼ ãÂÂæ â Standard size screen ï¼ 4:3 ï¼Ââ ãÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂ尺寸å±Âå¹ ï¼ 4:3 ï¼ ã ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¡æ³Â確å®Âå¦Âä½Âé¸æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 8 7 é  â å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Ââ ã MASTER VO L UME CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER We lcome to Pioneer DVD! Thank you for pur chasing this Pioneer DVD player . Before using, please take a little time to setup your D VD player Put the batteries into the remote control Next, press the [ENTER] b utton on the remote control and start the Let's Get Started Menu Next Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) XV-DV900/700.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 19 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 4 Ã¥ÂÂ次æ ENTER çµÂæÂÂè¨Âç½®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è¦Âè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂ並æ¹è®Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²è¡ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ï¼Â諠使ç¨ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ Back å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã â¢ æ¨é å¯以 使 ç¨åÂÂè½ æÂÂé ＠DVD/CD ï¼ TUNER çÂÂï¼ æ î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂéÂÂå°Âç³» çµ±å¾Âå¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ Âã è¨Âç½®æÂÂé è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂå°Â使æ¨è½夠使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂè½ã 1 æ TIMER/CLOCK ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨å¨調ç¯ÂæÂÂéÂÂä½ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ次é²è¡Âè¨Âç½®ï¼Âè« åÂÂ次æ TIMER/CLOCK ã 2 å¦ÂæÂÂ顯示å¹Âä¸Âå°Âæªåºç¾ â Clock ADJ? âÂÂï¼ è«Âæ î æ î ï¼Âå·¦å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Âç´è³æ¨ç è¦Â該è³Âè¨Âçºæ¢ã 3 æ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âå®Âå°Âæ ã 5 æ ENTER ã Let's Get Started Menu Setup complete If you're finished setting up, ch oose [Complete], to start again choose [Back] Complete Back MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ 9 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 20 ChH 6 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂé ã 7 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã 顯示å¹ÂéÂÂçÂÂ表示æÂÂéÂÂ已被è¨Âå®Âã â¢ ä»»ä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ TIMER/CLOCK å°Â顯示æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂé¢æÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂåº系統çÂÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂç¼ç åÂÂé»ï¼Âæ¨å°ÂéÂÂè¦ÂéÂÂæ°è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂã è¨Âç½®éÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© æ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂ使ç¨ TV CONTROL æÂÂéÂÂå°Âé¨æ©Âæ ä¾ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨é²è¡Âè¨Â置以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ©Âã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 2 å¨第 89 é Âä¸ÂçÂÂé Âè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表ä¸Âæ¾åºé»覠æ©ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱ã åÂÂ製é åÂÂä¹Âå¾Âæ¯ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âä½Âæ¸代碼 ã éÂÂ亠代碼æÂÂå°Âæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â種é¡Âè³Âè¨Âå³éÂÂè³éÂÂæ§å¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â製é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱æ²ÂæÂÂåºç¾å¨表ä¸Âï¼ æ¨å°Âç¡æ³Âè¨Â置該éÂÂæ§å¨æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 å°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂèÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂä½ CLR æÂÂé ï¼Âç¶ å¾Â輸堥æ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂä¸Âä½Âæ¸代碼ã éÂÂæ§å¨åÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âç¼å°ÂéÂÂî¿éÂÂä¿¡è ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨已輸 å ¥äºÂæ£確代碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ該éÂÂéÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ²ÂæÂÂéÂÂé ＠è«Â使ç¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂçÂÂ丠丠代碼é 褠該 æÂÂ¥ é©Âï¼Âç´ è³æ¨ç é» 覠橠æ åÂÂé éÂÂã ä¸Âæ¦è¨Âç½®å®Âç¢＠æ¨æÂ¥èÂÂå°±å¯使ç¨å¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示 çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçºå ÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® å¨使ç¨æ¨çÂÂ系統ä¾Â欣è³Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾ä¹Âå ＠建è° æ¨è±幾åÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¾Â使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® ã è¦Âçºæ¨çÂÂæ¿ éÂÂçÂÂé è¯好çÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼ éÂÂä¸Â失çºä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿«æ·çÂÂæ¹ æ³Âã 根æÂÂæ¨ç 主 è¦Âæ¶è½你置å°ç° ç¹ è² æÂÂè²å¨ ç 跠é¢ï¼Âå¯å¨ S ï¼Âå°Âï¼ ï¼ M ï¼Âä¸Âï¼ æ L ï¼Â大ï¼Âæ¿é ä¸Âé²è¡Âé¸æ ＠ç¶å¾Âæ ¹æÂÂ座ä½Âå°åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨åÂÂç° ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç¸å°Âä½Âç½®ï¼Âé¸æ Fwd ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹＠＠Mid ï¼Âä¸ÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè Back ï¼Âå¾Âæ¹＠ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ î æÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ  ã CH /â æ¹è®Âé»è¦Âæ©Âé »éÂÂã VOL /â 調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã INPUT å¨堧置å¼Âé» 覠調諧å¨åÂÂå¤Âé¨覠頻æÂÂæ¾æºÂä¹ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â輸堥 ã MASTER VO L UME TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT REPEA T RANDOM PROGRAM BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED TV CONTROL INPUT CH VO L XV-DV900/700.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 21 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 1 å¦ÂæÂÂ系統å°ÂæªéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 æ ROOM SETUP ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨以åÂÂå·²è¨Â置好æ¿éÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ座ä½Âä½ ç½®ï¼Â顯示å¹Âå°Â顯示ç¶åÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®ã 3 æ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¿é é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 根æÂÂæ¨çÂÂæ¿éÂÂ大å°Âé¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âä¹Âä¸Â＠⢠S âÂÂå°Âæ¼æ®éÂÂæ¿é â¢ M âÂÂæ®éÂÂæ¿é â¢ L âÂÂ大æ¼æ®éÂÂæ¿é 5 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂ座你è¨Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 根æÂÂæ¨çÂÂ主è¦Âæ¶è½ä½Âç½®é¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âä¹Âä¸Â＠⢠Fwd âÂÂèÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ç¸毠＠å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ´é è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠Mid âÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å°ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢åÂÂå° Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢ç¸å â¢ Back âÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¸毠＠å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ´é 迠ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®èªåÂÂè¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨跠é¢ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨已ç¶ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½®äºÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç´Âï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Â第 5 9 é  ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 58 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨åÂÂ次æÂÂ丠ROOM SETUP æ éÂÂå¾Âå°ÂçÂÂå°顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Room Set? ã â¢ 使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®åÂÂè½å°Âè¦ÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ以åÂÂè¨Âç½®ç è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå®ÂçÂÂ詳細說æ ＠è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 5 7 é Ââ è¨Âå®Âç°ç¹Âè²â ã 使ç¨è¢å¹Â顯示 çºäºÂæ¹便使ç¨ ï¼ æ¬æ©Â大éÂÂ使ç¨åÂÂå½¢åÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示 ï¼ÂOSDï¼ ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂ該çÂÂæÂÂ該工ä½Âæ¹张ï¼Âå çºç¶æ¨訠置æÂÂæ¾橠ï¼Â使ç¨æÂÂäºÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ ï¼Âå¦Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾＠以åÂÂå°Âé³頻åÂÂè¦Âé »é²è¡Âæ´é«Âç´ÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âæ ＠æ¨é è¦Âç¨å°å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂÂæÂÂç« é¢ åºæ¬ä¸Âé½ 以ç¸å ç æ¹ æ³Âå°Âèª ︰ ç¨ å  æ¨ÂæÂÂé ＠î ＠î ＠î ＠î ï¼Âæ¹ 讠髠亮頠ç®＠æ ENTER é¸å®Âã â¢ å¨æ¬ 說æÂÂæ¸ ä¸Âï¼ âÂÂé¸ å®ÂâÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ æ¯ç¨堠樠æÂÂéÂÂé«Â亮顯示ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  ç®ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã XV-DV900/700.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 22 ChH ⢠æ¯Âå OSD ç«é¢åºÂé¨çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示å¨該ç« é¢ä¸ÂæÂÂéÂÂç¨å°çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂã æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç æ¤èÂÂ說æÂÂçÂÂæ¯æÂÂæ¾ DVD ï¼ÂCDï¼ SACDï¼ VCD ï¼Â趠ç´ÂV CD å M P3 ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂåºæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ§å¶åÂÂè½ ã æ´夠çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å°Âå¨第 5 章詳述ã å¨æ¬ 說æÂÂæ¸丠＠âÂÂDVDâÂÂ表示 æ æ 種 é¡ ç DVD ç¢Âç ï¼ÂDVD 影碠ã DVDå±ç¢Âæ DVD-R/RWï¼ ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå°ÂæªæÂÂé ï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæ¯ DVD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ä¹Âè«ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Â橠＠並確èªÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå·²è¨Âå®Âå° æ£確çÂÂè¦Â頻輸堥ä¸Âã 2 æ î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ã 3 è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂã è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ使ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæ¨Â籤é¢åÂÂ丠ã ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ç¤å°Âè» å° æºÂç¢Âç ＠妠æÂÂæ¨裠堥çÂÂæ¯ ä¸Âå¼µé é¢ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Â欲æÂÂæ¾çÂÂä¸Âé¢åÂÂä¸Âï¼ ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ HOME MENU 顯示î¿éÂÂåºè¢å¹Â顯示 îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî æ¹è®Âé«Â亮é¸å®頠ç® ENTER é¸å®Âé«Â亮顯示çÂÂé¸å®頠ç® ï¼Âå ©å ENTER æÂÂéÂÂä½Âç¨ç¸åÂÂï¼ RETURN ä¸Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹è®ÂèÂÂè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂ主é¸å® MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 12 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î RETURN MENU HOME ENTER 3 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 23 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 4 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæ¯ DVD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD ï¼Âå¯è½ æÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®åºç¾ ã éÂÂæ¼å¦Âä½Â使ç¨é¸å®çÂÂæ´夠è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 25 é  â DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®â åÂÂ第 26 é  â VCD/ 趠素VCD ç P BC é¸å®â ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæ¯ MP3 ç¢Âç ＠根æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ件絠æ§ÂçÂÂè¤ÂéÂÂç¨Â度 ï¼ æÂÂæ¾éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½éÂÂè¦Âå¹¾ç§ÂéÂÂç æÂÂéÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è£Âå ¥çÂÂæ¯ä¸Âå¼µå æ¬ JPEG æÂÂ件ç CD/CD- R/RW ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå§ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼æÂÂæ¾éÂÂäºÂ碠çÂÂçÂÂæ´å¤Âè³Â訠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 5 2 é  â è§Âç JPEG 碠çÂÂâ ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå æ¬ MP3 é³頻æÂÂ件å JPEG å åÂÂæÂÂ件 ï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 71 é  â PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠â ã 5 使ç¨ MASTER VOLUME -/ æÂÂé ï¼ÂæÂÂå é¢æ¿ VOLUME æÂÂéÂÂï¼Â調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã åºæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ§å¶æÂÂé ä¸Â表說 æ äºÂéÂÂæ§å¨ ä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ 碠ç ç¨çÂÂåº æ¬ æ§ å¶ æÂÂéÂÂãÂÂæ´å¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½å°Âå¨第 5 章詳細說æÂÂã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ î éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã DVD å VCD ︰ å¦ÂæÂÂ顯示å¹Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復ï¼Âæ Last Mem ï¼ÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶＠ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾å°Âå¾Âæ¢復你置æÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶ä½Âç½®éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âè« åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠â æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂ訠æ¶â ï¼Âã MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM CLR MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ î î î î î î FOLDERâ FOLDER ENTER î 123 456 789 0 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 24 ChH ⢠æ¨å¯è½ç¼ç¾＠å°ÂæÂÂ亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂç¹å®Âé¨ Ã¥ÂÂï¼ ä¸ÂäºÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ ã éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã â¢ å°Âæ¼æªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂçÂÂCD-R/RW ç¢Âç ＠ç¨æ¼æ²ç® é¸æÂÂçÂÂæ²ç®跳èºÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ã 使ç¨åÂÂé¢æ¿æ§å¶æÂÂé åÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î OPEN/CLOSE ï¼ î å î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂçÂÂä½Âç¨èÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç¸æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç ä½Âç¨å®Âå ¨ç¸åÂÂã æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶ ç¶æ¨åÂÂæ¢ä¸Âå¼µ DVD æ V CD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ ＠顯示 å¹Âä¸Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠ï¼ÂéÂÂ表示æ¨å¯以å 次å¾Â該é»ÂéÂÂå§Âæ¢復æÂÂæ¾ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤æªæÂÂé ＠ç¶æ¨å¨ä¸Âä¸Â次éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ æÂÂï¼Â顯示å¹Âä¸Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ å¾Âæ¢復é»Âæ¢復ã å 尠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂ︰å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¾ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ æÂÂæ¾ä½Âç½®å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¥è¨Âæ¶髠ã ç¶æ¨å¨ä¸Â次è£Â堥該碠çÂÂæ ＠顯示å¹Âå°Â顯示 Last Mem ï¼ÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶＠＠éÂÂæÂÂæ¨å¯以æ¢復æÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂå¤Âå¯ç¨æ¼ 5 å¼µç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³渠é¤æ¢復î¿æÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶é»Âï¼Âè«Âå¨ Resume æ Last Mem åºç¾æÂÂæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ ç¶è£Âå ¥ VCD æ ＠å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Â被éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ DVD (CD) 以å¤ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æ ＠æ¢復é»Âå°Âä¸Â失 ã â¢ çº äºÂ使ç¨æÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶åÂÂè½ï¼Âå¨æÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ Ã¥ÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ æ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã î æ«åÂÂæ£å¨ æÂÂæ¾çÂÂ碠çÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ° é å§ÂæÂÂæ¾ä¸Âå¼µæ«åÂÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂã î åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã DVD å VCD ︰ 顯示å¹Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ î ï¼Âå æ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âæ¢復åÂÂè½ã ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Â以丠â æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶â ãÂÂï¼ î æÂÂæ¤æÂÂé éÂÂå§Âå¿«é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æÂÂãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã î æÂÂæ¤æÂÂé éÂÂå§Âå¿«é æ£åÂÂæ æÂÂãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã î 跳å°ç¶å æ²ç®æÂÂç« çÂÂéÂÂ姠èÂÂï¼Âç¶ å¾Âè³åÂÂä¸Âæ²ç®î¿章ã î 跳å°ä¸Âä¸Âæ²ç®æÂÂç« ã FOLDER /- (SUB) æÂÂæ¾ JP EG æ M P3 碠çÂÂæÂÂè·³ è³ Ã¥ÂÂ丠î¿ ä¸Â丠æ 件夾 ã æ¸å ç¨æ¼輸堥 æ¨Âé¡Âî¿æ²ç® î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿ ç« è 碼ãÂÂæ ENTER 以é¸æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂçÂÂå¾ æ¸ç§ÂéÂÂï¼ ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ被åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âå°Âå¾Âæ é¸çÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿åÂÂçµ ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ DVD 影碠î¿ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ²ç®èÂÂ碼 ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ SACD/CD/VCD/ 趠素VCD/MP3 ï¼ éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ å°Âè·³è³æÂÂé¸ çÂÂç« æÂÂæ²ç® ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼Âä½ æ¼ç¶åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂ堧＠éÂÂå§ÂèÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ XV-DV900/700.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 25 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ å°Âæ¼ DVD å±碠＠æ²ÂæÂÂæ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶åÂÂè½ ã â¢ æÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶åÂÂè½å°ÂVRæ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂDVD-RWç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âèµ· ä½Âç¨ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ MP3 æ ¼å¼Âç¢Âç ＠æÂÂæ¾ç¡æ³Âæ¢復 ï¼ èÂÂæ¯徠æÂÂæ¾åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæÂÂ件æÂÂå¨æÂÂ件夾ç é¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥å¾ÂéÂÂå¹¾ç§ÂéÂÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåº﹠æÂÂ大ç å¯è½æ¯ ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â符å æÂÂæ¾橠çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂå°æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂï¼Âè«ÂèÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå è ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¨å¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âæ¾å°å®Âï¼ é² è¡Âæ ¸ å°ÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8 é  â DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂâ ã å¦ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæ£確ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æ¯ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå£ÂæÂÂ髠亠ã è«Â渠æ½Âç¢ÂçÂÂ並æÂ¥çÂÂæ¯å¦æÂÂæÂÂå£ÂçÂÂ跡象 ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8 é  â 使ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።ÂçÂÂâ ã â¢ çºä»Âä¹Âè£Âå ¥çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾＠é¦Âå Âè«Â檢æÂ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥æ¹å¼Âæ¯å¦æ£確ï¼Â樠籤é¢å ä¸Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ檢æ¥碠çÂÂæ¯å¦ 渠æ½Âæ æÂÂæ å£ÂãÂÂéÂÂæ¼ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ渠æ½Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8 é  â 使 ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።ÂçÂÂâ ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥æ£確ä½Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æ¯ æ ¼å¼ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå ¼ 容ï¼Â妠DVD-ROMãÂÂé æ¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå ¼ 容 æ§çÂÂæ´ 夠賠è¨Âè«Âå 覠第 9 é  â ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§â ã â¢ æÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âé£çºä»Âä¹Âå¨æÂÂæ¾丠äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå±Âå¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨æÂÂé»Âæ¢Âï¼ æÂÂäºÂé» 影格张å³使å¨寬屠é»è¦Âæ© ä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾＠å±Âå¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨ä»ÂéÂÂæÂÂé»Â梠ã éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã â¢ æÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯æ¨ÂæºÂå±Âå¹Âï¼Â4:3＠＠並å°ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ©Âè¨Âå®Âçº以堨æ¯æÂÂæ ï¼Âpan & scanï¼Â格张顯 示寬屠DVDï¼Âé£ çº ä»Âä¹Âå¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸ÂäºÂç¢Âç æÂÂé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨ä»ÂæÂÂé»Âæ¢Âï¼ æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂ忽çÂ¥æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂé¦Âé¸顯示æ¹å¼Âï¼Âé 樣å³使æ¨é¸æÂÂ亠4:3 (Pan & Scan) ï¼Âé£亠ç¢ÂçÂÂä»Â以信箱格å¼Â顯示ç«é¢ ã éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã â¢ çºä»Âä¹ÂæÂÂä¸Âè½éÂÂéÂÂæ¸ä½Â亮起輸åºè½å° DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD çÂÂé³頻＠DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD é³頻å éÂÂéÂÂ模æ¬輸åº端輸 åºãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã â¢ æÂÂçÂÂDVD å±ç¢ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼ ä½Âé¨å¾ÂçªÂç¶åÂÂæ¢﹠該ç¢ÂçÂÂå¯è½æ¯éÂÂæ³Âæ·è²ÂçÂÂã DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® 許夠DVD å½±ç¢Âå DVD å±ç¢Â帶æÂÂé¸å® ï¼ æ¨å¯以é éÂÂ該é¸å®é¸æÂÂè¦Âè§ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¶è½çÂÂ堧容 ã éÂÂäºÂé¸å® å¯è½éÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂéÂÂå åÂÂè½ ï¼ ä¾Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âé¸ æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè æÂÂäºÂç¹æ®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âä¾Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ¾æ ãÂÂ詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂå è£Âä¸ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂã æÂÂæ DVD çÂÂé¸å®æÂÂå¨æ¨éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂèªåÂÂ顯示＠æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå å¨æ¨æ DVD MENU æ TOP MENU æÂÂ顯示ã â¢ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡ÂãÂÂè¦Âç²åÂÂéÂÂäºÂå çµÂï¼Âæ¨ å¿ é Â輸堥ç¢ÂçÂÂå è£Âä¸ÂçÂÂå¯Â碼ãÂÂ詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 6 9 é Âã XV-DV900/700.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 26 ChH VCD/ 趠素VCD ç PBC é¸å® ä¸Â亠VCD /趠ç´ÂV C D å«æÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âæ¨è½夠å¾ÂéÂÂå é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂæ¨æ³è§ÂçÂÂçÂÂ堧容ãÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ被稱çº PBC ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æ§å¶ï¼Âé¸å®ã æÂÂæ¾帶 PBC ç VCD /趠ç´ÂV C D æÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯以ä¸Âç¨ å°Âå PBC é¸å®ï¼ÂèÂÂæ¯å Âæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ ç¶å¾Â使ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ²ç®ä½Âä¸Âæ¯ î ï¼Âæ æ¾ï¼ÂæÂÂé ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ TOP MENU 顯示 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂç âÂÂé Â層é¸å®â ï¼Âé¨ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂç°ã DVD MENU 顯示 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âé¨ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂç° ＠並å¯è½è âÂÂé Â層é¸å®âÂÂç¸åÂÂã îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî å¨å±Âå¹Âä¸Â移åÂÂå Âæ¨Âã ENTER é¸å®Âç¶åÂÂçÂÂé¸å®é¸頠ã RETURN è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³堠åÂÂ顯示ç é¸å®ç« é¢ãÂÂå° æÂÂäºÂå ·æÂÂå¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂçÂÂç DVD å±碠＠æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå°Â顯示çÂÂ覽å¨ç«é¢ã æ¸å ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠é«Â亮顯示編èÂÂçÂÂé¸å®é¸頠ï¼Âå é© æ¼æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ãÂÂæ ENTER 以é²衠é¸æ ï¼ÂæÂÂçÂÂå¾ æ¸ç§ÂéÂÂï¼ ã MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP MASTER VO L UME î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î RETURN HOME MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 27 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¶è½æ¶é³橠調諧å¨å¯以æÂ¥æ¶ FM å AM 廣 æ ＠並è¨Âæ¶æ¨æÂÂå æ¡çÂÂéÂȏº ï¼ å¾ÂèÂÂç¡éÂÂæ¯Â次å¨æ³è¦Âæ¶è½æÂÂé²è¡Âæ åÂÂ調諧ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂ系統å°ÂæªéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 æ TUNER Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³調諧å¨ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該 æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ AM æ FM 波段ã 顯示å¹Â顯示調諧å¨波段åÂÂé »çÂÂã 3 調諧頻çÂÂã æÂÂä¸Â種調諧模å¼ÂâÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ模张＠èªåÂÂ模å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿«é 模å¼Âï¼ æÂÂé åÂÂè½ RETURN 顯示 PBC é¸å®ã æ¸åÂÂæÂÂé é¸æÂÂæ¸åÂÂé¸å®頠ç®ã î 顯示åÂÂä¸Âé¸å®é Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂ話＠ã î 顯示å¾Âä¸Âé¸å®é Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂ話＠ã ENTER æÂÂä¸Âé¸å®Âé«Â亮顯示çÂÂé¸å®頠ç®ã MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 XV-DV900/700.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 28 ChH ⢠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧 ï¼ åÂÂè¦Âæ TUNE /â æ¹è®ÂæÂÂ顯示ç 頻çÂÂã â¢ èªåÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´è³頻çÂÂ顯示é å§Â移åÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âé¬ÂéÂÂãÂÂ調諧å¨å°Âæ¼ç¼ç¾ä¸Â丠éÂȏºä¹Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢工ä½ÂãÂÂéÂÂè¤Â該æÂ¥é©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ索堶 ä»ÂéÂȏºã â¢ å¿«éÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´è³頻çÂÂ顯示幠éÂÂå§Âå¿«éÂÂ移åÂÂãÂÂä¸Âç´æÂÂä½Â該æÂÂéÂÂç´è³å°é æ¨æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé »çÂÂãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調 諧æ¹å¼Âå°Âé »çÂÂé²è¡Â微調ã æ¹åÂÂä¸Âè¯ç FM æÂ¥æ¶ å¦ÂæÂÂ以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ FM éÂȏºï¼Âä½ÂæÂ¥æ¶信è 輠弱ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨å¯ 以 é é å æÂÂçºå® è² é 侠æ¹ Ã¥ÂÂé³ 質ã 1 調諧è³ FM 廣æÂÂéÂȏºã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM Mode? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM Mono â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã ç¶調諧å¨èÂÂæ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶模å¼Âæ ＠å®è²éÂÂæÂÂ示 æ¨Â誠＠ï¼Â亮起ã é¸æÂÂä¸Âæ¹ç FM Auto è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模张ï¹Âæ¶è½ç«Âé«Âè²廣æÂÂæ ï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂ示æ¨ÂèªÂ＠＠亮起﹠ã è¨Âæ¶éÂȏº æ¨å¯以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºï¼ÂéÂÂ樣æ¨就ç¡ éÂÂæ¯Â次é²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧é²堥æ¨åÂÂæ¡çÂÂéÂȏºã 1 調諧è³ AM æ FM 廣æÂÂéÂȏºã å°Âæ¼ FM 波段ï¼Âè«Âæ ¹æÂÂéÂÂè¦Âé¸æÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶æ èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¥æ¶ãÂÂ該è¨Âç½®åÂÂé Âè¨Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂã MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 XV-DV900/700.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 29 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂâ St. Memory? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¨æ éÂÂçÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã 報æ 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨Âä½Âç½®ï¼Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®å¯以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå é Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã 5 æ ENTER ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¬系統å®Âå ¨åÂÂé»æºÂæ·éÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç éÂȏºå°Âä¿ÂçÂÂè¥干天ï¼Âå¨æ¤ä¹Âå¾Âæ¨éÂÂéÂÂæ°俠åÂÂéÂÂäºÂéÂȏºã æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȏº 1 Ã¥ÂÂå¿ é¸宠TUNER Ã¥ÂÂè½ã 2 ç¨ ST /â æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã æ¶è½堶ä»ÂæÂÂæ¾溠æ¨å¯ 以æÂÂ夠尠åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ夠é¨ æÂÂæ¾溠ï¼Âé»覠æ©Âï¼Âè¡ æÂÂæÂ¥æ¶å¨çÂÂï¼ é£æÂ¥è³該系統 ï¼Âå ¶ä¸Âå æ¬ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Â第 7 2 é  â é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©訠åÂÂâ ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂ系統å°ÂæªéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã åÂÂæ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ é åÂÂå¤Âé¨ æ æ¾溠ï¼Âé»覠æ©Âï¼Âè¡ æ æÂ¥æ¶å¨çÂÂï¼ ã 2 é¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã â¢ æ TV é¸æ TV 輸堥 ï¼ÂæÂÂè 使ç¨ LINE ï¼ L1/ L2 ï¼Âé¸ æ LINE 1 ANA ï¼ LINE1 DIG æ LINE 2 ANA 輸堥ã 3 å¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂæ¾å¤Âé¨æÂÂæ¾æºÂã ST ANDBY/ON L1/L2 CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER î î î îÂÂî î î î TV LINE XV-DV900/700.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 30 ChH 第 4 章家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 使ç¨該系統 ï¼ æ¨è½以ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âç¡æ æ¶è½åÂÂ種模æ¾ÂÂæ¸ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã èªåÂÂè½é³模张èª Ã¥ÂÂè½é³ 模 å¼ æ¯æÂÂæ 你æ¶ è½ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ¾ 溠çÂÂæ 簡å®æ¹泠＠æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ輸åºåÂÂæ äºÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂè³ÂæÂÂç åÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂæ Âã â¢ æ AUTO é¸æ â Auto âÂÂè½é³模å¼Âã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂæ¡ç¨äºÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示幠ä¸Âç 2 DIGITAL æ DTS æÂÂ示æ¨ÂèªÂå°Â亮起ã â¢ ç¶é¸æÂÂäºÂèªåÂÂè½é³模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå çÂÂæÂÂ毠Pro Logic æÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âå°Â被 Ã¥ÂÂæ¶Âã ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡Âæ¶è½ æ¨è½以ç°ç¹Âè²æ¶è½ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂè å¤Âè²é ＠模 æ¾ÂÂæ¸ä½ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂãÂÂ使ç¨ä¸Â種æÂÂ毠Pro Logic 解碼模å¼ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂæ¾溠ï¼ÂSACD å D VD å±碠é¤å¤Âï¼Âå¯ç¼åºç°ç¹Âè²ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SURROUND é¸æÂÂè½é³模张ï¹ÂæÂÂæ SURROUND å¾Â使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æ éÂÂï¹ ã 顯示å¹Â丠åº ç¾çÂÂè½é³ 模å¼Âå° æ ¹ æ æÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ç æ æ¾æºÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²è¡Âè®ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ Auto ï¼ÂèªåÂÂè½é³模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ＠⢠Dolby Digital / DTS ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS 解 碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ決æ¼æÂÂæ¾æºÂï¼ ã å°Âæ¼å¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾溠＠該模å¼Âè Auto ç¸åÂÂã â¢ Pro Logic ï¼Â4 .1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ç¨æ¼æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂé è²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã â¢ PL II Movie ï¼ÂP ro Logic II 5.1 è²éÂÂç°繠è²ï¼Âå° æ¼é»影æÂÂæ¾æºÂå°¤çºé©åÂÂï¼Â並å¯ç¨æ¼ æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE AUTO MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 31 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ PL II Music ï¼ÂP ro Logic II 5.1 è²éÂÂç°繠è²ï¼Âå°Âæ¼é³æ¨ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂå°¤çºé©åÂÂï¼Â並å¯ç¨æ¼ æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂçÂÂâ æ æ¯ÂP ro Logic II é³æ¨Âè¨Âå®Ââ ＠ã â¢ Stereo ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸Âæ â 以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶ è½â ã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂç«Âé«Âè²åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾é¸頠çÂÂ詳細說 æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Â第 3 2 é  â 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°繠è²æÂÂæÂÂâ ã â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³Âå° SACD ã DVD å±ç¢Âå 96kHz PCM é³溠使ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå Stereo é¸頠å¯ç¨ã â¢ ç¶以 Dolby Digital î¿ DTS 模å¼Âé²è¡Âæ¶è½ æ ＠éÂÂè²éÂÂè³ÂæÂÂå°ÂèªåÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂ毠Pro Logic 解碼æ¹å¼Â以ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å 使ç¨ä¸Â央è²éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âî¿ DTS æÂÂæ¾溠ç¡æ³Â以ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Âè¨Âå® ç¶å¨æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Â模å¼Âä¸Âæ¶è½æÂÂï¼ æ¨å¯以é²ä¸Âæ¥調ç¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ ï¼Âä¸Â央寬度 ï¼Âç¯Âå åÂÂå ¨æ¯ã é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ C Width ︰ 3 Dimen. ︰ 0 Pnrm. ︰ Off 1 å¨æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Â模å¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â C Width â ＠â Dimen. âÂÂæ â Pnrm. â ã â¢ C Width ï¼Âä¸Â央寬度＠ï¼Â使ä¸Â央è²éÂÂæ´寬 ï¼Âè¼Âé«Âè¨Âå®Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ´窠ï¼Âè¼Âä½Âè¨Âå®Â＠⢠Dimen. ï¼Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ï¼Â使 è² é³ æ´ é ï¼Â涠渠訠å®Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ´å ï¼Âå¢Âå è¨Âå®Â＠⢠Pnrm. ï¼Âå ¨æ¯＠＠åµé æ´廣éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè²空é 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè¨Âå®Âã ä¸Â央寬度å¯å¨ 0 å 7 ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âï¼ ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯ å¨ -3 å 3 ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯ÂãÂÂå ¨æ¯å¯å¨ On æ Off ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã 4 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã 以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ æ¨å¯以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂ＠模æ¾ æ¸ä½Âç æ æ¾ æºÂãÂÂç¶ æ æ¾å¤Âè² é æ æ¾ 溠æÂÂï¼ å¯éÂÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂè³åÂÂ置左î¿å 置å³æ è² å¨以åÂÂ趠ä½Âé³æ è² å¨ å¾ÂèÂÂç¢ ç 章髠è²ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SURROUND ç´è³顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ â Stereo âÂÂã æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âå°Â被åÂÂæ¶Âã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 32 ChH ⢠æÂÂéÂÂç«Âé«Âè²åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾é¸頠çÂÂ詳細說 æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Âä¸Âæ â 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æ æÂÂâ ã ç¨è³æ©Âæ¶è½ ç¶é£æÂ¥äºÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âåªæ Stereo ï¼Âé Âè¨Âï¼Âå Phones Surround ï¼Âè³æ©ÂèÂÂ捰ç¹Âè²ï¼Â模张æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ ADVANCED é¸æ â Phones Surround âÂÂæ æ SURROUND é¸æ â Stereo âÂÂã 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ é«Âç´Âç°繠è² æÂÂæÂÂå¯ç¨ æ¼å¤Âè² é æ ç«Âé«Âè² æ æ¾ æºÂï¼Â以ç²å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ種éÂÂå çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ æ ADVANCED é¸æÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¹Âæ æ ADVANCED ç¶å¾Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂï¹ ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¾Â以ä¸Âé  ç®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠Adv. Music ï¼Â賦äºÂé³æ¨Â廳é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè²é³ ⢠Adv. Movie ï¼Â賦äºÂå½±é¢é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè²é³ ⢠Expanded ï¼Âåµé 極寬廣çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²è²場 ⢠TV Surr. ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»覠廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂæ¾溠MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 33 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ Sports ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼é«Âè²ç¯Âç®åÂÂå ¶ä»Âè©Âè«Â篠ç® â¢ Game ï¼Âåµé è¦Âé »éÂÂæ²æÂÂæ¾æºÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² â¢ ExPwrSurr. ï¼Â趠強ç°ç¹Âè²＠ï¼Â賦äºÂç«Âé«Âè² æÂÂæ¾æºÂæ´大çÂÂè½éÂÂèÂÂ寬度 ⢠Virtual ï¼Âå åµé åºä¾ÂèªåÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç° ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ â¢ 5ch Stereo ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼å°Âç«Âé«Âè²é³æ¨ÂæÂÂæ¾ æºÂ帶ä¾Âå¼·åÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂSACD ã DVD å±ç¢Âå 96 kHz PCM æÂÂæ¾ æºÂ使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã â¢ æ¨å¯以å°Âä»»ä½Âé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂ使ç¨ä¸Â述任你ä¸Â種çÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼ÂãÂÂ給å®ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂå 你åÂÂèÂÂã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©Âæ ＠å Phones Surround é¸頠å¯ç¨ã 調ç¯Âé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´ æ¨å¯以 é¨ æ å°Âé«Âç´ ç° ç¹ è² 模å¼Âç æ æ é² è¡Â墠強æÂÂæ¸Âå¼± ãÂÂå°Âæ¼åÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å åÂ¥å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´Âé²è¡Âè¨Âç½®ã 1 å¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Effect âÂÂã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯ÂæÂÂæÂÂç ç´Âã æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´Âå¯以å¨ 10 ï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âï¼ è³ 90 ï¼ÂæÂÂ大＠习éÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âã 4 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã å¢Âå¼·å°Â話 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Dialog Off å°Â話墠強 Ã¥ÂÂè½è¨Â訠ç¨æ¼使 é» 覠æÂÂé»影 é³ 軠丠çÂÂå°Â話è²æ¯Âå ¶ä»ÂèÂÂæ¯è²æ´顯èÂÂã â¢ æ DIALOGUE é¸æÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼·çÂÂ大å°Âã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¾Â以ä¸Âé  ç®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠Dialog Off ï¼Âç¡å°Â話å¢Âå¼· ⢠Dialog Mid ï¼Âé©度çÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼· ⢠Dialog Max ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼· ⢠æ¨ç¡æ³Âå° SACD ã DVDå±ç¢Âå 96 kHz PCM æÂÂæ¾ æºÂ使ç¨å°Â話å¢Âå¼·åÂÂè½ã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED DIALOGUE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 34 ChH ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æ¶è½ ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Vir. SB Off ç¶以ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½æ ＠å¯使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°繠è²åÂÂè½ä¾Â模æÂŽÂÂå çÂÂå¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²è²é ã å¨çÂÂæ£ çÂÂå½±é¢裡 ï¼ å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ該ä½Âæ¼æ¨çÂÂæ£ å¾Âæ¹ï¼Â以åµé æ´å¤Âé£çºÂèÂÂé¼çÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ VIRTUAL SB å°Âå¨ â Vir. SB On â å â Vir. SB Off âÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ ç¶以 Stereo æ Virtual è½é³模å¼Âæ¶è½æ ＠æ¨ ç¡æ³Â使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°繠è²ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è²éÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²尠ä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ã â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂSACD ã DVD å±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂ96 kHz PCM é³溠使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂã 使ç¨å®ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âè½é³模张⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Off å®ÂéÂÂæ¶è½ å è½å¯éÂÂä½ è²é³æ æ¾ 溠ä¸ÂéÂÂ夠ç 你é³æÂÂé«Âé³ ã å¦ÂæÂÂé³æ¨ÂæÂÂé»Âåºè³ä½Âæ¨æ´åÂÂæ¡è¼Âçº æÂÂæ»ÂçÂÂè²é³ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯以使ç¨該åÂÂè½ã åÂÂå¤Âæ¶è½ å è½è®Âæ¨è½ å¨ä½Âé³ é 素çÂÂæ 泠丠è½ å°é»影ä¸Â實éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ã 該æÂÂæÂÂèªåÂÂæ ¹æÂÂæ¨æ£ å¨æ¶è½çÂÂé³éÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ QUIET/MIDNIGHT å°Âå¨ â Quiet â ＠â Midnight âÂÂå â Off âÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½è¨Âå® å®ÂéÂÂî¿åÂÂå¤Âè½é³模å¼Âã â¢ è£Âå ¥ SACD æ DVD å±ç¢ÂæÂÂã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED VIRTUAL SB MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 79 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MIDNIGHT MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 8 XV-DV900/700.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 35 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 調ç¯Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼Âé«Âé³＠0 ï¼Âä½Âé³＠0 使ç¨ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âå ¨é¨é³調 ã ç¶é åÂÂäºÂå®ÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Â模å¼Âå¾ ï¼ ç¡æ³Âé²è¡Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ 調ç¯Âã 1 æ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Bass â æÂÂâ Treble â ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè²é³ã ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³å¯å¨ -3 å° 3 ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âã 4 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã ç¶ æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½調篠é«Âé³î¿ä½Âé³ã â¢ éÂÂé³模å¼Âè¨Âçº ON æ â¢ è£Âå ¥ SACD æ DVD å±ç¢Âæ å¢Âå¼·ä½Âé³çÂÂç´ æ¨å¯以 使 ç¨ä¸Â種你é³模张侠墠強æÂÂæ¾ 溠丠ç ä½Âé³ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ BASS MODE é¸æÂÂé©åÂÂæ¨æ£å¨æ¶è½ çÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂçÂÂé¸頠ã â¢ Music ï¼Âå¯ç¨æ¼é³æ¨Âï¼Â以帶ä¾Âè¼Âçºä½Âæ²Âç ä½Âé³ â¢ Cinema ï¼Âé©ç¨æ¼åÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæÂÂå ·æÂÂ許å¤Âè²é³ æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂé»影 ⢠P. Bass ï¼Âå¯ç¨æ¼é³æ¨ÂæÂÂæ¾溠＠以å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹ ç¢çÂÂé³樠ï¼ÂæÂÂé³è»Âï¼ÂçÂÂç¯ÂæÂÂè² â¢ Off ⢠æ¨ç¡æ³Âå° SACD å DVD å±ç¢Â使ç¨ä½Âé³模张ã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨ä½Âé³模å¼Âã MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SOUND ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 36 ChH éÂÂé³ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨éÂÂè¦Âæ«æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè²é³ ï¼ è«Â使ç¨ MUTE æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ æ MUTE å·è¡ÂéÂÂé³ã è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂé³æÂÂ調ç¯Âé³éÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ次æ MUTE ã MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER MUTE XV-DV900/700.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 37 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 第 5 ç« æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç ä»Âç´¹ æ¬章ä»Âç´¹çÂÂ大é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é½æ¡ç¨äºÂè¢å¹Â顯示 ã é æ¼å¦Âä½Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ說æÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 2 1 é  â 使ç¨ è¢å¹Â顯示â ã æ¬章ä»Âç´¹ç 大é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ é½é©ç¨æ¼ DVD 碠çÂÂå SACD ãÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDãÂÂCD å M P3/JPEG ç¢Âç ＠ç¡管堶 丠丠äºÂ實é æ 你æ é¨è£Âå ¥ 碠ç ç 種顠èÂÂçÂ¥æÂÂå·®ç°ã æÂÂ亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂå¶æÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂè½çÂÂ使ç¨ ï¼Âä¾Â妠＠é¨ æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã å¨æÂÂæ¾ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ç¡æ³Âå¨ PBC æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Â使ç¨ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è¦Â使ç¨å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè« éÂÂéÂÂæ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ²ç®ä¾ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ è¦Âé²堥éÂÂæ§å¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ綠è²顯示çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âè« å°Âæ»ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå¾ MAIN 移è³ SUB ã 使ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ覽ç¢ÂçÂÂ堧容 使ç¨碠ç 尠åÂÂä¾Âç 覽 碠ç 堧容以 æ¾ å° æ¨ æ³æ æ¾çÂÂé¨å ã æ¨å¯以å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂ使ç¨碠çÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 1 æ HOME MENU ï¼Âå¾Âå±Âå¹ÂæÂÂ示ä¸Âé¸æ â Disc Navigator â ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã å¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂæ¯ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RWãÂÂCDãÂÂVCD ＠趠素VCD æ M P3/JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¹Âå¯以é¸æÂÂæ DVD MENU æÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå®Â使æ¨å¯ç´æÂ¥é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂå° åÂÂç«é¢ã 2 é¸æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂæ¾çÂÂé¨åÂÂã 根æÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂç 種é¡Âï¼Â碠çÂÂå°Âå ç«é¢çÂÂä¸Âå» çÂÂ¥ æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã DVD å½±ç¢ÂçÂÂç«é¢å¨左é¢顯示æ¨Âé¡ ï¼ å³é¢顯示章ã è«Âé¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âä¸ÂçÂÂç« ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±碠＠è«Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂå §çÂÂæ² ç®ã Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Title 1-10 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 DVD Disc Navigator Chapter 1-3 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Group 1-3 DVD - A u di o Disc Navigator Tr a c k 1-36 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 XV-DV900/700.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 38 ChH å°Âæ¼ SACDï¼Âè«Âé¸ æÂÂç¶å æÂÂæ¾åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå § çÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ² ç®ã å°Âæ¼ VR ï¼Âè¦Âé »éÂÂ製ï¼Â模å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ è«Âå¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âç Playlist ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表ï¼Âå Original ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂé¸æ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂæ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Âé Â覽æ¨Âé¡Âã â¢ å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç¡æ³Âå¨ Original ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âï¼ å Playlist ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表ï¼Âä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ 並éÂÂæÂÂæ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂé½堷æ Playlist ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表＠ã CD å V CD ï¼Â趠素VCD çÂÂç«é¢顯示æ²ç®åÂÂ表ã ï¼Â以ä¸Âç«é¢以 CD çºä¾Âï¼ MP3 碠ç ç 屠幠顯示ç« é¢ å¨ å·¦ é 顯示æÂʊȦ 夾 Ã¥ÂÂï¼Âå¨å³éÂÂ顯示æ²ç®å ï¼Âè«Â注æÂÂï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæ 16 Ã¥ÂÂ以ä¸Âç æ 件夾æÂÂæ² ç®åÂÂ稱 å å« éÂÂé³符 æ é 羠馬åÂÂ符 ï¼ åÂÂæ²ç®åÂÂæÂÂ件夾åÂÂå°Â以é¡Â屬åÂÂ顯示 ï¼ F_033 ï¼ T_035 çÂÂï¼ ã é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸ÂçÂÂæ²ç®ã æÂÂæ¾å°Âå¨æÂÂå ENTER å¾ÂéÂÂå§Âã â¢ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå è½åªæÂÂå¨ç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥å¾ÂæÂÂè½使 ç¨ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂ以 PBC 模å¼ÂæÂÂæ¾VCDï¼Â趠ç´ÂVCD ï¼ æÂÂè æ æ¾çÂÂæ¯ä¸Âå¼µæªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å°Âç¡æ³Â使ç¨ã â¢ æÂÂ¥ æ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂç¹å®Âä½Âç½®çÂÂå¦ä¸Âæ¹æ³Âæ¯使ç¨æÂÂç´¢ 模å¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂä¸Â種ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 4 7 é  â æÂÂ索碠çÂÂâ ã æÂÂæÂÂç¢Âç æ¨å¯以使 ç¨ Ã¥ÂÂ種ä¸Âå çÂÂéÂÂ度 å å æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ å¿« é æÂÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ î æ î éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ ã 2 Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ以å 快æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ度ã â¢ MP3 æ²ç®åªè½ç¨ä¸Â種éÂÂ度æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ度å°Âè¢å¹Â顯示ã Tr ack 1-14 Tr a c k 001 Tr a c k 002 Tr a c k 003 Tr a c k 004 Tr a c k 005 Tr a c k 006 Tr a c k 007 Tr a c k 008 2ch Area Disc Navigator Title(1-3) 01. 3/31 FIRST LEA GUE 02. 4/28 SECOND LEA GUE 03. 4/29 FINAL R OUND Original Play List Disc Navigator DVD - RW Tr a c k 1-10 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 CD Disc Navigator Folder 1-17 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead 007. Thermo 008. Missing Man MP3 Disc Navigator Tr ack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube XV-DV900/700.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 39 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 3 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¨æÂÂæÂÂCDå±碠ã SACDå MP3ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¨è½è½覠è²é³ã â¢ ç¶æÂÂæÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDæÂÂM P3 çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®æ ＠æÂÂæ¾å°ÂèªåÂÂå¨該æ²ç®çÂÂèµ·é»ÂæÂÂçµÂé»ÂèÂÂé å§Âã â¢ æÂÂæÂÂDVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠ç´ÂVCDæ ＠æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³ 輸åºãÂÂæÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示ã â¢ æ ¹æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡Âå ＠å¨å°é DVDå½±ç¢Âä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°ç 章æÂÂå¯è½èªåÂÂæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã 栢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ¨è½夠以åÂÂ種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ ¢éÂÂæÂÂæ¾ DVD 影碠ã DVD- R/RW å V CD ï¼Â趠素VCD ãÂÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå DVD-R/RW éÂÂè½以堩種栢éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾ã 1 æÂÂæ¾æ ï¼Âæ î ï¼Âæ«åÂÂï¼ ï¼Âä¸Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ＠ã 2 æÂÂä½ îÂÂ/î æ îÂÂ/î ç´å°栢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾é å§Âã â¢ æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂ度è¢å¹Â顯示ã â¢ æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂè²é³輸åºã 3 Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæ¹è®Âæ ¢éÂÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂéÂÂ度ã â¢ æ ¢éÂÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂéÂÂ度è¢å¹Â顯示ã 4 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD å æ¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé²çÂÂæ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã â¢ æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂç«é¢質é æ²ÂæÂÂæ£常æÂÂæ¾ç 好ã â¢ æ ¹ æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âå¨å°éÂÂæ°çÂÂç« æÂÂå¯è½èªå æ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²î¿éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé æ¨å¯以éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾ DVD å½±ç¢Âæ VR æ ¼ å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂå°Âæ¼ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âæ¨ å è½使ç¨éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²æÂÂæ¾ã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ î ï¼Âæ«åÂÂï¼ ï¼Âä¸Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ＠ã 2 æ îÂÂ/î æ îÂÂ/î æ¯Â次åÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé²ä¸Âå¹ ã 3 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ï¼Âä¸Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ï¼Âæ¢復æ£ 常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ 使 ç¨éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç«é¢質éÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé² çÂÂ好ã â¢ æ ¹ æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âå°éÂÂæ°çÂÂç« ç¯ÂæÂÂå¯è½èªå æ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ DVD ç¢Âç ＠å¨æ¹è®ÂæÂÂæ¾æ¹åÂÂæ ＠ç«é¢æ 以ç¡æ³Âé ÂæÂÂçÂÂæ¹å¼ÂâÂÂ移åÂÂâ ãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ é ã XV-DV900/700.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 40 ChH 循ç°æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â段 A-B éÂÂè¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½è®Âæ¨è½夠æÂÂå®Âæ²ç® ï¼ÂCD å V CDï¼ æÂÂæ¨Âé¡ ï¼ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âæ DVD-RWï¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂå ©åÂÂé» ï¼ÂA Ã¥ÂÂB ï¼ ï¼Â以形æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂ循ç°段ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢Âç ã DVD å±碠ã SACD ã 趠素VCDã PBC 模å¼Âä¸Âç VCD æÂÂæªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨ A-B éÂÂè¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æ â A-B Repeat â ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 å¨â A ï¼ Start Point ï¼ â ＠A ï¼Âèµ·é»Âï¼ ï¼Âè æ ENTER ï¼Â以è¨Âå®Â循ç°起é»Âã 4 å¨â B ï¼ End Point ï¼ÂâÂÂï¼ B ï¼ÂçµÂé»Âï¼ ï¼Âè æ ENTER ï¼Â以è¨Âå®Â循ç°çµÂé»Âã å¨æ¨æ ENTER æÂÂéÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾跳åÂÂå°起é»ÂéÂÂ姠循ç°æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ æÂÂå°Â循ç°æÂÂéÂÂçº 2 秠éÂÂã 5 è¦Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾＠è«Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂâ Off â ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã 使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂé¸頠é¨è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂç° ï¼ æ¨习å¯以èÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ä¸Â起使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ ＠以éÂÂè¤Âæ æ¾編庠å 表ä¸ÂçÂÂæ² ç® î¿章＠諠åÂÂè¦Â第 4 3 é  â åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表â ＠ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ PBC 模å¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDæÂÂæªæÂÂçµ å®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âæ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂè¤Âæ æ¾ã A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 41 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 使ç¨ OSD 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æ â Repeat â ï¼Âé è¤ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 é¸æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠ã å¦ÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾已æ¿Âæ´»ï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Program Repeat ï¼Â編庠é è¤Âï¼Â以éÂÂ褠æ æ¾ ç·¨åºÂå 表＠æÂÂé¸æ Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼Â以åÂÂ涠éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ã å°Âæ¼DVD å½±ç¢Âæ DVD-RWç¢Âç ＠é¸æ Title Repeat ï¼Â樠é¡ÂéÂÂè¤Âï¼Âæ Chapter Repeat ï¼Âç« é è¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼Âé¸æ Group Repeat ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ éÂÂè¤Âï¼Âæ Track Repeat ï¼Âæ²ç® éÂÂè¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ SACDãÂÂCD å VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âé¸æ Disc Repeat ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè¤Âï¼ æ Track Repeat ï¼Âæ²ç® éÂÂè¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âé¸æ Disc Repeat ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂé è¤Âï¼ ã Folder Repeat ï¼ÂæÂÂ件夾éÂÂè¤Âï¼ æ Track Repeat ï¼Âæ²ç®éÂÂè¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼Âé è¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã 使ç¨顯示幠⢠ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ REPEAT é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¤Âæ æ¾é¸頠ã åÂÂè¦Âæ ç´ å°æ¨æÂÂ覠çÂÂéÂÂ褠æ æ¾ é¸頠顯 示 å¨ 顯 示å¹Âä¸Âã éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠è OSD ä¸ÂçÂÂé¸頠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ç¸ Ã¥ÂÂã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨已åµ建äºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼Âä¹Âå¯使ç¨ Program Repeat ã â¢ å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂé ＠æ¨å¯以æ CLR Ã¥ÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Group Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Folder Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 42 ChH ⢠æ¨ä¸Âè½åÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂäºÂè¦Âè§Âï¼Âé è¤ÂæÂÂæ¾å°Â被åÂÂæ¶Âã 使ç¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ¨ å¯使ç¨ é¨ æ© æÂÂæ¾å è½ 以 é¨ æ©Âé Â庠æ æ¾ æ¨Âé¡ æÂÂç« ï¼ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ²ç® ï¼ÂDVD å±ç¢Âï¼ æÂÂæ²ç® ï¼ÂSACD ãÂÂC D ã VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD å M P3ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ã æ¨ å¯以å¨ 碠ç æ£å¨æ æ¾ æ 被 Ã¥ÂÂæ¢æ æ¾ æ è¨Âå® é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠ã â¢ å°Âæ¼VR æ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂDVD-RWç¢Âç ã PBC模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ çÂÂV CD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂè ç¶ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®æ£ å¨顯示æÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ã 使ç¨ OSD 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦ éÂÂç åÂÂè½ Ã¥ÂÂ表丠é¸æ â Random â ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 é¸æÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Random Title ï¼Âé¨橠æÂÂæ¾æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âæ Random Chapter ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ ç« ï¼ ãÂÂæ Random Off ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Random Group ï¼Âé¨ æ©Âæ æ¾åÂÂçµ ï¼Âæ Random Track ï¼Âé¨橠æ æ¾ æ²ç®＠ãÂÂæ Random Off ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ CD å VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âè«Âé¸æ On ï¼Âæ éÂÂï¼Âæ Off ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂï¼Â以æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ã Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Group Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode On Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 43 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Random All ï¼Âé¨æ©Âæ æ¾堨é¨＠ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ件夾＠æ Random Track ï¼Âé¨ æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æ²ç® ï¼ ï¼Âå éÂÂæ¼ç¶å æÂÂ件夾 ï¼ ã æ Random Off ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç RANDOM æÂÂé ä¾Âé¸æÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼ÂãÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âå°Âå¨ 顯示å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨å±Âç«é¢ä¸Â顯示ãÂÂå¯ç¨çÂÂé¨æ©Âæ æ¾模å¼Âè Play Mode é¸æÂÂãÂÂæ ENTER é¸ å®ä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂçÂÂç¸åÂÂã â¢ è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ç¢ÂçÂÂ並åÂÂæ¶Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âè«Âæ î ï¼Âå æ¢＠ã â¢ è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½èÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âè«Âæ CLR æÂÂé ãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾è³çµÂå°¾ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ ã â¢ å¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æ ＠î å î æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½èÂÂæ£常 çÂÂæ Âä¸ÂçÂ¥æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ︰ î è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°ç¶åÂÂæ²ç®î¿ ç« ç é 姠èÂÂãÂÂæ¨ç¡ æ³Âå é² ä¸ÂæÂÂ¥ è¿ åÂÂã î å¾Âå ¶é¤Âé¨åÂÂä¸Âé¨æ©Âé¸åÂÂå ¶ä»Âæ²ç®î¿章ã â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³ÂèÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ä¸Â起使ç¨é¨ æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ã åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 æÂŒÂÂè½ è® æ¨ è½夠編 製 碠ç ä¸Âæ¨Âé¡ î¿ çµ î¿ ç« î¿ æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®çÂÂæÂÂæ¾é ÂåºÂã â¢ å°Âæ¼VR æ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂDVD-RWç¢Âç ã PBC 模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ çÂÂV CD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂæÂÂè ç¶ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® æ£å¨顯示æÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨編åºÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ã 使ç¨ OSD 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦ é ç åÂÂè½å 表ä¸Âé¸ æ â Program â ï¼Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 å¾Âç·¨åºÂé¸頠çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æÂÂâ Create/Edit â ï¼Âåµ建î¿編輯＠ã æÂÂ顯示 ç 編åºÂ編輯 ç«é¢根 æ 裠堥ç¢Âç ç 種 é¡ èÂÂç°ã ç«é¢ å·¦éÂÂæ¯ ç·¨ åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ï¼Âå³é æ¯æ¨Âé¡ å 表 ï¼Â妠æÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂæ¯ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥ çÂÂæ¯ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ ãÂÂæ² ç® ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ SACD ã CD å VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂæÂÂè æ¯æÂÂ件夾åÂÂ表ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ MP3 碠çÂÂï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂæ¯章ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ²ç®å 稱 ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ MP3ï¼ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã Random All Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 44 ChH 4 å¨ ç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表丠çºç¶å æÂ¥é©Âé¸ æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ ã 章ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂãÂÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂæ²ç®ã å°Âæ¼ DVD 影碠＠æ¨å¯以å°Âæ´åÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âå §ç 章添å è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂÂ該æ¨Âé¡Âã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å 章ï¼Âå Âé«Â亮顯示堶æÂÂå¨æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç¶徠æ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Â＠並å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç« ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±碠＠æ¨å¯以å°Âæ´åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂå §ç æ²ç®添å è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å åÂÂçµÂï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂÂ該åÂÂçµÂã â¢ 覠添å æ²ç®ï¼Âè«Âå Âé«Â亮顯示åÂÂçµÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Â並å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®ã å°Âæ¼ SACDãÂÂCD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âé¸æÂÂä¸Âå æ²ç®以添å å°編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âã å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢Âç ＠æ¨å¯以å°Âæ´åÂÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂæÂÂ件夾 å §çÂÂæ²ç®添å è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å æÂÂ件夾ï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂÂ該æÂÂ件夾ã Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1-38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1-4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1~38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 Tr a c k 1~4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1-38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 T rack 1-4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack 1~12 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 Program Program Step 01. 001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube Program XV-DV900/700.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 45 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ è¦Âæ·»å ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®ï¼Âå Âæ¾å°堶æÂÂ件夾ï¼Âç¶徠æ î ï¼Âå³堠樠ï¼Â並å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸ æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ² ç®åÂÂ稱ã æ ENTER é¸æÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ² ç®å¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¥é©ÂèÂÂå°ÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â移åÂÂä¸ÂæÂ¥ã 5 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠4 ï¼Â以建ç«Âç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表æÂÂå¤Âå¯以å å« 24 Ã¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿ Ã¥ÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®ã 6 è¦ÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂæÂÂé ã 編åºÂæÂÂæ¾å°Âä¿ÂæÂÂæ¿Âæ´»çÂÂæ  ï¼ ç´å°æ¨éÂÂéÂÂç·¨åºÂæ æ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ã åªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ã éÂÂåºç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå° DVD (CD) 以 å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã â¢ è¦Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨çÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表並éÂÂåº編åºÂ編輯ç«é¢ ä½Âä¸ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âè«Âæ HOME MENU ã ï¼Âè« å¿æ RETURN ï¼ÂéÂÂ樣 Ã¥ÂÂä¸Âè½ ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨ åºÂå 表＠ã â¢ ç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾æ ＠æ î å°Âè·³è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âç ä¸Âä¸ÂæÂ¥ã â¢ æÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ CLR å¯éÂÂéÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ ãÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂæ¢ æÂÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¯åªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã 使ç¨ OSD 編輯編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 å¨編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表åµ建徠ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¢Âå ＠åªé¤æÂÂæ¹讠堶ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂ¥é©Âã 1 æÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode âÂÂã 2 å¾ å·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸宠â Program â ï¼Âç·¨ åºÂï¼ ã 3 å¾Âç·¨ åºÂé¸頠åÂÂ表丠é¸宠â Create/Edit â ï¼Âåµ建î¿編輯＠ã 4 覠渠é¤ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é©Âï¼Âè«Âé«Â亮顯示該æÂ¥é©ÂèÂÂ並 æ CLR ã 5 覠å¨編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸ÂæÂÂå ¥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é©Âï¼Âè«Âé«Â亮æ ç®Âè®Âæ°æÂ¥é©Âåºç¾å¨該èÂÂçÂÂæÂ¥è ＠åÂÂé¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠å 堥çÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®ã æ ENTER å¾Âï¼Âæ°çÂÂæÂ¥é©Â被æÂÂå ¥åÂÂ表ã 6 覠å¨編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表æ«尾å¢Âå ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é©Âï¼Âè«Âé«Â亮 顯示æ°æÂ¥é©Âè¦ÂæÂÂå ¥ä½Âç½®çÂÂæ¥驠＠åÂÂé¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠å¢Âå çÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®ã â¢ 覠ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼ÂéÂÂåº編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表編輯ç«é¢ èÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âè«Âæ HOME MENU ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨æ³ä¸Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂä¿®æ¹並éÂÂåº編åºÂå 表編輯ç«é¢ï¼Âè«Âæ RETURN ã OSD ç·¨åºÂé¸å®çÂÂå ¶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âé¸å® ï¼ æ¨é¤äºÂè½åµ建åÂÂ編輯編庠åÂÂ表ï¼ÂéÂÂè½夠éÂÂå§Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾＠åªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表åÂÂè¨Âæ¶編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã Program Step 01. 001-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Program Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube XV-DV900/700.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 46 ChH 1 æ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode âÂÂã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸宠â Program â ï¼Âç·¨ åºÂï¼ ã 3 é¸å®Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ã â¢ Create/Edit ï¼Âåµ 建 î¿ ç·¨ 輯＠ï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Âå 述堧容 ⢠Playback Start ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ å·²ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ⢠Playback Stop ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾＠ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂ編庠æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âä½Âä¸Âåªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ⢠Program Delete ï¼Âåªé¤編åºÂï¼ ï¼Âåªé¤編 åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表並éÂÂéÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ â¢ Program Memory ï¼Âç·¨åºÂè¨Âæ¶＠ï¼Âå å°Âæ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ ï¼Âé¸宠On 以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂç 編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã ï¼Âé¸宠Off Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢Âç çÂÂç·¨åºÂè¨Âæ¶＠⢠å¯å°Âè£Âå ¥ç DVDç¢ÂçÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ã ç¶æ¨裠堥ä¸Âå¼µä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç·¨åºÂæ æ¾å°ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æ¨å¯以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé 24 å¼µç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ã æ¤ å¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ©ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表å°Â被æÂÂæ°ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç æÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表åÂÂ代ã 使ç¨æ¬æ©Â顯示幠åÂÂ管 OSD é©ç¨æ¼ SACDï¼ÂCD å M P3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âä½Â顯 示å¹Âä»Âæ 侠äºÂ堠足賠è¨Â以æ¹ 便 å° åµ建編 庠å 表 ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã 1 æ PROGRAM ã æÂÂ示æ¨å¨ ç·¨ åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表丠é¦Âå Â輸 å ¥ 丠é¦Âæ²ç® æ æ 件夾ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸Âé¦Âæ² ç®ï¼Âæ ENTER ã â¢ å é MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ è¦Âé¸æÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸ÂçÂÂå®åÂÂæ² ç®ï¼Âè« ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ æÂÂ件夾å¾Âï¼ æ î ï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸Âé¦Âæ²ç®ãÂÂæ ENTER ã å¨å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ種 é¸ æÂÂä¹Âå¾Âï¼ ç 徠顯 示å¹Âå° æ¨ ç æ 示ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æªæ£確æÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«Âæ CLR åªé¤æÂÂå¾ ä¸Â馠ï¼ÂæÂÂè¿Âä¸Âé¦Âï¼Âç·¨åºÂæ²ç®ã 3 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠2 åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表å¯å å«å¤Âé 24 é¦Âæ²ç®ã 4 è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼Âè«Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 編åºÂæÂÂæ¾å°Âä¿ÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´è³æ¨æÂÂ丠î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠＠渠é¤æÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ï¼ å½Âåºç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âçºæ¢ã 渠é¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 è¦Â編製æ°çÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ï¼ æ¨忠é Â渠é¤åÂÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂå 表ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸Âå¼µç¢Âç ＠è«Âæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠ã 2 æ CLR ã Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode P0 -0 0 0 0 P0 -1 5 3 7 XV-DV900/700.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 47 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æÂÂç´¢ç¢Âç æ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂç« èÂÂ碼æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå° DVD å½± ç¢Âç¢ÂçÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ ã 尠D VD å±ç¢Âå¯åÂÂçµÂæÂÂæÂÂæ²ç® æÂÂæÂÂé Â碼é²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ï¼Âå° SACDï¼ÂCD ï¼Â趠素VCD å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæ²ç®èÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ ï¼ å° V CD å¯éÂÂéÂÂæ²ç® èÂÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ ï¼ å° M P3 ç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯以éÂÂéÂÂæ 件夾æÂÂæ²ç®èÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ã 1 å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸宠â Search Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂ索模å¼Âï¼ ã 顯示çÂÂæÂÂç´¢é¸頠根æÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂç° ãÂʊȴ ä¸Âç«é¢顯示亠DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂç´¢é¸頠ã 3 é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ索模å¼Âã 4 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂçµÂãÂÂç« ãÂÂæÂÂ件夾æ æ²ç®èÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè æ¯æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé Â碼ã â¢ å°ÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂç´¢ï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¨å¸ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ¢復你置çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç§Âæ¸輸堥å°ç¶åÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂ樠顠ï¼ÂDVD 影碠/DVD-RWï¼ æÂÂæ²ç®ï¼ÂVCDï¼ ä¸Âã ä¾Âå¦Âï¼Âæ 4 ã 5 ã 0 ã 0 è®ÂæÂÂæ¾å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç 45 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂèÂÂèµ·éÂÂå§ÂãÂÂå° 1 å°Âæ 2 0 å 3 0 ç§Âï¼ è«Âæ 8 ã 0 ã 3 ã 0 ã â¢ æÂÂäºÂDVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂå¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂé Âé¢ ã è«Â輸 å ¥æ¨è¦ÂçÂÂé Â碼ã 5 æ ENTER éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ æ¨å è½å°ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå VCDç¢ÂçÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂç´¢ Ã¥ÂÂè½ã â¢ è¦Â使ç¨æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂç´¢åÂÂè½ ï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå¿ é Âæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ PBC 模å¼Âä¸Âç VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂæªæÂÂçµ å®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂç´¢åÂÂè½ä¸Âå¯ç¨ã â¢ å°Âæ¼堩張以ä¸Âç SACD ç¢Âç ＠å¨第äºÂå¼µç¢Âç éÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ¨å¯è½ç¡æ³Âé¸æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®ã æÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢Âç âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Ââ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂé¡Âå¤ÂçÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡ ï¼ éÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂé è¦Â4 ä½Âæ¸çÂÂå¯Â碼æÂÂè½ç²åÂÂãÂÂ詳æ åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå¯Â碼＠è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂå è£ÂãÂÂç¶æ¨åÂÂ試æÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂé¡ ï¼Âæ¾ æ¾æ©Âå°ÂèªåÂÂæÂÂ示æ¨輸堥å¯Â碼ã 1 使ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥 4 ä½Âæ¸å¯Â碼ã â¢ ä¹ å¯以éÂÂéÂÂé¸頠é¸å®輸堥å¯Â碼ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 69 é Âã åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ æÂÂ亠DVD å½±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂä¸Â種æÂÂå¤Â種èªÂè¨ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ幠＠碠çÂÂå 裠ç ä¸Âè¾ÂÂå çÂ¥æÂÂåª 亠å å¹ÂèªÂ訠å¯ 以 使 ç¨ãÂÂæ¨è½夠å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SUBTITLE é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Âé¸頠ã â¢ æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂåªå Â許æ¨å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ä¾Âæ¹è®ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂæ TOP MENU å¯é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ã Title Search Chapter Search Time Search A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal XV-DV900/700.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 48 ChH ⢠è¦Âè¨Âç½®åÂÂå¹Âé¦Âé¸頠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 65 é  â Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ â ã åÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂ訠å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂæÂÂ堩種以ä¸ÂèªÂè¨Âå°Âç½ç DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂï¼ æ¨è½夠å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ AUDIO é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âé¸頠ã â¢ æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂåªå Â許æ¨å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ä¾Âæ¹è®Âé³頻 èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂæ TOP MENU å¯é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ã â¢ è¦Âè¨Â置伴é³èªÂè¨Âé¦Âé¸頠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 5 é  â Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ â ã åÂÂæ DVD å±ç¢ÂçÂÂé³頻è²é 根æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡Âå ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢ÂæÂÂæ¨å¯以åÂÂæÂÂè² éÂÂï¼Â詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂã 1 Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ AUDIO é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³頻è²éÂÂé¸頠ã ç¶æ¨æ¹è®Âé³頻è²éÂÂæ ＠æÂÂæ¾å°Âèªç¶åÂÂæ²ç®çÂÂèµ· å§ÂèÂÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂå§Âã â¢ æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂå 容許æ¨éÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®æ¹è®Âé³頻 è²é ã è«Âæ TOP MENU å¯é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ã â¢ è¦Âè¨Â置伴é³èªÂè¨Âé¦Âé¸頠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 5 é  â Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ â ã åÂÂæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD çÂÂé³頻 è²é ç¶æÂÂæ¾ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¨ç«Âé«Âè²ã å 左è²éÂÂæÂÂå å³è²éÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ AUDIO é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³頻è²éÂÂé¸頠ã æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ å¨欣賠DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ÂDVD å±ç¢Âæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼ æ¨è½夠å©ç¨æ¾大åÂÂè½å°Âç«é¢çÂÂä¸Âé¨åÂÂæ¾大 2å æ 4 å ã 1 å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸Âç¨ ZOOM æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¾大åÂÂæ¸ã â¢ Normal ï¼Âæ£常＠⢠2x ⢠4x ⢠ç±æ¼ DVD 影碠＠DVD å±ç¢Âæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD ç å 辨çÂÂæ¯åºå®ÂçÂÂï¼Âå æ¤åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ丠éÂÂ＠尤堶æ¯以 4 å æ¾大æ ã ä½ÂéÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã Au dio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH 1/2 Current /T otal Audio Linear PCM 192kHz24bit 1 2CH Digital Out Converted Au dio Stereo Zoom 2x Zoom 4x XV-DV900/700.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 49 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 2 ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¹è®Âæ¾大åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æ¨å¯以 å¨ æ æ¾éÂÂ稠丠é¨ æ å°æ¹讠æ¾ 大 å æ¸å æ¾大åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå±Âå¹Âé Âé¨ç å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹æ¡Âæ¶Â失＠諠åÂÂæ ZOOM 使堶顯示ã â¢ ç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢被æ¾大æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°ä¸Âè¦Â使ç¨ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âå çºæ¤æÂÂé¸å®é¸頠å°Âç¡泠é«Â亮顯示ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨顯示äºÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Âï¼Âç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢被æ¾大æ å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¶Â失ãÂÂç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢åÂÂå°æ£常大å°Âæ å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ次åºç¾ã åÂÂæÂÂè¦Â觠æÂÂäºÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂ以堩åÂÂ以ä¸Âè§Â度æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç«é¢ ï¼Â詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ç¢ÂçÂÂå è£ÂçÂÂã ç¶å¤Âè¦Âè§Âç«é¢被æÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âå±Âå¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂåºç¾ä¸Âå åÂÂæ¨Âï¼Â以è®Âæ¨çÂ¥éÂÂéÂÂå¯è§ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âè§Â度ç ç«é¢ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ¿æÂÂï¼Âä¹Âå¯éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé  åÂÂè½ï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Â第 6 7 é  â Angle Indicator ï¼Âè§Â度æÂÂ示 å¨＠â ã ã â¢ å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼ÂæÂÂæ«åÂÂï¼ æ ＠æ ANGLE Ã¥ÂÂæ è¦Âè§Âã 顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠å¨æÂÂæ¾ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ＠å±Âå¹Âä¸Âå¯顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ種 æ²ç®ï¼Âç« åÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âè³Âè¨Â以åÂÂè¦Âé »å³輸çÂÂã OSD ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠⢠è¦Â顯示î¿åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ顯示çÂÂè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âæ DISPLAY ã å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂ被æÂÂæ¾æ ï¼Âè³Âè¨Âåºç¾å¨å±Âå¹Âé Âé¨ãÂÂæÂÂä½ DISPLAY 以æ¹è®Â顯示çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã â¢ DVD å½±ç¢Â顯示 ⢠DVD å±ç¢Â顯示 ⢠VR 格张DVD-RW 顯示 ⢠SACD 顯示 ï¼Âå å¨å¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âï¼ Audio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH Angle Subtitle English 1 Title Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Tr. Rate 8.6Mbps Chapter Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Audio 1 Linear PCM Angle Subtitle - - 1 T rack Play DVD-A udio î 3.20 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 2.41 Remain 6.01 T otal 192kHz 24bit 2/0CH Tr . Rate : 9.5Mbps Group Play DVD î 3.21 1/3 Current / T otal Elapsed 53.20 Remain 56.41 T otal -Audio Audio Dolb y Digital 2/0CH 1 Subtitle - - Title Play DVD-R W Original î 0.08 1/32 Current / T otal Elapsed 30.22 Remain 30.30 T otal Tr . Rate 4.3Mbps Chapter Play DVD-R W Original î 1/1 Current / T otal T rack Play SA CD î 0.13 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.21 Remain 4.34 T otal Audio 3/2.1CH T rack Play SA CD î 0.22 1/9 Current / T otal Elapsed 3.38 Remain 4.00 T otal Disc Play SA CD î 0.05 Elapsed 73.00 Remain 73.05 T otal XV-DV900/700.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 50 ChH ⢠CD å V CD 顯示 ⢠ï¼Âå å¨ PBC æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Â＠⢠趠素VCD 顯示 ⢠MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 ⢠JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 ⢠æ¨è½夠å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ä¸ÂçÂÂå°ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠ï¼Âæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章ã æ²ç® ãÂÂçµÂã æÂÂ件夾çÂÂçÂÂæ¸ç®＠ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 3 7 é  â 使ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ覽ç¢Âç 堧容â ã T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.40 Remain 5.47 T otal Disc Play CD î 28.00 Elapsed 30.20 Remain 58.20 T otal Play VCD î T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed Play MP3 î T rack T rack Name Outernational 0.18 1/17 Current / T otal Elapsed 12.42 Remain 13.00 T otal Play MP3 î Folder Folder Name ACP 2/7 Current / T otal Play JPEG î File File Name FL000001 1/40 Current / T otal Play JPEG î Folder Folder Name Holiday 2/6 Current / T otal XV-DV900/700.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 51 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 顯示å¹Âè³Â訠æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè³Âè¨Âä¹Âåºç¾å¨åÂÂé¢æ¿顯示å¹Â丠ã æ DISPLAY æ¹è®Â顯示çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã â¢ DVD å½±ç¢Âî¿ DVD-RW 顯示 æ¨Âé¡Âè 章è 已æÂÂæ¾æ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂé æ¨Âé¡Âè å©é¤Âæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂé æ¨Âé¡Âè 章è å©é¤Âç« æÂÂé â¢ DVD å±碠çµÂè æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé çµÂè æ²ç®è å©é¤Âæ²ç®æÂÂé çµÂè å©é¤ÂçµÂæÂÂé â¢ SACD/CD 顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé æ²ç®è å©é¤Âæ²ç®æÂÂé å©é¤Âç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé 22 8 4 9 2T T L 1 0 70 0 22 0 4 2 22 8 4 9 22 3 1 5 2 1 47 00 GRP 41 1 6 43 2 0 53 15 Disc ⢠VCD 顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé å©é¤Âç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé æ²ç®è å©é¤Âæ²ç®æÂÂé â¢ 趠素VCD 顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé â¢ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé æ²ç®åÂÂ稱 æÂÂ件夾åÂÂ稱 ⢠JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 æÂÂ件åÂÂ稱 æÂÂ件夾åÂÂ稱 41 1 1 6 53 15 Disc 43 2 0 41 1 6 20 3 5 EVE R YB O D BE S T _ O F_ TI G E R _ 0 1 ZO O _ TR I P XV-DV900/700.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç 06 52 ChH 第 6 ç« è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç æÂÂæ¾ JPEG ç¢Âç è£Âå ¥å«æ JPEG Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂç CD/CD-R/RW å¾ ï¼ æ î 徠碠çÂÂçÂÂ第 丠å æÂÂ件夾 î¿ 第 丠張åÂÂç é 姠éÂÂå¼µ æ¼Â示 ã æÂÂæ¾æ©Â以åÂÂæ¯Âé ÂåºÂ顯示åÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸ÂçÂÂå çÂÂã æ æ¾æ©Âæ èª å 調ç¯Âå ç 尺 寸 以ç¡å¯ è½ 使 Ã¥ÂÂç 堠滿æ´ å å±Âå¹ ï¼Âå¦Âæ å çÂÂçÂÂ縱 æ©« æ¯ÂèÂÂæ¨ çÂÂé» è¦Âæ©Âå±Âå¹Âä¸Âå ＠æ¨æÂÂç¼ç¾å±Âå¹Âå·¦å³æÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂæÂÂé» æ¢Âï¼ ã éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ æÂÂ︰ ⢠ç¶ç«é¢顯示 Loading ï¼Âæ£å¨è£Âè¼Âï¼ æ ＠î ã ANGLE å ZOOM æÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ã â¢ æ æ¾æ©Âè¼Âå ¥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé¨æÂÂ件尺寸ç å¢Âå èÂÂå¢Âå ã â¢ ä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂå¤Âå¯æ 999 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件ä¾Âè§Âç ã 妠æ ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件æ¸趠éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ç®ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂåªæ åÂÂ9 99 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件å¯以è§ÂçÂÂã 使ç¨ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽 å¨ è¦ÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂʊȦ Ã¥ÂÂå¨èÂÂæ¼ æÂÂæ¾你置 ç ç¢ÂçÂÂ丠æ¾ å° ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¹å®ÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂå° åÂÂï¼Âè¦ÂéÂÂéÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂå¨æÂÂ件夾ä¸Âæ¾å°ä¸Âå¼µåÂÂçÂÂï¼ è«Â使ç¨åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ã 1 æ DVD MENU 顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âå ＠Disc Navigator ï¼Âç«é¢ã 左åÂÂ顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件夾 ï¼ å³åÂÂ顯示æÂÂ件夾丠çÂÂæÂÂ件ã 2 ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂé ＠îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âé²è¡Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂã ç¶ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件被é«Â亮顯示æ ＠該æÂÂ件çÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂ尠顯示ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ î æ«åÂÂéÂÂå¼µ æ¾æ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ä¸Â次éÂÂæ° é å§Âã î 顯示ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µåÂÂçÂÂã î 顯示ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µåÂÂçÂÂã ANGLE æ«åÂÂéÂÂå¼µ æ¾æ ï¼Â並尠ç¶åÂÂ顯示 ç åÂÂçÂÂé ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¹åÂÂæÂÂè½ 90ðãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂå§ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ã ZOOM æ«åÂÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ï¼Âæ¾大ç«é¢ ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂæ°é å§ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ã DVD MENU 顯示 ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ ï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â丠æÂÂï¼ ã FOLDER / FOLDER â æÂÂæ¾ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂè·³è³ä¸Âä¸Âî¿åÂÂ丠æÂÂ件夾ã Folder 1-2 001. F_001 002. F_002 JPEG Disc Navigator File 1-40 001. FL000001 002. FL000002 003. FL000003 004. FL000004 005. FL000005 006. FL000006 007. FL000007 008. FL000008 XV-DV900/700.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç 06 53 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ ç¶ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件夾被 é«Â亮顯示æ ＠æ¨å¯以æ ENTER çº該æÂÂ件夾æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ç«é¢ã éÂÂæ¼åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨使ç¨çÂÂæ´å¤Âè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠ä¸ÂæÂÂã 3 è¦Âå¾Âé«Â亮顯示ç æÂÂ件æ¢復éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ＠æ ENTER ã 使ç¨åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨å¾Âç¶åÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸Âä¸Â次顯示9 å¼µ 縮çÂÂ¥ Ã¥ÂÂã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ä¸Âï¼Âé«Â亮ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â顯示çÂÂæ 件夾ç®éÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ç«é¢æÂÂé ＠å 9 å¼µåÂÂçÂÂ以縮çÂ¥åÂÂ顯 示ã 2 ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âé«Â亮顯示ä¸Â幠縮çÂ¥åÂÂã â¢ ç¨æ²ç®跳èºÂæÂÂé ＠î å î ï¼Âè§ÂçÂÂä¸Â丠é Âî¿ä¸Âä¸Âé ÂçÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³跳éÂÂè¥干 é Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âæ¾ç´å°æ¨éÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂé£é Âåº ç¾å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¬ÂéÂÂã â¢ è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ï¼Âæ RETURN ã 3 è¦Â以堨 尺寸å¨ å±Âå¹Âä¸Â顯示 é¸å®Âç 縮çÂ¥åÂÂï¼ æ ENTER ã å¾ÂæÂÂé¸åÂÂçÂÂæ¢復éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ã æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ ç¶è§Âç JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨è½夠å©ç¨æ¾大 Ã¥ÂÂè½å°Âç«é¢çÂÂä¸Âé¨åÂÂæ¾大 2 Ã¥ÂÂæ 4 å ã 1 å¨éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ æÂÂæ¾æÂÂç¨ ZOOM æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¾ 大åÂÂæ¸ã â¢ Normal ï¼Âæ£常＠⢠2x ⢠4x ⢠ç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢被æ¾大æÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ æ«åÂÂã â¢ ç±æ¼ JPEG Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ辨çÂÂæ¯åºå®Âç ＠åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質 éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂï¼Â尤堶æ¯以 4 å æ¾大æÂÂãÂÂä½ éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ éÂÂã 2 ç¨å Â樠æÂÂé ＠îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âæ¹讠æ¾ 大 å åÂÂã æ¨å¯以é¨æÂÂæ¹è®Âæ¾大åÂÂæ¸åÂÂæ¾大åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 3 è¦Âæ¢復éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ï¼Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂã Photo Browser 2 / 40 Live at Soft XV-DV900/700.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ 07 54 ChH 第 7 章使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ è¨Âç½®åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ 使 ç¨åÂÂé 宠æ å¨è¨Âç½® ç³» çµ± 以 å¨任你æ å éÂÂå é»æºÂ並éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã â¢ è¦Â使åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨æ£常工ä½Âï¼Âå¿ é Âå°ÂæÂÂéÂÂé² è¡ÂæºÂ確çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âç½® ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 19 é  â 訠置æÂÂéÂÂâ ＠ã 1 é¸æÂÂæ¨è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã ä¾Â妠＠æ TUNER é¸æÂÂæ¶é³æ©Âä½Âçºæ¨çÂÂæÂÂæ¾溠ã 2 æºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã ä¾Âå¦Âï¼Â調諧åÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂ廣æÂÂéÂȏºã 3 è¨Âç½®é³éÂÂã 4 æÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK é²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ã 5 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Wake- Up? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 6 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â TimerEdit? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 7 è¨Âç½®éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂã ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¶徠æ ENTER ãÂÂ以 Ã¥ÂÂ樣çÂÂæ¹张è¨Âç½®å éÂÂï¼Âç¶æ¨宠æÂÂè¨Âç½®å¾Âï¼Âæ ENTER ã 8 è¨Âç½®éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂã ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¶徠æ ENTER ãÂÂ以 Ã¥ÂÂ樣çÂÂæ¹张è¨Âç½®å éÂÂï¼Âç¶æ¨宠æÂÂè¨Âç½®å¾Âï¼Âæ ENTER ã å¨æÂÂå¾Âä¸Â次æÂÂ丠ENTER ä¹Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂ示å¨亮 起＠顯示å¹Âä¸Âå°ÂéÂÂå ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½＠DVD/ CD çÂÂï¼Â以åÂÂé³éÂÂé²è¡ÂäºÂ確èªÂã 9 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©Â模å¼Âã å¦ÂæÂÂ系統俠æ éÂÂå ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå é 宠æÂÂå¨尠丠起 ä½ ç¨＠ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM L1/L2 CLOCK TIMER/ DVD TUNER TV LINE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER M ASTER V OLUME 9 MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ 07 55 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ æ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK å¨徠橠çÂÂæ Âä¸Â檢æÂ¥å®ÂæÂÂå¨è¨Âç½® ã ï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Â次 TIMER/ CLOCK å°Â顯示ç¶åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂãÂÂï¼ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ å¦ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨èÂÂæ¼éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ  ï¼ å®Âå°Âæ¯Â天å¨æ¨ æÂÂè¨Âç½®çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂȎÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統ã 1 æÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK é²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Wake- Up? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Timer On? âÂÂæ â Timer Off? â ã â¢ æ¨忠é Âå°Âå®ÂæÂÂå¨é²è¡Âè¨Âç½® ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ＠以é¸æ ON ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé å®ÂæÂÂå¨å°ÂæÂÂç §æ¨å ÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âç½®å·è¡ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂä½Âã 4 æ ENTER ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ被復你＠åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨å°ÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ涠ã XV-DV900/700.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ 07 56 ChH è¨Âç½®ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ å¨è¦Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¾ ï¼Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨å°ÂéÂÂéÂÂ系統 ï¼ÂéÂÂ樣 æ¨就ç¡éÂÂæÂÂå¿Â系統èÂÂå®Âå¿Âå ¥ç¡ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¨åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ Âä¸Âè¨Âç½®ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¼Âæ©çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂȌªå Âé²è¡Âã 1 æÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK é²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Sleep? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæ éÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã å¨以ä¸Âé¸頠ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠Sleep Auto ï¼Âå¨ç¶å SACD ã CDãÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠ç´ÂV CD æ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾å®Âç¢ä¹Âå¾Âï¼Â系統èª Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep 90 ï¼Â系統å¨ 90 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep 60 ï¼Â系統å¨ 1 å°ÂæÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep 30 ï¼Â系統å¨ 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep Off ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ã 4 è¦Â檢æÂ¥å©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂé·度 ï¼ è«ÂéÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠1 å 2 ã å°Âæ«æÂÂ顯示å©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep Auto å¨V CDï¼Â趠素VCD é²è¡ÂPBC æÂÂæ¾ æÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè å¨ CD éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ ã MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ ENTER 9 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® 08 57 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 第 8 ç« ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® è¨Âå®Âç°ç¹Âè² æ¿éÂÂè¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ＠第 2 0 é  ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼帶給æ¨丠åÂÂåºæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® ï¼ ä½Âæ¯æ¨ä»Âå¯以é²è¡Âæ´詳 ç´°çÂÂè¨Âç½®ï¼Â以æ¹åÂÂæ¨æ¶è½æ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã â¢ ç¶ æ¨æ¹讠æÂÂè²å¨ è·Âé¢å è²éÂÂé³å£Â訠å®ÂæÂÂï¼ é äºÂè¨Âå®Âå°Âè¦ÂèÂÂæ¨å¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âå®Âä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂ訠å®Âã 1 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âé² è¡Â調ç¯ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ã ç¶æ¨ç 覽顯示 å¹ æ ï¼Âå°Â顯 示 Ã¥ÂÂé¸頠ç ç¶ å 訠置ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½®çÂÂå®Âæ´åÂÂ表åÂÂ說æÂÂã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè¨Âç½®ã 4 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠2 å 3 é²è¡Âå ¶å®Âè¨Âç½®ã 5 ç¶æ¨å®ÂæÂÂè¨Â置徠＠è«Âæ ENTER é¢éÂÂ系統訠å®Âé¸å®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå¨ 5 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå §ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂ你＠系統è¨Âç½®é¸ å®å°ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåºã 系統è¨Âå®Âé¸å®é¸頠以ä¸Âæ¯è¨Âå®Âé¸å®ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¯é¸è¨Âç½® ã åÂÂé¨åÂÂç 第ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ訠置 çºé Âè¨Âç æ ÂãÂÂæ éÂÂè¨Âç½® ç é å 賠è¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂç« ç¯Âä¸ÂçÂÂ注æÂÂäºÂé  ã MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SETUP SYST E M ENTER 4 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® 08 58 ChH Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âç½® æÂÂå®Âå¾Âæ¨çÂÂæ¶è½ä½Âç½®å°åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢＠⢠Front 0.3 m â¼ Front 9 m ï¼Âå¯以 0.3 m çº å¢ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âè·Âé¢è¨Âç½®ãÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº 3 mã ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âç½® æÂÂå®Âå¾Âæ¨çÂÂæ¶è½ä½Âç½®å°ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢＠⢠Center 0.3 m â¼ Center 9 m ï¼Âå¯以 0.3 m çºå¢ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âè·Âé¢è¨Âç½®ãÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº 3 mã ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âç½® æÂÂå®Âå¾Âæ¨çÂÂæ¶è½ä½Âç½®å°åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢＠⢠Surr. 0.3 m â¼ Surr. 9 m ï¼Âå¯以 0.3 m çº å¢ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âè·Âé¢è¨Âç½®ãÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº 3 mã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ å°ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS é³è»ÂæÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ調ç¯Â幠度＠⢠DRC Off ï¼Âç¡åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調ç¯Âï¼Âç¶以è¼Âé«Âé³ éÂÂé²è¡Âæ¶è½æÂÂ使ç¨＠⢠DRC Mid ï¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½® ⢠DRC High ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂä½ ï¼Âè¼Âé¿çÂÂè²é³ é³éÂÂéÂÂä½ÂèÂÂè¼Âå®ÂéÂÂçÂÂè²é³é³éÂÂå¢Âå ＠⢠該è¨Âç½®å å°ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂäºÂDTS é³è»ÂæÂÂæ ã å°Âæ¼堶å®ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂï¼Âæ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂ使ç¨åÂÂå¤Â模 å¼ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 3 4 é  â 使ç¨å®ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âè½ é³模å¼Ââ ï¼Âåµé é¡Âä¼¼çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã éÂÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âç½® å°Â以éÂÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂ編碼çÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS é³è»Âæ 宠æÂÂæ¾æ¹ å¼Âã æ¨ éÂÂå¯以 使ç¨該 è¨Â置尠éÂÂæÂÂ亠åÂÂç¨ç«Âé³è»Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂé²è¡Âè²éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ L-Ch1 R-Ch2 ï¼Âå ©åÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè² å¨é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ â¢ Ch1 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæ¾è²é 1 ⢠Ch2 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæ¾è²é 2 â¢ å¨ Ch1 Mono å Ch2 Mono è¨Â置丠＠è²é³ å å¾Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åº ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂ以 STEREO 模å¼Âæ¶è½ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åº＠ã â¢ 該 è¨Âç½®å å°Â以éÂÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂ編碼çÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸你æÂÂD TS é³è»ÂæÂÂæÂÂãÂÂæÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âå è¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âå¥Âã LFE è¡°æ¸Âå¨è¨Âç½® æ æ¯Âæ¸你å DTS é³ é » æÂÂæ¾æºÂå æ¬ äºÂ趠ä½Âé³é³ 調 ãÂÂè«ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¦Âè¨Âç½® LFE è¡°æ¸Âå¨以é²æ¢趠ä½Âé³åº ç¾è²é³失çÂÂã â¢ LFE ATT 0 ï¼ÂL FE è²éÂÂ以ç¡衰æ¸ÂçÂÂæ Âé²è¡Âæ æ¾ ⢠LFE ATT 10 ï¼ÂL FE è²éÂÂ以 10dB é²è¡Â衰渠⢠LFE Off ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ LFE è²é XV-DV900/700.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® 08 59 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ æ¨å¯以 çº å æ¶è½模 张訠置 èÂÂæ¨ç 主 覠æ¶ è½你置ç¸éÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç´ ï¼ å ¶ä¸Âå æ¾ÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè²以 Ã¥ÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ＠第 2 0 é  ï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æ¶è½模å¼ÂçÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç´Âå°Âé¨å³被è¨Âç½® ãÂÂä½Âæ¯＠æ¨ ä»Âå¯以æÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç´Âé²è¡Â微調ã 1 Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SURROUND æ ADVANCED é¸æ æ¶è½模å¼Âã 2 å°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³ SUB ï¼ ç¶å¾Âæ TEST TONE æ¶è½測試é³ã 測試 é³ å°ÂæÂÂ以 丠é ÂåºÂ輸 åº ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶ å æ¶è½模 å¼ å¾ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åº＠＠⢠L ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ置左æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠C ï¼Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠R ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®å³æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠RS ï¼Âå³ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠LS ï¼Âå·¦ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SW ï¼Â趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨ 3 ç¨ MASTER VOLUME /- æÂÂéÂÂå°Âé³éÂÂ調篠è³é©ç¶çÂÂç´Âã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂä¾Â次調ç¯Âæ è²å¨çÂÂç´Âã ç¶æ¨åÂÂå¨主è¦Âæ¶è½ä½Âç½®ä¸Âæ ＠æ¨æÂÂ該å¯以åÂÂ樣 çÂÂé³éÂÂè½å°åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åºçÂÂ測試é³ ã è²éÂÂç çÂÂç´Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dBã 5 ç¶æ¨å®ÂæÂÂè¨Â置徠＠è«Âæ ENTER éÂÂåº測試é³ è¨Âå®Âã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂæ CH LEVEL ï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠堠æ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè²éÂÂçÂÂç´Âï¼Âå¯å¨æ¶è½任你æÂÂéÂÂè²é³æÂÂæ¾æºÂæÂÂå°Âæ è²å¨é³éÂÂé²è¡Â調 ç¯ÂãÂÂç¶ æ¨å®ÂæÂÂäºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ä¹Âå¾Âï¼Âè« ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ移è³ä¸Âä¸Â訠置ã â¢ 趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨å¯ç¢çÂÂ趠ä½Âé »çÂÂï¼Âå æ¤堶è² é³è½ä¸Âå»æ¯Â實éÂÂçÂÂè²é³è¦Âæ´çºå®ÂéÂÂã ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND îÂÂî î î î ENTER TEST TONE 5 SURROUND M ASTER V OLUME ADV ANCED MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® 09 60 ChH 第 9 ç« è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Standard å¾ è¦Â頻調 篠ç« é¢æ¨å¯ 以 é¸ æ æ¨ÂæºÂ覠頻 顯 示æ è å®Â義æ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ã 1 æ HOME MENU å¾Âè¢å¹Â顯示é¸宠â Video Adjust â ï¼Âè¦Â頻調ç¯Âï¼ ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  è¨Âé  ã â¢ æ¨Â溠ï¼Âæ®é â¢ Memory1-2 ï¼Âè¨Âæ¶ 1-2 ï¼ ï¼Âç¨æ¼ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨èª å·±çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ 3 æ ENTER å®ÂæÂÂè¨Âç½®ï¼ÂéÂÂåº Video Adjust ï¼Âè¦Â頻調ç¯Âï¼Âç«é¢ã â¢ æ ¹æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ç£è¦Âå¨çÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯ è½ç¡æ³ÂçÂÂå°æÂÂ顯çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã åµ建æ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  æ¨æÂÂå¤Âåµ建äºÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ã 1 é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âæ¶é Âè¨Âé  ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ã 2 æ î ï¼Âä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ é¸æ â Detailed Settings â ï¼Â詳細è¨Â置＠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã 3 調ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質éÂÂè¨Âç½®å¼ã â¢ ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® é  ã â¢ ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âç¶åÂÂ訠置ã â¢ æ DISPLAY å¨堨é¨顯示åÂÂå®åÂÂ顯示éÂÂå æÂÂã â¢ æ¨å¯以éÂÂé Recall Settings ï¼Â調ç¨è¨Â置＠é¸å®頠æ¹è®Âé Âè¨Âé  èÂÂ碼ã Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Standard V ideo Adjust Memory1 Detailed Settings Video Adjust Recall Settings Contrast Brightness Chroma Level Memory1 Memory1 min max min max min max XV-DV900/700.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® 09 61 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¨å¯以調ç¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä»»ä¸ÂæÂÂå ¨é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質éÂÂè¨Â置頠＠⢠Contrast ï¼Âå°Âæ¯Â度＠ï¼Âå¨亮æÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âå°Â毠度ã â¢ Brightness ï¼Â亮度＠ï¼Â調ç¯Âæ´é«Â亮度ã â¢ Chroma Level ï¼Âè²度水平＠ï¼Â調ç¯Âé¡Âè² çÂÂ飽åÂÂç¨Â度ã 4 æ ENTER ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ï¼ éÂÂåºè¦Â頻調ç¯Âç«é¢ ã XV-DV900/700.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 62 ChH 第 10 ç« åÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 使ç¨åÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½®é¸å®è®Âæ¨è½夠å®Âå ¨æÂÂæ§DVD 系統çÂÂ訠置 ï¼Âå ¶ä¸Âå æ¬è¦Â頻輸åºè¨Â置頠ï¼Â家é·éÂÂå®Âè¨Âç½® é  çÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸頠åÂÂç°è² ＠表æÂÂæ¤æÂÂ該é¸頠ç¡æ³Âæ¹ è® ãÂÂéÂÂ常éÂÂæ¯å çºæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢該 ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ¹è®Âè¨Âç½®ã 1 æ HOME MENU ï¼Âå¾Âè¢å¹Â顯示ä¸Âé¸宠â Initial Settings â ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Â置＠ã 2 å¾Âå·¦åÂÂé¸å®Âè¨Âç½®é¡Âå¥ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå¾Âå³åÂÂä¸Âé¸宠頠ç®ã 3 é²è¡Âæ¨æÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ã â¢ ä¸ÂæÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示åÂÂä¾Âä¸Â顯示çÂÂèªÂè¨Âé¸頠å¯è½ èÂÂç¨æ¼貴åÂÂæÂÂè²´å°åÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã Digital Audio Mode Settings ï¼Âæ¸ä½Âé³頻模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ å° å¤ÂæÂ¥çÂÂæ¸ ä½Âè¨Âå é£ æÂÂ¥ è³å Âå¸ æ¸ 你輸 åºï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Âé²è¡ÂéÂÂäºÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂè«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂDVD å±ç¢Âå SACD çÂÂé³頻並éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂ該å Âå¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸åºã Dolby Digital Out ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â輸åº＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Dolby Digital å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â堼容 ï¼ åÂÂå°Âæ¬訠å®Âè¨Âçº Dolby Digital ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âï¼ ï¼Âå¦åÂÂ訠çº Dolby Digital >PCM ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Â確å®Â該訠åÂÂæ¯å¦çºæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â堼容 ï¼ è«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé¨該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ帶 çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã DTS Out ï¼ DTS 輸åº＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ DTS Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital > PCM Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out DTS DTS > PCM Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 63 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ·æÂÂ堧置张DTS 解碼å¨ ï¼ è« å°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº DTS ï¼Âå¦åÂÂè¨Âçº DTS>PCM ãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨ä¸Â確å®Â該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯å¦çº DTS 堼容 ï¼ è«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé¨ 該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ帶çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå°Âæ¼éÂÂDTS 堼容è¨Âå ＠æ¨å°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº 亠DTS ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¶æ¨æÂÂæ¾ DTS ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå°Â輸åºåª é³ã â¢ ç¡è«Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âçº你＠DTS-CDå§ÂçµÂ輸åºDTSæ¸你é³頻ã Linear PCM Out ï¼Âç·Âæ§ PCM 輸åº＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Down Sample Off å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣ç ï¼Â96 kHzï¼Âå ¼ 容ï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº Down Sample Off ï¼Âå¦ Ã¥ÂÂè¨Âçº Down Sample On ï¼Â96 kHz é³頻轠æÂÂçºæ´çº堼容ç 48 kHzï¼ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Â確å®Â該 è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯å¦çº 96 kHz 堼容ï¼Âè«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé¨該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé 帶çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å³使æ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº Down Sample Off ï¼Âæ 亠ç¢ÂçÂÂä»Âå°ÂéÂÂéÂÂæ¸ä½Â輸åº端輸åºåÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣ç é³頻ï¼Âæ¨å è½éÂÂéÂÂ模æ¬輸åº端ç²åÂÂå ¨åÂÂ樣 çÂÂçÂÂé³頻＠ã Video Output settings ï¼Âè¦Âé » 輸åºè¨Â置＠TV Screen ï¼ TV å±Âå¹Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ 16:9 (Wide) å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬å±Âå ＠è«Âé¸æ 16:9 (Wide) ï¹ 16:9 ï¼Â寬å±Âï¼ ï¹ è¨Âå®Âï¼Â寬屠DVD è»Âé«Âå°Âç¨堨 å±Âé² è¡Â顯 示 ãÂÂå¨æÂÂæ¾ 以å³ çµ± ï¼Â4:3ï¼Âæ ¼ å¼Âé 製 çÂÂè» é«ÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨é»è¦Âæ©Â丠çÂÂè¨Âç½®å°Â決å®Âç«é¢ 以你種æ¹ å¼Âå ç¾＠éÂÂæ¼ åª亠é¸頠å¯ç¨ çÂÂ詳 ç´°è³ è¨Âï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âæ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂéÂÂ帶çÂÂ說æÂÂæ¸ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯å³統å ＠è«Âé¸æ 4:3 (Letter Box) ï¹ 4:3 ï¼Â信箱＠﹠æ 4:3 (Pan & Scan) ï¹ 4:3 ï¼Âå ¨æ¯æÂÂæÂÂï¼ ï¹ ãÂÂå¨信箱模å¼Âä¸Âï¼Â寬å±Âè»Âé«Âå¨ å±Âå¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨顯示æÂÂé»Â梠ã èÂÂå ¨æ¯æÂÂæÂÂå°Âå å»寬å±Âç«é¢çÂÂå ©é ＠以使堶é©æ¼ 4:3 å±Âå¹ ï¼Âå æ¤ç¡管å±Âå¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂå½±åÂÂçÂÂä¸Âå»大亠＠ä½Â實éÂÂä¸Âæ¨ çÂÂå°çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ堧容æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾Âå°ÂäºÂï¼ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 87 é  â å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Ââ ã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Down Sample On Down Sample Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 64 ChH Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸åº＠å æ¬系統éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºèÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé£æÂ¥æÂÂï¼ æÂÂéÂÂè¦Âé²è¡ÂéÂÂé  è¨Âç½®ã â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Interlace å¦Âæ æ¨ç é»è¦Â橠堼容 é è¡Âæ æ ＠諠訠宠çº Progressive ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Â＠以ç²å¾Âç¡éÂÂçÂÂçÂÂè¦Â頻輸 åºãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨ç é» 覠橠丠堼容é 衠æ æ 覠頻信 èÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Â訠å®Âçº Interlace ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Âï¼ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ ç¡æ³Â確å®Âæ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ ï¼ è«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé 帶çÂÂ說æÂÂæ¸ã å¦ÂæÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº Progressive ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Âï¼ ï¼Âæ¨忠é Â夠æÂÂä¸Â次 ENTER ï¼ÂæÂÂæ RETURN Ã¥ÂÂ涠)ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼ éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé »çÂÂéÂÂè¦Âè³Âè¨Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂã éÂÂæ¼éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé » ç¸è¼Âæ¼éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé » ï¼ éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé »çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æÂÂçÂÂæÂÂé«ÂäºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂ樣çÂÂæÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ極çº穩宠＠毫ç¡éÂÂç ã éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé »å éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Â頻輸åº æÂÂè½ç²å¾Âã â¢ ç¶ Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸 åº ï¼Âè« å 覠ä¸Âæ ＠被è¨Âå® çº Progressive ï¼Âé è¡Âï¼ æÂÂï¼ VIDEO å S- VIDEO æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡è¦Â頻信èÂÂ輸åº ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³å æÂÂå¨幾åÂÂç£è¦Âå¨ä¸Â顯示è¦Â頻信èÂÂï¼Âè«Â確誠該頠ç®被è¨Âå®Âçº Interlace ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Âï¼ ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨é£æÂÂ¥ çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âä¸Â堼容éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¿¡ èÂÂï¼Âå» å°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂçºéÂÂè¡Â模å¼Âï¼Âæ¨å°Âå® å ¨çÂÂä¸Âå°åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å¨ éÂÂ種æ æ³Âä¸Âï¼ è« æ î STANDBY/ON å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©Âï¼Âç¶徠æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠大素8 ç§ÂéÂÂç´ è³顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Mem.Clr.? ãÂÂæÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ ä¸Âç VOLâ æ æÂÂéÂÂ＠顯 示幠ä¸Âåº ç¾ Interlace? ãÂÂæÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î æÂÂéÂÂ訠çºéÂÂè¡Âä¸ÂéÂÂæ°æÂÂéÂÂæ¬æ©Âã æ¬系統å°ÂéÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ æ¬æ©ÂèÂÂ帶 Macro Vision 系統æ·è²Âä¿Âè·æÂÂè¡Âç éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Â頻堼容ã æ¶Âè²»è è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠注æÂÂï¼Â並éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂé«Â渠æ°度é»è¦Âæ©Âå®Âå ¨ 堼容换åÂÂï¼Âå¯è½å°Âè´åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂç°常信èÂÂ顯示ãÂÂå¦Âæ 525 éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂåºç¾åÂÂé¡Âï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°ç¨æ¶å°Âé£æÂ¥å æÂÂå° âÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂ渠æ°度â ＠STANDARD DEFINITION ï¼Â輸 åºãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¼æÂÂå ¬å¸é»è¦Âæ©ÂèÂÂæ¬ 525p DVD æÂÂæ¾橠堼容æ§çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«ÂèÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ客æ¶æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿Âè¯繫ã æ¬系 çµ± è ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå  éÂÂ顯示 å¨åÂÂç£ è¦Âå¨堼 容︰ PDP-503HDGï¼ÂPDP-433HDG éÂÂè¡Âæ æ 堼容é» 覠æ©Âã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Progressive Interlace Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 65 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ S-Video Out ï¼ S è¦Â頻輸åº＠å ç¶æ¬系統ç¨ S 覠頻é»çºÂèÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé£æÂÂ¥ æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¦Âé²è¡ÂéÂÂé  è¨Âç½®ã â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ S2 ⢠å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç¼ç¾å¨é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ  S2 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ伸 æÂÂæÂÂæ²ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ試å°Âè¨Âç½®æ¹çº S1 ã Language settings ï¼ÂèªÂè¨Â訠置＠Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ English æ¬è¨Â置頠è¨Âå®Âæ¨é¦Âé¸ç DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂ訠ã 妠æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂ製æÂÂæ¨å¨æ¤èÂÂæÂÂå®ÂçÂÂèªÂ訠＠æ¬系統 å°ÂèªåÂÂ以該èªÂè¨ÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂã DVD å½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼Âè½夠èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 136 種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨ÂãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂå®Âä¸Â種æªå¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºçÂÂèªÂ訠＠è«Âé¸ æ Other Language ï¼Âå ¶ä»ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå è¦Â第 8 7 é  â 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂè¨Ââ ã â¢ æ¨å¯以å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç¨ AUDIO æÂÂéÂÂå¨ DVD å½± ç¢Âä¸Âæ éÂÂèªÂ訠ä¹ÂéÂÂé² è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ã ï¼ÂéÂÂ丠影 é¿æ¬è¨Âç½®ãÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 4 8 é  â åÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Ââ ã â¢ ä¸Â亠DVD å½±ç¢Âå¨è£Âå ¥æÂÂæÂÂ忽çÂÂ¥ Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ è¨Âç½®ï¼ÂèªåÂÂè¨Âå® ä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âã â¢ 帶 æÂÂ堩種以ä¸Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â茯å¾Â碠ç é¸å®é¸ æÂÂä¼´é³ èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂè¦Âé² å ¥ç¢Âç é¸å®＠è«Âæ DVD MENU æÂÂéÂÂã Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ English æ¬è¨Â置頠è¨Âå®Âæ¨é¦Âé¸ç DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂ訠ã 妠æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂ製æÂÂæ¨å¨æ¤èÂÂæÂÂå®ÂçÂÂèªÂ訠＠æ¾ÂÂæ¾ æ©Âå°ÂèªåÂÂ以該èªÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂã DVD å½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼Âè½夠èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 136 種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèªÂ訠ã 妠æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂå®Âä¸Â種æªå¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºçÂÂèªÂ訠＠è«Âé¸ æ Other Language ï¼Âå ¶ä»ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 87 é  â 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂè¨Ââ ã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options S1 S2 Initial Settings TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Aud io Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 66 ChH ⢠æ¨å¯以å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç¨ SUBTITLE æÂÂéÂÂæ¹ è®ÂæÂÂéÂÂé DVD å½±ç¢Âä¸ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Âã ï¼ÂéÂÂä¸Âå½±é¿ æ¬è¨Âç½®ãÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 4 7 é  â åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Ââ ã â¢ ä¸Â亠DVD å½±ç¢Âå¨è£Âå ¥æÂÂæÂÂ忽çÂÂ¥ Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ è¨Âç½®ï¼ÂèªåÂÂè¨Âå® åÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âã â¢ 帶æÂÂ堩種以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â茯å¾Â碠ç é¸å®é¸ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂè¦Âé²堥碠çÂÂé¸å® ï¼ è«Âæ DVD MENU æÂÂéÂÂã DVD Menu Language ï¼ DVD é¸å®誠è¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ w/Subtitle Lang. ä¸ÂäºÂå¤ÂèªÂ種ç¢ÂçÂÂå ·æÂÂå¤Â種èªÂè¨ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® ã æ¬ è¨Â置頠æÂÂå®Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®çÂÂ顯示èªÂ訠ã ä¿ÂçÂÂé Âè¨Âç 栠ï¼Âé¸å®å°Â以è Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â誠è¨Âï¼ è¨Âç½® ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¸åÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨Â顯示ã DVD å½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼Âè½夠èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 136 種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨ÂãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂå®Âä¸Â種æªå¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºçÂÂèªÂ訠＠è«Âé¸ æ Other Language ï¼Âå ¶ä»ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 87 é  â 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂè¨Ââ ã Subtitle Display ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On ç¶è¨Âçº On æ ＠æÂÂæ¾æ©Âæ ¹æ Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ è¨Â置顯示åÂÂå¹ ãÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº Off Ã¥ÂÂé éÂÂå ¨é¨åÂÂå¹Âã Display settings ï¼Â顯示è¨Â置＠OSD Language ï¼ OSD èªÂè¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ English æ¬è¨Â置頠è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示èªÂè¨Âã On Screen Display ï¼Âè¢å¹Â顯示＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Lang. English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD Menu Lang. Subtitle Display On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options English fran ais Español OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 67 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¬頠ç®è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂä½Â顯示æ¯å¦å¨è¢幠ä¸Âåºç¾ ï¹ Play ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾＠＠Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠＠Scan ï¼Âæ æÂÂï¼ çÂÂï¹ ã Angle Indicator ï¼Âè§Â度æÂÂ示å¨＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Âæ³å¨æÂÂæ¾DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè¦Âè§Âç«é¢æÂÂå¨ å±Âå¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå½±æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樠＠è«Âå°Âæ¬è¨Âç½®æ¹çº Off ã Options ï¼Âé¸頠＠Parental Lock ï¼Â家é·éÂÂå®Â＠⢠é»ÂèªÂç´Âå¥︰ Off ⢠é»ÂèªÂå¯Â碼︰ ç¡ â¢ é»ÂèªÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼︰ us ï¼ 2119 ï¼ ä¸Â亠DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂ家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂæÂÂæ¾ æ©Âè¨Âå®ÂçÂÂç´Âå¥è¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂä½ ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾ã é 樣＠æ¨就å¯以é©ç¶æ§å¶å©åÂÂå¨ DVD 系統ä¸ÂçÂÂ觠çÂÂ堧容ã ä¸ÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼åÂÂè½ ã 根æÂÂæ¨æÂÂè¨Âå® çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼 ï¼ æÂÂæ¾æ©Âå°Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ äºÂç«é¢ã å¨è¨Âå®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼å ＠æ¨忠é Âå  çÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯Â碼 ãÂÂä½Âçºå¯Â碼æÂÂæÂÂè ＠æ¨å¯以é¨æ æ¹è®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼 ã æ¨ä¹Âè½æ¹è®Â寠碼ã â¢ 並 éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¨èªÂçºä¸Âé©åÂÂæ¼å©åÂÂè§ÂçÂÂçÂÂç¢Âç é½ å ·æÂÂ家é·éÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ãÂÂéÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè¦Â輸 å ¥å¯Â碼就è½æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨å¿Âè¨ÂäºÂå¯Â碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂéÂÂç½® çº工廠è¨Âå® ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 7 é  â éÂÂç½®æ¬系 çµ±â ＠ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂçÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼ã çÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼 å¨æ¨æ¹è®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂ家代碼å ＠æ¨ å¿ é Âå ÂçÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯Â碼ã 1 é¸宠â Password â ï¼Âå¯Â碼＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥ä¸Âå 4 ä½Âæ¸å¯Â碼ã æ¨輸堥çÂÂæ¸åÂÂå¨è¢å¹Âä¸Â以æÂÂè ï¼Â*ï¼Â顯示ã OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: Register Code Number Initial Settings ** * * Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 68 ChH 3 æ ENTER çÂȎÂÂ該å¯Â碼並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸å®ç« é¢ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¿Âè¨ÂäºÂå¯Â碼 ï¼Âå¯以éÂÂç½®æÂÂæ¾æ©Âï¼ ç¶å¾Âç» éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼 ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼å¦Âä½ÂéÂÂç½®æÂÂæ¾æ©Âï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第7 7 é  â éÂÂç½®æ¬系統â ã æ¹è®Âæ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼 è¦Âæ¹è®Âæ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼＠è«Âå Â確èªÂæ¨ç¶åÂÂçÂÂå¯Â碼＠å 輸堥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼ã 1 é¸宠â Password Change â ï¼Âæ¹è®Âå¯Â碼＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸å æÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨ ç¶åÂÂçÂÂå¯Â碼 ï¼ å æ ENTER ã ç¶æ¨輸堥æ¸åÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ以æÂÂèÂÂ顯示ã 3 輸堥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°çÂÂå¯Â碼ã 4 æ ENTER çÂȎÂÂæ°å¯Â碼並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸å®ç« é¢ã è¨Âç½®î¿æ¹è®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 1 é¸宠â Level Change â ï¼Âæ¹è®Âç´Âå¥＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°çÂÂç´Âå¥ã åÂÂè¦Âæ î ï¼Âå·¦å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂéÂÂä½Âæ´å¤Âç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ ï¼Âæ´å¤Âç ç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå¯Â碼＠ï¼Âæ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Â解éÂÂç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ ã æ¨ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂå®Âç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 1ã 4 æ ENTER è¨Âå®Âæ°çÂÂç´Âå¥並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸å®ç« é¢ã Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: P assword Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock: P asswor d Change Initial Settings ** * * ** ** Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pass word Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Parental Loc k : Level Change ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock : Le vel Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 69 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¨Âç½®î¿æ¹è®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼 æ¨å¯è½éÂÂè¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 8 8 é  â åÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代 碼åÂÂ表â ã 1 é¸宠â Country Code â ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼ã æÂÂ堩種æ¹æ³Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼ã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂ代碼åÂÂæ¯Âé²è¡Âé¸æÂÂ︰ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠å Âæ¨Âï¼Âæ¹è®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼ã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂ代碼æ¸åÂÂé²è¡Âé¸æÂÂ︰æ î ï¼Âå³堠æ¨Âï¼ ï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥 4 ä½Âæ¸çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家 代碼 ã ï¼Âæ¨å¯以åÂÂè¦Â第 88 é Ââ åÂÂ家 ( å° å ) 代碼åÂÂ表â ãÂÂï¼ 4 æ ENTER è¨Âå®Âæ°çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸ å®ç«é¢ã â¢ å° åÂÂ家代碼è¨Âç½®çÂÂè®Âæ´ç´å°ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂ裠堥 ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè£Âï¼Âå¾ÂæÂÂçÂÂæÂÂã Bonus Group ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂé¡Âå¤Âç âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂâÂÂé¡Âï¼Â該顠éÂÂ覠4 ä½ æ¸å¯Â碼 ã æÂÂéÂÂ詳æ åÂÂå¯Â碼è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢Âç å è£Âã Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k Change: Country Code ** * * Pas s wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 P arental Loc k: Country Code ** * * Pass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k: Country Code ** * * P ass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer î Off (us) î On î Single î DVD-A udio î 2ch Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Bonus Group : Key Number Input Initial Settings _ _ _ _ XV-DV900/700.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 70 ChH ç¶æ¨æÂÂæ¾堷æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âç DVD å±ç¢Âæ ＠å¯Â碼輸堥 ç« é¢å°Âèª å 顯 示ãÂÂæ¨ ä¹ å¯以å¨ æ¤ è é² å ¥ 該ç« é¢ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨éÂÂåºç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾橠çÂÂé»æºÂç·Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦ÂéÂÂæ°輸堥å¯Â碼ã Auto Disc Menu ï¼ÂèªåÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On 該 è¨Âå®Âæ 宠ç¢ÂçÂÂ裠堥 å¾Âé¸å® ï¼Âé Â層 é¸å®ï¼Âæ¯ å¦èªåÂÂ顯示ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³è¦Âé¸å®èªåÂÂ顯示ï¼Âè¨Âçº On ï¼ÂæÂÂè å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Âæ³è¦Â堶顯示ï¼Âè¨Âçº Off ã â¢ å°Âæ¼æÂÂ亠DVD ç¢Âç ＠ç¡è«Â該è¨Âå®Âçº你＠é½尠èªåÂÂ顯示é¸å® ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥æÂÂæ î ＠æ¬è¨Âå®Âå°Â被忽çÂ¥ã Group Playback ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ¾＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Single DVD å±ç¢Âå¯堷æÂÂå¤Âé 9 Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂçÂÂæ²ç®ãÂÂç¶æ¬訠å®Âè¨Âçº Single ï¼Âå®çµÂï¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂé¸çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âç¶ å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂè è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°é¸å®ç«é¢ã è«Â使ç¨æ 索åÂÂè½ ï¼Â第 47 é  ï¼Âé¸æÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂã ï¼Âå¨ æ¬模å¼Â丠＠æ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨æ²ç®跳躠î / î æ æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé î / î ãÂÂï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è¦Âé£çºÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ ï¼ è«Âè¨Âçº All ï¼Âå ¨é¨＠ã â¢ å³使æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Â被è¨Âçº All ï¼Âå ¨é¨＠ä½ÂèÂ¥æ¨ å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® ä¸Âé¸æÂÂäºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂ以é²è¡Âæ æ¾＠åÂÂå 該åÂÂçµÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ å ç¶æ¨éÂÂæ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂ次 æÂÂæ¾ã DVD Playback Mode ï¼ DVD æÂÂæ¾ 模 å¼Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ DVD-Audio Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer All Single Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer DV D-Audio DV D-Video Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 71 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âé¤ DVD é³頻å¤ÂéÂÂå å« DVD è¦Â頻堧 容ãÂÂå°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº DVD-Video ï¼ÂDVD è¦Âé »ï¼Âå¯ 以象 DVD å½±ç¢Âé£樣æÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢ÂãÂÂè«Â注æ ï¼Âæ¤ æÂÂï¼Âå ç¢ÂçÂÂç DVD è¦Âé »é¨åÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ ç¶åÂÂè½æ¹è®ÂãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤被æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂè é»æºÂ被 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©Â模å¼Âæ ＠æ¬è¨Âå®Âå°Âè½ÂæÂÂçº DVD- Audio ï¼ÂDVD é³頻＠ã SACD Playback ï¼ SACD æÂÂæ¾＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Multi-ch Area SACD ç¢ÂçÂÂå¯ 以被åÂÂçº夠åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå åÂÂï¼Âç«Âé« è²é³頻 ï¼ 2ch Area ï¼ ãÂÂå¤Âè² é é³ é » ï¼ Multi- ch Area ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼éÂÂ層 SACD ç æ¨Â溠CD é³頻 ï¼ CD Area ï¼ ãÂÂè«Âé¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂé¨åÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂæ¨é¸æÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âå å°ÂæÂÂæ¾堶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂä¾Âå¦Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨é¸æÂÂæ¨Â溠CD é³頻ï¼Âä½ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âæ¯éÂÂ層 SACD ï¼ åÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾ç«Âé«Âè² SACD Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On 妠æÂÂæ¨è£Âå ¥ç ç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå æ¬ MP3 é³ é » æÂÂ件å JPEG Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ件ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ該頠è¨Â置就åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Âã é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ  On 使æ¨å è½è§ÂçÂÂæ¤é¡Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂJPEG æÂÂ件ãÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº Off å°Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ MP3 é³頻æÂÂ件ã â¢ å° åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨è¨Âç½®çÂÂè®Âæ´ç´å°ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µç¢Âç è£Âå ¥ ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè£Âï¼Âå¾ÂæÂÂçÂÂæÂÂã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer 2ch Area Multi-ch Area CD Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options On Off Initial Settings Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Di sc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer XV-DV900/700.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 72 ChH 第 11 ç« å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天締è«Â使ç¨ 5-6 ç±³çÂÂä¹Âç¯çµÂç·£é»ç·Â並å¨室堧æÂÂ室夠é²è¡Âå®Âè£ÂãÂÂä¿Âæ AM ç°形天ç·ÂçÂÂé£æÂ¥ã å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締è«Â使ç¨ä¸Âæ ¹ 75 ⦠åÂÂ軸é»çºÂé¤ä½Âå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天ç·Âã é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå 該系統堼åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模æ¬輸堥èÂÂ輸åº端 ＠亦堷å ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸堥端åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸åº端ã è«Â使ç¨éÂÂäºÂ端åÂÂé£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥è¨Âå ＠ä¾Âå¦Âæ¨ç VCR ï¼ MD æÂÂè CD-R éÂÂ製æ©Âã â¢ å° TV æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æ¨é»è¦Âæ© ï¼Âæ VCR ï¼ çÂÂé³ 頻輸åº端ã éÂÂ使æ¨è½éÂÂéÂÂæ¬系統ä¾Âæ¶è½é»è¦Âæ© ï¼Âæ VCRï¼ ã è«Â使ç¨ RCA è¯æÂÂé ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ã 諠åÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Â第 73 é  â éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé» å¹³â ã ENNA BAL AM LOOP ANTENNA 5âÂÂ6 m ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L INE1 L INE1 OUT TV IN VIDEO L R AUDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT XVâÂÂDV900/XVâÂÂDV700 XV-DV900/700.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 73 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ å° LINE1 ï¼ IN ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨æÂÂæ¾è¨Âå çÂÂ模æ¬輸åº端ã 堶ä¸Âå æ¬諸妠VCR æÂÂéÂÂé³æ©Âä¹Âé¡ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã è«Â使 ç¨R CA è¯æÂÂé ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣 Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸Âæ â éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé»平â ã â¢ å° LINE 1 ï¼ OUT ï¼ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨éÂÂé³訠åÂÂçÂÂ模æ¬輸堥端ã 堶ä¸Âå æ¬諸å¦ÂéÂÂé³æ©ÂãÂÂVCR ãÂÂMD æÂÂå ·æÂÂ模æ¬輸 堥端çÂÂå ¶å®ÂéÂÂ製橠ã è«Â使ç¨ RCA è¯æÂÂé ÂçÂÂç«Âé« è²é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ã â¢ å°Âå¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT æ åÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨éÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸堥端ã â¢ å°Âå¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç LINE1 ï¼ OPTICAL IN ï¼Âæ å é£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨æÂÂæ¾è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸åº端ã 堶ä¸Âå æ¬諸妠MD æÂÂæ¾æ©Âï¼Âæ¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ²系 çµ±ä¹Âé¡ÂçÂÂæ¸ä½Âè¨Âå ã è«Â使ç¨å Âå¸æ¸ä½Âé»çºÂï¼Âæª é¨æ©ÂæÂÂä¾Âï¼Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ã éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé»平 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ ATT 6dB æÂÂäºÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂå¯è½ç¢çÂÂå¾Âé«ÂçÂÂä¿¡èÂÂçÂÂ素＠並å¯è½ å¼Âèµ·æÂÂè²å¨ç¼åºé£è½çÂÂè²é³失ç ã å¨éÂÂ種æ 泠ä¸Âï¼ æ¨å¯è½éÂÂè¦ÂéÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¡°æ¸Âå¨ä¾ÂéÂÂä½Âè¼Âå©æ æ¾溠ï¼ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ç TV æ LINE1 æ LINE2 模æ¬ 輸堥ï¼ÂçÂÂä¿¡èÂÂçÂÂç´Âã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â TV ATT? âÂÂæ â LINE1 ATT? âÂÂæ â LINE2 ATT? â ＠ç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â ATT Off âÂÂï¼ â ATT 6dB âÂÂæ â ATT 10dB â ã å¦Âæ ATT 6dB è¨Âç½®ä»Âç¶å°Âè´è²é³失çÂÂï¼Âè«Âå 試 ATT 10dB è¨Âç½®ã 5 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã C AL T AL N S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L R LINE1 LINE1 OUT TV IN A UDIO VIDEO L R AU D LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT XV -DV900/XV -DV700 OPTICAL DIGIT AL OUT LINE2 OPTICAL DIGIT AL IN LINE1 XV-DV900/700.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 74 ChH éÂÂé³模张éÂÂé³模 å¼ è®Âæ¨è½ 夠éÂÂé LINE1 ï¼ OUT ï¼ æÂÂå é²è¡Â模æÂŽÂÂé³ã ç¶éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂé³模å¼Â徠＠大å¤Âæ¸èÂÂè²é³ç¸éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âå æ¬ SURROUND ï¼ ADVANCED ï¼ AUTO ï¼ SYSTEM SETUP ï¼ å°ÂèÂÂæ¼æªåÂÂç¨çÂÂæ  ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ 試åÂÂå¨éÂÂé³模å¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂä¸Â被ç¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å 顯示å¹Âå°Âç°¡çÂÂéÂÂç RecMode On ã ç¶éÂÂé³模å¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂæ ＠å¾Â模æ¬輸åº端å³åºçÂÂé³頻 å¯è½被ä¸Âæ·ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ決æ¼æÂÂä½Âæ¬身ã 1 æ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Rec Mode? âÂÂã 3 æ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â R.Mode On âÂÂæ â R.Mode Off â ã â¢ ç¶éÂÂé³模å¼Âè¨Âçº On æ ＠å¤Âè²é DVD å±ç¢Âå SACDç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²å¾ÂæÂÂè²å¨åÂÂ模 掳頻æÂÂå£輸åº . 諠注æÂÂï¼Âå°Âæ¼æÂÂ亠DVD å±碠＠å åÂÂ置左î¿å³è²éÂÂ輸åº ã ç¶è¨Âçº Off æ ＠å¤Âè²é DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD ç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂ置左î¿å³é³頻å¾Â模掳 é »æÂÂå£輸åºã â¢ å¨æÂÂæ¾ SACD æÂÂèÂ¥é¸æ R.Mode On ï¼ æ¬æ©Â尠端éÂÂæÂÂè²å¨SW輸åº ï¼ ä½Âé³å°Âè®Âå¾Âç¡æ³Âè½覠ã 使ç¨ S è¦Â頻輸åº端é²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â帶æ S 覠頻輸堥端 ï¼ åÂÂæ¨å¯以 使ç¨該輸堥端ä¾Â代æ¿æ¨ÂæºÂè¦Â頻信èÂÂ輸åº端 ＠以 ç²å¾Â質éÂÂæ´好çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨ S è¦Âé »é»纠ï¼Âæªé¨æ©ÂæÂÂä¾Âï¼ å° S-VIDEO OUT é£æÂ¥è³æ¨é»è¦Âæ©Âä¸Âç S è¦Â頻輸堥端ã å¨æÂÂå ¥é»çºÂä¹Âå ＠è«Âå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ¹çÂÂå°Âä¸Âè§Âå°Â溠æÂÂé Âä¸ÂçÂÂå°Âä¸Âè§Âã â¢ S覠頻輸åº端å¯å¨ S1 å S2 æ ¼å¼Âä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âå æÂÂ以åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â堼容 ã æÂÂéÂÂ堶詳細說æ ＠è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 6 5 é  â S-Video Out ï¼ÂS è¦Â頻輸 åº＠â ã S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT E1 N E1 U T TV IN VIDEO L R A UDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN FM UNBAL 75 AM L ANT E ANTENNA P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT XV -DV900/XV -DV700 S-VIDEO INPUT XV-DV900/700.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 75 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 使ç¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â帶æÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â頻輸堥端 ï¼ åÂÂæ¨å¯ 以使ç¨ é 亠輸堥端 侠代 æ¿ æ¨ÂæºÂ覠頻 ä¿¡ è 輸åº 端 ï¼Â以å°Âæ¬系é£æÂ¥è³æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã å¨ä¸Â種å¯é¸ çÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºæ¹å¼Â丠＠éÂÂæÂÂ給æ¨帶ä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå 質éÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨ è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âé »é»çºÂï¼ æª é¨橠æÂÂä¾ ï¼ å° COMPONENT VIDEO OUT é£ æÂ¥è³æ¨ é» è¦Âæ© ä¸ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçµÂ份éÂÂ輸堥端ã â¢ 份éÂÂè¦Â頻輸åº端å¯å¨éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ ¼å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¡ æ ¼å¼Âä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂãÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ堶詳細說æÂÂï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Â第 6 4 é  â Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸 åº＠â ã AUDIO E1 N LINE2 IN P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA COMPONENT INPUT XV -DV900/XV -DV700 XV-DV900/700.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 76 ChH 第 12 ç« éÂÂå è³Â訠éÂÂéÂÂæ¼Â示 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Demo On 該系統堷æÂÂèªåÂÂæ¼Â示åÂÂè½ ï¼ ç¶系統第ä¸Â次æÂ¥é é»æºÂæÂÂï¼Â該åÂÂè½éÂÂå§ÂéÂÂè¡Âã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Demo Mode? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂâ Demo Off? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã â¢ å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå¾Âï¼Âæ¼Â示模å¼ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂéÂÂãÂÂä½ æ¯ï¼Â妠æÂÂæ¨徠é»æºÂæ 座ä¸Âæ·éÂÂç³» çµ±é»溠＠æ¼Â示模å¼Âå°Âè¿Âå Demo On ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂéÂÂå°Â被 復ä½Âï¼ ã 童é â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Lock Off 該系統堷æÂÂç«¥éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å¯使åÂÂé¢æ¿æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ æÂÂéÂÂ失å»ä½Âç¨ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Child Lock? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Lock On? âÂÂæ â Lock Off? âÂÂã 5 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã æ¹è®ÂæÂÂéÂÂ格张⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ 12-Hour æ¨å¯以é¸æ 12 æ 24 å°ÂæÂÂæ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ顯示ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â 12/ 24 Hour? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â 12- Hour? âÂÂæ â 24-Hour? âÂÂã 5 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂçÂÂ素⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ FM 100 AM 10 å¦ÂæÂÂç¼ç¾æ¨ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°調諧éÂȏº ï¼ åÂÂ該頻çÂÂç ç´Âå¯è½ä¸Âé©åÂÂæ¨æÂÂå¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家î¿å°åÂÂã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM AM Step? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM 50 AM 9? âÂÂæ â FM100 AM 10? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã XV-DV900/700.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 77 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¨Âç½®é»è¦Âå¶张⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ AUTO æ¬系統çÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº AUTO ï¼ é¤éÂÂæ¨å¨æÂÂæ¾æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¼ç¾åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ失ç ＠å¦åÂÂæÂÂ好è®Âå ¶ä¿Âæ AUTO é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ  ã å¦ÂæÂÂå°Âæ¼æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂåºç¾ 失ç ï¼Âè«Âè¨Âç½®é»è¦Âå¶å¼Â＠以èÂÂæ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂ家æÂÂå° Ã¥ÂÂæ¡ç¨çÂÂå¶å¼Âç¸符 ã ç¶èÂÂéÂÂ樣åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂéÂÂå¶æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂè§Âç ã ä¸Â表表æÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® ï¼ AUTO ã PAL å NTSC ï¼ÂèÂÂåªäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â TV System? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ Auto ã PAL æ NTSC ç¶å¾Âæ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã å¨ PAL å¶é»è¦Âæ© ï¼ MOD.PAL ï¼ ä¸Âè§Âç NTSC ç¯Âç® å¤Âæ¸æ¡ç¨æ°éÂÂç¼çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ頻张PAL é»è¦Âå¶å¼ÂçÂÂé» è¦Âæ©Âè½夠檢測 50 Hz ï¼ÂPALï¼Â/60 Hz ï¼ÂNTSCï¼ ä¿¡èÂÂï¼Â並èªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´幠度ï¼Âå¾ÂèÂÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´ æ¹åÂÂç¡æ¶縮çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç¶èÂÂï¼Âå¨æÂÂäºÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡è²ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç PAL é»è¦Âæ©Âæ²Âæ V-Hold ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç´ä¿ÂæÂÂï¼ æ§ å¶åÂÂè½ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç±æ¼ å å 滾 å æ¨å¯è½ ç¡ 泠觠ç NTSC ç¢Âç ã å¦ÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â帶æ V-Hold æ§å¶åÂÂè½ ï¼ è«Âå°Âå ¶é²è¡Â調ç¯Âç´è³åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢滾åÂÂã å¨æÂÂäºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âä¸Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´æ¶縮 ï¼Âå¨屠å¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨çÂÂä¸Âé»Âé ãÂÂéÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ éÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂæ¯ç± NTSC å° PAL çÂÂè½ÂæÂÂé æÂÂçÂÂã éÂÂç½®æ¬系統 éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âè¿°æ¥驠＠æ¬系統çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨Âç½® ( é» èºè¨Âæ¶ é¤夠) å° éÂÂç½®çº工廠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âã 1 å°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î î î î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠æÂÂéÂÂ大素8 秠éÂÂç´è³顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ â Mem.Clr.? âÂÂã 3 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î æÂÂéÂÂã ç¾å¨æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨Âç½®å¼é½已被éÂÂç½® ï¼ æ¨å°Âè½ 夠çÂÂå° âÂÂWelcome to Pioneer DVD!( æ¡è¿Â使 ç¨å Âé DVD! ) âÂÂç«é¢ã 調ç¯Â顯示å¹Â亮度 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ 3 æ¬顯示å¹Âå ·æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ亮度ç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ ï¼ 1-3 ï¼ ã 1 æ DIMMER æ¹è®Â顯示å¹ÂçÂÂ亮度ç´Âå¥ã ç¢Âç æÂÂæ¾æ©Âè¨Âç½® é¡Âå 格张NTSC P AL AUTO DVD NTSC NTSC MOD.PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL Video CD NTSC NTSC MOD.PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL CD î¿ç¡碠â â â â NTSC PAL æ NTSC PAL XV-DV900/700.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 78 ChH 使ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።Âç æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç« åÂÂæ²ç® DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âè¬被åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçºä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂæ¨Âé¡ å¯被é²ä¸Âæ¥細åÂÂçº章ã DVD å±ç¢Âä¸Âè¬被åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçºä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ ãÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ å¯è½å æ¬許å¤Âæ²ç®ã CDãÂÂSACD å V CD ï¼Â趠素VCD 被åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçºæ²ç®ã CD-ROM å æ¾ÂÂ件夾åÂÂæÂÂ件 ã MP3 æÂÂ件被稱çºæ² ç®ãÂÂæÂÂ件夾å¯è½å æ¬ä¸Âä¸Âç´ÂæÂÂ件夾ã DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âé½å¨堶ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂèÂÂå°æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ樠èªÂï¼ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ÂèªÂæÂÂæÂÂ該ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂåªäºÂå°å 堼容ã æ¨ç DVD 系統ä¹ÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ÂèªÂï¼ æ¨å¯ 以å¨å¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âæ¾å°宠ã ä¾ÂèªéÂÂ堼容åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç¢Âç ç¡ æ³Âå¨æ¬ æÂÂæ¾橠ä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂ樠æ ALL ï¼ÂæÂÂæ å åÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå¯以å¨任æÂÂä¸ÂèºæÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ã ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示堨ä¸ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå DVD Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .jpg .jpg XV-DV900/700.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 79 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¿åÂÂç¢Âç æ¿åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂï¼Â注æÂÂä¸Âè¦Âå¨ç¢ÂçÂÂ表é¢çÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂå°＠ç°塵æÂÂå®ç ã æÂÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå ¶éÂÂç·£æÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå éÂÂç·£ã åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¼Âé«ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå½±é¿æÂÂæ¾æ§è½ ã åÂÂ樣æÂÂ注 æÂÂä¸Âè¦Âå®åÂ።ÂçÂÂçÂÂæ¨Â籤é¢ ï¼ éÂÂç¶æ¤é¢ä¸Âå¦ÂéÂÂ製 é¢æÂÂå æ ï¼Âä½Âæ¯ å® ç ä»Âå¯è½ å° è´ 碠ç ç¡æ³Â使 ç¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ²¾ä¸ÂæÂÂå° ï¼Âç°塵çÂÂ＠使ç¨æÂÂè»ÂçÂÂ乾帠渠æ½Âï¼Âå¦Â丠å æ 示 ç± ä¸Âå¿Âå 夠緣 è¼ è¼ æ¦æÂÂ碠çÂÂã æÂÂç´ç·Âè»Âè·¡å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂéÂÂå§Âè¼Âè¼Âå°æ¦æÂÂã å¿沿åÂÂå¨è»Âè·¡æÂÂè½Âæ¦æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ表é¢ã å¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âç¨è¸ Ã¥ÂÂé Âç²¾ çÂÂå¸Âæ å¸Âå®ç CD/DVD 渠æ½Â工堷徹åºÂ渠æ½Âç¢Âç ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿使ç¨è¯＠ç¨ÂéÂÂå æÂÂå ¶ä»Â渠æ½Âå ＠å æ¬è¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼渠æ½Âä¹Âç¯å±ç¢Âç ç¢åÂÂã åÂÂå²ç¢Âç éÂÂç¶ CD å DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂæ¯Âä¹Âç¯å±ç¢Âæ´çºèÂÂç¨ï¼Âæ¨ ä»ÂéÂÂ注æÂÂé²è¡Âæ£確æ¿æ¾åÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç¨æÂÂï¼ æÂÂæ¾åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂä¸Âè±Âç«Âæ¾置 ã è«Âé¿å Âå°Âç¢ÂçÂÂç½®æ¼ é å·ï¼Âé æ¿ÂæÂÂé ç± çÂÂç°墠丠ï¼Âå æŽ½堠ç´ å° çÂÂç°å¢Âï¼ ã è«Âå¿å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç²Âè²¼ç´Âå¼µæÂÂç²Â貼素＠æÂÂå°Â堶使ç¨ éÂÂç ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç çÂÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â帶æÂÂå°Â端çÂÂæ¸寫工堷ãÂÂå¦ Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå£Âç¢ÂçÂÂã æÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¿Âé¤ÂçÂÂæ´å¤Âä¿¡æ¯ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂã è«Âå¿å¨æÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥å¤Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂã ä¸Âå¯使ç¨çÂÂç¢Âç ç¢ÂçÂÂå¨æÂÂæ¾æ©Âå §å°Âé²è¡Âé«ÂéÂÂæÂÂè½ ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç¼ç¾ ç¢ÂçÂÂç ´è£Âï¼Âç ´æ ï¼Âæ²翹æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°堶ä»ÂæÂÂå£Âï¼Âè«Âå¿ Ã¥ÂÂéªå¨æ¬æ©Â堧使ç¨ï¼Âå¦åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå£Âæ¬æ©Âã æ¬æ©Âå é©åÂÂ使ç¨常è¦ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå½¢ç¢Âç ã åÂÂå¿å¨æ¬橠ä¸Â使ç¨ç°形ç¢Âç ã å°Âæ¼å 使ç¨ç°形ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂå°Âè´ çÂÂä»»ä½Âå¾ÂæÂÂï¼Âå ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸ä¸Âæ¿æÂÂä»»ä½Â責任ã XV-DV900/700.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 80 ChH æ¬系統æ£確å®Âè£ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¶Âè· å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¡·å¿Âå¸ÂæÂÂæ¬æ©Âè½é·习å°çºæ¨æÂÂå ＠æÂÂ以ç¶ æ¨ é¸æÂÂå é© ç å®Âè£Âä½ ç½® æ 諠åÂÂå¿ éµ 循 以 ä¸Âå¹¾ ï¼ é» è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠⦠î å¨éÂÂ風è¯好çÂÂæ¿éÂÂ堧使ç¨ã î æ¾置å¨堠åº ï¼ å¹³æ´çÂÂ水平表é¢丠＠å¦Âæ¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æ±æ¶æÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æ©Âæ¶ä¸Âã è«Âå¿â¦ î æ¾置å¨é«Â溫æÂÂé«Âæ¿Âå ´æÂÂï¼Âå æ¾£ç±å¨æÂÂå ¶ ä»Âç¼ç±å¨堷éÂÂè¿Âã î æ¾置å¨çªÂèºæÂÂå ¶ä»Â使æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°é½å Âç´尠çÂÂå°æ¹ã î å¨å¤Â塵æÂÂæ½®æ¿Âç°å¢Âä¸Â使ç¨ã î ç´æÂ¥æ¾置å¨æ¾大å¨æÂÂç«Âé«Âè²系統ä¸ÂçÂÂ堶仠å¨使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂç¼ç±çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé Âé¨ã î æ¾置å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯è¦Âå¨ï¼Â尤堶æ¯使ç¨室堧 天ç·ÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂéÂÂè¿Âï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¢çÂÂå¹² æ¾ã î æ¾置å¨å»Âæ¿æÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂ使æÂÂæ¾æ©Â置身æ¼ç Âé§ æÂÂè¸汽çÂÂå ´æÂÂã î æ¾置å¨åÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå°毯æÂÂå¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂè ç¨å¸Âå¹ å°Âæ¬æ©Âè¦ÂèÂÂä½ÂãÂÂå çºéÂÂ樣ï¼ÂæÂÂ妨ç¤Âæ¬æ©Âæ£ ç±ã î æ¾置å¨ä¸Â平穩çÂÂ表é¢æÂÂè é¢ç©Âä¸Â足以æ¯æ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ©Âè ³çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âã 渠æ½Âæ¾åÂÂé  DVD æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂæ¾åÂÂé Âå¨æ£常使ç¨æ æ³Âä¸ÂæÂÂä¸Âæ è®Âé« ï¼ ä½Âæ¯å¦ÂæÂÂåºæ¼æÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂå å ç°塵æÂÂé«Â污è åºç¾æ éÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå¨詢é°è¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿Âã éÂÂç¶å¸Âé¢ä¸Âå®æÂÂæ¾åÂÂé Â渠æ½Âå ＠ä½Âæ¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è° ä¸Âè¦Â使ç¨éÂÂé¡Âç¢å ＠å çºæÂÂäºÂ渠æ½ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂæ å£Âæ¾åÂÂé Âã éÂÂæ¼çµÂé²åÂÂé¡ å¦ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå¾Â室å¤Âæ¬堥溫æÂÂçÂÂæ¿é ＠æÂÂè æ¿ éÂÂ溫度åÂÂé«Â太快ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå §é¨å¯è½æÂÂæÂÂçµÂé²ã éÂÂç¶çµÂé²ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂå£ÂæÂÂæ¾橠＠ä½ÂæÂÂæ«æÂÂå½±é¿æÂÂæ¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ§è½ ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ＠æÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå¨溫æ 溫度ä¸Âæ¾置ä¸Âå°ÂæÂÂå·¦å³ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ©Â使ç¨ã æ¬移æ¬橠å¦Âæ æ¨éÂÂ覠æ¬移æ¬ æ©Âï¼Âè«Âå Âæ åÂÂé¢æ¿ ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂéÂÂé ã è«ÂçÂÂè³ Good Bye å¾Â顯示å¹Âä¸Âæ¶Â失å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂç· ã åÂÂå¿å¨ æÂÂæ¾æÂÂæÂÂèµ·æÂÂæ¬移æ¬橠ãÂÂå çºæ¤æÂÂï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Â以 é«ÂéÂÂæÂÂè½Âï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°æÂÂå£Âã â¢ å¨ Good Bye æ¶Â失ä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Âå¿éÂÂéÂÂæ¬æ©Âï¼Âå¦ Ã¥ÂÂæ¬系統æÂÂè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³åº廠è¨Âç½®ã XV-DV900/700.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 81 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ é»æºÂç·Â注æÂÂäºÂé  è«ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé Âé¨åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé»æºÂç· ã æÂÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂè«Âå¿æ æ¯é»締ãÂÂç¶æ¨éÂÂæÂÂæ½®æ¿ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿觸碰é»æºÂç·Âï¼ å¦ Ã¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂå¼Âèµ·çÂÂè·¯æÂÂéÂȾ ãÂÂè«Âå¿å°Âæ¬æ©Âï¼Â家堷 æÂÂ堶仠ç© é« æ¾ ç½® å¨é»溠締丠ï¼ÂæÂÂè 締å£Âé»溠締ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿使é»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂçµÂï¼ æÂÂè èÂÂå ¶ä»Âé»ç·ÂæÂÂå¨ ä¸Âèµ· ãÂÂé»æºÂç·ÂçÂÂå¸Âç·ÂæÂÂ使堶ç¡æ³Â被踩å° ãÂÂæÂÂ壠çÂÂé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½æÂÂéÂȾÂÂäºÂæ ã è«Âå®ÂæÂÂ檢æÂ¥é»æºÂç· ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç¼ç¾é»æºÂç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ＠è«Â就迠è¯ 繫 å ÂéÂÂæ 欠æ å ä¸Âå¿Âæ 綠é· å äºÂ以 æ´æÂÂã XV-DV900/700.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 82 ChH æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ ä¸Âæ£確çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂéÂÂ常æÂÂå¼Âèµ·æ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ失éÂÂãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨èªÂçº該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºäºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Â檢æ¥以ä¸Â堧容ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå æ éÂÂå¯è½ä½Âæ¼å¦ä¸Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂãÂÂè«Â檢æ¥堶å®ÂæÂÂ使ç¨çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂȌ¨ãÂÂå³使å·è¡ÂäºÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ檢æÂ¥ï¼Âä» ä¸Âè½解決æ éÂÂï¼Âè«Âè¯繫éÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂè æ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂ以é²è¡Âä¿®çÂÂå·¥ä½Âã â¢ 妠æÂÂç±æ¼éÂÂéÂȍÂÂ夠é¨影é¿èÂÂ使 系統ç¡æ³Âæ£ 常工ä½Âï¼Âè«Âå°Âé»æºÂæ é Âå¾ÂæÂÂ座è æ·éÂÂï¼Â並åÂÂ次æ 堥è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ£常工ä½ÂçÂÂæ Âã ä¸Âè¬ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ é»æºÂç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å°Âé»æºÂæÂÂé Âé£æÂ¥è³é»æºÂæÂÂ座ã â¢ å°Âé»æºÂæÂÂé Âå¾ÂæÂÂ座ä¸Âæ·éÂÂï¼Â並åÂÂ次æÂÂå ¥ã â¢ è«Â確ä¿ÂæÂÂè²å¨é»ç·Âä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂé¬ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç·Âé ÂèÂÂå¾Âé¢æ¿æ¥觸ã å¦åÂÂå¯è½å°Âè´系統èª Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã ç¶é¸æ äºÂæ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ æÂÂï¼ æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³輸åºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨使ç¨äºÂç·Â路輸堥ï¼Âè«Â確ä¿Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ£確é£æÂÂ¥ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 72 é  â é£æÂÂ¥ è¼Âå©è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂâ ï¼Âã â¢ è«ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç MUTE 以éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ 調篠VOLUME ï¼Âé³éÂÂï¼ ã æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ²Âæ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸 åºã â¢ è«Â確ä¿Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ£確é£æÂÂ¥ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ è«Âå°Âè¦Â頻輸åº復ä½Âè³éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 64 é  â Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé 輸åº＠â ã æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³å¾Âç°繠è²æÂÂè² å¨æÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ä¸Âå³ åºã â¢ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 5 9é Ââ è¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´Ââ 以檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç´Âã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥æ¨æ¯å¦é¸æÂÂ亠STEREO è²é³模å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 30 é Ââ ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²é²衠æ¶è½â ï¼Âã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥æ¯å¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂèÂÂæ¬模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 32 é Ââ 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂâ ＠ã â¢ è«Âæ£確é£æÂ¥åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ã â¢ è«Âæ´æÂÂé»池ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ å¨7 米＠30ðçÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå §å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæÂÂçªÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Â裠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ è«Â移åÂȾÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç¤Âç©æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®é²è¡ÂæÂÂä½Âã â¢ è«Âé¿å Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæÂÂçªÂæ´é²å¨ç´å°Âå Âä¸Âã æ²ÂæÂÂ顯示 ⢠è«Â確ä¿ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æ£確ã XV-DV900/700.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 83 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ DVD/CD/VCD æÂÂæ¾橠å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ示å¨éÂÂç ï¼Â丠系統ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ è«Âæ·éÂÂæ¬æ©Âé»æºÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥éÂÂãÂÂçÂÂå¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå¾ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ è«Â確ä¿Âæ¬橠AMP é¨åÂÂçÂÂ風æÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂ被堵ä½Âã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨已æ£確é£æÂ¥ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âä»Âç¶åÂÂå¨ ï¼ è«ÂæÂÂå®Â帶è³éÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂè æ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·å èÂÂé²è¡Âä¿®çÂÂã åÂÂé¡ æªæ½ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ ç¢ÂçÂÂå¨è£Âå ¥å¾Âèªå 彠åºã â¢ è«Â渠æ½Âç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ è«Âå°Âç¢ÂçÂÂæ£確å°ÂæºÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âè»Âã â¢ å¦Âæ DVD å½±ç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸Âå¹é Âï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âç¡æ³Â使ç¨ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8é Ââ DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂâ ï¼Âã â¢ è«Âç 徠ä¸Â段æ éÂÂ使æÂÂæ¾橠堧é¨çÂÂçµÂé² è¸ç¼ãÂÂè«Âé¿堠å¨空調éÂÂ迠使ç¨æÂÂæ¾ æ©Âã ç¡æ³Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè£ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¨Â籤é¢æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ°è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂæ¢ï¼Âä¸Âç¡ 泠使ç¨æÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂÂã â¢ è«Âæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂéÂÂæ°æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ è«ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂä¸Â次 ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ次使ç¨åÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON æÂÂéÂÂé²è¡Âé åÂÂã è¨Â置被åÂÂæ¶Âã â¢ å åÂÂéÂȾÂÂé»æºÂç·Â被æÂÂåºèÂÂ使é»æºÂ被åÂÂæ·ï¼Âè¨Âç½®å°Â被åÂÂæ¶Âã æ²ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿æ²ÂæÂÂé¡Âè²ã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥åÂÂé  é£æÂ¥æ¯å¦æ£確ï¼ÂæÂÂé Âæ¯å¦å®Âå ¨æÂÂå ¥ã â¢ è«Â檢 æÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ ç£è¦Âå¨çÂÂæ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ以確 ä¿Âé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ ç£è¦Âå¨é²衠äºÂæ£確ç è¨Âç½®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ç£è¦Âå¨使ç¨ Sè¦Âé »é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ï¼ åÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ試æ¹è®ÂSè¦Â頻輸 åºè¨Âå® ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 65 é  â S-Video Out ï¼ÂS è¦Â頻輸åº＠â ãÂÂã ç«é¢被æÂÂé·æÂÂ縱橫毠æª æ¹è®Âã â¢ TV Screen ï¼ TV å±Âå¹ ï¼ è¨Âç½®ä¸Âæ£確 ãÂÂè«Âè¨Âç½®é»è¦Âæ©Âå±Âå¹Âé¸頠以å¹é Âæ¨æÂÂ使ç¨ çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ç£è¦Âå¨ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 3 é  â TV Screen ï¼ÂTV å±Âå¹Âï¼ â ãÂÂã ç¶å¨ VCR ä¸ÂéÂÂé³æÂÂç¶Âé AV é¸æÂÂå¨æ ＠å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ¾ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨干æ¾ã â¢ æ¬系統æ¡ç¨é²æ·è²ÂæÂÂè¡ ï¼ å¯å¨é£æÂ¥æ VCR æ AV é¸æÂÂå¨æÂÂé²æ¢éÂÂé³æÂÂè å¼Âèµ· Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡ÂãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã XV-DV900/700.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 84 ChH MP3/JPEG ç¢Âç å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå åÂÂå°干 æ¾æÂÂè è®ÂæÂÂã â¢ æÂÂæ¾æ©Âè Macro-Vision 系統çÂÂé²æ·è²Â堼容 ã æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂå«æÂÂé²æ·è²Âä¿¡è ＠ç¶ æÂÂæ¾éÂÂé¡Âç¢Âç æÂÂï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂçÂÂå°åÂÂå çÂÂä¸ÂäºÂé¨åÂÂä¸Âåºç¾梠ç´ÂçÂÂæ æ³Âï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ決 æ¼é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ æ³ÂãÂÂèÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã â¢ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âç¹æ®ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂãÂÂç¶å·è¡Â該åÂÂè½æ ＠å¯è½å°Âè´ç«é¢ç æÂÂéÂÂè®Âé»ÂæÂÂè¼ å¾®æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂéÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Â主覠æ¸å æ¼ç¢ÂçÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂ以 Ã¥ÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ堧容ä¹ÂéÂÂçÂʌᨍ°ï¼Â並éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂæ éÂÂã DVD å CD é³éÂÂåºç¾顯èÂʌᨍ°ã â¢ DVD å CD 使ç¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂ製æ¹æ³ÂãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã æ¶è½ DVD å±ç¢ÂæÂÂï¼Âè³橠輸åºçÂÂè²é³ä¸Âå®Âæ´ã â¢ æÂÂäºÂå¤Âè²é DVD å±ç¢ÂéÂÂéÂÂè³æ©Âå 輸åºåÂÂç½®î¿å³置è²éÂÂã åÂÂé¡ æªæ½ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ æ¬系統ç¡æ³ÂèÂÂCD-ROM 碠çÂÂã â¢ 確ä¿Â使ç¨以 ISO 9660 ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製ç CD-ROMã æÂÂéÂÂå ¶å®Âç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§çÂÂè³ è¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 9 é  â ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ â ã æÂÂ件å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âå î¿åÂÂç çÂÂ覽å¨ä¸Âä¸Â顯示ã â¢ ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件忠é Â以æ£確çÂÂæÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂå½åÂÂ︰ MP3 æÂÂ件çº .mp3 ï¼ JPEG æÂÂ件 çº .jpg ï¼Â大å°Â寫åÂÂå¯＠ã æÂÂéÂÂå ¶ä»Âç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§çÂÂè³Â訠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 9 é  â 丠è¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§â ã JPEG æÂÂ件顯示ï¼Âä½ MP3 æÂÂ件ä¸Â顯示ã â¢ å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âå®Âé¸å®ä¸ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨é¸å®é¸頠è¨Âç½®çº Off 以è½訪å MP3 æÂÂ件 ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 71 é  â PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠â ã XV-DV900/700.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 85 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 調諧å¨ é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ ç¡ç·Âé»廣æÂÂæÂÂ大é åª é³ã â¢ è«Âæ£確é£æ¥天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ è«Âå®Â堨伸屠FM æÂÂç·Â天ç·Âï¼Âç½®æ¼æÂÂä½³æÂ¥æ¶ä½Â置並åºå®Âå¨çÂÂä¸Âã â¢ è«Âé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ ¹å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 72 é  â é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天ç·Ââ ï¼Âã â¢ è«Â調ç¯Âæ¹åÂÂèÂÂä½Â置以ç²å¾ÂæÂÂä½³æÂ¥æ¶ã â¢ è«Âé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ ¹éÂÂå çÂÂ室堧æÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå 第 72 é  â é£æÂÂ¥ å¤Âæ¥天ç·Ââ ï¼Âã â¢ è«ÂéÂÂéÂÂä»»ä½Âå ¶å®Âå¯è½å°Âè´åªé³çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè å°Âå®Âé é¢主æ©Âæ¾置ã â¢ 調諧éÂÂéÂÂä¸Â符åÂÂæ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂ家æÂÂå°åÂÂãÂÂè«Â試èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ調諧éÂÂé ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 76 é Ââ æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂçÂÂç´Ââ ï¼Âã èªåÂÂ調諧ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂç´¢å° æ äºÂéÂȏºã â¢ ç¡ç·Âé»信èÂÂè¼Âå¼±ã èªåÂÂ調諧å°Âå åµ測å°信èÂÂè¯好çÂÂ廣æÂÂéÂȏºã å¦ÂæÂÂè¦Âç²徠éÂÂæÂÂ度é«ÂçÂÂ調諧æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âé£æÂ¥ä¸Â根室å¤Â天ç·Âã è²é³åªæÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã â¢ è«Â檢æ¥調諧å¨æ¯å¦è¨Âç½®çº FM å®è²éÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 28 é Ââ æ¹åÂÂä¸Âè¯ç FM æÂÂ¥ æ¶â ï¼Âã è¨Âæ¯ 說æ Child Lock ⢠ç¶童éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ åÂÂåºç¾該è¨Âæ¯ãÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿ éÂÂéÂÂå Âç«¥éÂÂå®ÂçÂÂ詳細說æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 6 é  â 童éÂÂâ ã Rec Mode On ⢠ç±æ¼éÂÂé³模å¼ÂçÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂ＠該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 秠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 4é Ââ éÂÂé³模å¼Ââ ï¼Âã Phones In ⢠ç±æ¼é£æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂèÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Â該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 ç§Âã 96K Stereo ⢠ç±æ¼æÂÂæ¾æºÂçºæ¸你88.2 æ 96kHz PCM èÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½Âæ ＠該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2秠ã No Surr. SP ⢠ç±æ¼æ²ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨輸åºèÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Â該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 ç§Âã Muting ⢠ç±æ¼è²é³被éÂÂé³èÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½Âæ ＠該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 秠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 36 é  â éÂÂé³â ï¼Âã Exit ⢠å¨çÂÂæ«éÂÂæÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂæÂÂä¸Âé¸å®èªåÂÂéÂÂåºæÂÂï¼Âç°¡çÂÂåºç¾該è¨Âæ¯ã XV-DV900/700.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 86 ChH DVD-AUDIO ⢠è£Âå ¥ DVD å±ç¢Âå¾Âï¼Âç¶以ä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂçÂÂã â¢AUTO â¢SURROUND â¢ADVANCED â¢DIALOGUE â¢VIRTUAL SB â¢BASS MODE SACD ⢠è£Âå ¥ SACD å±ç¢Âå¾Âï¼Âç¶以ä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂçÂÂã â¢AUTO â¢SURROUND â¢ADVANCED â¢DIALOGUE â¢VIRTUAL SB â¢BASS MODE è¨Âæ¯ 說æ XV-DV900/700.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 87 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂ碠çÂÂ格张DVDå½±ç¢Âå¯é©ç¨æ¼幾種 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå±Âå¹Â縱橫毠ï¼Âå¾ é»è¦Âç¯Âç® ï¼Âä¸Â荺 4:3 æ ¼å¼Âï¼ è³C inemaScope 系統ç 寬 å± é» å½± ï¼Â縱 æ©«æ¯ÂæÂÂé«Âé 7:3ï¼ ã é»è¦Âæ©Âä¹Âå¯使ç¨ä¸Âå çÂÂ縱橫毠＠æ¨Â溠4:3 å 寬屠16:9ã 寬å±Âé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬 å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âç TV Screen ï¼Â第 6 3 é Âï¼Â訠置æÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº 16:9 ï¼ Wide ï¼ ã ç¶æ¨è§ÂçÂÂ以4:3 æ ¼å¼Âé 製çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ ＠æ¨å¯以使 ç¨é»è¦Âæ©Âæ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂä¾ é¸å®Âç«é¢çÂÂ顯示æ¹张ã æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå¯以æÂÂä¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ縮æ¾åÂÂæÂÂ伸é¸ 頠＠詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âé»è¦Âæ© éÂÂ帶çÂÂ說æÂÂæ¸ã è«Â注æ ＠æÂÂäºÂé»影縱橫 æ¯Â大æ¼ 16:9ï¼ÂæÂÂ以å³ 使æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬屠ç ＠ç¢ÂçÂÂä»Â以信箱格张æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ å¨å±Âå¹ÂçÂÂé Âé¨å åºÂé¨顯示æÂÂé»Âæ¢Âã æ¨ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯樠æºÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âç TV Screen ï¼Â第 6 3 é Â＠訠置å¯æÂÂç §æ¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ好訠å®Âçº 4:3 ï¼ Letter Box ï¼ æ 4:3 ï¼ Pan&Scan ï¼ ã è¨Âçº 4:3 ï¼ Letter Box ï¼ æ ï¼Â寬å±Âç¢ÂçÂÂæ å¨å±Âå¹ÂçÂÂé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨ 顯示é»Âæ¢Âã è¨Âçº 4:3 ï¼ Pan&Scan ï¼ æÂÂï¼Â寬 å±Âç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥Âȍ«é¢ç 堩é ã éÂÂç¶åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ起侠大亠＠ä½Âæ¨æÂÂçÂÂå°çÂÂ並 ä¸Âæ¯æ´åÂÂç«é¢ã è«Â注æ ＠許å¤Â寬å±Âç¢Âç æÂÂ忽çÂ¥æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂè¨Â宠＠以è³ç¡è«Âè¨Âå®Âçº你＠å 以信箱格å¼Â顯示ã â¢ å°Âæ¨Â溠4:3 é»è¦Âæ© è¨Âçº 16:9 ï¼ Wide ï¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂå°Â寬 å±Âé»覠æ©Âè¨Âçº ä»» ä½Âä¸Â種 4:3 æ ¼å¼Âï¼ é½æÂÂå° è´ç«é¢ 失 çÂÂã 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼 Ã¥ÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂ訠æÂÂäºÂèªÂè¨Âé¸頠ã 諠å è¦Â第 6 5 é Ââ Language settings ï¼Â誠訠訠置＠â ãÂÂå¯è®Âæ¨è½夠徠第8 8 é  â èªÂè¨Â代碼å 表â ä¸Âä»»é¸ 136 種èªÂ訠ä¹Â丠ä½Âçºæ¨é¦Âé¸çÂÂ誠è¨Âã 1 é¸宠â Other Language â ï¼Âå ¶ 仠誠è¨Âï¼ ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³ å  æ¨Âï¼Âé¸ æ æ¯ 使 ç¨ 代 碼åÂÂæ¯ÂéÂÂæ¯代碼æ¸å ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠堠æ¨Âï¼Âé¸ æÂʊȣ 碼 å 毠æÂÂ代碼æ¸åÂÂã éÂÂæ¼ èªÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ代碼çÂÂå® æ´ Ã¥ÂÂ表ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Â第 8 8 é Ââ èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表â ã XV-DV900/700.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 88 ChH èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 èªÂ訠ï¼ÂèªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂæ¯Âï¼ ï¼ èªÂè¨Â代碼 Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Dutch (nl), 1412 Russian (ru), 1821 Chinese (zh), 2608 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swedish (sv), 1922 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volap?k (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Ã¥ÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代碼åÂÂ表 Ã¥ÂÂ家 ( å° å ) ã åÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代 碼ã åÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代 碼åÂÂ毠é¿根廷 , 0118 , ar 澳洲 , 0121 , au 奧å°å© , 0120 , at æ¯Âå©æ , 0205 , be 巴西 , 0218 , br å æ¿大 , 0301 , ca æºå© , 0312 , cl ä¸Âå , 0314 , cn 丹麥 , 0411 , dk 菠, 0609 , fi æ³Âå , 0618 , fr å¾·å , 0405 , de é¦Â港 , 0811 , hk å°度 , 0914 , in å°度尼西亠, 0904 , id 義大å© , 0920 , it æ崾 , 1016 , jp éÂÂå , 1118 , kr 馬ä¾Â西亠, 1325 , my 墨西åÂÂ¥ , 1324 , mx è·è , 1412 , nl ç´Â西è , 1426 , nz æª娠, 1415 , no å·´åºæ¯å¦ , 1611 , pk è²å¾Âè³ , 1608 , ph è¡èÂÂç , 1620 , pt ä¿Âç¾ æ¯è¯é¦ , 1821 , ru æ°å å¡ , 1907 , sg 西çÂÂç , 0519 , es çÂÂ士 , 1905 , se çÂÂå ¸ , 0308 , ch èºç£ , 2023 , tw æ³°å , 2008 , th è±å , 0702 , gb ç¾Âå , 2119 , us XV-DV900/700.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 89 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ é Âè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 è«Â注æÂÂï¼Âå¯è½å¨åÂÂé ÂäºÂæ£確çÂÂé Âè¨Â代碼å¾Âåªè½æ§å¶é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âä¹ÂæÂÂå¯è½åÂÂ表ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼尠æ¨使ç¨çÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æÂÂã 製é å 代碼 ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK & TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M - ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 XV-DV900/700.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 90 ChH SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 XV-DV900/700.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 91 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¡Â誠模掳頻 ç´æ¥表ç¾è²é³çÂÂé»信è ã è«ÂèÂÂå¯以çºé»信èÂÂä½ å°Âè²é³ é æÂÂ¥ 表 ç¾ çÂÂæ¸你é³ é » ç¸ 毠è¼ÂãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â æ¸ä½Âé³頻â ã 縱橫毠é»è¦Âå±Âå¹Â寬度ç¸å°Âé«Â度çÂÂ毠ã å³統é»è¦Â縱橫毠çº4 :3 ï¼ÂæÂÂè¨Âä¹Âï¼Âå±Âå¹ÂæÂ¥è¿Âæ¼æ£æ¹形＠ï¼Â寬 å± é»è¦Âæ©Âçº 16:9ï¼Âå±Âå¹ÂçÂÂ寬幾ä¹Âæ¯é«ÂçÂÂå ©åÂÂï¼ ã éÂÂéÂÂé¡ ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æ âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂâÂÂé¡Âï¼Â該é¡ÂéÂÂè¦Â寠碼æÂÂè½ç²åÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 9 é  â Bonus Group ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âï¼ â ã å¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂç ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂ該åÂÂè½＠使ç¨æ¶å¨æÂÂæ¾é³頻 æÂÂå¯ç 覽 éÂÂ製å¨ 碠çÂÂä¸Âç é åÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠â å çÂÂæ¾æ â ã æ¸ä½Âé³頻 éÂÂéÂÂæ¸åÂÂå°Âè²é³éÂÂæ¥表ç¾ ãÂÂéÂÂ製éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âï¼Âè²é³ éÂÂéÂÂ模 æ¸ è½ÂæÂÂå¨ 以é¢æ£ ç éÂÂéÂÂé² 衠測宠ï¼ÂCD é³頻çºæ¯Â秠44,100 次＠ï¼ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¸åÂÂæµÂãÂÂæÂÂæ¾ æÂÂï¼Âæ¸模轠æ å¨ å 根 æÂÂéÂÂ亠æ¸ å ç æ 模æ¬信 èÂÂãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â åÂÂ樣頻çÂÂâ åÂÂâ 模掳頻â ã æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸你1 æ¡ç¨æÂÂå¤Âçº 5.1 è²éÂÂçÂÂé³頻＠éÂÂ種é«Â質éÂÂçÂÂç° ç¹Âè²系統被æÂÂç¨æ¼ä¸ÂçÂÂä¸Â許å¤Âé«Âç´Âé»影é¢ä¸Âã è¢å¹Â顯示å¯表æÂÂåªä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂæ£å¨使ç¨丠＠ä¾Â妠顯示 3/2.1 æÂÂï¼Â3 çº堩åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂï¼ 2çº ç°ç¹Âè²è²éÂÂï¼Â1 æ¯ L FE è²éÂÂã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯î¿å°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯 II ç©é£解碼系統å¯èª 2 å è²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂä¸ÂæÂÂå 4.1 ï¼ÂæÂÂ毠尠楠é 輯ï¼Âæ è 5 .1 ï¼Âæ 毠尠楠é 輯 IIï¼Âè²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã DTS DTS 代表 Digital Theater System ï¼Âæ¸ä½Âå½±é¢ 系統＠ãÂÂDTS æ¯ä¸Â種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¼æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½ÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² 系統 ï¼ å®Â已綠æ çºé»影ä¸Âè¼Âæ® å çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²格 å¼Âã åÂÂæ Âç¯Âå é³頻信 è ä¸ÂæÂÂé¿è² é³åÂÂæ 輠è² é³ä¹Âé ç 差 å¼ ï¼Âæ²Âæ 失çÂÂæÂÂæ²Âæ å¨åªè²ä¸Âæ 失＠ãÂÂæ æ¯Âæ¸你åÂÂD TS è²éÂÂé½æÂÂå¾Â寬çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ è½夠ç¢çÂÂå½± é¢ç´ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ÂæÂÂæÂÂã R XV-DV900/700.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 92 ChH EXIF ï¼Âå¯交æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件＠éÂÂæ¯ç± Fuji Photo Film éÂÂç¼çÂÂä¸Â種ç¨æ¼æ¸你ç¸æ©ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件格张ã 許å¤Âå» åÂÂçÂÂç¢çÂÂæ¸ä½Âç¸æ©Âé½ 使ç¨éÂÂ種å£Â縮çÂÂæÂÂ件格å¼Âï¼ å®Â帶æÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂé åÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂè³Âè¨Â以åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ¸æÂÂã æÂÂ件æ´å±Âå å å¨ æÂÂ件æ« å°¾ ç 樠籤 ï¼Â表示 æÂʊȦ ç é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂä¾ å¦Âï¼ âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ表示 MP3 æÂÂ件ã ISO 9660 格张CD-ROM ç¢ÂçÂÂ容éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件çµÂæ§ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂã JPEG éÂÂå ï¼Âå¦Âç §çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件格å¼ÂãÂÂJPEG æ 件以 âÂÂ.jpgâÂÂæ âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂæ´å±Âå è åÂ¥ãÂÂçµÂ大 é¨åÂÂçÂÂæ¸ä½Âç¸æ©Âé½æ¡ç¨éÂÂ種格å¼Âã MP3 MP3 ï¼ÂMPEG1 é³頻層 3ï¼Âæ¯ä¸Â種å£Â縮çÂÂé³頻æ 件格å¼ÂãÂÂæÂÂ件以 âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂæ âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂæ´å±Âå èÂÂå¥ã MLP î¿å£Â縮 PCM ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ éÂÂæ¯ä¸Â種ç¡æÂÂçÂÂå£Â縮格张＠å¯使 DVD å±ç¢Âä¸Âä¿ åÂÂç PCM é³頻æ¯Âå ¶ä»Âæ¹å¼ÂæÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå¤Âã MPEG é³頻 ç¨æ¼ VCD Ã¥ÂÂä¸Â亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂä¸Â種é³頻格张ã æ¬ æ©Âå¯以尠MPEG é³頻è½ÂæÂÂæ PCM æ ¼å¼Âï¼Â以æ´好 å°èÂÂæ¸ä½ÂéÂÂ製è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå AV æ¾大å¨堼容ãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â PCM ï¼ÂèÂÂ碼調å¶＠â ã MPEG è¦Âé » ç¨æ¼ VCD å D VD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂä¸Â種è¦Â頻格张ãÂÂVCD æ¡ ç¨è¼Âæ©ç MPEG-1 æ¨ÂæºÂï¼Âè DVD æ¡ç¨æ´æ°ï¼Â質 éÂÂæ´好ç MPEG-2 æ¨ÂæºÂã PBC ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æ§å¶＠ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ VCD/ 趠素VCD ï¼ é éÂÂéÂÂ製 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç è¢å¹Â顯示é¸ å®çÂÂ覽 VCD/ 趠素VCD çÂÂä¸Â種系統 ã 尤堶é©ç¨æ¼ä¸Âæ¯ä¸Â次徠é ÂçÂÂå°尾çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âä¾Âå¦Âå¡æ OK ç¢ÂçÂÂã PCM ï¼ÂèÂÂ碼調å¶＠CD å D AT ä¸ÂæÂÂ常è¦ÂçÂÂæ¸ä½Âé³頻編碼系統ãÂÂ質 éÂÂçµÂä½³ï¼Âä½Âæ¯èÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âå MPEG é³頻çÂÂ格张ç¸毠＠éÂÂè¦Â大éÂÂçÂÂæ¸æ ã å¯åÂÂ覠â æ¸ä½Âé³頻 â ã åÂÂå ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ å°Âç¢ÂçÂÂå æ æ¾æ©ÂèÂÂ丠çÂÂä¸Âç ç¹ å® åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¯ 繫 å¨ ä¸Âèµ·ãÂÂæ¬æ©Âå æÂÂæ¾堷æÂÂ堼容åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代碼çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂã æ¨å¯以å¨å¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂå°æ¬æ©ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代碼 ã æÂÂç ç¢ÂçÂÂè 丠æ¢丠åÂÂçÂÂå åÂÂ堼容 ï¼ÂæÂÂè æÂÂæÂÂå å 堼容＠ã S1 S è¦Â頻輸åº 該S 覠頻信èÂÂæ ¼å¼Âå¨è¦Â頻信èÂÂä¸Âå å«縱橫æ¯Âè³ è¨Âï¼ 4 : 3 æ 16:9 ï¼ ã S2 S è¦Â頻輸åº S2 æ¯ S è¦Âé »çÂÂå¢Âå¼·çÂÂï¼ å®Âé¤äºÂ縱橫æ¯Âè³Âè¨Âå¤Âï¼ éÂÂå å« letterbox/pan & scan è³Âè¨ÂãÂÂè S2 S è¦Â頻堼容 ç 寬å±Âé»覠æ©Âå¯根 æ 信 èÂÂèªå å æ è³åÂÂé©çÂÂ模å¼Âã XV-DV900/700.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 93 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ åÂÂ樣頻ç è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¸ä½Âé³頻æ¸æÂÂæÂÂè²é³çÂÂ測éÂÂé »ç ã 頻ç è¶Âé«Âï¼Âé³質 趠好 ï¼Âä½Âæ¯ å° ç æ æ´ 夠ç æ¸ä½Âè³ è¨ÂãÂÂæ¨Â溠CD é³頻çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣頻çÂÂçº 44.1kHzï¼Âå³ æÂÂæ¯Âç§ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣 ï¼Â測éÂÂï¼Â44,100 次 ãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â æ¸ ä½Âé³頻â ã åÂÂçÂÂæ¾æ ＠DVD ã VCD/ 趠素VCD ï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂå VCD/ 趠素VCD å ·æÂÂ該åÂÂè½＠å¯使é 製 å¨ ç¢ÂçÂÂ丠ç é å å¨æÂÂæ¾ é³ é » æ èªå 循ç°æÂÂæ¾ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠âÂÂå¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂçÂÂâ ã 趠ç´Âé³頻 ï¼ SACD ＠趠ç´Âé³頻 CD æ¯ä¸Â種é«Â質éÂÂçÂÂé³頻ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Âï¼ å¯å¨å 丠張 ç¢ÂçÂÂ丠容 ç´ é« åÂÂ樣頻 ç 章髠è²å å¤Âè²éÂÂé³頻ï¼Â以åÂÂ常覠CD é³頻ã XV-DV900/700.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 94 ChH è¦Âæ ¼ æ¾大å¨é¨å é£çºÂÃ¥ÂÂç ï¼ÂRMSï¼Â................ 75W î¿è²é ................... (1 kHz, THD 10%, 6 ⦠) ç¢ÂçÂÂé¨å æ¸ä½Âé³頻 ç¹æ§ .............. DVD fs: 96 kHz, 24 ä½Âå  é¡Âå ......DVD 系統ï¼ÂVCD 系統å CD æ¸ä½Âé³頻 系統 é »çÂÂé¿æ 48 kHz Ã¥ÂÂ樣 ................ 4 Hz-22 kHz 96 kHz Ã¥ÂÂ樣 ................ 4 Hz-44 kHz 192 kHz Ã¥ÂÂ樣 ............... 4 Hz-88 kHz ä¿¡åª毠............................. 108 dB Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯Âå ............................ 95 dB 總諧波失ç ........................ 0.005 % æÂÂæÂÂç ........................... 測éÂÂéÂÂå¶ ï¼Âñ 0.001 % W.PEAKï¼ÂæÂÂ以丠ï¼ÂJEITAï¼ FM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå ...................... 87.5-108MHz 天締........................ 75 ⦠ï¼ÂéÂÂ平衡 AM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå ....531 kHz è³ 1,602 kHz ï¼Â使ç¨ 9 kHz çÂÂç´Âï¼ ...530 kHz è³ 1,700 kHz ï¼Â使ç¨ 10 kHz çÂÂç´Â＠天締............................. ç°形天締堶仠é»æºÂè¦Âæ± ...AC 110-120 V/220-230 V/240 Vï¼Â50/60 Hz Ã¥ÂÂè ................................172 W å¾ æ©Â模å¼Â丠åÂÂè ............................... 0.55 W 尺寸＠DVD/CD 調諧å¨ ...... 360 ï¼Â寬＠à74 ï¼Âé«Â＠à270 ï¼Âæ·±ï¼Âmm 顯示幠. 274 ï¼Â寬＠à44 ï¼Âé«Â＠à35 ï¼Âæ·±ï¼Âmm éÂÂéÂÂ︰ DVD/CD 調諧å¨ ...................... 3.2 kg 顯示幠............................. 0.2 kg éÂÂ件 æÂÂä½Â說æÂÂæ¸ .............................. 1 è¨Âç½® 系統 ................................1 顯示幠..................................1 éÂÂæ§å¨ ..................................1 é»æºÂç· ..................................1 è¦Âé »é»纠ï¼Âé»Âè²æÂÂé Âï¼ ....................1 顯示å¹Âé»纠ï¼Âç°è²æÂÂé Âï¼ ..................1 æ§å¶é»纠A ï¼ èÂÂè²æÂÂé Âï¼ ..................1 æ§å¶é»纠B ï¼ é»Âè²æÂÂé Âï¼ ..................1 FM 天締.................................1 AM ç°形天締............................. 1 ä¹¾é»池ï¼ÂAA/R6ï¼Â......................... 2 æÂÂè²å¨é»纠ï¼Â5 米＠......................3 æÂÂè²å¨é»纠ï¼Â10 米＠.....................2 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨＠ï¼Âå é S-DV700STï¼ ....................3 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Â趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨＠..................4 æÂÂè²å¨æ¯æ¶ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨＠........4 æÂÂè²å¨æ¯æ¶ ï¼Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨＠ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ....................1 大èº絲 ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ................8 ä¸Âèº絲 ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ................2 å°Âèº絲 ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ...............16 èÂÂæ¿ ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ..................4 è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨系統 ï¼ S-DV700ST ï¼ å°ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé²ç£Âå¼ æÂÂè²å¨ ..................... 8.7 cm ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ........................... 5.2 cm ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ é¡Âå®ÂéÂȾ ............................. 6 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå ..................... 80-20,000 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥 .................... 75 W ï¼ÂJEITAï¼ åÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ...... 110 ï¼Â寬＠à59 ï¼Â深＠à284 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé ............................... 0.7 kg ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ...... 284 ï¼Â寬＠à59 ï¼Â深＠à110 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé ............................... 0.7 kg XV-DV900/700.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 95 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨系統 ï¼ S-DV900ST ï¼ é¡Âå ........................ å¹³æ¿å¼Âæ¸æ¶å æÂÂè²å¨ æ¯è©å¨ ............ 2.5 cm æ¯è©å¨ à3 é«Âé³æÂÂè²å¨ ...... 2.6 cm ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé Â形＠é¡Âå®ÂéÂȾ ............................ 6 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå ................. 100 - 35,000 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥 ................... 75 W ï¼ÂJEITAï¼ åÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ..... 120 ï¼Â寬＠à30 ï¼Â深＠à450 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé .............................. 0.9 kg ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ..... 420 ï¼Â寬＠à32 ï¼Â深＠à120 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé .............................. 0.9 kg æÂÂæºÂ趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ S-DV700SW/S-DV900SW ï¼ é¡Âå .............. ä½Âé³åÂÂå°Âå°é¢åÂÂï¼Âé²ç£Âå¼ æÂÂè²å¨ ..................... 18 cm ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ é¡Âå®ÂéÂȾ ............................ 6 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå ..................... 25-2,300 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥 ................... 75 W ï¼ÂJEITA＠尺寸 .... 192 ï¼Â寬＠à436 ï¼Â深＠à395 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé ............................. 12.5 kg ⢠å ç¢åÂÂæ¹é²ï¼Âè¦Âæ ¼èÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè®Âæ´æÂÂä¸Âå¦ è¡ÂéÂÂçÂ¥ã æ¢åÂÂå æ¬ NEC å ¬å¸æÂÂæ¬Â使ç¨ç FontAvenue  Ã¥ÂÂé«Âã FontAvenue æ¯ NEC å ¬å¸çÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã æÂ¥æ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸åºç çÂÂ欠ï 2003 æÂ¥æ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸ çÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂæ XV-DV900/700.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 96 ChH XV-DV900/700.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 97 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ XV-DV900/700.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<TWKCW/03G00001> Printed in <ARC7496-A> PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 XV-DV900/700.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
CONGRATULATIONS ON YOUR PURCHASE OF THIS FINE PIONEER PRODUCT. Pioneer is on the leading edge of DVD research for consumer products and this unit incorporates the latest technological developments. We are sure you will be fully satisfied with this system. Thank you for your support. Location: underside of the unit Operating Environment H045 En Operating environment temperature and humidity: 5 ð C â 35 ð C ( 41 ð F â 95 ð F); less than 85%RH (cooling vents not blocked) Do not install in the following locations ⢠Location exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light ⢠Location exposed to high humidity, or poorly ventilated location VENTILATION: When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 28 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and 15 cm at each side ). WARNING: Slot and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, to prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked and covered with items, such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains, etc. Also do not put the apparatus on the thick carpet, bed, sofa, or fabric having a thick pile. H040 En The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. IMPORTANT CAUTION: [For Taiwanese model] TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. H002_En RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION NS03_ZFL.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
VOLTAGE SELECTOR SWITCH Only multi-voltage model is provided with this switch. Always check that selector are set properly before plugging the power cord into the wall outlet. 1. Disconnect the power cord. 2. Use a small-sized screwdriver. 3. Insert the screwdriver into the groove on the voltage selector, and adjust the VOLTAGE SELECTOR. 240 V VO LTA GE SELECT OR 220V âÂÂ230V 110V âÂÂ120V CAUTION 240 V Power source voltage is factory adjusted at 240 volts. If your area is different, change the voltage selectorâÂÂs setting. H039En On the inside cover of the unit. Wall-mounting the center and surround speaker system Before mounting ⢠Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that its weight could cause the wood screws to work loose, or the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to mount the speakers on is strong enough to support them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls. ⢠Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws that are suitable for the wall material and that will support the weight of the speaker . ⢠If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the walls, consult a professional for advice. ⢠Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or damage that result from improper installation. W ood screw Pr otrusion: 5-7mm 5 mm 5 mm 10 mm NS03_ZFL.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION These labels can be found on the DVD/CD tuner rear panel and bottom panel and on the powered subwoofer rear panel. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference. This player is not suitable for commercial use. This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long- term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period. K041_En Energy-saving design This system is designed to use 0.55 W of electricity when power is switched to standby. Installation precaution ⢠Install components so that there are no obstructions above or either side, and nothing blocking ventilation holes. ⢠Leave at least 5 cm of free space around the subwoofer and at least 28cm above and 15cm to the left and right of the DVD/CD Tuner, as shown below. Remember to also leave 15cm of space at the rear. ⢠Use a vacuum cleaner periodically to clean the port of the subwoofer to keep it free of dust. 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm Powered subwoofer unit (S-DV900/700SW) 28 cm 15 cm 15 cm DVD/CD Tuner unit (XV-DV900/700) [For Taiwanese model] NS03_ZFL.book 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 En Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference . Contents 01 Before you start Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Introduction to home theater . . . . . . . . . . . 9 General disc compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CD-R/RW compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DVD-R/RW compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PC-created disc compatibility . . . . . . . . 10 Compressed audio compatibility . . . . . . 10 JPEG file compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 02 Controls and displays Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 03 Getting started Switching on and setting up . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Setting the clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Setting up the remote to control your TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the Room Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the on-screen displays . . . . . . . . . . 21 Playing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Basic playback controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Resume and Last Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 24 DVD disc menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus . . . . . 26 Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Improving poor FM reception . . . . . . . . . 28 Memorizing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Listening to station presets . . . . . . . . . . 29 Listening to other sources . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 04 Home theater sound Auto listening mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings . . . . . . 31 Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Listening with headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Advanced Surround effects . . . . 32 Adjusting the Advanced Surround effect level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Enhancing dialogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Listening with a virtual surround back speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Adjusting the bass and treble . . . . . . . . . . 35 Boosting the bass level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Muting the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 05 Playing discs Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Scanning discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Playing in slow motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Frame advance/frame reverse . . . . . . . . . . 39 Looping a section of a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using repeat play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Using the display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Using random play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Creating a program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using the OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Using the unit display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Clearing the program list . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Searching a disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Playing DVD-Audio âÂÂBonus Groupsâ . . . . . . 47 Switching subtitles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Switching DVD-Video audio language . . . . 47 NS03_ZFL.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
6 En Switching DVD-Audio audio channels . . . 48 Switching Video CD/Super VCD audio channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Switching camera angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Displaying disc information . . . . . . . . . . . 49 OSD disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Display unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 06 Viewing JPEG discs Playing a JPEG slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Using the JPEG Disc Navigator and Photo Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Zooming the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 07 Using the timer Setting the wake-up timer . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Turning the wake-up timer on/off . . . . . . 55 Setting the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 08 Surround sound setup Setting up surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . 57 System Setup menu options . . . . . . . . . 57 Setting the channel levels . . . . . . . . . . . 59 09 Video Adjust menu Video Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Creating your own presets . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu . . . . . . . . 62 Digital Audio Mode Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Dolby Digital Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 DTS Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Linear PCM Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Video Output settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 TV Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Component Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 S-Video Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Language settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Audio Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Subtitle Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 DVD Menu Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Subtitle Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 OSD Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 On Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Parental Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bonus Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Auto Disc Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Group Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 DVD Playback Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 SACD Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 PhotoViewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 11 Other connections Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . 72 Connecting auxiliary components . . . . . . . 72 Reducing the TV and line signal levels . . 73 Recording mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Connecting using the S-video output . . . . . 74 Connecting using the component video output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 12 Additional information Switching off the demo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Changing the clock format . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Changing the frequency step . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Setting the TV format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Watching NTSC on a PAL TV (MOD. PAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Using and taking care of discs . . . . . . . . . 78 Titles, groups, chapters and tracks . . . . . 78 DVD Video regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Handling discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Storing discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Discs to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Proper installation and maintenance of this system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Hints on installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Cleaning the pickup lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Problems with condensation . . . . . . . . . . 80 Moving the system unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Power cord caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 NS03_ZFL.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 En Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DVD/CD/Video CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 MP3/JPEG discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Screen sizes and disc formats . . . . . . . . . 87 Widescreen TV users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Standard TV users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Selecting languages using the language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Language code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Country code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Preset code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 NS03_ZFL.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 8 En Chapter 1 Before you start Features DVD-Audio and SACD compatible Experience the super high-quality audio performance of DVD-Audio and Super Audio CD (SACD). The on-board 24-bit/192kHz DAC means that this player is fully compatible with high sampling-rate discs, capable of delivering exceptional sound quality in terms of dynamic range, low-level resolution and high- frequency detail. Excellent audio performance with Dolby Digital, Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II *1 and DTS *2 software Built-in Dolby Digital and DTS decoders let you enjoy true discrete multi-channel home theater sound with Dolby Digital and DTS encoded DVD discs. Dolby Pro Logic and Dolby Pro Logic II decoding adds excitement to two-channel source material with surround sound playback. Simple Room Setup for surround sound Setting up basic surround sound is made a simple two step process with the Room Setup feature. Tell the unit the size of your listening room and your listening position, and the system automatically configures the surround sound. Picture zoom While a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD is playing, you can zoom in on any part of the picture at up to 4x magnification for a closer look. See Zooming the screen on page 48. MP3 compatibility This system is compatible with CD-R, CD-RW and CD-ROM discs that contain MP3 audio tracks. See also Compressed audio compatibility on page 10. Graphical on-screen displays Setting up and using your DVD home theater system is made very easy using the graphical on-screen displays. Energy saving design This system is designed to use 0.55 W of power when in standby mode. *1 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. âÂÂDolbyâÂÂ, âÂÂPro Logicâ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. *2 âÂÂDTSâ and âÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. NS03_ZFL.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 9 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Introduction to home theater You are probably used to using stereo equipment to listen to music, but may not be used to home theater systems that give you many more options (such as surround sound) when listening to soundtracks. Home theater refers to the use of multiple audio tracks to create a surround sound effect, making you feel like you're in the middle of the action or concert. The surround sound you get from a home theater system depends not only on the speakers you have set up in your room, but also on the source and the sound settings of the system. DVD-Video has become the basic source material for home theater due to its size, quality, and ease of use. Depending on the DVD, you can have up to six different audio tracks coming from one disc, all of them being sent to different speakers in your system. This is what creates a surround sound effect and gives you the feeling of âÂÂbeing thereâÂÂ. This system will automatically decode Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby Surround DVD-Video discs, according to your speaker setup. In most cases, you wonâÂÂt have to make changes for realistic surround sound, but other possibilities (like listening to a CD with multi- channel surround sound) are explained in Home theater sound on page 30. General disc compatibility This system was designed and engineered to be compatible with software bearing one or more of the following logos: ⢠KODAK Picture CD ⢠is a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd. This player supports the IECâÂÂs Super VCD standard. Compared to the Video CD standard, Super VCD offers superior picture quality, and allows two stereo soundtracks to be recorded. Super VCD also supports the widescreen size. Other formats, including but not limited to the following, are not playable in this system: DVD-RAM / DVD-ROM / CD-ROM * * Except those that contain MP3 or JPEG. See also Compressed audio compatibility and JPEG file compatibility below. Video CD F ujicolor CD Audio CD CD-R CD-RW DVD- Video DVD-R DVD-RW DVD-Audio Super Audio CD VIDEO CD Super Video CD (Super VCD) NS03_ZFL.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 10 En DVD-R/RW and CD-R/RW discs (Audio CDs and Video CDs) recorded using a DVD recorder, CD recorder or personal computer may not be playable on this system. This may be caused by a number of possibilities, including but not limited to: the type of disc used; the type of recording; damage, dirt or condensation on either the disc or the playerâÂÂs pick-up lens. See below for notes about particular software and formats. CD-R/RW compatibility ⢠This system will play CD-R and CD-RW discs recorded in CD Audio or Video CD format, or as a CD-ROM containing MP3 or JPEG files. However, any other content may cause the disc not to play, or create noise/distortion in the output. ⢠This system cannot record CD-R or CD- RW discs. ⢠Unfinalized CD-R/RW discs recorded as CD Audio can be played, but the full Table of Contents (playing time, etc.) will not be displayed. DVD-R/RW compatibility ⢠This unit will play DVD-R/RW discs recorded using the DVD-Video format that have been finalized using a DVD-recorder. ⢠This unit will play DVD-RW discs recorded using the Video Recording (VR) format. ⢠DVD-RW shows in the display when a VR format DVD-RW disc is loading. ⢠When playing a VR format DVD-RW discs that was edited on a DVD recorder, the screen may go momentarily black at edited points and/or you may see scenes from immediately before the edited point. ⢠This unit cannot record DVD-R/RW discs. ⢠Unfinalized DVD-R/RW discs cannot be played in this player. PC-created disc compatibility ⢠If you record a disc using a personal computer, even if it is recorded in a âÂÂcompatible formatâ as listed above, there will be cases in which the disc may not be playable in this machine due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information. ⢠Check the DVD-R/RW or CD-R/RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information. Compressed audio compatibility ⢠This unit will play CD-ROM, CD-R, and CD-RW discs containing files saved in the MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3) format with a sampling rate of 32, 44.1 or 48kHz. Incompatible files will not play and the message CanâÂÂt play this format will be displayed ( No Play in the Display unit). ⢠Fixed bit-rate MP3 files are recommended. Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 files are playable, but playing time may not be shown correctly. ⢠The CD-ROM used to compile your MP3 files must be ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. ⢠Use CD-R or CD-RW media for recording your files. The disc must be finalized (i.e. the session must be closed) in order to play in this unit. This player is not compatible with multi-session discs. Only the first session of a multi-session disc will be recognized. ⢠This player only plays tracks that are named with the file extension .mp3 or .MP3. NS03_ZFL.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Before you start 01 11 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠When naming MP3 files, add the corresponding file name extension (.mp3). Files are played according to the file extension. To prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use these extensions for other kinds of files. ⢠This player can recognize up to 999 files (MP3/JPEG) and up to 499 folders. If a disc exceeds these limits, only files and folders up to these limits will be playable. Files and folders are read/ displayed in alphabetical order. Note that if the file structure is very complex, you may not be able to read/play all files on the disc. ⢠Folder and track names (excluding the file extension) are displayed. ⢠There are many different recording bit- rates available to encode MP3 files. This unit was designed to be compatible with all of them. Audio encoded at 128Kbps should sound close to regular CD Audio quality. This player will play lower bit-rate files, but please note that the sound quality becomes noticeably worse at lower bit-rates. JPEG file compatibility ⢠Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.1* still image files up to 8 mega-pixels are supported (maximum vertical and horizontal resolution is 5120 pixels). (* File format used by digital still cameras ) ⢠The CD-ROM used to compile your JPEG files must be ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player. ⢠This player only displays files that are named with the file extension .jpg or .JPG. NS03_ZFL.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 12 En Chapter 2 Controls and displays Front panel 1 VOLUME buttons Use to adjust the volume. 2 î Press to stop playback. 3 î Press to switch to the DVD/CD function. Also press to start/pause/resume playback. 4 Timer indicator Lights when the wake-up timer is set (page 54). 5 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on or into standby. 6 Disc tray 7 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 8 PHONES jack Headphone jack. Display unit 9 Remote sensor 10 Display See Display on page 13 for detailed information. TIMER ST ANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE î î 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NS03_ZFL.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 13 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Display 1 Tuner indicators Lights when a broadcast is being received. Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode. Lights when FM mono reception is selected. 2 î Lights when a disc is playing. 3 MIDNIGHT Lights when the Midnight mode is selected (page 34). 4 QUIET Lights when the Quiet mode is selected (page 34). 5 PGM Lights when a program list has been programmed (page 43). 6 RPT and RPT-1 RPT lights during repeat play. RPT-1 lights during repeat one-track play (page 40). 7 RDM Lights during random play (page 42). 8 V.PART Light when playing a video part of a DVD disc. 9 ATT Lights when the input attenuator is active for the currently selected analog input (page 73). 10 REC MODE Lights when Rec Mode is active (page 74). 11 Timer indicators Lights when the wake-up timer is set (page 54). Lights when the sleep timer is active (page 56). 12 2 PRO LOGIC II Lights during Dolby Pro Logic decoding (page 30). 13 2 DIGITAL Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 30). MIDNIGHT QUIET PGM RPT - 1 RDM ATT V. PA R T REC MODE kHz ADV .SURR. DIGITAL MHz PRO LOGIC PRGSVE 16 15 17 18 19 20 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 10 11 12 13 14 NS03_ZFL.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 14 En 14 Speaker indicators These show which speakers are being used to output the current source. The illustrations below show some example displays. 15 PRGSVE Lights when progressive scan video output is selected (page 64). 16 ADV.SURR. Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 32). 17 DTS Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 30). 18 kHz / MHz Indicates the unit of the frequency shown in the character display ( kHz for AM, MHz for FM). 19 Character display 20 Lights during multi-angle scenes on a DVD disc (page 49). 5.1 channel surround sound Stereo (2.1 channel) sound 3.1 channel sound with Dialogue enhancement on the center channel 5.1 channel surround sound with Virtual Surround Back mode active NS03_ZFL.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 15 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Remote control ⢠Functions printed in green on the remote control are accessed by switching the MAIN / SUB switch to SUB . 1 î STANDBY/ON Press to switch the system on or into standby. 2 Function select buttons Press to select the source you want to listen to ( DVD (CD) . TUNER , TV , LINE ) 3 DISPLAY Press to display/change disc information shown on-screen (page 49). 4 Disc playback controls î Press to start or resume playback. î and îÂÂ/î Use for reverse slow motion playback, frame reverse and reverse scanning. î and îÂÂ/î Use for forward slow motion playback, frame advance and forward scanning. î Press to pause playback; press again to restart. î Press to stop playback. 5 î Press to jump to the beginning of the current chapter/track, then to previous chapters/ tracks. 6 DVD MENU Press to display a DVD disc menu, or the Disc Navigator if a VR format DVD-RW, CD, Video CD/Super VCD, MP3 or JPEG disc is loaded. 7 Cursor buttons, ENTER and tuning buttons Cursor buttons Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to navigate on-screen displays and menus. ENTER Press to select an option or execute a command. TUNE /â Use to tune the radio. ST /â Use to select station presets when listening to the radio. ST TUNE ENTER TUNEâ MASTER VO L UME STâ ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN/CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î î î î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 11 12 13 14 22 NS03_ZFL.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 16 En 8 MUTE Press to mute all sound from the speakers and headphones (press again to cancel) (page 36). 9 MASTER VOLUME Use to adjust the volume. 10 TV CONTROL (page 20) î Press to switch the TV on or into standby. INPUT Press to switch the TV input. CH /â Use to select channels on the TV. VOL /â Use to adjust the volume on the TV. 11 î OPEN/CLOSE Press to open/close the disc tray. 12 î Press to jump to the next chapter/track. 13 RETURN Press to return to a previous menu screen. 14 SOUND Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust the DSP effect level, bass and treble, etc. 15 Surround sound mode/sound enhancement buttons (In MAIN) AUTO Press to select the default decoding for the current source (page 30). SURROUND Use to select a Surround mode (page 30). ADVANCED Use to select an Advanced Surround (page 32). (In SUB) BASS MODE Use to select a Bass Mode (page 35). DIALOGUE Use to select a Dialogue mode (page 33). VIRTUAL SB Press to switch the Virtual Surround Back speaker effect on/off (page 34). 16 DVD/CD buttons (In MAIN) AUDIO Press to select an audio channel or language (page 47). SUBTITLE Press to display/change the DVD subtitle display (page 47). ANGLE Press to change camera angle during DVD multi-angle scene playback (page 49). (In SUB) PROGRAM Use to program/play a program list (page 43). REPEAT Use to select a repeat play mode (page 40). RANDOM Use to select a random play mode (page 42). 17 (In SUB) ZOOM Press to change the screen zoom level (page 48). TOP MENU Use to display the top menu of a DVD disc in the play position (this may be the same as pressing DVD MENU ). NS03_ZFL.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Controls and displays 02 17 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch HOME MENU Press to display (or exit) the on-screen menu for Initial Settings, Play Mode functions, etc. 18 (In SUB) SYSTEM SETUP Use to make various system and surround sound settings (page 57). TEST TONE Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 59). CH LEVEL Use to adjust the speaker level (page 59). 19 (In SUB) DIMMER Press to dim or brighten the display. QUIET/MIDNIGHT Use to select the Quiet and Midnight modes (page 34). TIMER/CLOCK Press to display the clock and to access the timer menu (page 19 and page 54). 20 (In MAIN) CLR Press to clear an entry. ENTER Selects menu options, etc. (works exactly the same as the ENTER button in 7 above). (In SUB) FOLDER â Press to jump to previous folders. FOLDER Press to jump to the next folder. 21 MAIN / SUB Change from MAIN to SUB to access functions printed in green. (In MAIN) ROOM SETUP Press to start Room Setup (page 20). 22 (In MAIN) Number buttons Use the number buttons for selecting titles/chapters/tracks from a disc directly. NS03_ZFL.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 18 En Chapter 3 Getting started Switching on and setting up After making sure everything is connected up properly, youâÂÂre ready to switch on. The first thing to do is to tell the system what kind of TV youâÂÂre using, standard or widescreen. After that you can set up the surround sound for your room, and set the clock so that you can use the timer features. 1 Press î STANDBY/ON (on the remote or on the front panel) to switch the system on. Also make sure that your TV is switched on and that the video input is set to this system. You should see the welcome screen displayed. 2 Press ENTER to move on to the next screen. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select either âÂÂWide screen (16:9)â or âÂÂStandard size screen (4:3)â according to the kind of TV you have, then press ENTER. See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 87 if youâÂÂre not sure which one to choose. MASTER VO L UME CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER We lcome to Pioneer DVD! Thank you for pur chasing this Pioneer DVD player . Before using, please take a little time to setup your D VD player Put the batteries into the remote control Next, press the [ENTER] b utton on the remote control and start the Let's Get Started Menu Next Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) NS03_ZFL.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 19 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 4 Press ENTER again to finish setting up. ⢠Use the î (cursor right) button to select Back then press ENTER if you want to go back and change the setting you just made. ⢠You can also use the function buttons ( DVD/CD , TUNER , etc.) or the î OPEN/ CLOSE button to switch the system on from standby. Setting the clock Setting the clock allows you to use the timer features. 1 Press TIMER/CLOCK. ⢠If you are adjusting the clock, rather then setting it for the first time, press TIMER/ CLOCK again. 2 If âÂÂClock ADJ?â isnâÂÂt already showing in the display, press î or î (cursor left or right) until you see it. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the hour. 5 Press ENTER. Let's Get Started Menu Setup complete If you're finished setting up, ch oose [Complete], to start again choose [Back] Complete Back MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ 9 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 20 En 6 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the minute. 7 Press ENTER to confirm. The display flashes to indicate the clock is set. ⢠Press TIMER/CLOCK anytime to display the clock. ⢠If you unplug the system from the wall outlet, or there is a power outage, you will need to set the clock again. Setting up the remote to control your TV You can set up the supplied remote to control your TV using the TV CONTROL buttons. 1 Switch on your TV. 2 Find the name of the manufacturer of your TV in the Preset code list on page 89 Next to each manufacturer is one or more three digit codes. These tell the remote what kind of TV you have. If the name of the manufacturer of your TV does not appear in the table, you wonâÂÂt be able to set up this remote to control your TV. 3 Point the remote at your TV, hold down the CLR button, then enter the three digit code for your TV. The remote transmits an on/off signal to the TV. If youâÂÂve entered the correct code, your TV should switch off. If your TV doesnâÂÂt turn off, repeat the procedure using the next code in the list until your TV switches off successfully. Once set, you can then use the individual TV controls shown below. ⢠The default setting is for a Pioneer TV. Using the Room Setup Before using your system to enjoy surround sound playback, we recommend you spend a few minutes using the Room Setup. This is a quick and easy way to get good surround sound for your room. Depending on the distance of the surround speakers from your main listening position, choose between S (small), M (medium), or L (large) room, then depending on your seating position relative to the front and surround speakers, choose Fwd (forward), Mid (middle), or Back . Button What it does î Switches your TV on or into standby. CH /â Changes the TV channel. VOL /â Adjusts the TV volume. INPUT Switches the TVâÂÂs input between the built in TV tuner and an external video source. MASTER VO L UME TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT REPEA T RANDOM PROGRAM BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED TV CONTROL INPUT CH VO L NS03_ZFL.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 21 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch it on. 2 Press ROOM SETUP. ⢠If you have previously set up the room type and seating position, the display will show the current room settings. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a room type then press ENTER. Choose one of the following depending on your room size: ⢠S â Smaller than average room ⢠M â Average room ⢠L â Larger than average room 5 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a seating position setting, then press ENTER . Choose one of the following depending on where your main listening position is: ⢠Fwd â If you are nearer to the front speakers than the surround speakers ⢠Mid â If you are equal distance from the front and surround speakers ⢠Back â If you are nearer to the surround speakers than the front speakers ⢠The Room Setup automatically sets up both channel level and speaker distance. If you have already set the channel levels manually (see page 59) or speaker distance settings (see page 58), you will see Room Set? in the display when you first press the ROOM SETUP button. ⢠Using the Room Setup will overwrite any previous settings you had for channel level and speaker distance. ⢠For a more detailed surround sound setup, see Setting up surround sound on page 57. Using the on-screen displays For ease of use, this system makes extensive use of graphical on-screen displays (OSDs). You should get used to the way these work as youâÂÂll need to use them when setting up the system, using some of the playback features, such as program play, and when making more advanced settings for audio and video. All the screens are navigated in basically the same way, using the cursor buttons ( î , î , î , î ) to change the highlighted item and pressing ENTER to select it. ⢠Throughout this manual, âÂÂSelectâ means use the cursor buttons to highlight an item on-screen, then press ENTER . NS03_ZFL.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 22 En ⢠The button guide at the bottom of every OSD screen shows you which buttons youâÂÂll need to use for that screen. Playing discs The basic playback controls for playing DVD, CD, SACD, Video CD/Super VCD and MP3 discs are covered here. Further functions are detailed in the chapter 5. Throughout this manual, the term âÂÂDVDâ means any kind of DVD disc (DVD-Video, DVD-Audio or DVD-R/RW). 1 If the player isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch it on. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD also turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input. 2 Press î OPEN/CLOSE to open the disc tray. 3 Load a disc. Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if youâÂÂre loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face down). Button What it does HOME MENU Displays/exits the on-screen display îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Changes the highlighted menu item ENTER Selects the highlighted menu item (both ENTER buttons work in exactly the same way) RETURN Returns to the main menu without saving changes MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 12 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î RETURN MENU HOME ENTER 3 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 23 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 4 Press î (play) to start playback. If youâÂÂre playing a DVD or Video CD/Super VCD, a menu may appear. See DVD disc menus on page 25 and Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus on page 26 for how to navigate these. If youâÂÂre playing an MP3 disc, it may take a few seconds before playback starts, depending on the complexity of the file structure on the disc. If you loaded a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEGs, a slideshow will start. See Viewing JPEG discs on page 52 for more on playing these discs. ⢠See also PhotoViewer on page 71 if the disc contains both MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files. 5 Use the MASTER VOLUME â / button (or the top panel VOLUME buttons) to adjust the volume. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls on the remote for playing discs. You can find other playback features in the chapter 5. Button What it does î Starts playback. DVD and Video CD: If the display shows Resume or Last Mem playback starts from the resume or last memor y point (see also Resume and Last Memory below.) MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM CLR MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ î î î î î î FOLDERâ FOLDER ENTER î 123 456 789 0 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 24 En ⢠You may find with some DVD discs that some playback controls donâÂÂt work in certain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Track skip and number buttons for track selection do not work with unfinalized CD- R/RW discs. Using the top panel controls The î OPEN/CLOSE , î and î (stop) buttons on the top panel work the same way as the remote control equivalents. Resume and Last Memory When you stop playback of a DVD or Video CD disc, Resume is shown in the display indi- cating that you can resume playback again from that point. If the disc tray is not opened, the next time you start playback the display shows Resume and playback resumes from the resume point. For DVD discs only: If you take the disc out of the player, the play position is stored in memory. When you load the disc next time, the display shows Last Mem and you can resume playback (this works for up to five discs). If you want to clear the resume/last memory point, press î (stop) while Resume or Last Mem is displayed. ⢠When a Video CD is loaded, the Resume point is lost if the system is switched off, or switched to a function other than DVD (CD) . ⢠For the Last Memory function to work, you must press î (stop) to stop playback before opening the disc tray. î P auses a disc thatâÂÂs playing, or restarts a paused disc. î Stops playback. DVD and Video CD: The display shows Resume . P ress î again if you want to cancel the resume function. (See also Resume and Last Memory below.) î P ress to start fast reverse scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î P ress to start fast for ward scanning. P ress î (play) to resume normal playback. î Skips to the start of the current track or chapter , then to previous tracks/chapters. î Skips to the next track or chapter . FOLDER /â (SUB) Skips to the next/previous folder when playing a JPEG or MP3 disc. Numbers Use to enter a title/track/group/ chapter number . P ress ENTER to select (or wait a few seconds). ⢠If the disc is stopped, playback starts from the selected title/ group (for DVD- Video/DVD- Audio) or track number (for SACD/CD/Video CD/Super VCD / MP3 ). ⢠If the disc is playing, playback jumps to the start of the selected chapter or track (within the current group for DVD-Audio). Button What it does NS03_ZFL.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 25 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠Resume and Last Memory are not avail- able with DVD-Audio discs. ⢠The Last Memory function doesnâÂÂt work with VR format DVD-RW discs. ⢠With MP3 format discs, playback does not resume. Instead, playback begins of the first track of the folder containing the file that was playing when playback was stopped. ⢠After I load a DVD disc, it ejects automatically after a few seconds! Most likely, the disc is the wrong region for your system. The region number should be printed on the disc; check it against the region number of the system (which you can find on the rear panel). See also DVD Video regions on page 78. If the region number is OK, it may be that the disc is damaged or dirty. Clean the disc and look for signs of damage. See also Using and taking care of discs on page 78. ⢠Why wonâÂÂt the disc I loaded play? First check that you loaded the disc the right way up (label side up), and that itâÂÂs clean and not damaged. See Using and taking care of discs on page 78 for information on cleaning discs. If a disc loaded correctly wonâÂÂt play, itâÂÂs probably an incompatible format or disc type, such as DVD-ROM. See General disc compatibility on page 9 for more on disc compatibility. â¢I have a widescreen TV so why are there black bars at the top and bottom of the screen when I play some discs? Some movie formats are such that even when played on a widescreen TV, black bars are necessary at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunction. â¢I have a standard (4:3) TV and set the system to show widescreen DVDs in pan & scan format, so why do I still get black bars top and bottom with some discs? Some discs override the display preferences of the system, so even if you have 4:3 (Pan & Scan) selected, those discs will still be shown in letterbox format. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Why canâÂÂt I hear DVD-Audio and SACD audio through the digital outputs? DVD-Audio and SACD audio is only available through the analog outputs. This is not a malfunction. ⢠My DVD-Audio disc starts playing, but then suddenly stops! The disc may have been illegally copied. DVD disc menus Many DVD-Video and DVD-Audio discs contain menus from which you can select what you want to watch or listen to. They may give access to additional features, such as subtitle and audio language selection, or special features such as slideshows. See the disc packaging for details. Sometimes DVD menus are displayed automatically when you start playback; others only appear when you press DVD MENU or TOP MENU . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature a bonus group. To access this group you have to input a password which you can find on the disc packaging. See page 69 for more information. NS03_ZFL.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 26 En Video CD/Super VCD PBC menus Some Video CD/Super VCDs have menus from which you can choose what you want to watch. These are called PBC (Playback control) menus. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD without having to navigate the PBC menu by pressing î (stop) then starting playback using a number button to select a track, rather than î (play) (or î on the top panel). Button What it does TOP MENU Displays the âÂÂtop menuâ of a DVD discâÂÂthis varies with the disc. DVD MENU Displays a DVD disc menuâÂÂthis varies with the disc and may be the same as the âÂÂtop menuâÂÂ. îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî Moves the cursor around the screen. ENTER Selects the current menu option. RETURN Returns to the previously displayed menu screen. On some DVD-Audio discs featuring browsable pictures, press to display the browser screen. Numbers (MAIN) Highlights a numbered menu option (some discs only). P ress ENTER to select (or wait a few seconds). MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP MASTER VO L UME î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î RETURN HOME MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 27 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Listening to the radio The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you donâÂÂt have to manually tune in every time you want to listen. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. 2 Press TUNER to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the AM or FM band. The display indicates the tuner band and the frequency. 3 Tune to a frequency. There are three tuning modesâÂÂmanual, auto, and high-speed: Button What it does RETURN Displays the PBC menu. Numbers Selects a numbered menu option. î Displays the previous menu page (if there is one). î Displays the next menu page (if there is one). ENTER P ress to select highlighted menu option. MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 NS03_ZFL.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 28 En ⢠Manual tuning : Press TUNE /â repeatedly to change the displayed frequency. ⢠Auto tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to search for other stations. ⢠High-speed tuning : Press and hold TUNE /â until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method. Improving poor FM reception If youâÂÂre listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono. 1 Tune to an FM radio station. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose âÂÂFM Mode?â then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂFM Monoâ then press ENTER. The mono indicator ( ) lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode. Select FM Auto above to switch back to auto- stereo mode (the stereo indicator ( ) lights when receiving a stereo broadcast). Memorizing stations You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time. 1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station. For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset. MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 NS03_ZFL.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Getting started 03 29 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose âÂÂSt. Memory?â then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the station preset you want. There are 30 preset locations; each can store one station preset. 5 Press ENTER to save the station preset. ⢠If the system is unplugged from the power supply completely, saved stations will remain for several days, after which youâÂÂll have to save them again. Listening to station presets 1 Make sure the TUNER function is selected. 2 Use the ST /â buttons to select a station preset. Listening to other sources You can connect up to four external sources (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) to this system, including one digital source. See also Connecting auxiliary components on page 72. 1 If the system isnâÂÂt already on, press î STANDBY/ON to switch on. Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on. 2 Select the source you want to listen to. ⢠Press TV to select the TV input, or use the LINE ( L1/L2 ) button to select the LINE 1 ANA, LINE1 DIG or LINE 2 ANA input. 3 If necessary, start playback of the external source. ST ANDBY/ON L1/L2 CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER î î î îÂÂî î î î TV LINE NS03_ZFL.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 30 En Chapter 4 Home theater sound Using this system you can enjoy listening to sources, analog or digital, in either stereo or surround sound. Auto listening mode The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material. ⢠Press AUTO to select the âÂÂAutoâ listening mode. If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the 2 DIGITAL or DTS indicator on the display unit lights. ⢠Any previously active Dolby Pro Logic or Advanced Surround mode is canceled when Auto listening mode is selected. Listening in surround sound You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannel, analog or digitalâÂÂin surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources (except SACD and DVD-Audio) using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode (or press SURROUND then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons). The listening mode choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source thatâÂÂs playing. ⢠Auto â Auto listening mode (see above) ⢠Dolby Digital / DTS â Dolby Digital or DTS decoding (depending on the source). For a multichannel source, this will be the same as Auto . ⢠Pro Logic â 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source ⢠PL II Movie â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, for use with any two- channel source TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE AUTO MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 31 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠PL II Music â Pro Logic II 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two- channel source (see also Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below) ⢠Stereo â See Listening in stereo below ⢠See also Using the Advanced Surround effects on page 32, for further stereo and surround playback options. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Surround modes with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. ⢠When headphones are connected, only the Stereo option is available. ⢠When listening in Dolby Digital / DTS mode, two-channel material will automatically be played in surround sound using Dolby Pro Logic decoding. ⢠Dolby Digital / DTS sources that use only the center channel cannot be played back in surround sound. Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode, there are three further parameters you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama. Default Settings: C Width: 3 Dimen.: 0 Pnrm.: Off 1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂC WidthâÂÂ, âÂÂDimen.â or âÂÂPnrm.â â¢ C Width (Center Width): Makes the center channel wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings) ⢠Dimen. (Dimension): Makes the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings) ⢠Pnrm. (Panorama): Creates more spacious surround sound 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the setting. Center Width is adjustable between 0 and 7 ; Dimension between âÂÂ3 and 3 . Panorama is On or Off . 4 Press ENTER to confirm. Listening in stereo You can listen to any sourceâÂÂstereo or multichannel, analog or digitalâÂÂin stereo. When playing a multichannel source, stereo sound is created by downmixing all channels to the front left/right speakers and the subwooofer. ⢠Press SURROUND repeatedly until âÂÂStereoâ shows in the display. Any active Advanced Surround mode is canceled. TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 32 En ⢠See also Using the Advanced Surround effects below, for further stereo and surround playback options. Listening with headphones When headphones are connected, only the Stereo (default) and Phones Surround (virtual surround sound for headphones) modes are available. ⢠With headphones connected, press ADVANCED to select âÂÂPhones Surroundâ or SURROUND to select âÂÂStereoâ . Using the Advanced Surround effects Advanced Surround effects can be used with multichannel or stereo sources for a variety of additional surround sound effects. ⢠Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode (or press ADVANCED then use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) bottons). Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠Adv. Music â Gives a concert hall-type sound ⢠Adv. Movie â Gives a movie theater-type sound ⢠Expanded â Creates an extra wide stereo field ⢠TV Surr. â Designed for mono or stereo TV broadcasts and other sources MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 33 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠Sports â Designed for sports and other programs based on commentary ⢠Game â Creates surround sound from video game sources ⢠ExPwrSurr. (Extra Power Surround) â Gives additional energy and width to stereo sources ⢠Virtual â Creates the impression of surround sound from just the front speakers ⢠5ch Stereo â Designed to give powerful surround sound to stereo music sources ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Advanced Surround modes with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. ⢠You can use any of the above Advanced Surround modes with any type of source. The descriptions are given only as a guide. ⢠When headphones are connected, only the Phones Surround option is available. Adjusting the Advanced Surround effect level You can emphasize or reduce the effect of the Advanced Surround modes as you like. For each Advanced Surround mode you can set the effect level independently. 1 With one of the Advanced Surround modes active, press SOUND . 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂEffectâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the effect level. The effect level can be adjusted from 10 (min) to 90 (max). 4 Press ENTER to confirm. Enhancing dialogue ⢠Default setting: Dialog Off The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make the dialog stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack. ⢠Press DIALOGUE to select the amount dialog enhancement. Press repeatedly to select from: ⢠Dialog Off â No dialog enhancement ⢠Dialog Mid â Moderate dialog enhancement ⢠Dialog Max â Strong dialog enhancement ⢠You canâÂÂt use Dialog Enhancement with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED DIALOGUE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 34 En Listening with a virtual surround back speaker ⢠Default setting: Vir. SB Off The Virtual Surround Back feature can be used when listening in surround sound to simulate an added surround back channel. In a real theater the surround back speaker would be directly behind you, creating more cohesive and realistic surround sound. ⢠Press VIRTUAL SB repeatedly to switch between âÂÂVir. SB Onâ and â Vir. SB OffâÂÂ. ⢠You canâÂÂt use Virtual Surround Back when listening in Stereo or Virtual listening modes. ⢠You canâÂÂt use Virtual Surround Back when headphones are connected. ⢠If there is no surround channel, Virtual Surround Back has no effect. ⢠You canâÂÂt use the Virtual Surround Back effect with SACD, DVD-Audio and 96 kHz PCM sources. Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes ⢠Default setting: Off The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source. You can use this feature if the music is a little bit harsh and you would like a smoother sound. The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels. The effect automatically adjusts according to the volume at which youâÂÂre listening. ⢠Press QUIET/MIDNIGHT repeatedly to switch between âÂÂQuietâÂÂ, âÂÂMidnightâ and âÂÂOffâÂÂ. When the headphones are connected, you can't set Quiet/Midnight in the following cases: ⢠When an SACD or DVD-Audio disc is loaded. TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED VIRTUAL SB MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 79 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MIDNIGHT MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 8 NS03_ZFL.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 35 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Adjusting the bass and treble ⢠Default setting: Treble: 0 , Bass: 0 Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone. Bass and treble adjustment is not possible when the Quiet or Midnight modes are active. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂBassâ or âÂÂTrebleâÂÂ. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the sound. The bass and treble can be adjusted from âÂÂ3 to 3 . 4 Press ENTER to confirm. When the headphones are connected, you can't adjust treble/bass in the following cases: ⢠When Recording Mode is ON ⢠When an SACD or DVD-Audio disc is loaded. Boosting the bass level There are three bass modes you can use to enhance the bass in a source. ⢠Press BASS MODE repeatedly to choose an option that fits the source youâÂÂre listening to. ⢠Music â Can be used with music to give a deeper bass sound ⢠Cinema â Good for action movies or movies with lots of sound effects ⢠P. Bass â Can be used with music sources to bring the beat of the music (or soundtrack) to the forefront ⢠Off ⢠You canâÂÂt use the bass mode with SACD and DVD-Audio sources. ⢠You can't use the bass mode when the headphones are connected. MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SOUND ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Home theater sound 04 36 En Muting the sound Use the MUTE button if you need to momentarily turn off all sound from the speakers. ⢠Press MUTE to mute the volume. To cancel, adjust the volume or press MUTE again. MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER MUTE NS03_ZFL.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 37 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Chapter 5 Playing discs Introduction Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. For an expla- nation of how to navigate these, see Using the on-screen displays on page 21. Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to DVD and SACD discs, Video CD/ Super VCDs, CDs and MP3/JPEG discs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded. Some DVD discs restrict the use of some functions (random or repeat, for example). This is not a malfunction. When playing Video CD/Super VCDs, some of the functions are not available during PBC playback. If you want to use them, start the disc playing using a number button to select a track. ⢠To access functions printed in green on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB . Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc Use the Disc Navigator to browse through the contents of a disc to find the part you want to play. You can use the Disc Navigator when a disc is playing or stopped. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂDisc Navigatorâ from the on-screen display. Alternatively, if a VR format DVD-RW, CD, Video CD/Super VCD or MP3/JPEG disc is loaded, you can press DVD MENU , which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen. 2 Select what you want to play. Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different. The screen for DVD-Video discs shows the titles on the left and the chapters on the right. Select a title, or a chapter within a title. For DVD-Audio, select a group or a track within a group. Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Title 1-10 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 DVD Disc Navigator Chapter 1-3 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Group 1-3 DVD - A u di o Disc Navigator Tr a c k 1-36 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 NS03_ZFL.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 38 En For SACD, select a track within the current playback area. For a VR (Video Recording) mode DVD-RW disc select beween the Playlist and Original areas of the disc, or a title. Press î (cursor right) to preview the title. ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to switch between Orig- inal and Playlist during playback. ⢠Not all VR format DVD-RW discs have a Playlist. The screen for CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs shows a list of tracks. (The screen below shows a CD loaded.) The screen for an MP3 disc shows the folder names on the left and the track names on the right (note that if there are more than 16 folders or names that contain accented or non-roman characters, tracks and folders may show up with generic names â F_033 , T_035 , etc.). Select a folder, or a track within a folder. Playback starts after you press ENTER . ⢠The Disc Navigator is not available unless there is a disc loaded. ⢠ItâÂÂs not possible to use the Disc Navigator when playing a Video CD/Super VCD in PBC mode, or an unfinalized CD-R/RW disc. ⢠Another way to find a particular place on a disc is to use one of the search modes. See Searching a disc on page 46. Scanning discs You can fast-scan discs forward or backward at various different speeds. 1 During playback, press î or î to start scanning. 2 Press repeatedly to increase the scan- ning speed. ⢠MP3 tracks can only be scanned at one speed. ⢠The scanning speed is shown on-screen. Tr ack 1-14 Tr a c k 001 Tr a c k 002 Tr a c k 003 Tr a c k 004 Tr a c k 005 Tr a c k 006 Tr a c k 007 Tr a c k 008 2ch Area Disc Navigator Title(1-3) 01. 3/31 FIRST LEA GUE 02. 4/28 SECOND LEA GUE 03. 4/29 FINAL R OUND Original Play List Disc Navigator DVD - RW Tr a c k 1-10 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 CD Disc Navigator Folder 1-17 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead 007. Thermo 008. Missing Man MP3 Disc Navigator Tr ack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube NS03_ZFL.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 39 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Sound can be heard while scanning audio CDs, SACD and MP3 discs. ⢠When scanning a Video CD/Super VCD or MP3 track, playback automatically resumes at the end or beginning of the track. ⢠There is no sound while scanning DVD- Videos and Video CD/Super VCDs, and no subtitles while scanning DVD-Videos. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD-Video disc. Playing in slow motion You can play DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW and Video CD/Super VCDs at four different forward slow motion speeds. DVD-Videos and DVD-R/RW discs can also be played at two reverse speeds. 1 During playback, press î (pause) ( î on the top panel). 2 Press and hold îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î until slow motion playback starts. ⢠The slow motion speed is shown on- screen. ⢠There is no sound during slow motion playback. 3 Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed. ⢠The slow motion speed is displayed on- screen. 4 To resume normal playback, press î (play). ⢠Video CD/Super VCD only supports forward slow motion playback. ⢠The picture quality during slow motion playback is not as good as during normal playback. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. Frame advance/frame reverse You can advance or back up DVD-Video or VR format DVD-RW discs frame-by-frame. With Video CD/Super VCDs, you can only use frame advance. 1 During playback, press î (pause) ( î on the top panel). 2 Press îÂÂ/î or îÂÂ/î to reverse or advance a frame at a time. 3 To resume normal playback, press î (play) ( î on the top panel). ⢠The picture quality when using frame reverse is not as good as frame advance. ⢠Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached. ⢠When changing direction with a DVD disc, the picture may âÂÂmoveâ in an unex- pected way. This is not a malfunction. NS03_ZFL.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 40 En Looping a section of a disc The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track (CD and Video CD) or title (DVD-Video and DVD-RW) that form a loop which is played over and over. ⢠You canâÂÂt use A-B Repeat with MP3 discs, DVD-Audio, SACD, Super VCD discs, Video CDs in PBC mode or unfinalized CD-R/RW discs. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂA-B Repeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Press ENTER on âÂÂA(Start Point)â to set the loop start point. 4 Press ENTER on âÂÂB(End Point)â to set the loop end point. After pressing ENTER , playback jumps back to the start point and plays the loop. ⢠The minimum loop time is 2 seconds. 5 To resume normal playback, select âÂÂOffâ from the menu. Using repeat play There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded. ItâÂÂs also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Creating a program list on page 43). ⢠You canâÂÂt use Repeat play with Video CD/ Super VCDs in PBC mode, or unfinalized CD-R/RW discs. A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 41 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRepeatâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select a repeat play option. If program play is active, select Program Repeat to repeat the program list, or Repeat Off to cancel. For DVD-Video and DVD-RW discs, select Title Repeat or Chapter Repeat (or Repeat Off ). For DVD-Audio discs, select Group Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). For SACDs, CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select Disc Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). For MP3 discs, select Disc Repeat , Folder Repeat or Track Repeat (or Repeat Off ). Using the display unit ⢠During playback, press REPEAT to select a repeat play option. Press repeatedly until the repeat play option you want is shown in the display. The repeat options are the same as those available from the OSD (see above). ⢠If youâÂÂve created a program list, Program Repeat is also available. ⢠During playback, you can cancel repeat play by pressing CLR . ⢠You canâÂÂt use repeat and random play at the same time. ⢠If you switch camera angle during repeat play, repeat play is canceled. Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Group Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Folder Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 42 En Using random play Use the random play function to play titles or chapters (DVD-Video), groups or tracks (DVD- Audio), or tracks (SACD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD and MP3 discs) in a random order. You can set the random play option when a disc is playing or stopped. ⢠You canâÂÂt use random play with VR format DVD-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂRandomâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select a random play option. For DVD-Video discs, select Random Title or Random Chapter , (or Random Off ). For DVD-Audio discs, select Random Group or Random Track (or Random Off ). For CDs and Video CD/Super VCDs, select On or Off to switch random play on or off. For MP3 discs, select Random All (all folders) or Random Track (current folder only), (or Random Off ). ⢠You can also use the RANDOM button on the remote to select a random play mode. The random mode is indicated in the display unit and on-screen. The random modes available are the same as when choosing from the Play Mode menu. Press ENTER to start random play. ⢠To stop the disc and cancel random play- back, press î (stop). Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Group Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode On Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random All Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 43 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠To cancel random playback without stop- ping playback, press CLR . The disc will play to the end, then stop. ⢠During random play, the î and î buttons function a little differently to normal: î returns to the beginning of the current track/chapter. You can't go back further than this. î selects another track/chapter at random from those remaining. ⢠You can't use random play together with program or repeat play. Creating a program list This feature lets you program the play order of titles/groups/chapters/folders tracks on a disc. ⢠You canâÂÂt use Program play with VR format DVD-RW discs, Video CD/Super VCDs playing in PBC mode, or while a DVD disc menu is being displayed. Using the OSD 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. The Program edit screen that appears depends on the kind of disc loaded. On the left side is the program list, then to the right is a list of titles (if a DVD-Video disc is loaded), groups (for DVD-Audio), tracks (for SACDs, CDs and Video CD/Super VCD), or folder names (for MP3 discs). On the far right is a list of chapters (for DVD-Video) or track names (for MP3). 4 Select a title, chapter, group, folder or track for the current step in the program list. For a DVD-Video disc, you can add a whole title, or a chapter within a title to the program list. ⢠To add a title, select the title. Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program NS03_ZFL.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 44 En ⢠To add a chapter, first highlight the title, then press î (cursor right) and select a chapter from the list. For a DVD-Audio disc, you can add a whole group, or a track within a group to the program list. ⢠To add a group, select the group. ⢠To add a track, first highlight the group, then press î (cursor right) and select a track from the list. For an SACD, CD or Video CD/Super VCD, select a track to add to the program list. For an MP3 disc, you can add a whole folder, or a track within a folder to the program list. ⢠To add a folder, select the folder. ⢠To add a track, first find the folder, then press î (cursor right) and select a track name from the list. After pressing ENTER to select the title/ chapter/group/folder/track, the step number automatically moves down one. 5 Repeat step 4 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 titles/ chapters/group/folders/tracks. Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1-38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1-4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1~38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 Tr a c k 1~4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1-38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 T rack 1-4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack 1~12 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 Program Program Step 01. 001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube Program Program Step 01. 001-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Program Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube NS03_ZFL.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 45 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 6 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you turn off program play (see below), erase the program list (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player or switched to a function other than DVD (CD) . ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting play- back, press HOME MENU . (DonâÂÂt press RETURN â your program list wonâÂÂt be saved.) ⢠During program play, press î to skip to the next program step. ⢠Press CLR during playback to switch off program play. Press while stopped to erase the program list. Editing a program list using the OSD After creating a program list, you can add, delete and change steps. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select âÂÂCreate/Editâ from the list of program options. 4 To clear a step, highlight the step number and press CLR. 5 To insert a step in the middle of the program list, highlight the step where you want the new step to appear, then select a title/chapter/group/folder/track to add. After pressing ENTER , the new step is inserted into the list. 6 To add a step to the end of the program list, highlight the next free step then select a title/chapter/group/folder/ track to add. ⢠To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting play- back, press HOME MENU . ⢠If you want to exit the program edit screen without saving the changes you made, press RETURN . Other functions available from the OSD program menu As well as creating and editing a program list, you can start program play, cancel program play, erase the program list, and memorize a program list from the Play Mode menu. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂProgramâ from the list of functions on the left. 3 Select a program play function. ⢠Create/Edit â See above ⢠Playback Start â Starts playback of a saved program list ⢠Playback Stop â Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list ⢠Program Delete â Erases the program list and turns off program play Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 46 En ⢠Program Memory (DVD-Video only) â Select On to save the program list for the disc loaded. (Select Off to cancel the program memory for the disc loaded) ⢠Program lists are saved for the DVD disc loaded. When you load a disc with a saved program list, program play is automati- cally turned on. ⢠You can save program lists for up to 24 discs. After that, the oldest one is replaced with the new one saved. Using the unit display Even though the OSD is available for SACDs, CDs and MP3 discs, the Display unit provides enough information to make a program list easily. If a disc is playing, stop it first. 1 Press PROGRAM. YouâÂÂre prompted to enter a track or folder for the first step in the program list. 2 Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to select a track or a folder, then press ENTER. ⢠For MP3 discs only: To select an individual track within a folder, use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select the folder, then press î , then use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/ down) to select a track. Press ENTER . Wait for the display to prompt you after completing each selection. If you make a mistake, press CLR to delete the last (most recently) programmed track. 3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list. A program list can contain up to 24 steps. 4 To play the program list, press î (play). Program play remains active until you press î (stop), clear the playlist (see below), eject the disc or switch off the player. Clearing the program list You must clear the program list to program a new one. 1 If a disc is playing, press î (stop). 2 Press CLR. Searching a disc You can search DVD-Video discs by title or chapter number, or by time. DVD-Audio discs can be searched by group or track, or by page. SACDs, CD/Super VCDs can be searched by track number, and Video CDs by track number or time. MP3 discs can be searched by folder or track number. 1 During playback, press HOME MENU and select âÂÂPlay ModeâÂÂ. 2 Select âÂÂSearch Modeâ from the list of functions on the left. The search options that appear depend on the kind of disc loaded. The screen below shows the DVD-Video search options. P0 -0 0 0 0 P0 -1 5 3 7 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode NS03_ZFL.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 47 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch 3 Select a search mode. 4 Use the number buttons to enter a title, group, chapter, folder or track number, or a time or a page. ⢠For a time search, enter the number of minutes and seconds into the currently playing title (DVD-Video/DVD-RW) or track (Video CD) you want playback to resume from. For example, press 4 , 5 , 0 , 0 to have play- back start from 45 minutes into the disc. For 1 hour, 20 minutes and 30 seconds, press 8 , 0 , 3 , 0 . ⢠Some DVD-Audio discs feature pages of browsable pictures. Enter the page number you want. 5 Press ENTER to start playback. ⢠You can only use time search with DVD- Video and Video CD discs. ⢠The disc must be playing in order to use time search. ⢠Search functions are not available with Video CD/Super VCDs in PBC mode, or unfinalized CD-R/RW discs. ⢠With more than two SACD discs you may not be able to select the first track of discs after the second disc. Playing DVD-Audio âÂÂBonus Groupsâ Some DVD-Audio discs have an extra âÂÂbonusâ group that requires a 4-digit key number to access. See the disc packaging for details and the key number. When you try and play the bonus group, the player will automatically ask you for the key number. 1 Use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit key number. ⢠ItâÂÂs also possible to enter the key number from the Options menu. See page 69. Switching subtitles Some DVD-Video discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are avail- able. You can switch subtitle language during playback. ⢠Press SUBTITLE repeatedly to select a subtitle option. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 65. Switching DVD-Video audio language When playing a DVD-Video disc recorded with dialog in two or more languages, you can switch audio language during playback. 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal NS03_ZFL.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 48 En ⢠Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio language option. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 65. Switching DVD-Audio audio channels Depending on the disc, you may be able to switch channels when playing DVD-Audio discsâÂÂsee the disc box for details. 1 Press AUDIO repeatedly to select an audio channel option. When you change the audio channel, play- back restarts from the beginning of the current track. ⢠Some discs only allow you to change audio channel from the disc menu. Press TOP MENU to access. ⢠To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 65. Switching Video CD/Super VCD audio channel When playing a Video CD/Super VCD you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel. ⢠Press AUDIO repeatly to select an audio channel option. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while watching a DVD-Video, DVD-Audio or Video CD/Super VCD. 1 During playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor. ⢠Normal ⢠2x ⢠4x ⢠Since DVD-Video, DVD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD have a fixed resolution, picture quality will deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor buttons to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely during playback. Au dio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH 1/2 Current /T otal Audio Linear PCM 192kHz24bit 1 2CH Digital Out Converted Au dio Stereo Zoom 2x Zoom 4x Normal Zoom 2x Zoom 4x NS03_ZFL.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 49 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠If the navigation square at the top of the screen disappears, press ZOOM again to display it. ⢠We do not recommend using DVD disc menus when the screen is zoomed as menu options will not be highlighted. ⢠If you are displaying subtitles, these will disappear when the screen is zoomed. They will reappear when you return the screen to normal. Switching camera angles Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more anglesâÂÂcheck the disc box for details. When a multi-angle scene is playing, a icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you preferâÂÂsee Angle Indicator on page 67). ⢠During playback (or when paused), press ANGLE to switch angle. Displaying disc information Various track, chapter and title information, as well as the video transmission rate for DVD discs, can be displayed on-screen while a disc is playing. OSD disc information ⢠To show/switch the information displayed, press DISPLAY . When a disc is playing, the information appears at the top of the screen. Keep pressing DISPLAY to change the displayed information. ⢠DVD-Video displays ⢠DVD-Audio displays ⢠VR format DVD-RW displays ⢠SACD displays (During multichannel playback only) Audio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH Angle Subtitle English 1 Title Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Tr. Rate 8.6Mbps Chapter Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Audio 1 Linear PCM Angle Subtitle - - 1 T rack Play DVD-A udio î 3.20 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 2.41 Remain 6.01 T otal 192kHz 24bit 2/0CH Tr . Rate : 9.5Mbps Group Play DVD î 3.21 1/3 Current / T otal Elapsed 53.20 Remain 56.41 T otal -Audio Audio Dolb y Digital 2/0CH 1 Subtitle - - Title Play DVD-R W Original î 0.08 1/32 Current / T otal Elapsed 30.22 Remain 30.30 T otal Tr . Rate 4.3Mbps Chapter Play DVD-R W Original î 1/1 Current / T otal T rack Play SA CD î 0.13 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.21 Remain 4.34 T otal Audio 3/2.1CH T rack Play SA CD î 0.22 1/9 Current / T otal Elapsed 3.38 Remain 4.00 T otal Disc Play SA CD î 0.05 Elapsed 73.00 Remain 73.05 T otal NS03_ZFL.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 50 En ⢠CD and Video CD displays ⢠(During PBC playback only.) ⢠Super VCD displays ⢠MP3 disc displays ⢠JPEG disc displays ⢠You can see disc information (number of titles/chapters, tracks, groups, folders and so on) from the Disc Navigator screen. See Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc on page 37. T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.40 Remain 5.47 T otal Disc Play CD î 28.00 Elapsed 30.20 Remain 58.20 T otal Play VCD î T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed Play MP3 î T rack T rack Name Outernational 0.18 1/17 Current / T otal Elapsed 12.42 Remain 13.00 T otal Play MP3 î Folder Folder Name ACP 2/7 Current / T otal Play JPEG î File File Name FL000001 1/40 Current / T otal Play JPEG î Folder Folder Name Holiday 2/6 Current / T otal NS03_ZFL.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Playing discs 05 51 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Display unit information Limited disc information also appears in the display unit. Press DISPLAY to change the displayed information. ⢠DVD-Video / DVD-RW displays Title no . Chapter no. Elapsed title time Title no . Remaining title time Title no . Chapter no. Remaining chapter time ⢠DVD-Audio displays Group no. T rack no. Elapsed track time Group no. T rack no. Remaining track time Group no. Remaining group time ⢠SACD / CD displays T rack no. Elapsed track time T rack no. Remaining track time Remaining disc time 22 8 4 9 2T T L 1 0 70 0 22 0 4 2 22 8 4 9 22 3 1 5 2 1 47 00 GRP 41 1 6 43 2 0 53 15 Disc ⢠Video CD displays T rack no. Elapsed disc time Remaining disc time T rack no. Remaining track time ⢠Super VCD displays T rack no. Elapsed track time ⢠MP3 disc displays T rack no. Elapsed track time T rack name F older name ⢠JPEG disc displays File name F older name 41 1 1 6 53 15 Disc 43 2 0 41 1 6 20 3 5 EVE R YB O D BE S T _ O F_ TI G E R _ 0 1 ZO O _ TR I P NS03_ZFL.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Viewing JPEG discs 06 52 En Chapter 6 Viewing JPEG discs Playing a JPEG slideshow After loading a CD/CD-R/RW containing JPEG pictures, press î to start a slideshow from the first folder/picture on the disc. The player displays the pictures in each folder in alphabetical order. Pictures are automatically adjusted so that they fill as much of the screen as possible (if the aspect ratio of the picture is different to your TV screen you may notice black bars at the sides, or at the top and bottom of the screen). While the slideshow is running: ⢠The î , ANGLE and ZOOM buttons do not work while the display shows Loading . ⢠The time it takes for the player to load a file increases with large file sizes. ⢠Up to 999 files are viewable on a disc. If there are more files than this on a disc, only the first 999 files are viewable. Using the JPEG Disc Navigator and Photo Browser Use the JPEG Disc Navigator to find a particular folder or picture by filename on the disc in the play position; use the Photo Browser to find a picture within a folder by thumbnail image. 1 Press DVD MENU to display the Disc Navigator screen. The left column shows the folders on the disc, the right column shows the files in a folder. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to navigate. When a file is highlighted, a thumbnail image is displayed. Button What it does î P auses the slideshow; press again to restart. î Displays the previous picture. î Displays the next picture. ANGLE P auses the slideshow and rotates the currently displayed picture 90ú clockwise. P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). ZOOM P auses the slideshow and zooms the screen (see below). P ress î (play) to restart slideshow). DVD MENU Displays the Disc Navigator screen (see below). FOLDER / FOLDER â Skip to the next/previous folder when playing a JPEG disc. Folder 1-2 001. F_001 002. F_002 JPEG Disc Navigator File 1-40 001. FL000001 002. FL000002 003. FL000003 004. FL000004 005. FL000005 006. FL000006 007. FL000007 008. FL000008 NS03_ZFL.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Viewing JPEG discs 06 53 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠When a folder is highlighted you can press ENTER to open the Photo Browser screen for that folder. See below for more on using the Photo Browser. 3 To resume the slideshow from the highlighted file, press ENTER . Using the Photo Browser The Photo Browser displays nine thumbnail images at a time from the current folder. 1 From the Disc Navigator screen, highlight a folder to display then press ENTER. The Photo Browser screen opens with the first nine pictures displayed as thumbnails. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to highlight a thumbnail picture. ⢠Use the track skip buttons ( î and î ) to see the previous / next page of thumbnails. Keep the button pressed if you want to skip several pages; release when you reach the page you want. ⢠To return to the Disc Navigator screen, press RETURN . 3 Press ENTER to display the selected thumbnail full size on screen. The slideshow resumes from the selected picture. Zooming the screen Using the zoom feature you can magnify a part of the screen by a factor of 2 or 4, while viewing pictures from a JPEG disc. 1 During sldeshow playback, use the ZOOM button to select the zoom factor. ⢠Normal â¢2 x â¢4 x ⢠The slideshow is paused when the screen is zoomed. ⢠Since JPEG pictures have a fixed resolution, picture quality may deteriorate, especially at 4x zoom. This is not a malfunction. 2 Use the cursor buttons ( îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ) to change the zoomed area. You can change the zoom factor and the zoomed area freely. 3 To resume the slideshow, press î (play). Photo Browser 2 / 40 Live at Soft Normal Zoom 2x Zoom 4x NS03_ZFL.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 07 54 En Chapter 7 Using the timer Setting the wake-up timer Use the wake-up timer to set the system to switch on at any time and start playing whatever source you want. ⢠The clock must be set to the correct time for the wake-up timer to work properly (see Setting the clock on page 19). 1 Select the source you want played. For example, press TUNER to select the radio as your source. 2 Prepare the source. For example, tune in the radio station you want to wake up to. 3 Set the volume. 4 Press TIMER/CLOCK twice to reach the timer menu. 5 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂWake-Up?â then press ENTER. 6 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTimerEdit?â then press ENTER. 7 Set the switch-on time. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. 8 Set the switch-off time. Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to set the hour, then press ENTER . Set the minute in the same way, pressing ENTER when youâÂÂre done. After pressing ENTER this last time, the wake- up indicator lights, and the switch-on, switch- off times, the function ( DVD/CD , etc.) and volume are confirmed in the display. 9 Switch the system into standby mode. The wake-up timer will not work if the system is left on! ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM L1/L2 CLOCK TIMER/ DVD TUNER TV LINE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER M ASTER V OLUME 9 MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 07 55 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠You can check the timer settings in standby by pressing TIMER/CLOCK twice. (Press TIMER/CLOCK once to display the current time.) Turning the wake-up timer on/off If the wake-up timer is on, it will switch on the system everyday at the time you have set. 1 Press TIMER/CLOCK twice to reach the timer menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂWake-Up?â then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTimer On?â or âÂÂTimer Off?âÂÂ. ⢠You must have the timer set (see above) to select ON . The wake-up timer switches on and off according to your previous settings. 4 Press ENTER. ⢠The wake-up timer will automatically be canceled if the clock is reset. NS03_ZFL.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Using the timer 07 56 En Setting the sleep timer The sleep timer switches off the system after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it. ⢠If you set the sleep timer while either the wake-up timer is active, the earlier switch off time takes priority. 1 Press TIMER/CLOCK twice to reach the timer menu. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂSleep?â then press ENTER. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a switch-off time then press ENTER. Choose between the following options: ⢠Sleep Auto â System switches off automatically after the currently playing SACD, CD, Video CD/Super VCD or MP3 disc has finished. ⢠Sleep 90 â System switches off after 90 minutes ⢠Sleep 60 â System switches off after an hour ⢠Sleep 30 â System switches off after 30 minutes ⢠Sleep Off â cancels the sleep timer 4 To check how much time is left, repeat steps 1 and 2. The remaining time is displayed momentarily. ⢠Sleep Auto will not work with Video CD/ Super VCDs during PBC playback or CDs in repeat play. MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ ENTER 9 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound setup 08 57 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Chapter 8 Surround sound setup Setting up surround sound The Room Setup feature (page 20) is designed to give you a basic surround sound setup, however you can make the more detailed settings that may improve the surround sound in your listening room. ⢠When you change speaker distance and channel level settings, these settings will override settings you made in the Room Setup. 1 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to choose the setting you want to adjust. The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the setting. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to make other settings. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to leave the System Setup menu. ⢠The System Setup menu is exited automatically after 5 minutes of inactivity. System Setup menu options Below are all the available settings in the setup menu. The first setting in each section is the default. See also the notes in each section for additional information about the settings. MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SETUP SYST E M ENTER 4 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound setup 08 58 En Front speakers distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to the front speakers: ⢠Front 0.3 m ~ Front 9 m â Distance can be set in increments of 0.3 m. The default is 3 m. Center speaker distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to the center speaker: ⢠Center 0.3 m ~ Center 9 m â Distance can be set in increments of 0.3 m. The default is 3 m. Surround speakers distance setting Specifies the distance from your listening position to the surround speakers: ⢠Surr. 0.3 m ~ Surr. 9 m â Distance can be set in increments 0.3 m. The default is 3 m. Dynamic Range Control Specifies the amount of dynamic range adjustment to Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks: ⢠DRC Off â No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume) ⢠DRC Mid â Mid setting ⢠DRC High â Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased) ⢠This setting works only with Dolby Digital and some DTS soundtracks. For other sources you can create a similar effect using the Midnight mode (see Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes on page 34). Dual mono setting Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with two separate soundtracks. ⢠L-Ch1 R-Ch2 â Both channels are played through the front speakers ⢠Ch1 Mono â Only channel 1 is played ⢠Ch2 Mono â Only channel 2 is played ⢠On the Ch1 Mono and Ch2 Mono settings the sound comes only from the center speaker (or from the front speakers if listening in STEREO mode). ⢠This setting works only with dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks. See the disc packaging for channel information. LFE attenuator setting Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass tones. Set the LFE attenuator as needed to prevent the ultra-low bass from distorting the sound. ⢠LFE ATT 0 â The LFE channel is played with no attenuation ⢠LFE ATT 10 â LFE channel is attenuated by 10dB ⢠LFE Off â LFE channel is not played NS03_ZFL.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Surround sound setup 08 59 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Setting the channel levels You can set the relative channel levels from your main listening position for each listening mode, including all the Surround and Advanced Surround modes. If you used the Room Setup feature (page 20), the channel levels for each listening mode will already be set. However, you can still fine- tune the levels here if you need to. 1 Press SURROUND or ADVANCED repeatedly to select a listening mode. 2 Switch the remote control to SUB, then press TEST TONE to hear the test tone. The test tone is output in the following order (from the speakers active in the current listening mode): ⢠L â Front left speaker ⢠C â Center speaker ⢠R â Front right speaker ⢠RS â Right surround speaker ⢠LS â Left surround speaker ⢠SW â Subwoofer 3 Use the MASTER VOLUME /â button to adjust the volume to an appropriate level. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the speaker levels in turn. You should hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker when seated in the main listening position. The channel level range is ñ 10 dB. 5 When youâÂÂre done, press ENTER to exit test tone setup. ⢠The speaker volume can be adjusted while listening to any sound source you want by pressing CH LEVEL and then using the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to adjust the channel levels. After youâÂÂre finished with one channel, use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to move to the next. ⢠Since the subwoofer produces ultra-low frequencies its sound may seem quieter than it actually is. ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND îÂÂî î î î ENTER TEST TONE 5 SURROUND M ASTER V OLUME ADV ANCED MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP NS03_ZFL.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Video Adjust menu 09 60 En Chapter 9 Video Adjust menu Video Adjust ⢠Default setting: Standard From the Video Adjust screen you can select the standard video presentation or define presets of your own. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂVideo Adjustâ from the on-screen display. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select a preset. ⢠Standard â Normal ⢠Memory1âÂÂ2 â Use for saving your own presets (see below) 3 Press ENTER to make the setting and exit the Video Adjust screen. ⢠Depending on the disc and the TV/ monitor, you may not see the effect clearly. Creating your own presets You can create up to two presets of your own. 1 Select one of the Memory presets (see above). 2 Press î (cursor down) to select âÂÂDetailed Settingsâ then press ENTER. 3 Adjust the picture quality settings. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a setting. ⢠Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to adjust the current setting. ⢠Press DISPLAY to switch between full and single view. ⢠You can change the preset number from the Recall Settings menu item. Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Standard V ideo Adjust Memory1 Detailed Settings Video Adjust Recall Settings Contrast Brightness Chroma Level Memory1 Memory1 min max min max min max NS03_ZFL.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Video Adjust menu 09 61 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch You can adjust any or all of the following picture quality settings: ⢠Contrast â Adjusts the contrast between light and dark. ⢠Brightness â Adjusts the overall bright- ness. ⢠Chroma Level â Adjusts how saturated colors appear. 4 Press ENTER to save the preset and exit the Video Adjust screen. NS03_ZFL.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 62 En Chapter 10 Initial Settings menu Using the Initial Settings menu The Initial Settings menu gives you complete control in setting up your DVD system, including video output settings and parental lock settings, among others. If an option is grayed out it means that it cannot be changed at the current time. This is usually because a disc is playing. Stop the disc, then change the setting. 1 Press HOME MENU and select âÂÂInitial Settingsâ from the on-screen display. 2 Select the setup category from the list on the left, then select an item from the menu list to the right. 3 Make the setting you want. ⢠The language options shown in the on- screen display illustrations on the following pages may not correspond to those available in your country or region. Digital Audio Mode Settings Make these settings if you connect an external digital component to the optical digital output. Note that DVD-Audio and SACD audio is not output through this jack. Dolby Digital Out ⢠Default setting: Dolby Digital If the connected component is Dolby Digital compatible, set to Dolby Digital , otherwise set to Dolby Digital > PCM . Check the manual that came with the other component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is Dolby Digital compatible. DTS Out ⢠Default setting: DTS If the connected component has a built-in DTS decoder, set this to DTS , otherwise set to DTS > PCM . Check the manual that came with the other component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is DTS compatible. Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital > PCM Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out DTS DTS > PCM Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 63 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠If you set to DTS with non-DTS compatible equipment, noise will be output when you play a DTS disc. ⢠DTS-CDs are always output as DTS digital audio regardless of this setting. Linear PCM Out ⢠Default setting: Down Sample Off If the connected component is compatible with high sampling rates (96 kHz), set this to Down Sample Off , otherwise set it to Down Sample On (96 kHz audio is converted to a more compatible 48 kHz). Check the manual that came with the other component if youâÂÂre unsure whether it is 96 kHz compatible. ⢠Even when set to Down Sample Off , some discs will still output down-sampled audio through the digital outputs (you only get full sampling rate audio through the analog outputs). Video Output settings TV Screen ⢠Default setting: 16:9 (Wide) If you have a widescreen TV, select the 16:9 (Wide) settingâÂÂwidescreen DVD software is then shown using the full screen area. When playing software recorded in conventional (4:3) format, the settings on your TV will determine how the material is presentedâ see the manual that came with your TV for details on what options are available. If you have a conventional TV, select either 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) . In Letter Box mode, widescreen software is shown with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Pan & Scan chops the sides off widescreen material to make it fit the 4:3 screen (so even though the image looks larger on the screen, youâÂÂre actually seeing less of the picture). See also Screen sizes and disc formats on page 87. Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Down Sample On Down Sample Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 64 En Component Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this system to your TV using the component video outputs. ⢠Default setting: Interlace If you have a progressive-scan compatible TV, set this to Progressive for flicker-free video output. If your TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video, set to Interlace . Check the operating instructions that came with your TV if youâÂÂre unsure about its compatibility. When setting to Progressive , you have to press ENTER once more to confirm (or RETURN to cancel). See also below for important information on progressive scan video. About progressive scan video Compared to interlace video, progressive scan video effectively doubles the scanning rate of the picture, resulting in a very stable, flicker-free image. Progressive scan video is available only from the component video output. ⢠When Component Out (above) is set to Progressive , there is no video output from the VIDEO and S-VIDEO jacks. If you want to display video on more than one monitor simultaneously, make sure that it is set to Interlace . ⢠If you connect a TV that is not compatible with a progressive scan signal and switch the system to progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press î STANDBY/ON to put the system in standby, then press and hold the front panel î (stop) button for about 8 seconds until the display shows Mem.Clr.? . Press the front panel VOL â or button so that the display shows Interlace? . Press the front panel î button to set to interlace and switch the system back on. Compatibility of this system with progressive-scan TVs. This system is compatible with progressive video Macro Vision System Copy Guard. CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 PROGRESSIVE SCAN PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE âÂÂSTANDARD DEFINITIONâ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER SERVICE CENTER. This system is compatible with the following Pioneer displays and monitors: PDP-503HDG, PDP-433HDG progressive scan-compatible TVs. Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Interlace Progressive Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 65 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch S-Video Out You only need to make this setting if you connected this system to your TV using an S-video cable. ⢠Default setting: S2 ⢠If you find that the picture is stretched or distorted on the default S2 setting, try changing it to S1 . Language settings Audio Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred audio language for DVD-Video discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the system automatically plays the disc in that language. The DVD-Video format recognizes 136 different languages. Select Other Language if you want to specify a language other than those listed. See also Selecting languages using the language code list on page 87. ⢠You can switch between the languages recorded on a DVD-Video disc during playback using the AUDIO button. (This does not affect this setting.) See Switching DVD-Video audio language on page 47. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs set the audio language automatically when loaded, overriding the Audio Language setting. ⢠Discs with two or more audio languages usually allow you to select the audio language from the disc menu. Press DVD MENU to access the disc menu. Subtitle Language ⢠Default setting: English This setting is your preferred subtitle language for DVD-Video discs. If the language you specify here is recorded on a disc, the system automatically plays the disc with those subtitles. The DVD-Video format recognizes 136 different languages. Select Other Language if you want to specify a language other than those listed. See also Selecting languages using the language code list on page 87. Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options S1 S2 Initial Settings TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Aud io Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 66 En ⢠You can usually change or switch off the subtitles on a DVD-Video disc during playback using the SUBTITLE button. (This does not affect this setting.) See Switching subtitles on page 47. ⢠Some DVD-Video discs set the subtitle language automatically when loaded, overriding the Subtitle Language setting. ⢠Discs with two or more subtitle languages usually allow you to select the subtitle language from the disc menu. Press DVD MENU to access the disc menu. DVD Menu Language ⢠Default setting: w/Subtitle Lang. Some multilingual discs have disc menus in several languages. This setting specifies in which language the disc menus should appear. Leave on the default setting for menus to appear in the same language as your Subtitle Language âÂÂsee above. The DVD-Video format recognizes 136 different languages. Select Other Language if you want to specify a language other than those listed. See also Selecting languages using the language code list on page 87. Subtitle Display ⢠Default setting: On When set to On , the player displays subtitles according to the Subtitle Language setting. Set to Off to switch subtitles off altogether. Display settings OSD Language ⢠Default setting: English This sets the language of this systemâÂÂs on- screen displays. On Screen Display ⢠Default setting: On Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Lang. English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD Menu Lang. Subtitle Display On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options English fran ais Español OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 67 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch This sets whether operation displays are shown on-screen ( Play , Resume , Scan and so on). Angle Indicator ⢠Default setting: On If you prefer not to see the camera icon on- screen during multi-angle scenes on DVD discs, change this setting to Off . Options Parental Lock ⢠Default level: Off ⢠Default password: none ⢠Default Country code: us (2119) Some DVD-Video discs feature a Parental Lock level. If the player is set to a lower level than the disc, the disc wonâÂÂt play. This gives you some control about what your children watch on your DVD system. Some discs also support the Country code feature. The player does not play certain scenes on these discs, depending on the Country code you set. Before you can set the Parental Lock level or the Country code you must register a password. As the password owner, you can change the Parental Lock level or Country code whenever you like. You can also change the password. ⢠Not all discs that you may consider inappropriate for your children use the Parental Lock feature. These discs will always play without requiring the password first. ⢠If you forget your password, youâÂÂll need to reset the system to its factory settings (see Resetting the system on page 77), then register a new password. Registering a new password You must register a password before you can change the Parental Lock level or enter a Country code. 1 Select âÂÂPasswordâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter a 4- digit password. The numbers you enter show up as asterisks (*) on-screen. OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: Register Code Number Initial Settings ** * * Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 68 En 3 Press ENTER to register the password and return to the Options menu screen. If you forget your password, you can reset the system then register a new one. See Resetting the system on page 77 for how to reset the system. Changing your password To change your password, confirm your existing password then enter a new one. 1 Select âÂÂPassword ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use the number buttons to enter your existing password, then press ENTER. The numbers appear as asterisks as you enter them. 3 Enter a new password. 4 Press ENTER to register the new password and return to the Options menu screen. Setting/changing the Parental Lock level 1 Select âÂÂLevel ChangeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a new level. Press î (cursor left) repeatedly to lock more levels (more discs will require the password); press î (cursor right) to unlock levels. You canâÂÂt lock level 1. 4 Press ENTER to set the new level and return to the Options menu screen. Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: P assword Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock: P asswor d Change Initial Settings ** * * ** ** Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pass word Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Parental Loc k : Level Change ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock : Le vel Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options NS03_ZFL.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 69 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Setting/changing the Country code You may also want to refer to the Country code list on page 88. 1 Select âÂÂCountry CodeâÂÂ. 2 Use number buttons to enter your password, then press ENTER . 3 Select a Country code. There are two ways you can do this. ⢠Select by code letter: Use îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) to change the Country code. ⢠Select by code number: Press î (cursor right) then use the number buttons to enter the 4-digit Country code (you can find the Country code list on page 88.) 4 Press ENTER to set the new Country code and return to the Options menu screen. ⢠Changing the Country code does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Bonus Group Some DVD-Audio discs have an extra âÂÂbonusâ group that requires a 4-digit key number to access. See the disc packaging for details and the key number. Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k Change: Country Code ** * * Pas s wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 P arental Loc k: Country Code ** * * Pass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k: Country Code ** * * P ass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer î Off (us) î On î Single î DVD-A udio î 2ch Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Bonus Group : Key Number Input Initial Settings _ _ _ _ NS03_ZFL.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 70 En When you play a DVD-Audio disc that has a bonus group, the key number input screen appears automatically. You can also access the same screen here. ⢠If you eject the disc, switch the power off, or unplug the player, you will need to re- enter the key number. Auto Disc Menu ⢠Default setting: On This specifies whether the menu (Top menu) is automatically displayed after loading a disc. Set to On if you want the menu displayed automatically, or Off if you donâÂÂt want it displayed. ⢠Some DVD discs display a menu automatically regardless of this setting. If you press î while a disc is loading, this setting is ignored. Group Playback ⢠Default setting: Single DVD-Audio discs can have up to 9 groups of tracks. When set to Single , the selected group plays and then the disc stops, or returns to the menu screen. Use the search function (page 46) to select the group to play. (You cannot use the track skip î / î or scan buttons î / î in this mode.) Set to All if you want to play all the groups on a disc consecutively. ⢠Even if the player is set to All but you select a group to play from the disc menu, only that group will play. If you stop playback, all groups will play again when you restart playback. DVD Playback Mode ⢠Default setting: DVD-Audio Some DVD-Audio discs contain DVD-Video content in addition to the DVD-Audio. Set to DVD-Video to play a DVD-Audio disc as if it were a DVD-Video disc. Note that in this case only the DVD-Video part of the disc will play. Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer All Single Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer DV D-Audio DV D-Video Initial Settings NS03_ZFL.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Initial Settings menu 10 71 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠This setting reverts to DVD-Audio when the function is changed, the disc tray is opened, or the power is switched into standby. SACD Playback ⢠Default setting: Multi-ch Area SACD discs can be divided up into several different areas â stereo audio ( 2ch Area ), multi-channel audio ( Multi-ch Area ) and, for hybrid SACDs, standard CD audio ( CD Area ). Select which you want to listen to. ⢠If you select an area that isnâÂÂt on the disc loaded, a different area will play. For example, if you choose standard CD audio but the disc loaded is not a hybrid SACD, the stereo SACD area will play. PhotoViewer ⢠Default setting: On This setting is important if you load a disc that contains both MP3 audio files and JPEG picture files. The default On setting allows you to view only the JPEG files on this kind of disc. Set to Off to be able to play the MP3 audio files. ⢠Changing the PhotoViewer setting does not take effect until the next disc is loaded (or the current disc is reloaded). Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer 2ch Area Multi-ch Area CD Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options On Off Initial Settings Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Di sc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer NS03_ZFL.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 72 En Chapter 12 Other connections Connecting external antennas External AM antenna Use 5âÂÂ6 meters of vinyl-insulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the AM loop antenna connected. External FM antenna Use a 75 ⦠coaxial cable to hook up an external FM antenna. Connecting auxiliary components This system has both stereo analog inputs and outputs, as well as one optical digital inputs and one optical digital output. Use these to connect external components, such as your VCR, MD or CD-R recorder. ⢠Connect the TV (IN) jacks to the audio outs of your TV (or VCR). This will enable you to hear the TV (or VCR) through this system. Connect using RCA pin- plug stereo cables. See also Reducing the TV and line signal levels on page 73. ENNA BAL AM LOOP ANTENNA Outdoor antenna Indoor antenna (vinyl-coated wire) 5âÂÂ6 m ANTENNA FM UNBALî 75 AM LOOPî ANTENNA 75 ⦠coaxial cable S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L INE1 L INE1 OUT TV IN VIDEO L R AUDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT XVâÂÂDV900 / XVâÂÂDV700 NS03_ZFL.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 73 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ⢠Connect the LINE 1 (IN) jacks to the analog outputs of an external playback component. These include components such as a VCR or cassette deck. Connect using RCA pin-plug stereo cables. See also Reducing the TV and line signal levels below. ⢠Connect the LINE 1 (OUT) jacks to the analog inputs of an external recording component. These include components such as a cassette deck, VCR, MD or another recorder with analog inputs. Connect using RCA pin- plug stereo cables. ⢠Connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT jack on the rear panel to the optical digital input of an external recording component. ⢠Connect the LINE 1 (OPTICAL IN) jack on the rear panel to the optical digital output of an external playback component. These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system. Connect using a optical digital cable (not supplied). Reducing the TV and line signal levels ⢠Default setting: ATT 6dB Some sources may produce a high signal level which may produce unpleasant distortion from the speakers. In such cases, you may need to reduce the signal level of the auxiliary source (connected to the TV or LINE 1 or LINE 2 analog inputs) by switching on the attenuator. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTV ATT?â or âÂÂLINE1 ATT?â or âÂÂLINE2 ATT?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂATT OffâÂÂ, âÂÂATT 6dBâ or âÂÂATT 10dBâÂÂ. If the ATT 6dB setting still results in distorted sound, try the ATT 10dB setting. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. C AL T AL N S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L R LINE1 LINE1 OUT TV IN A UDIO VIDEO L R AU D LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT T ape deck, etc. XVâÂÂDV900 / XV â DV700 OPTICAL DIGIT AL OUT LINE2 OPTICAL DIGIT AL IN LINE1 NS03_ZFL.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 74 En Recording mode The Recording mode allows you to make analog recordings from the LINE 1 (OUT) jacks. When Recording mode is on, most sound- related functions (including SURROUND , ADVANCED , AUTO , SYSTEM SETUP ) become inactive. The display will briefly blink RecMode On if you try and use a prohibited function while Recording mode is on. When Recording mode is off, the audio from the analog output may be interrupted, depending on the operation. 1 Press SOUND. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂRec Mode?âÂÂ. 3 Press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂR.Mode Onâ or âÂÂR.Mode OffâÂÂ. ⢠When Recording Mode is On a stereo downmix of multi-channel DVD-Audio and SACD discs is output from the speakers and from the analog audio jacks. Note that with some DVD-Audio disc, only the front left/right channels are output. When set to Off , multi-channel DVD-Audio and SACD discs are played through all the speakers, but front L/R audio is output from the analog audio jack. ⢠When R.Mode On is selected while playing SACD, the unit will loose speaker SW output and bass will become inaudible. Connecting using the S-video output If your TV has an S-video input, you can use this instead of the standard video output for a better quality picture. ⢠Use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUT to an S-video input on your TV. Line up the small triangle above the jack with the same mark on the plug before plugging in. ⢠The S-video ouptut is switchable between S1 and S2 formats for compatibility with all TVs. See S-Video Out on page 65 for more on this. S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT E1 N E1 U T TV IN VIDEO L R A UDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN FM UNBAL 75 AM L ANT E ANTENNA P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT TV XVâÂÂDV900 / XV â DV700 S-VIDEO INPUT NS03_ZFL.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Other connections 11 75 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Connecting using the component video output If your TV has component video inputs, you can use these instead of the standard video output to connect this system to your TV. This should give you the best quality picture from the three types of video output available. ⢠Use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT to a set of component inputs on your TV. ⢠The component video ouptut is switchable between interlaced and progressive formats. See Component Out on page 64 for more on this. AUDIO E1 N LINE2 IN P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA COMPONENT INPUT XVâÂÂDV900 / XV â DV700 NS03_ZFL.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 76 En Chapter 12 Additional information Switching off the demo ⢠Default setting: Demo On This system has an automatic demo feature that starts when the system is plugged in for the first time. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂDemo Mode?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂDemo Off?â then press ENTER to confirm. ⢠After setting the clock, the demo mode switches off automatically. However, if you unplug the system from the wall outlet, the demo mode will revert to Demo On (and the clock will be reset). Child Lock ⢠Default setting: Lock Off This system has a child lock feature that makes the front panel buttons and controls inoperative. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂChild Lock?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂLock On?â or âÂÂLock Off?âÂÂ. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. Changing the clock format ⢠Default setting: 12-Hour You can choose to display the clock in either 12 or 24 hour formats. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂ12/24 Hour?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select either âÂÂ12-Hour?â or âÂÂ24- Hour?âÂÂ. 5 Press ENTER to confirm. Changing the frequency step ⢠Default setting: FM 100 AM 10 If you find that you canâÂÂt tune into stations successfully, the frequency step may not be suitable for your country/region. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂFM AM Step?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select âÂÂFM 50 AM 9?â or âÂÂFM 100 AM 10?â then press ENTER to confirm. NS03_ZFL.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 77 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Setting the TV format ⢠Default setting: AUTO The default setting of this system is AUTO , and unless you notice that the picture is distorted when playing some discs, you should leave it set to AUTO . If you experience picture distortion with some discs, set the TV system to match your country or regionâÂÂs system. Doing this, however, may restrict the kinds of disc you can watch. The table below shows what kinds of disc are compatible with each setting ( AUTO , PAL and NTSC ). 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press SYSTEM SETUP. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select âÂÂTV System?âÂÂ, then press ENTER. 4 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select Auto, PAL or NTSC, then press ENTER to confirm. Watching NTSC on a PAL TV (MOD. PAL) Most models of the newly developed count- down PAL TV system detect 50 Hz (PAL)/60 Hz (NTSC) and automatically switch vertical amplitude, resulting in a display without vertical shrinkage. However, in some cases, the image may appear without color. If your PAL TV does not have a V-Hold control, you may not be able to watch NTSC discs because of picture roll. If the TV has a V-Hold control, adjust it until the picture stops rolling. On some TVs, the picture may shrink verti- cally, leaving black bands at the top and bottom of the screen. This is not a malfunc- tion; it is caused by the NTSC to PAL conver- sion. Resetting the system Use this procedure to reset all system settings (except for station memory) to the factory default. 1 Switch the system into standby. 2 Press and hold the top panel î î î î (Stop) button for about 8 seconds until the display shows âÂÂMem.Clr.?âÂÂ. 3 Press the top panel î button. The systemâÂÂs settings are now reset, and you should see the âÂÂWelcome to Pioneer DVD !â screen. Dimming the display ⢠Default setting: 3 The display has three brightness levels ( 1âÂÂ3 ). 1 Press DIMMER to change the brightness level of the display unit. Disc Player setting T ype Format NTSC P AL AUTO DVD NTSC NTSC MOD.P AL NTSC P AL NTSC P AL PA L Video CD NTSC NTSC MOD.P AL NTSC P AL NTSC P AL PA L CD/no disc â NTSC P AL NTSC or PA L NS03_ZFL.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 78 En Using and taking care of discs Titles, groups, chapters and tracks DVD discs are generally divided into one or more titles. Titles may be further subdivided into chapters. DVD-Audio discs are divided into one or more groups that can each contain a number of tracks. CDs, SACDs and Video CD/Super VCDs are divided into tracks. CD-ROMs contain folders and files. MP3 files are referred to as tracks. Folders may contain further folders. DVD Video regions All DVD Video discs carry a region mark on the case somewhere that indicates which region(s) of the world the disc is compatible with. Your DVD system also has a region mark, which you can find on the rear panel. Discs from incompatible regions will not play in this player. Discs marked ALL will play in any player. The diagram below shows the various DVD regions of the world. Title 1 Title 2 Title 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 1 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 1 T rack 1 Tr ack 2 T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 4 T rack 5 T rack 6 F older A Folder B Folder C T rack 1 T rack 2 T rack 3 T rack 1 File 1 File 2 .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .jpg .jpg NS03_ZFL.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 79 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Handling discs When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge. Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable. Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge as shown in the diagram below. Wipe lightly from the center of the disc using straight strokes. DonâÂÂt wipe the disc surface using circular strokes. If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records. Storing discs Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight). Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp- tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc. For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs. Do not load more than one disc into the player at a time. Discs to avoid Discs spin at high speed inside the player. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it in your playerâÂÂyou could end up damaging the unit. This unit is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs. NS03_ZFL.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 80 En Proper installation and maintenance of this system Hints on installation We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it: Do... î Use in a well-ventilated room. î Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack. DonâÂÂt... î Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances. î Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight. î Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment. î Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use. î Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interferenceâÂÂespecially if the television uses an indoor antenna. î Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam. î Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with clothâÂÂthis may prevent proper cooling of the system. î Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unitâÂÂs feet. Cleaning the pickup lens The DVD playerâÂÂs lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneer authorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens. Problems with condensation Condensation may form inside the player if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation wonâÂÂt damage the player, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using. Moving the system unit If you need to move the main unit, first remove a disc if thereâÂÂs one in the player, then press î STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn the system off. Wait for Good Bye to disappear from the display, then unplug the power cable. Never lift or move the unit during playbackâÂÂdiscs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged. ⢠Unplugging the unit before Good Bye disappears from the display may cause the system to return to the factory settings. NS03_ZFL.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 81 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Power cord caution Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or an electric shock. Do not place this unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. NS03_ZFL.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 82 En Troubleshooting Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work. ⢠If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions. General Problem Remedy The power does not turn on. ⢠Connect the power plug to the wall outlet. ⢠Disconnect the power plug from the outlet, and insert again. ⢠Make sure there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. No sound is output when a function is selected. ⢠If youâÂÂre using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 72). ⢠Press MUTE on the remote control to turn muting off. ⢠Adjust the VOLUME . No image is output when playing discs. ⢠Make sure the TV is connected correctly (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠Reset the video output to interlace (see Component Out on page 64) No sound from surround or center speakers. ⢠Refer to Setting the channel levels on page 59 to check the speaker levels. ⢠Check that you havenâÂÂt selected the STEREO sound mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 30). ⢠Check that the Virtual mode is not on ( Using the Advanced Surround effects on page 32). ⢠Connect the speakers properly (refer to the Setup Guide). CanâÂÂt operate the remote control. ⢠Replace the batteries (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠Operate within 23 ft. (7 m), 30ð of the remote sensor on the display unit (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. ⢠Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the display unit to direct light. No display ⢠Make sure everything is connected properly. NS03_ZFL.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 83 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch DVD/CD/Video CD player Timer indicator is blinking and the system will not switch on. ⢠Unplug the unit, then plug back in. Wait for one minute then switch on. ⢠Make sure the fan at the AMP section of the unit is not being blocked. ⢠Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ⢠If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy The disc is ejected automatically after loading. ⢠Clean the disc. ⢠Align the disc properly in the disc guide. ⢠If the region number on a DVD-video disc does not match the number on the player, the disc cannot be used (see DVD Video regions on page 78). ⢠Allow time for any condensation inside the player to evaporate. Avoid using the player near an air-conditioning unit. Playback is not possible. ⢠If the disc is loaded upside down, reload the disc with the label side face up. Picture playback stops and the operation buttons cannot be used. ⢠Press î (stop), then î (play) to start playback again. ⢠Switch the power off once, then on again using the front panel î STANDBY/ON button. Settings are canceled. ⢠When the power is cut due to power failure or by unplugging the power cable, settings will be canceled. No picture/No color. ⢠Check that connections are correct and that plugs are inserted fully. ⢠Check the instruction manual of the TV/monitor to make sure the TV/ monitor settings are incorrect. ⢠If your TV/monitor is connected using an S-video cable, try changing the S-Video Out setting (see S-Video Out on page 65). Screen is stretched or aspect does not change. ⢠The TV Screen setting is incorrect. Set the TV Screen option to match the TV/monitor you're using (see TV Screen on page 63). When recorded on a VCR or passed through an AV selector, there is disturbance in the playback picture. ⢠This system uses copy-protection technology which may prevent recording or cause picture problems when connected through a VCR or AV selector. This is not a malfunction. NS03_ZFL.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 84 En MP3/JPEG discs Picture disturbance during playback or dark. ⢠This player is compatible with Macro-Vision System copy guard. Some discs include a copy prevention signal, and when this type of disc is played back, stripes etc., may appear on some sections of the picture depending on the TV. This is not a malfunction. ⢠Discs respond differently to particular player functions. This may result in the screen becoming black for a brief instant or shaking slightly when the function is executed. These problems are largely due to differences between discs and disc content and are not malfunctions of this player. Noticeable difference in DVD and CD volume. ⢠DVDs and CDs use different recording methods. This is not a malfunction. Incomplete sound from headphones when listening to a DVD- Audio disc. ⢠Some multichannel DVD-Audio discs only output the front/right channels through headphones. Problem Remedy Problem Remedy CD-ROM disc is not recognized by the system. ⢠Make sure that the CD-ROM was recorded using the ISO 9660 disc format. See General disc compatibility on page 9 for other disc compatibility information. Files don âÂÂt show up in the Disc Navigator/ Photo Browser . ⢠The ï¬Âles on the disc must be named with the correct ï¬Âle extention: .mp3 for MP3 ï¬Âles; .jpg for JPEG ï¬Âles (upper or lower-case is OK). See General disc compatibility on page 9 for other disc compatibility information. JPEG ï¬Âles appear , but MP3 ï¬Âles donâÂÂt show up. ⢠Set the PhotoViewer menu option in the Initial Settings menu to Off to be able to access the MP3 ï¬Âles. See PhotoViewer on page 71. NS03_ZFL.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 85 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Tuner Error Messages Problem Remedy Considerable noise in radio broadcasts. ⢠Connect the antenna (refer to the Setup Guide). ⢠F ully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. ⢠Connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 72). ⢠Adjust the direction and position for best reception. ⢠Connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to the Setup Guide and Connecting external antennas on page 72). ⢠T urn off any other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it away from the main unit. ⢠The tuning inter val is incorrect for your countr y or region . T r y switching the tuning inter val (frequency step) (see Changing the frequency step on page 76). Auto tuning does not pick up some stations. ⢠The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. F or more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna. Sound is mono only . ⢠Check that the tuner is not set to FM mono (see Improving poor FM reception on page 28). Message Desciption Child Lock ⢠This message appears when the front panel buttons are pressed when the child lock feature is active. See Child Lock on page 76 for more on switching on/off the child lock. Rec Mode On ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because the Recording Mode is on (see Recording mode on page 74). Phones In ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because headphones are connected. 96K Stereo ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because the source is digital 88.2 or 96kHz PCM. No Surr. SP ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because there is no surround speaker output. Muting ⢠Blinks rapidly for 2 seconds when an operation is prohibited because the sound is muted (see Muting the sound on page 36). Exit ⢠Appears brieï¬Ây when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity . NS03_ZFL.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 86 En DVD-AUDIO ⢠Blinks rapidly when one of the below buttons is pressed while a DVD- Audio disc is loaded. ÷AUTO ÷SURROUND ÷ADV ANCED ÷DIALOGUE ÷VIRTU AL SB ÷BASS MODE SACD ⢠Blinks rapidly when one of the below buttons is pressed while a SACD disc is loaded. ÷AUTO ÷SURROUND ÷ADV ANCED ÷DIALOGUE ÷VIRTU AL SB ÷BASS MODE Message Desciption NS03_ZFL.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 87 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Screen sizes and disc formats DVD-Video discs come in several different screen aspects, ranging from TV programs, which are generally 4:3, to CinemaScope widescreen movies, with an aspect ratio of up to about 7:3. Televisions also come in different aspect ratios; âÂÂstandardâ 4:3 and widescreen 16:9. Widescreen TV users If you have a widescreen TV, the TV Screen setting (page 63) of this system should be set to 16:9 (Wide) . When you watch discs recorded in 4:3 format, you can use the TV controls to select how the picture is presented. Your TV may offer various zoom and stretch options; see the instructions that came with your TV for details. Please note that some movie aspect ratios are wider than 16:9, so even though you have a widescreen TV, these discs will still play in a âÂÂletterboxâ style with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen. Standard TV users If you have a standard TV, the TV Screen setting (page 63) of this system should be set to 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , depending on which you prefer. Set to 4:3 (Letter Box) , widescreen discs are shown with black bars top and bottom. Set to 4:3 (Pan&Scan) , widescreen discs are shown with the left and right sides cropped. Although the picture looks larger, you donâÂÂt actually see the whole picture. Please note that many widescreen discs override the systemâÂÂs settings so that the disc is shown in letterbox format regardless of the setting. ⢠Using the 16:9 (Wide) setting with a standard 4:3 TV, or either of the 4:3 settings with a widescreen TV, will result in a distorted picture. Selecting languages using the language code list Some of the language options (see Language settings on page 65) allow you to set your prefered language from any of the 136 languages listed in the Language code list on page 88. 1 Select âÂÂOther LanguageâÂÂ. 2 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor left/right) buttons to select either a code letter or a code number. 3 Use the îÂÂ/î (cursor up/down) buttons to select a code letter or a code number. See the Language code list on page 88 (next page) for a complete list of languages and codes. NS03_ZFL.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 88 En Language code list Language (Language code letter), Language code Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Dutch (nl), 1412 Russian (ru), 1821 Chinese (zh), 2608 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swedish (sv), 1922 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volapük (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Country code list Country, Country code, Country code letter Argentina, 0118, ar Australia, 0121, au Austria, 0120, at Belgium, 0205, be Brazil, 0218, br Canada, 0301, ca Chile, 0312, cl China, 0314, cn Denmark, 0411, dk Finland, 0609, fi France, 0618, fr Germany, 0405, de Hong Kong, 0811, hk India, 0914, in Indonesia, 0904, id Italy, 0920, it Japan, 1016, jp Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr Malaysia, 1325, my Mexico, 1324, mx Netherlands, 1412, nl New Zealand, 1426, nz Norway, 1415, no Pakistan, 1611, pk Philippines, 1608, ph Portugal, 1620, pt Russian Federation, 1821 , ru Singapore, 1907, sg Spain, 0519, es Switzerland, 0308, ch Sweden, 1905, se Taiwan, 2023, tw Thailand, 2008, th United Kingdom, 0702 , gb United States of America, 2119 , us NS03_ZFL.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 89 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Preset code list Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using. MANUFACTURER Code(s) ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH /PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK &TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M -ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 NS03_ZFL.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 90 En SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 NS03_ZFL.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 91 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Glossary Analog audio An electrical signal that directly represents sound. Compare this to digital audio which can be an electrical signal, but is an indirect representation of sound. See also Digital audio . Aspect ratio The width of a TV screen relative to its height. Conventional TVs are 4:3 (in other words, the screen is almost square); widescreen models are 16:9 (the screen is almost twice as wide as it is high). Bonus Group (DVD-Audio only) An âÂÂextraâ group on some DVD-Audio discs that requires a key number to access. See also Bonus Group on page 69. Browsable pictures (DVD-Audio only) A feature of some DVD-Audio discs in which the user can browse still pictures recorded on the disc as the audio is played. See also Slide- show . Digital audio An indirect representation of sound by numbers. During recording, the sound is measured at discrete intervals (44,100 times a second for CD audio) by an analog-to-digital converter, generating a stream of numbers. On playback, a digital-to-analog converter generates an analog signal based on these numbers. See also Sampling frequency and Analog audio . Dolby Digital 1 Using a maximum of 5.1 channels of audio, this high quality surround system is used in many of the finer movie theaters around the world. The on-screen display shows which channels are active, for example showing 3/2.1. The 3 being the two front channels and the center channel; the 2 being the surround channels, and the .1 being the LFE channel. Dolby Pro Logic / Pro Logic II A matrix decoding system that extracts 4.1 (Dolby Pro Logic) or 5.1 (Dolby Pro Logic II) channel surround sound from a two channel source. DTS DTS stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system different from Dolby Digital that has become a popular surround sound format for movies. Dynamic range The difference between the quietest and loudest sounds possible in an audio signal (without distorting or getting lost in noise). Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks are capable of a very wide dynamic range, deliv- ering dramatic cinema-like effects. R NS03_ZFL.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 92 En EXIF (Exchangeable Image File) A file format developed by Fuji Photo Film for digital still cameras. Digital cameras from various manuafcturers use this compressed file format which carries date, time and thumbnail information, as well as the picture data. File extension A tag added to the end of a filename to indi- cate the type of file. For example, âÂÂ.mp3â indi- cates an MP3 file. ISO 9660 format International standard for the volume and file structure of CD-ROM discs. JPEG A file format used for still images, such as photographs and illustrations. JPEG files are identified by the file extension âÂÂ.jpgâ or âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂ. Most digital cameras use this format. MP3 MP3 (MPEG1 audio layer 3) is a compressed audio file format. Files are recognized by their file extension âÂÂ.mp3â or âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂ. MLP / Packed PCM (DVD-Audio only) A lossless compression system that enables more PCM audio to be stored on a DVD- Audio disc than would otherwise be possible. MPEG audio An audio format used on Video CDs and some DVD discs. This system can convert MPEG audio to PCM format for wider compatibility with digital recorders and AV amplifiers. See also PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) . MPEG video The video format used for Video CDs and DVDs. Video CD uses the older MPEG-1 stan- dard, while DVD uses the newer and much better quality MPEG-2 standard. PBC (PlayBack Control) (Video CD/Super VCD only) A system of navigating a Video CD/Super VCD through on-screen menus recorded onto the disc. Especially good for discs that you would normally not watch from beginning to end all at onceâÂÂkaraoke discs, for example. PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) The most common system of encoding digital audio, found on CDs and DAT. Excellent quality, but requires a lot of data compared to formats such as Dolby Digital and MPEG audio. See also Digital audio . Regions (DVD-Video only) These associate discs and players with partic- ular areas of the world. This system will only play discs that have compatible region codes. You can find the region code of your system by looking on the rear panel. Some discs are compatible with more than one region (or all regions). S1 S-video output This S-video signal format includes aspect ratio information (4:3 or 16:9) within the video signal. S2 S-video output S2 is an enhanced version of S-video which, in addition to aspect ratio information, contains letterbox / pan & scan information. Widescreen TVs which are compatible with S2 S-video automatically switch to the appropriate mode according to the signal. NS03_ZFL.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 93 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Sampling frequency The rate at which sound is measured to be turned into digital audio data. The higher the rate, the better the sound quality, but the more digital information is generated. Stan- dard CD audio has a sampling frequency of 44.1kHz, which means 44,100 samples (measurements) per second. See also Digital audio . Slide show (DVD, Video CD/Super VCD) A feature of some DVD discs and Video-CD/ Super VCDs in which still pictures recorded on the disc cycle automatically as the audio is played. See also Browsable pictures . Super Audio CD (SACD) Super Audio CD is a high quality audio disc format that can accomodate high sampling rate stereo and multi-channel audio, as well as conventional CD audio all on the same disc. NS03_ZFL.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 94 En Specifications Amplifier Section Continuous Power (RMS) . . . . . 75 W / channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1 kHz, THD 10%, 6 ⦠) Disc section Digital audio characteristics . . . . . . . . DVD fs: 96 kHz, 24-bit Type . . . . . . DVD system, Video CD system and Compact Disc digital audio system Frequency response 48 kHz sampling . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz â 22 kHz 96 kHz sampling . . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz â 44 kHz 192 kHz sampling . . . . . . . . . 4 Hz â 88 kHz S/N ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 dB Dynamic range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 dB Total harmonic distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.005 % Wow and Flutter . . . . . . . Limit of measurement (ñ0.001 % W.PEAK) or less (JEITA) FM tuner section Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87.5 - 108MHz Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ⦠, unbalanced AM tuner section Frequency Range . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 kHz to 1,602 kHz (9 kHz step) . . . . . . . . . . . 530 kHz to 1,700 kHz (10 kHz step) Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loop antenna Miscellaneous Power Requirements . . AC 110âÂÂ120 V/220âÂÂ230 V/240 V, 50/60 Hz Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 W Power Consumption in standby mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.55 W Dimensions: DVD/CD Tuner . 360 (W) x 74 (H) x 270 (D) mm Display Unit . . . . . 274 (W) x 44 (H) x 35 (D) mm Weight: DVD/CD Tuner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 kg Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2 kg Accessories Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Setup guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Remote control unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Video Cord (yellow plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Display cable (gray plugs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable A (blue plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Control cable B (black plugs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FM antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Dry cell batteries (AA/R6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Speaker cords (5 m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Speaker cords (10 m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Non-skid pads (center speaker) (S-DV700ST only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Non-skid pads (subwoofer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Speaker stands (front/surround speakers) . . . 4 Speaker stand (center speaker) (S-DV900ST only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Large screw (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Medium screw (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Small screw (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Cover plate (S-DV900ST only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Satellite Speaker System (S-DV700ST) Type Sealed, antimagnetic Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 cm (cone type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.2 cm (cone type) Nominal impedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 â 20,000 Hz Max. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 W (JEITA) Front / Surround speakers Dimensions . . . . 110 (W) x 59 (D) x 284 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 kg Center speaker Dimensions . . . . 284 (W) x 59 (D) x 110 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 kg NS03_ZFL.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Additional information 12 95 En English Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch Satellite Speaker System (S-DV900ST) Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat panel type bookshelf Speaker Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 cm exciter x 3 Tweeter . . . . . . . . . 2.6 cm (semi-dome type) Nominal impedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 â 35,000 Hz Max. input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 W (JEITA) Front / Surround speakers Dimensions . . . . 120 (W) x 30 (D) x 450 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 kg Center speaker Dimensions . . . . 420 (W) x 32 (D) x 120 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 kg Powered subwoofer (S-DV700SW/S-DV900SW) Type . . . . . . Bass reflex floor type, antimagnetic Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 cm (cone type) Nominal impedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ⦠Frequency range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 â 2,300 Hz Max. input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 W (JEITA) Dimensions . . . 192 (W) x 436 (D) x 395 (H) cm Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 kg ⢠Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements. T he S-DV900ST satellite speakers are flat-panel- type units that use NXT î speaker technology . T hese slim style speakers allow for easy installation anywhere. NXT and the logo are registered trademarks of New T ransducers Limited. This product includes F ontAvenueî fonts licenced by NEC corporation. F ontAvenue is a register ed trademark of NEC Corporation. NS03_ZFL.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
XV-DV900/700.book 2 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
XV-DV900/700.book 3 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION 5 cm 5 cm 5 cm 28 cm 15 cm 15 cm 00Cover & Anki.fm 4 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
5 ChH æÂÂè¬Âæ 購å ÂéÂÂç¢åÂÂã è«ÂéÂÂè®Â使ç¨說æÂÂæ¸以äºÂ解æÂŒÂÂèÂÂçÂÂæ£確æÂÂä½Âæ¹æ³ÂãÂÂéÂÂè®Âå®Âç¢å¾Âï¼Âè«Â妥åÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Â以åÂÂæÂ¥å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂã ç®é 01 éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå åÂÂè½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 家åºÂå½±é¢使ç¨說æ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CD-R/RW 堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 DVD-R/RW 堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PC 製ä½Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 å£Â縮é³頻堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 JPEG æÂÂ件堼容æ§ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 02 æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 顯示å¹Âè£Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 éÂÂæ§å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 03 éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ éÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 è¨Âç½®æÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 è¨Âç½®éÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 使ç¨è¢å¹Â顯示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 åºæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ§å¶æÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 VCD/ 趠素VCD ç PBC é¸å® . . . . . . . . . 26 æ¶è½æ¶é³橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 æ¹åÂÂä¸Âè¯ç FM æÂ¥æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 è¨Âæ¶éÂȏº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȏº . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 æ¶è½堶ä»ÂæÂÂæ¾溠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 04 家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ èªåÂÂè½é³模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡Âæ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Âè¨Âå® . . . . . . . . . . 31 以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ç¨è³æ©Âæ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 調ç¯Âé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 å¢Âå¼·å°Â話 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æ¶è½ . . . . . . . . . . 34 使ç¨å®ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âè½é³模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 調ç¯Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 å¢Âå¼·ä½Âé³çÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 éÂÂé³ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 05 æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç ä»Âç´¹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 使ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ覽ç¢ÂçÂÂ堧容 . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 æÂÂæÂÂç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²î¿éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 循ç°æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â段 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 使ç¨ OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 使ç¨顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 使ç¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 使ç¨ OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 使ç¨ OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 使ç¨æ¬æ©Â顯示幠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 渠é¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 æÂÂç´¢ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 æÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢Âç âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Ââ . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Ã¥ÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂ訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ã¥ÂÂæ DVD å±ç¢ÂçÂÂé³頻è²é . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ã¥ÂÂæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD çÂÂé³頻è²é . . . . . . 48 æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè¦Â觠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 XV-DV900/700.book 5 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
6 ChH 顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 OSD ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 顯示å¹Âè³Â訠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 06 è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç æÂÂæ¾ JPEG ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 使ç¨ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ . . . . . . 52 æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 07 使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ è¨Âç½®åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 è¨Âç½®ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 08 ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® è¨Âå®Âç°ç¹Âè² . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 系統è¨Âå®Âé¸å®é¸頠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 è¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 09 è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 åµ建æ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 10 Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 使ç¨åÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® . . . . 62 Digital Audio Mode Settings ï¼Âæ¸ä½Âé³頻模 å¼Âè¨Âå®Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Dolby Digital Out ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â輸åº＠. . 62 DTS Out ï¼ DTS 輸åº＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Linear PCM Out ï¼Âç·Âæ§ PCM 輸åº＠. . . 63 Video Output settings ï¼Âè¦Â頻輸åºè¨Â置＠63 TV Screen ï¼ TV å±Âå¹Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸åº＠. . . . . . . 64 S-Video Out ï¼ S è¦Â頻輸åº＠. . . . . . . . . 65 Language settings ï¼ÂèªÂè¨Âè¨Â置＠. . . . . . 65 Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ . . . . . . . 65 Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ . . . . . 65 DVD Menu Language ï¼ DVD é¸å®èªÂè¨Âï¼ 66 Subtitle Display ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示＠. . . . . . . 66 Display settings ï¼Â顯示è¨Â置＠. . . . . . . . 66 OSD Language ï¼ OSD èªÂè¨Âï¼ . . . . . . . 66 On Screen Display ï¼Âè¢å¹Â顯示＠. . . . . 66 Angle Indicator ï¼Âè§Â度æÂÂ示å¨＠. . . . . . 67 Options ï¼Âé¸頠＠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Parental Lock ï¼Â家é·éÂÂå®Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bonus Group ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âï¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Auto Disc Menu ï¼ÂèªåÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®＠. . . . 70 Group Playback ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ¾＠. . . . . . . . 70 DVD Playback Mode ï¼ DVD æÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ 70 SACD Playback ï¼ SACD æÂÂæ¾＠. . . . . . . 71 PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠. . . . . . . . 71 11 å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé»平 . . . . . . . . . . 73 éÂÂé³模张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 使ç¨ S è¦Â頻輸åº端é²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 使ç¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 12 éÂÂå è³Â訠éÂÂéÂÂæ¼Â示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 ç«¥é . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 æ¹è®ÂæÂÂéÂÂ格张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂçÂÂç´ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 è¨Âç½®é»è¦Âå¶张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 å¨ PAL å¶é»è¦Âæ© ï¼ MOD.PAL ï¼Âä¸Âè§Âç NTSC ç¯Âç® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 éÂÂç½®æ¬系統 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 調ç¯Â顯示å¹Â亮度 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 使ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç« åÂÂæ²ç® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂå . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 æ¿åÂÂç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ã¥ÂÂå²ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 ä¸Âå¯使ç¨çÂÂç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 æ¬系統æ£確å®Âè£ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¶Âè· . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 渠æ½Âæ¾åÂÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 éÂÂæ¼çµÂé²åÂÂé¡ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 æ¬移æ¬橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 é»æºÂç·Â注æÂÂäºÂé  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 XV-DV900/700.book 6 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
7 ChH æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 ä¸Âè¬ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 DVD/CD/VCD æÂÂæ¾橠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 MP3/JPEG ç¢Âç . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 調諧å¨ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ格张. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 寬å±Âé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 æ¨ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂ訠. . . . . . . . . . . 87 èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Ã¥ÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代碼åÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 é Âè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 è¡Â誠. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 è¦Âæ ¼ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 XV-DV900/700.book 7 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 8 ChH 第 1 ç« éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå åÂÂè½ DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD 堼容 使æ¨å¯é«Âé© DVD å±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂ趠素CD å±碠ï¼ÂSACD＠趠å¡çÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ質é³頻æ§è½ã æ¿輠24bit/192kHz DAC çÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂå³èÂÂæ¾ÂÂæ¾ æ©ÂèÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣çÂÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå®Â堨堼容 ï¼ å¾ÂèÂÂå¨åÂÂæ Â篠åÂÂã ä½Âé»平解æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé«Â頻細ç¯Âæ¹é¢è½夠æÂÂä¾Â極佳 çÂÂé³質ã éÂÂç¨æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸你ã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯 ã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥Âé 輯 II *1 å DTS *2 è»Âé«ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¶Âé³頻æ§è½ 堧置å¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âå DTS 解碼å¨è®Âæ¨è½夠享åÂÂå° 帶æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âå DTS 編碼ç DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå ·æÂÂçÂÂç æ£ç¨ç«Âå¤Âè²éÂÂ家åºÂå½±é¢è²é³æÂÂæÂÂã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯åÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯 II 解碼æ¹å¼Âé éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ çºéÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂè³ÂæÂÂå¢Âæ·»äºÂ極 大çÂÂéÂÂæ¼åÂÂã ç°ç¹Âè²é³æÂÂçÂÂç°¡æÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® éÂÂéÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®åÂÂè½ ï¼ å 使ç¨堩åÂÂæÂ¥é©Âå³å¯è¨Âç½® åºæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²é³æ ã åÂÂçÂ¥æ¬æ©Âæ¨è½é³æ¿éÂÂçÂÂ大 å°Â以åÂÂæ¨çÂÂè½é³ä½Â置徠＠系統å³è½èªåÂÂé Âç½®ç° ç¹Âè²é³æÂÂã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¾大 å¨æÂÂæ¾ DVD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼ æ¨è½夠æ¾大 Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂä»»ä¸Âé¨ å ä»Âç´°è§ÂçÂÂï¼ æ 大å¯æ¾大 å° 4 Ã¥ÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 4 8 é  â æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢â ã MP3 堼容 æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âå¯堼容å«æ MP3 é³頻æ²ç®ç CD-Rã CD-RW å CD-ROM ç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 10 é  â å£Â縮 é³頻堼容æ§ â ã åÂÂå½¢åÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示 Ã¥ÂÂå½¢åÂÂè¢ 幠顯示è®Âæ¨ è½夠å å 輠é¬Âå°訠置 å 使ç¨æ¨ç DVD 家åºÂå½±é¢系統ã ç¯Âè½è¨Â訠æ¬系統èÂÂæ¼徠æ©Â模å¼ÂæÂÂçÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂçº 0.55 W ã *1 ç¶ÂæÂÂæ¯Â實é©Â室æÂÂæ¬ÂçÂÂç¢ã âÂÂDolbyâ ã âÂÂPro LogicâÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé D 樠èªÂæ¯æÂÂæ¯Â實é©Â室çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã *2 âÂÂDTSâÂÂÃ¥ÂÂâÂÂDTS Digital Surroundâ çºæ¸ 碼 å½±é¢系統堬å¸ ï¼ÂDigital Theater Systemsï¼ÂInc.ï¼ÂçÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã XV-DV900/700.book 8 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 9 ChH Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 家åºÂå½±é¢使ç¨說æ æ¨å¯è½ ç¿ æ £ æ¼使ç¨ ç« é« è² è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾ æ¶ è½ é³ æ¨Âè å¾Âä¾Âæ²ÂæÂÂç¨éÂÂ家åºÂå½±é¢系統 ï¼ å¾Âè å¯以å¨æ¨æ¶ è½æ²ç® æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ æ ä¾Âæ´夠ç å¯é¸頠ç® ï¼Â妠ç°繠è²＠ã 家åºÂå½± é¢ æ¯ æÂÂå©ç¨ 夠é³ è» ä¾Âåµé 丠種 ç° ç¹Âè² æÂÂæ ＠è®Âæ¨æÂÂå°èª己æ£èÂÂæ¼åÂÂä½Âå ´æ¯æÂÂè é³樠æÂÂçÂÂä¸Âå¿Âä½Âç½® ã ä¾ÂæºÂæ¼家åºÂå½±é¢系統çÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ä¸Âå åÂÂ決æ¼æ¨å¨æ¿éÂÂå §æÂÂå®Âæ¾çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨æ 泠＠éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ決æ¼æÂÂæ¾æºÂ以åÂÂ系統çÂÂè²é³è¨Âç½®ã ç±æ¼堶尺寸 ï¼Â質éÂÂ以åÂÂ使ç¨ 便æ·ç ç¹é»Âï¼ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå·² æ çº 家 庠影é¢ç åº æ¬ æ æ¾ æºÂè³Âæ ãÂÂ覠DVD èÂÂå®Âï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¾Âä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç²å¾Âå¤Âé 6 種 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé³軠＠èÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé³è»Âå°Â被ç¼éÂÂå°æ¨系統ç åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ è² å¨ ä¸ÂãÂÂé 就 æ¯ç°繠è² æ æ ç åµé æ¹ å¼Âï¼Âå¯以給æ¨以身è¨堶å¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æ¬æ©Âå°Âæ ¹æÂÂæ¨çÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è¨Âç½®æ 泠＠èªåÂÂå°ÂæÂÂ毠æ¸你＠DTS æÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âç°繠DVD å½±ç¢Âé²è¡Â解碼ãÂÂå¨ 大å¤Âæ¸æ æ³Â丠＠æ¨å°Âç¡éÂÂæ¹è®Âå³å¯ç²å¾Âé¼çÂÂç ç°ç¹Âè²ï¼Âä½Âå¨第 3 0 é  â 家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æÂÂâ 丠å°Âå°Âå ¶ ä»ÂæÂÂæ é² è¡Â說æ ï¼Âå¦Âç¨ å¤Âè²é ç° ç¹Âè² æ¶è½ CDï¼ ã ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ æ¬æ©Â訠訠çºå¯èÂÂ帶 æÂÂ以丠丠å æÂÂå¹¾å 樠誠ç è»Âé«Â堼容︰ ⢠KODAK Picture CD ⢠æ¯F uji Photo Film å ¬å¸çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âæ¯æ IEC ä¹Â趠素VCD æ¨Â溠ã èÂÂå½±é³ CD æ¨ÂæºÂç¸毠ï¼Â趠素VCD å¯æÂÂä¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¶ÂçÂÂç«質 ï¼Â並å¯ é²è¡Âå ©æ¢Âç«Âé«Âè²é³è»ÂçÂÂéÂÂ製 ã 趠素VCD éÂÂæ¯æ 寬è¢å¹Â尺寸ã 堶ä»Âæ ¼ å¼ ï¼Âå æ¬ ä½ ä¸ÂéÂÂæ¼ 丠åÂÂ格张ï¼Âä¸Âè½ å¨ æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾︰ DVD-RAM / DVD-ROM / CD-ROM * * é¤é£äºÂå«æ MP3æ JPEGçÂÂ以夠ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå£Â縮 é³頻堼容æ§ å JPEG æÂÂ件堼容æ§ ã VIDEO CD XV-DV900/700.book 9 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 10 ChH 使ç¨ DVD éÂÂ製æ©Âï¼ÂCD éÂÂ製æ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ人é»蠦éÂÂ製 çÂÂD VD-R/RW å CD-R/RW ç¢Âç ï¼ÂCD å±ç¢Âå VCDï¼ å¯è½ä¸Âè½å¨æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂå ¶åÂÂå å¯è½æÂÂç¾å¤Âï¼ å æ¬ä½Âä¸ÂéÂÂæ¼ï¼Â使ç¨çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ éÂÂ製é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âæ¾åÂÂé¡é ÂçÂÂæÂÂå£Âï¼Â塵å¢æÂÂçµÂé² ã æ éÂÂå°Âç¨ è» é« å 格 å¼ÂçÂÂ注 æ 亠頠ï¼Âè« å è¦Â丠æÂÂã CD-R/RW 堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾以 CD å±ç¢Âæ VCD æ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製ç CD-R å CD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âå ¶ä½Âçºå«æ MP3 æÂÂJ PEG æÂÂ件ç CD-ROM é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂä½Âæ¯＠任ä½Âå ¶ä»Â堧容é½æÂÂ使ç¢ÂçÂÂç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂ使輸 åºç¢çÂÂåªé³î¿失çÂÂã â¢ æ¬æ©Âç¡æ³ÂéÂÂ製 CD-R æ CD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ä½ÂçºCDå±ç¢ÂéÂÂ製çÂÂæªç¶ÂæÂÂçµ å®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âä½Âç¡æ³Â顯示堶å®Âæ´ çÂÂç®é ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂï¼ ã DVD-R/RW 堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾以 DVDå½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製並ç¨DVD éÂÂ製æ©ÂæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂç DVD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ç¨è¦Âé »éÂÂ製 ï¼ÂVRï¼Âæ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製 çÂÂD VD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ è£Âå ¥ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂ徠＠顯示å¹Âå°Â顯 示 DVD-RW ã â¢ æÂÂæ¾ç± DVD éÂÂ製æ©Â編輯ç VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RW 碠çÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå¨編 輯é»Âè è¢å¹Âå¯è½æ« æÂÂè®Â黠＠並丠/ æ è æ¨å¯è½æÂÂçÂÂè¦Â編輯é»Âä½Âç½®åÂÂé¢ çÂÂç«é¢ã â¢ æ¬æ©Âç¡æ³ÂéÂÂ製 DVD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾æªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂçÂÂDVD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂã PC 製ä½Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨ç¨åÂÂ人é»蠦éÂÂ製ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âå³使該ç¢Âç æ¯以åÂÂè¿°ç âÂÂ堼容格å¼ÂâÂÂéÂÂ製çÂÂï¼Âä¹Âå¯è½ ç± æ¼製ä½Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂç¨ç¨Âå¼ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®åÂÂé¡ÂèÂÂç¡ æ³ å¨æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂéÂÂå°æ¤é¡Âæ æ³Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè»Âé« ç¼è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨詢詳æ ã â¢ 檢æÂÂ¥DVD-R/RWæ C D-R/RW è»Âé«Âç¢ÂçÂÂå è£Âç ＠以ç²å¾Âæ´å¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ堼容æ¹é¢çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã å£Â縮é³頻堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾åÂÂ樣çÂÂçº32 ã 44.1æ 48kHz丠堶ä¸ÂæÂÂå«æÂÂ件以 MPEG-1 é³頻層 3 ï¼ÂMP3ï¼ æ ¼å¼Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç CD-ROMãÂÂCD-R å C D-RW ç¢Âç ã ä¸Â堼容çÂÂæÂÂ件å°Âä¸Âè½æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ ä¸ÂæÂÂ顯示 Can't play this format ï¼Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ¤格å¼Âï¼ ç è¨Âæ¯ ãÂÂ顯示å¹Â丠顯示 â No Play â ï¼Âä¸Âæ æ¾＠ã ã â¢ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨è¦æ¡ç¨åºå®Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂçÂÂMP3 æÂÂ件 ã å¯讠ä½Âå  ç ï¼ÂVBRï¼Âç MP3 æ 件è½夠被æ æ¾＠ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂå¯è½ç¡æ³Âæ£確顯示ã â¢ ç¨æ¼編輯 MP3 æÂÂ件ç CD-ROM å¿ é Â符å ISO 9660 Level 1 æ 2 覠池ãÂÂC D ç©çÂÂæ ¼å¼Â︰模 å¼ 1ï¼Â模张2 XA Form 1ãÂÂæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå ¼ 容R omeo è Joliet æÂÂ件系統ã â¢ è«Â使ç¨ CD-RæÂÂC D-RWç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂ製æ¨çÂÂæÂÂ件 ã 碠çÂÂå¿ é ÂæÂÂçµÂå®Âæ ï¼Âå³çÂÂ段忠é ÂçµÂæÂÂ＠以便 è½ å¨æ¬æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸Â堼容å¤ÂçÂÂ段 ç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂæ¬æ©ÂåªèÂÂå¥å¤ÂçÂÂ段ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ第 1 å ç 段ã â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âå æÂÂæ¾æÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº .mp3æ . MP3 çÂÂæ²ç®ã â¢ å½åÂÂMP3 æÂÂ件æ ＠è«Âå ä¸Âç¸æÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ件æ´å±Âå ï¼Â.mp3ï¼ ã æÂÂ件根æÂÂæÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾ã çº亠é² æ¢åªè²åÂÂæ éÂÂï¼Âè«Âå¿å°Âå ¶ä»Â種é¡ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件 使ç¨éÂÂäºÂæ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂã XV-DV900/700.book 10 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ä¹Âå 01 11 ChH Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂæÂÂå¤Âå¯èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 999 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件 ï¼ÂMP3/ JPEGï¼Âå 499 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件夾ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ 件æÂÂæÂÂ件夾æ¸趠éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå¶ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤Âåªè½ æÂÂæ¾éÂÂå¶æ¸ç®堧çÂÂæÂÂ件æÂÂæÂÂ件夾ãÂÂæÂÂ件å æÂÂ件夾以åÂÂæ¯Âé ÂåºÂè®Âå / 顯 示ãÂÂè«Â注æÂÂï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂ件çµÂæ§Âè¼Âçºè¤ÂéÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯è½ä¸Âè½è®Âå /æ æ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ件ã â¢ æÂÂ件夾åÂÂæ²ç®åÂÂ稱 ï¼Âä¸Âå æ¾ÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ å°Â被顯示ã â¢ å°ÂM P3 æÂÂ件編碼å¯æÂÂ許å¤Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂ製ä½Âå  çÂÂãÂÂæ¬ æ©Âè¨Âè¨Âå¯èÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¨é¨堼容 ãÂʊȴ 128Kbps 編碼çÂÂé³頻æÂ¥è¿Â常è¦Âç CD é³質ã æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ä½Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ件ï¼Âä½Â諠注æÂÂï¼Âå¨ä½Âä½Âå ÂçÂÂæÂÂé³質å°ÂæÂÂ顯ä¸ÂéÂÂã JPEG æÂÂ件堼容æ§ â¢ æ¬æ©Âæ¯æÂÂæÂÂé«Âçº 8 ç¾èÂŒÂÂç´ çÂÂåº締JPEG å EXIF 2.1* éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件ï¼ÂæÂÂ大åÂÂç´åÂÂæ°´å¹³å 辨çÂÂçº 5120 Ã¥ÂÂç´ ï¼ ãÂÂï¼ * æ¸ä½Âç¸æ©ÂæÂÂç¨æ 件格张＠⢠ç¨æ¼編輯 JPEG æÂÂ件ç CD-ROM å¿ é Â符å ISO 9660 Level 1 æ 2 覠池ã CD ç©çÂÂæ ¼å¼Â︰模 å¼Â1 ï¼Â模 å¼Â2 XA Form 1ã æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå ¼ 容R omeo è J oliet æÂÂ件系統ã â¢ æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©ÂåªæÂÂæ¾æÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂçº.jpgæÂÂ. JPG çÂÂæÂÂ件ã XV-DV900/700.book 11 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 12 ChH 第 2 ç« æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 Ã¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ 1 VOLUME æÂÂé ç¨æ¼調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã 2 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã 3 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ DVD/CD Ã¥ÂÂè½ãÂÂä¹Âå¯以ç¨æ¼ éÂÂå§Âî¿æ«åÂÂî¿æ¢復æÂÂæ¾ã 4 å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ示å¨ å¨è¨Â置好å éÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨徠亮起 ( 第 5 4 é  ) ã 5 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統æÂÂå°Âå ¶åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 6 ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ 7 î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂéÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ã 8 PHONES æÂÂå è³æ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 顯示å¹Âè£Âç½® 9 éÂÂæÂÂ窠10 顯示幠詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 1 3 é  â 顯示å¹Ââ ã TIMER ST ANDBY/ON OPEN/CLOSE î î 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 XV-DV900/700.book 12 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 13 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 顯示幠1 調諧å¨æÂÂ示å¨ æÂ¥æ¶廣æÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 以èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模å¼ÂæÂ¥æ¶ç«Âé«Âè²FM廣æÂÂæÂÂ亮 èµ·ã FM å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起ã 2 î æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 3 MIDNIGHT Ã¥ÂÂå¤Â模å¼Â被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 34 é  ) ã 4 QUIET å®ÂéÂÂ模å¼Â被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 (第 3 4é  ) ã 5 PGM ç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表被編åºÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 43 é  ) ã 6 RPT å RPT-1 å¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂé RPT 亮起ãÂÂå¨å®æ²éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ æÂÂé RPT-1 亮起 ( 第 40 é  ) ã 7 RDM å¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 42 é  ) ã 8 V.PART ç¶æÂÂæ¾ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂè¦Âé »é¨åÂÂæÂÂ亮起ã 9 ATT Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸 å ¥ è¡°æ¸Âå¨以 é²è¡Âç¶ å æ é¸çÂÂ模 æ¬ 輸 å ¥ æÂÂ亮起 ( 第 73 é  ) ã 10 REC MODE éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ製模å¼ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 74 é  ) ã 11 å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ示å¨ è¨Â置好åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨å¾Â亮起 ( 第 54 é  ) ã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ亮起 ( 第 56 é  ) ã 12 2 PRO LOGIC II å¨æÂÂ毠PRO LOGIC 解碼æÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 30 é  ) ã 13 2 DIGITAL å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂæÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 30 é  ) ã MIDNIGHT QUIET PGM RPT - 1 RDM ATT V. PA R T REC MODE kHz ADV .SURR. DIGITAL MHz PRO LOGIC PRGSVE 16 15 17 18 19 20 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 10 11 12 13 14 XV-DV900/700.book 13 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 14 ChH 14 æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ示å¨ é äºÂæÂÂ示 å¨ 表 示æ£ç¨ æ¼ 輸 åº ç¶åÂÂæ æ¾ 溠çÂÂæ è²å¨ãÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表示è¥干顯示實ä¾Âã 15 PRGSVE éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Â頻輸åº被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 64 é  ) ã 16 ADV.SURR. ä¸Â種é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²è½é³模å¼Â被é¸å®ÂæÂÂ亮起 ( 第 3 2 é Â) ã 17 DTS å¨æÂÂæ¾ DTS æÂÂæ¾æºÂæÂÂéÂÂ亮起 ( 第 3 0 é  ) ã 18 kHz / MHz 表æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ符顯示å¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂ顯示çÂÂé »çÂÂå®你＠kHz ç¨ æ¼A M , MHz ç¨æ¼ FMï¼ ã 19 Ã¥ÂÂ符顯示幠20 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âåºç¾å¤Âè¦Âè§Âå ´æ¯æÂÂ亮起 ( 第 4 9 é  ) ã 5.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ç«Âé«Âè² ï¼Â2.1 è²éÂÂ＠帶ä¸Â央è²éÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼·ç 3.1 è²é è²é³ Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂèÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âç 5.1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè² XV-DV900/700.book 14 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 15 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ éÂÂæ§å¨ ⢠é æ§å¨丠å°製å 綠è² çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ å¯éÂÂé 尠MAIN / SUB éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ SUB ç²å¾Âã 1 î STANDBY/ON æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 Ã¥ÂÂè½é¸æÂÂæÂÂé æÂÂéÂÂäºÂæ éÂÂé¸æ æ¨è¦Âæ¶ è½çÂÂæÂÂæ¾ 溠ã DVD (CD) ï¼ TUNER ï¼ TV ï¼ LINE ã 3 DISPLAY æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示î¿æ¹è®Âè¢å¹Â顯示çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠( 第 49 é  ) ã 4 ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ§å¶æÂÂé î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¢復æÂÂæ¾ã î å îÂÂ/î ç¨æ¼é²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âæ ¢æ¾ ï¼ éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ ã î å îÂÂ/î ç¨ æ¼é²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ¢æ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²以åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æÂÂã î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæ«åÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼ åÂÂ次æÂÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã 5 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå°Âè·³è³ç¶åÂÂç« î¿æ²ç®çÂÂéÂÂå§Âè ＠ç¶徠跳è³åÂÂä¸Âç« î¿æ²ç®ã 6 DVD MENU å¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥äºÂä¸Âå¼µ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RWï¼ÂCDï¼ÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂMP3æ JPEG ç¢Âç ï¼ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯 示D VD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âèªå¨ã 7 å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ ENTER Ã¥ÂÂ調諧æÂÂé å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂé 使ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¢å¹Â顯 示åÂÂé¸å®ã ENTER æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæÂÂä¸Âé¸頠æÂÂè å·è¡ÂæÂÂä¸Âå½ 令ã TUNE /â ç¨æ¼調諧æ¶é³æ©Âã ST TUNE ENTER TUNEâ MASTER VO L UME STâ ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN/CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î î î î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 16 17 18 19 21 20 11 12 13 14 22 XV-DV900/700.book 15 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 16 ChH ST /â æ¶è½æ¶é³æ©ÂæÂÂç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂéÂȏºã 8 MUTE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ使åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨åÂÂè³æ©Âä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè²é³ éÂÂé³ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂé³＠( 第 36 é  ) ã 9 MASTER VOLUME ç¨æ¼調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã 10 TV CONTROL (第 2 0é  ) î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã INPUT æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³é»è¦Âæ©Â輸堥ã CH /â ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé »éÂÂã VOL /â ç¨æ¼調ç¯Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂé³éÂÂã 11 î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ã 12 î æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè·³è³ä¸Âä¸Âç« î¿æ²ç®ã 13 RETURN æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âé¸å®ç«é¢ã 14 SOUND æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂé²堥è²é³é¸å® ï¼ æ¨å¯以å¾Âä¸Â調篠DSP æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´Âï¼Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³çÂÂé¸頠ã 15 ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âî¿è²é³å¢Âå¼·æÂÂé ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠AUTO æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂçºç¶åÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂé¸æÂÂé Âè¨Â解碼æ¹张(第 3 0é  ) ã SURROUND ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模张( 第 30 é  ) ã ADVANCED ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè² ( 第 32 é  ) ã ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠BASS MODE ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂä½Âé³模张( 第 3 5 é  ) ã DIALOGUE ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂå°Â話模张( 第 3 3 é  ) ã VIRTUAL SB æ 該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂèÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè² å¨æÂÂæ ( 第 34 é  ) ã 16 DVD/CD æÂÂé ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠AUDIO æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂé³頻è²éÂÂæÂÂä¼´é³èªÂ訠( 第 4 7 é Â) ã SUBTITLE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示î¿æ¹讠DVD Ã¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示 ( 第 47 é Â) ã ANGLE æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¨é²衠DVD å¤Âè¦Âè§Âå ´æ¯æÂÂæ¾æÂÂé æ¹è®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ©Âè¦Â觠( 第 49 é  ) ã ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠PROGRAM ç¨æ¼編åºÂî¿æÂÂæ¾編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ( 第 43 é  ) ã REPEAT ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾模张( 第 4 0 é  ) ã RANDOM ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾模张( 第 4 2 é  ) ã XV-DV900/700.book 16 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示 02 17 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 17 ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠ZOOM æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæ¹è®Âç«é¢縮æ¾æ¯Âç ( 第 48 é  ) ã TOP MENU ç¨æ¼顯示æÂÂæ¾ä½Âç½®èÂÂç DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé Â層é¸ å® ï¼ÂéÂÂå¯è½åÂÂæÂÂ丠DVD MENU çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂç¸ Ã¥ÂÂï¼ ã HOME MENU æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示 ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂåºï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½®ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ 模å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½çÂÂé  ç®çÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示é¸å®ã 18 ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠SYSTEM SETUP ç¨æ¼é²衠å¤Â種系統 Ã¥ÂÂç°ç¹Âè² è¨Âç½®(第5 7 é  ) ã TEST TONE ç¨æ¼輸åº測試é³ ï¼Âè¨Âå®ÂæÂÂè²å¨ç¨＠( 第 5 9 é Â) ã CH LEVEL ç¨æ¼調ç¯ÂæÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç´ ( 第 5 9 é  ) ã 19 ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠DIMMER æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ使顯示å¹Âè®ÂæÂÂæÂÂè®Â亮ã QUIET/MIDNIGHT ç¨æ¼é¸æÂÂå®ÂéÂÂ模å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Â模张( 第 3 4 é  ) ã TIMER/CLOCK æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ顯示æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ï¼Â第 19 é  åÂÂ第 5 4 é Âï¼ ã 20 ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠CLR æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂ渠é¤輸堥ã ENTER é¸æÂÂé¸å®é¸頠çÂÂã ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ丠æ 第 7 æ¢Âä¸Âç ENTER æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå®Âå ¨ä¸Â樣＠ã ï¼Âå¯åÂÂè½＠FOLDER â æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè·³è³åÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ件夾ã FOLDER æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂè·³è³å¾Âä¸ÂæÂÂ件夾ã 21 MAIN / SUB å¾ MAIN æ¹è®Âè³ SUB å¯é²堥éÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âå°製å 綠è²çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠ROOM SETUP æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå§Âæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® ( 第 20 é  ) ã 22 ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠æ¸åÂÂæÂÂé 使 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç´æÂ¥é¸æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç« ï¼Âæ²ç®ã XV-DV900/700.book 17 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 18 ChH 第 3 ç« éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ éÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® å¨確èªÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æ£確徠ï¼Âå¯æºÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ©Âã 馠å ÂéÂÂ確èªÂæ¨使ç¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â種é¡Âï¼Âæ¨ÂæºÂæÂÂ寬屠ã å¨æ¤ä¹Âå¾ ï¼Âæ¨å¯çºæ¨çÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè² ï¼Â並å¯ è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂ以便使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂè½ã 1 æ î STANDBY/ON ï¼Âå¨éÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ ä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ系統ã å æÂÂè«Â確 誠é» è¦Âæ©Âå·² æ é 丠è¦Â頻輸 åº å·² é£è³ æ¬系統ã æ¨æÂÂçÂÂå°顯示æ¡è¿Âç«é¢ã 2 æ ENTER 移è³ä¸Âä¸Âç«é¢ã 3 æ ¹æÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â種é¡Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³ å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Wide Screen ï¼ 16:9 ï¼Ââ ãÂÂ寬屠＠16:9 ï¼ ãÂÂæ â Standard size screen ï¼ 4:3 ï¼Ââ ãÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂ尺寸å±Âå¹ ï¼ 4:3 ï¼ ã ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¡æ³Â確å®Âå¦Âä½Âé¸æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 8 7 é  â å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Ââ ã MASTER VO L UME CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER We lcome to Pioneer DVD! Thank you for pur chasing this Pioneer DVD player . Before using, please take a little time to setup your D VD player Put the batteries into the remote control Next, press the [ENTER] b utton on the remote control and start the Let's Get Started Menu Next Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) Let's Get Started Menu What kind of TV do you have? Use the / cursor buttons to choose, then press [ENTER] Wide screen (16:9) Standard size screen (4:3) XV-DV900/700.book 18 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 19 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 4 Ã¥ÂÂ次æ ENTER çµÂæÂÂè¨Âç½®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è¦Âè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂ並æ¹è®Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²è¡ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ï¼Â諠使ç¨ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ Back å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã â¢ æ¨é å¯以 使 ç¨åÂÂè½ æÂÂé ＠DVD/CD ï¼ TUNER çÂÂï¼ æ î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂéÂÂå°Âç³» çµ±å¾Âå¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ Âã è¨Âç½®æÂÂé è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂå°Â使æ¨è½夠使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨åÂÂè½ã 1 æ TIMER/CLOCK ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨å¨調ç¯ÂæÂÂéÂÂä½ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ次é²è¡Âè¨Âç½®ï¼Âè« åÂÂ次æ TIMER/CLOCK ã 2 å¦ÂæÂÂ顯示å¹Âä¸Âå°Âæªåºç¾ â Clock ADJ? âÂÂï¼ è«Âæ î æ î ï¼Âå·¦å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Âç´è³æ¨ç è¦Â該è³Âè¨Âçºæ¢ã 3 æ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âå®Âå°Âæ ã 5 æ ENTER ã Let's Get Started Menu Setup complete If you're finished setting up, ch oose [Complete], to start again choose [Back] Complete Back MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ 9 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 19 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 20 ChH 6 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂé ã 7 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã 顯示å¹ÂéÂÂçÂÂ表示æÂÂéÂÂ已被è¨Âå®Âã â¢ ä»»ä½ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ TIMER/CLOCK å°Â顯示æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå¾ÂçÂÂé¢æÂÂ座ä¸ÂæÂÂåº系統çÂÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂç¼ç åÂÂé»ï¼Âæ¨å°ÂéÂÂè¦ÂéÂÂæ°è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂã è¨Âç½®éÂÂæ§å¨以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ© æ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂ使ç¨ TV CONTROL æÂÂéÂÂå°Âé¨æ©Âæ ä¾ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨é²è¡Âè¨Â置以æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ©Âã 1 éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 2 å¨第 89 é Âä¸ÂçÂÂé Âè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表ä¸Âæ¾åºé»覠æ©ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱ã åÂÂ製é åÂÂä¹Âå¾Âæ¯ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âä½Âæ¸代碼 ã éÂÂ亠代碼æÂÂå°Âæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â種é¡Âè³Âè¨Âå³éÂÂè³éÂÂæ§å¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â製é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ稱æ²ÂæÂÂåºç¾å¨表ä¸Âï¼ æ¨å°Âç¡æ³Âè¨Â置該éÂÂæ§å¨æ§å¶é»è¦Âæ©Âã 3 å°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨å°ÂèÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂæÂÂä½ CLR æÂÂé ï¼Âç¶ å¾Â輸堥æ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂä¸Âä½Âæ¸代碼ã éÂÂæ§å¨åÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âç¼å°ÂéÂÂî¿éÂÂä¿¡è ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨已輸 å ¥äºÂæ£確代碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ該éÂÂéÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ²ÂæÂÂéÂÂé ＠è«Â使ç¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂçÂÂ丠丠代碼é 褠該 æÂÂ¥ é©Âï¼Âç´ è³æ¨ç é» 覠橠æ åÂÂé éÂÂã ä¸Âæ¦è¨Âç½®å®Âç¢＠æ¨æÂ¥èÂÂå°±å¯使ç¨å¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ示 çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçºå ÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã 使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® å¨使ç¨æ¨çÂÂ系統ä¾Â欣è³Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾ä¹Âå ＠建è° æ¨è±幾åÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¾Â使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½® ã è¦Âçºæ¨çÂÂæ¿ éÂÂçÂÂé è¯好çÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ï¼ éÂÂä¸Â失çºä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿«æ·çÂÂæ¹ æ³Âã 根æÂÂæ¨ç 主 è¦Âæ¶è½你置å°ç° ç¹ è² æÂÂè²å¨ ç 跠é¢ï¼Âå¯å¨ S ï¼Âå°Âï¼ ï¼ M ï¼Âä¸Âï¼ æ L ï¼Â大ï¼Âæ¿é ä¸Âé²è¡Âé¸æ ＠ç¶å¾Âæ ¹æÂÂ座ä½Âå°åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨åÂÂç° ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç¸å°Âä½Âç½®ï¼Âé¸æ Fwd ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹＠＠Mid ï¼Âä¸ÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè Back ï¼Âå¾Âæ¹＠ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ î æÂÂéÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ  ã CH /â æ¹è®Âé»è¦Âæ©Âé »éÂÂã VOL /â 調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã INPUT å¨堧置å¼Âé» 覠調諧å¨åÂÂå¤Âé¨覠頻æÂÂæ¾æºÂä¹ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â輸堥 ã MASTER VO L UME TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT REPEA T RANDOM PROGRAM BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED TV CONTROL INPUT CH VO L XV-DV900/700.book 20 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 21 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 1 å¦ÂæÂÂ系統å°ÂæªéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 æ ROOM SETUP ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨以åÂÂå·²è¨Â置好æ¿éÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ座ä½Âä½ ç½®ï¼Â顯示å¹Âå°Â顯示ç¶åÂÂæ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®ã 3 æ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¿é é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 根æÂÂæ¨çÂÂæ¿éÂÂ大å°Âé¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âä¹Âä¸Â＠⢠S âÂÂå°Âæ¼æ®éÂÂæ¿é â¢ M âÂÂæ®éÂÂæ¿é â¢ L âÂÂ大æ¼æ®éÂÂæ¿é 5 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂ座你è¨Âç½®ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 根æÂÂæ¨çÂÂ主è¦Âæ¶è½ä½Âç½®é¸æÂÂ以ä¸Âä¹Âä¸Â＠⢠Fwd âÂÂèÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ç¸毠＠å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ´é è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠Mid âÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å°ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢åÂÂå° Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢ç¸å â¢ Back âÂÂèÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ç¸毠＠å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ´é 迠ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®èªåÂÂè¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨跠é¢ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨已ç¶ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½®äºÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç´Âï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Â第 5 9 é  ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 58 é Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨åÂÂ次æÂÂ丠ROOM SETUP æ éÂÂå¾Âå°ÂçÂÂå°顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Room Set? ã â¢ 使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âç½®åÂÂè½å°Âè¦ÂèÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ以åÂÂè¨Âç½®ç è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢ã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå®ÂçÂÂ詳細說æ ＠è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 5 7 é Ââ è¨Âå®Âç°ç¹Âè²â ã 使ç¨è¢å¹Â顯示 çºäºÂæ¹便使ç¨ ï¼ æ¬æ©Â大éÂÂ使ç¨åÂÂå½¢åÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示 ï¼ÂOSDï¼ ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂ該çÂÂæÂÂ該工ä½Âæ¹张ï¼Âå çºç¶æ¨訠置æÂÂæ¾橠ï¼Â使ç¨æÂÂäºÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ ï¼Âå¦Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾＠以åÂÂå°Âé³頻åÂÂè¦Âé »é²è¡Âæ´é«Âç´ÂçÂÂè¨Âå®Âæ ＠æ¨é è¦Âç¨å°å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂã æÂÂæÂÂç« é¢ åºæ¬ä¸Âé½ 以ç¸å ç æ¹ æ³Âå°Âèª ︰ ç¨ å  æ¨ÂæÂÂé ＠î ＠î ＠î ＠î ï¼Âæ¹ 讠髠亮頠ç®＠æ ENTER é¸å®Âã â¢ å¨æ¬ 說æÂÂæ¸ ä¸Âï¼ âÂÂé¸ å®ÂâÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ æ¯ç¨堠樠æÂÂéÂÂé«Â亮顯示ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  ç®ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã XV-DV900/700.book 21 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 22 ChH ⢠æ¯Âå OSD ç«é¢åºÂé¨çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示å¨該ç« é¢ä¸ÂæÂÂéÂÂç¨å°çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂã æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç æ¤èÂÂ說æÂÂçÂÂæ¯æÂÂæ¾ DVD ï¼ÂCDï¼ SACDï¼ VCD ï¼Â趠ç´ÂV CD å M P3 ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂåºæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ§å¶åÂÂè½ ã æ´夠çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å°Âå¨第 5 章詳述ã å¨æ¬ 說æÂÂæ¸丠＠âÂÂDVDâÂÂ表示 æ æ 種 é¡ ç DVD ç¢Âç ï¼ÂDVD 影碠ã DVDå±ç¢Âæ DVD-R/RWï¼ ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå°ÂæªæÂÂé ï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæ¯ DVD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ä¹Âè«ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Â橠＠並確èªÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå·²è¨Âå®Âå° æ£確çÂÂè¦Â頻輸堥ä¸Âã 2 æ î OPEN/CLOSE æÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ã 3 è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂã è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ使ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæ¨Â籤é¢åÂÂ丠ã ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ç¤å°Âè» å° æºÂç¢Âç ＠妠æÂÂæ¨裠堥çÂÂæ¯ ä¸Âå¼µé é¢ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Â欲æÂÂæ¾çÂÂä¸Âé¢åÂÂä¸Âï¼ ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ HOME MENU 顯示î¿éÂÂåºè¢å¹Â顯示 îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî æ¹è®Âé«Â亮é¸å®頠ç® ENTER é¸å®Âé«Â亮顯示çÂÂé¸å®頠ç® ï¼Âå ©å ENTER æÂÂéÂÂä½Âç¨ç¸åÂÂï¼ RETURN ä¸Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹è®ÂèÂÂè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂ主é¸å® MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 12 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î RETURN MENU HOME ENTER 3 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 22 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 23 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 4 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæ¯ DVD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD ï¼Âå¯è½ æÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸å®åºç¾ ã éÂÂæ¼å¦Âä½Â使ç¨é¸å®çÂÂæ´夠è³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 25 é  â DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®â åÂÂ第 26 é  â VCD/ 趠素VCD ç P BC é¸å®â ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæ¯ MP3 ç¢Âç ＠根æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ件絠æ§ÂçÂÂè¤ÂéÂÂç¨Â度 ï¼ æÂÂæ¾éÂÂå§ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½éÂÂè¦Âå¹¾ç§ÂéÂÂç æÂÂéÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è£Âå ¥çÂÂæ¯ä¸Âå¼µå æ¬ JPEG æÂÂ件ç CD/CD- R/RW ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå§ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼æÂÂæ¾éÂÂäºÂ碠çÂÂçÂÂæ´å¤Âè³Â訠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 5 2 é  â è§Âç JPEG 碠çÂÂâ ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå æ¬ MP3 é³頻æÂÂ件å JPEG å åÂÂæÂÂ件 ï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 71 é  â PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠â ã 5 使ç¨ MASTER VOLUME -/ æÂÂé ï¼ÂæÂÂå é¢æ¿ VOLUME æÂÂéÂÂï¼Â調ç¯Âé³éÂÂã åºæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ§å¶æÂÂé ä¸Â表說 æ äºÂéÂÂæ§å¨ ä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ 碠ç ç¨çÂÂåº æ¬ æ§ å¶ æÂÂéÂÂãÂÂæ´å¤ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½å°Âå¨第 5 章詳細說æÂÂã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ î éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã DVD å VCD ︰ å¦ÂæÂÂ顯示å¹Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復ï¼Âæ Last Mem ï¼ÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶＠ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾å°Âå¾Âæ¢復你置æÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶ä½Âç½®éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âè« åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠â æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂ訠æ¶â ï¼Âã MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM CLR MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ î î î î î î FOLDERâ FOLDER ENTER î 123 456 789 0 ENTER MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 23 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 24 ChH ⢠æ¨å¯è½ç¼ç¾＠å°ÂæÂÂ亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂç¹å®Âé¨ Ã¥ÂÂï¼ ä¸ÂäºÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ ã éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã â¢ å°Âæ¼æªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂçÂÂCD-R/RW ç¢Âç ＠ç¨æ¼æ²ç® é¸æÂÂçÂÂæ²ç®跳èºÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ã 使ç¨åÂÂé¢æ¿æ§å¶æÂÂé åÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î OPEN/CLOSE ï¼ î å î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂçÂÂä½Âç¨èÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç¸æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç ä½Âç¨å®Âå ¨ç¸åÂÂã æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶ ç¶æ¨åÂÂæ¢ä¸Âå¼µ DVD æ V CD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ ＠顯示 å¹Âä¸Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠ï¼ÂéÂÂ表示æ¨å¯以å 次å¾Â該é»ÂéÂÂå§Âæ¢復æÂÂæ¾ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤æªæÂÂé ＠ç¶æ¨å¨ä¸Âä¸Â次éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ æÂÂï¼Â顯示å¹Âä¸Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ å¾Âæ¢復é»Âæ¢復ã å 尠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂ︰å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¾ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ æÂÂæ¾ä½Âç½®å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¥è¨Âæ¶髠ã ç¶æ¨å¨ä¸Â次è£Â堥該碠çÂÂæ ＠顯示å¹Âå°Â顯示 Last Mem ï¼ÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶＠＠éÂÂæÂÂæ¨å¯以æ¢復æÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂå¤Âå¯ç¨æ¼ 5 å¼µç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³渠é¤æ¢復î¿æÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶é»Âï¼Âè«Âå¨ Resume æ Last Mem åºç¾æÂÂæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ ç¶è£Âå ¥ VCD æ ＠å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Â被éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè³ DVD (CD) 以å¤ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æ ＠æ¢復é»Âå°Âä¸Â失 ã â¢ çº äºÂ使ç¨æÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶åÂÂè½ï¼Âå¨æÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤ Ã¥ÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ æ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã î æ«åÂÂæ£å¨ æÂÂæ¾çÂÂ碠çÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ° é å§ÂæÂÂæ¾ä¸Âå¼µæ«åÂÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂã î åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã DVD å VCD ︰ 顯示å¹Â顯示 Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ î ï¼Âå æ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âæ¢復åÂÂè½ã ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Â以丠â æ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶â ãÂÂï¼ î æÂÂæ¤æÂÂé éÂÂå§Âå¿«é åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æÂÂãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã î æÂÂæ¤æÂÂé éÂÂå§Âå¿«é æ£åÂÂæ æÂÂãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã î 跳å°ç¶å æ²ç®æÂÂç« çÂÂéÂÂ姠èÂÂï¼Âç¶ å¾Âè³åÂÂä¸Âæ²ç®î¿章ã î 跳å°ä¸Âä¸Âæ²ç®æÂÂç« ã FOLDER /- (SUB) æÂÂæ¾ JP EG æ M P3 碠çÂÂæÂÂè·³ è³ Ã¥ÂÂ丠î¿ ä¸Â丠æ 件夾 ã æ¸å ç¨æ¼輸堥 æ¨Âé¡Âî¿æ²ç® î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿ ç« è 碼ãÂÂæ ENTER 以é¸æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂçÂÂå¾ æ¸ç§ÂéÂÂï¼ ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ被åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âå°Âå¾Âæ é¸çÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿åÂÂçµ ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ DVD 影碠î¿ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ²ç®èÂÂ碼 ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ SACD/CD/VCD/ 趠素VCD/MP3 ï¼ éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ å°Âè·³è³æÂÂé¸ çÂÂç« æÂÂæ²ç® ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼Âä½ æ¼ç¶åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂ堧＠éÂÂå§ÂèÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ XV-DV900/700.book 24 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 25 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ å°Âæ¼ DVD å±碠＠æ²ÂæÂÂæ¢復åÂÂæÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶åÂÂè½ ã â¢ æÂÂçµÂè¨Âæ¶åÂÂè½å°ÂVRæ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂDVD-RWç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âèµ· ä½Âç¨ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ MP3 æ ¼å¼Âç¢Âç ＠æÂÂæ¾ç¡æ³Âæ¢復 ï¼ èÂÂæ¯徠æÂÂæ¾åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂæÂÂ件æÂÂå¨æÂÂ件夾ç é¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥å¾ÂéÂÂå¹¾ç§ÂéÂÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåº﹠æÂÂ大ç å¯è½æ¯ ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â符å æÂÂæ¾橠çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂå°æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂï¼Âè«ÂèÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå è ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¨å¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âæ¾å°å®Âï¼ é² è¡Âæ ¸ å°ÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8 é  â DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂâ ã å¦ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂæ£確ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æ¯ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå£ÂæÂÂ髠亠ã è«Â渠æ½Âç¢ÂçÂÂ並æÂ¥çÂÂæ¯å¦æÂÂæÂÂå£ÂçÂÂ跡象 ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8 é  â 使ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።ÂçÂÂâ ã â¢ çºä»Âä¹Âè£Âå ¥çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾＠é¦Âå Âè«Â檢æÂ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥æ¹å¼Âæ¯å¦æ£確ï¼Â樠籤é¢å ä¸Âï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ檢æ¥碠çÂÂæ¯å¦ 渠æ½Âæ æÂÂæ å£ÂãÂÂéÂÂæ¼ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂ渠æ½Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8 é  â 使 ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።ÂçÂÂâ ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥æ£確ä½Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æ¯ æ ¼å¼ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå ¼ 容ï¼Â妠DVD-ROMãÂÂé æ¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå ¼ 容 æ§çÂÂæ´ 夠賠è¨Âè«Âå 覠第 9 é  â ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§â ã â¢ æÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âé£çºä»Âä¹Âå¨æÂÂæ¾丠äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå±Âå¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨æÂÂé»Âæ¢Âï¼ æÂÂäºÂé» 影格张å³使å¨寬屠é»è¦Âæ© ä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾＠å±Âå¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨ä»ÂéÂÂæÂÂé»Â梠ã éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã â¢ æÂÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯æ¨ÂæºÂå±Âå¹Âï¼Â4:3＠＠並å°ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ©Âè¨Âå®Âçº以堨æ¯æÂÂæ ï¼Âpan & scanï¼Â格张顯 示寬屠DVDï¼Âé£ çº ä»Âä¹Âå¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸ÂäºÂç¢Âç æÂÂé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨ä»ÂæÂÂé»Âæ¢Âï¼ æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂ忽çÂ¥æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂé¦Âé¸顯示æ¹å¼Âï¼Âé 樣å³使æ¨é¸æÂÂ亠4:3 (Pan & Scan) ï¼Âé£亠ç¢ÂçÂÂä»Â以信箱格å¼Â顯示ç«é¢ ã éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã â¢ çºä»Âä¹ÂæÂÂä¸Âè½éÂÂéÂÂæ¸ä½Â亮起輸åºè½å° DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD çÂÂé³頻＠DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD é³頻å éÂÂéÂÂ模æ¬輸åº端輸 åºãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã â¢ æÂÂçÂÂDVD å±ç¢ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼ ä½Âé¨å¾ÂçªÂç¶åÂÂæ¢﹠該ç¢ÂçÂÂå¯è½æ¯éÂÂæ³Âæ·è²ÂçÂÂã DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® 許夠DVD å½±ç¢Âå DVD å±ç¢Â帶æÂÂé¸å® ï¼ æ¨å¯以é éÂÂ該é¸å®é¸æÂÂè¦Âè§ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¶è½çÂÂ堧容 ã éÂÂäºÂé¸å® å¯è½éÂÂæÂÂä¾ÂéÂÂå åÂÂè½ ï¼ ä¾Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âé¸ æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè æÂÂäºÂç¹æ®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âä¾Âå¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ¾æ ãÂÂ詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂå è£Âä¸ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂã æÂÂæ DVD çÂÂé¸å®æÂÂå¨æ¨éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂèªåÂÂ顯示＠æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå å¨æ¨æ DVD MENU æ TOP MENU æÂÂ顯示ã â¢ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡ÂãÂÂè¦Âç²åÂÂéÂÂäºÂå çµÂï¼Âæ¨ å¿ é Â輸堥ç¢ÂçÂÂå è£Âä¸ÂçÂÂå¯Â碼ãÂÂ詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 6 9 é Âã XV-DV900/700.book 25 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 26 ChH VCD/ 趠素VCD ç PBC é¸å® ä¸Â亠VCD /趠ç´ÂV C D å«æÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âæ¨è½夠å¾ÂéÂÂå é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂæ¨æ³è§ÂçÂÂçÂÂ堧容ãÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ被稱çº PBC ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æ§å¶ï¼Âé¸å®ã æÂÂæ¾帶 PBC ç VCD /趠ç´ÂV C D æÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯以ä¸Âç¨ å°Âå PBC é¸å®ï¼ÂèÂÂæ¯å Âæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ ç¶å¾Â使ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ²ç®ä½Âä¸Âæ¯ î ï¼Âæ æ¾ï¼ÂæÂÂé ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ TOP MENU 顯示 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂç âÂÂé Â層é¸å®â ï¼Âé¨ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂç°ã DVD MENU 顯示 DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âé¨ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂç° ＠並å¯è½è âÂÂé Â層é¸å®âÂÂç¸åÂÂã îÂÂîÂÂîÂÂî å¨å±Âå¹Âä¸Â移åÂÂå Âæ¨Âã ENTER é¸å®Âç¶åÂÂçÂÂé¸å®é¸頠ã RETURN è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³堠åÂÂ顯示ç é¸å®ç« é¢ãÂÂå° æÂÂäºÂå ·æÂÂå¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂçÂÂç DVD å±碠＠æÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå°Â顯示çÂÂ覽å¨ç«é¢ã æ¸å ï¼Â主åÂÂè½＠é«Â亮顯示編èÂÂçÂÂé¸å®é¸頠ï¼Âå é© æ¼æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ãÂÂæ ENTER 以é²衠é¸æ ï¼ÂæÂÂçÂÂå¾ æ¸ç§ÂéÂÂï¼ ã MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED RETURN ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP MASTER VO L UME î î DVD MENU SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT TEST TONE 1 ZOOM CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 456 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR FOLDER SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î RETURN HOME MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ENTER TOP MENU MENU HOME 23 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 26 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 27 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¶è½æ¶é³橠調諧å¨å¯以æÂ¥æ¶ FM å AM 廣 æ ＠並è¨Âæ¶æ¨æÂÂå æ¡çÂÂéÂȏº ï¼ å¾ÂèÂÂç¡éÂÂæ¯Â次å¨æ³è¦Âæ¶è½æÂÂé²è¡Âæ åÂÂ調諧ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂ系統å°ÂæªéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 2 æ TUNER Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³調諧å¨ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該 æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ AM æ FM 波段ã 顯示å¹Â顯示調諧å¨波段åÂÂé »çÂÂã 3 調諧頻çÂÂã æÂÂä¸Â種調諧模å¼ÂâÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ模张＠èªåÂÂ模å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿«é 模å¼Âï¼ æÂÂé åÂÂè½ RETURN 顯示 PBC é¸å®ã æ¸åÂÂæÂÂé é¸æÂÂæ¸åÂÂé¸å®頠ç®ã î 顯示åÂÂä¸Âé¸å®é Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂ話＠ã î 顯示å¾Âä¸Âé¸å®é Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂ話＠ã ENTER æÂÂä¸Âé¸å®Âé«Â亮顯示çÂÂé¸å®頠ç®ã MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 XV-DV900/700.book 27 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 28 ChH ⢠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧 ï¼ åÂÂè¦Âæ TUNE /â æ¹è®ÂæÂÂ顯示ç 頻çÂÂã â¢ èªåÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´è³頻çÂÂ顯示é å§Â移åÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âé¬ÂéÂÂãÂÂ調諧å¨å°Âæ¼ç¼ç¾ä¸Â丠éÂȏºä¹Âå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢工ä½ÂãÂÂéÂÂè¤Â該æÂ¥é©Âï¼ÂæÂÂ索堶 ä»ÂéÂȏºã â¢ å¿«éÂÂ調諧 ï¼ æÂÂä½ TUNE /â ç´è³頻çÂÂ顯示幠éÂÂå§Âå¿«éÂÂ移åÂÂãÂÂä¸Âç´æÂÂä½Â該æÂÂéÂÂç´è³å°é æ¨æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂé »çÂÂãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«Â使ç¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調 諧æ¹å¼Âå°Âé »çÂÂé²è¡Â微調ã æ¹åÂÂä¸Âè¯ç FM æÂ¥æ¶ å¦ÂæÂÂ以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ FM éÂȏºï¼Âä½ÂæÂ¥æ¶信è 輠弱ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨å¯ 以 é é å æÂÂçºå® è² é 侠æ¹ Ã¥ÂÂé³ 質ã 1 調諧è³ FM 廣æÂÂéÂȏºã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM Mode? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM Mono â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã ç¶調諧å¨èÂÂæ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶模å¼Âæ ＠å®è²éÂÂæÂÂ示 æ¨Â誠＠ï¼Â亮起ã é¸æÂÂä¸Âæ¹ç FM Auto è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模张ï¹Âæ¶è½ç«Âé«Âè²廣æÂÂæ ï¼Âç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂ示æ¨ÂèªÂ＠＠亮起﹠ã è¨Âæ¶éÂȏº æ¨å¯以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºï¼ÂéÂÂ樣æ¨就ç¡ éÂÂæ¯Â次é²è¡ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ調諧é²堥æ¨åÂÂæ¡çÂÂéÂȏºã 1 調諧è³ AM æ FM 廣æÂÂéÂȏºã å°Âæ¼ FM 波段ï¼Âè«Âæ ¹æÂÂéÂÂè¦Âé¸æÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂ¥æ¶æ èªåÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂ¥æ¶ãÂÂ該è¨Âç½®åÂÂé Âè¨Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂã MASTER VO L UME CD OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DV DT V LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 5 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST ANDBY/ON FM/AM SETUP SYST E M TUNER TUNE TUNEâ ENTER ST STâ MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 4 XV-DV900/700.book 28 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå§Â使ç¨ 03 29 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂâ St. Memory? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¨æ éÂÂçÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã 報æ 30 Ã¥ÂÂé Âè¨Âä½Âç½®ï¼Âæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®å¯以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå é Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã 5 æ ENTER ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¬系統å®Âå ¨åÂÂé»æºÂæ·éÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç éÂȏºå°Âä¿ÂçÂÂè¥干天ï¼Âå¨æ¤ä¹Âå¾Âæ¨éÂÂéÂÂæ°俠åÂÂéÂÂäºÂéÂȏºã æ¶è½é Âè¨ÂéÂȏº 1 Ã¥ÂÂå¿ é¸宠TUNER Ã¥ÂÂè½ã 2 ç¨ ST /â æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂé Âè¨ÂéÂȏºã æ¶è½堶ä»ÂæÂÂæ¾溠æ¨å¯ 以æÂÂ夠尠åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ夠é¨ æÂÂæ¾溠ï¼Âé»覠æ©Âï¼Âè¡ æÂÂæÂ¥æ¶å¨çÂÂï¼ é£æÂ¥è³該系統 ï¼Âå ¶ä¸Âå æ¬ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Â第 7 2 é  â é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©訠åÂÂâ ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂ系統å°ÂæªéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ î STANDBY/ ON éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã åÂÂæ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿ é åÂÂå¤Âé¨ æ æ¾溠ï¼Âé»覠æ©Âï¼Âè¡ æ æÂ¥æ¶å¨çÂÂï¼ ã 2 é¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã â¢ æ TV é¸æ TV 輸堥 ï¼ÂæÂÂè 使ç¨ LINE ï¼ L1/ L2 ï¼Âé¸ æ LINE 1 ANA ï¼ LINE1 DIG æ LINE 2 ANA 輸堥ã 3 å¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂæ¾å¤Âé¨æÂÂæ¾æºÂã ST ANDBY/ON L1/L2 CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER î î î îÂÂî î î î TV LINE XV-DV900/700.book 29 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 30 ChH 第 4 章家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 使ç¨該系統 ï¼ æ¨è½以ç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âç¡æ æ¶è½åÂÂ種模æ¾ÂÂæ¸ä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã èªåÂÂè½é³模张èª Ã¥ÂÂè½é³ 模 å¼ æ¯æÂÂæ 你æ¶ è½ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ¾ 溠çÂÂæ 簡å®æ¹泠＠æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂ輸åºåÂÂæ äºÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂè³ÂæÂÂç åÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂæ Âã â¢ æ AUTO é¸æ â Auto âÂÂè½é³模å¼Âã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂæ¡ç¨äºÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示幠ä¸Âç 2 DIGITAL æ DTS æÂÂ示æ¨ÂèªÂå°Â亮起ã â¢ ç¶é¸æÂÂäºÂèªåÂÂè½é³模å¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå çÂÂæÂÂ毠Pro Logic æÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âå°Â被 Ã¥ÂÂæ¶Âã ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡Âæ¶è½ æ¨è½以ç°ç¹Âè²æ¶è½ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂè å¤Âè²é ＠模 æ¾ÂÂæ¸ä½ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂãÂÂ使ç¨ä¸Â種æÂÂ毠Pro Logic 解碼模å¼ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂæ¾溠ï¼ÂSACD å D VD å±碠é¤å¤Âï¼Âå¯ç¼åºç°ç¹Âè²ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SURROUND é¸æÂÂè½é³模张ï¹ÂæÂÂæ SURROUND å¾Â使ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æ éÂÂï¹ ã 顯示å¹Â丠åº ç¾çÂÂè½é³ 模å¼Âå° æ ¹ æ æÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ç æ æ¾æºÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²è¡Âè®ÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ Auto ï¼ÂèªåÂÂè½é³模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ＠⢠Dolby Digital / DTS ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS 解 碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ決æ¼æÂÂæ¾æºÂï¼ ã å°Âæ¼å¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾溠＠該模å¼Âè Auto ç¸åÂÂã â¢ Pro Logic ï¼Â4 .1 è²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ç¨æ¼æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂé è²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã â¢ PL II Movie ï¼ÂP ro Logic II 5.1 è²éÂÂç°繠è²ï¼Âå° æ¼é»影æÂÂæ¾æºÂå°¤çºé©åÂÂï¼Â並å¯ç¨æ¼ æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE AUTO MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 30 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 31 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ PL II Music ï¼ÂP ro Logic II 5.1 è²éÂÂç°繠è²ï¼Âå°Âæ¼é³æ¨ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂå°¤çºé©åÂÂï¼Â並å¯ç¨æ¼ æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂçÂÂâ æ æ¯ÂP ro Logic II é³æ¨Âè¨Âå®Ââ ＠ã â¢ Stereo ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸Âæ â 以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶ è½â ã â¢ æÂÂéÂÂç«Âé«Âè²åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾é¸頠çÂÂ詳細說 æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Â第 3 2 é  â 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°繠è²æÂÂæÂÂâ ã â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³Âå° SACD ã DVD å±ç¢Âå 96kHz PCM é³溠使ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå Stereo é¸頠å¯ç¨ã â¢ ç¶以 Dolby Digital î¿ DTS 模å¼Âé²è¡Âæ¶è½ æ ＠éÂÂè²éÂÂè³ÂæÂÂå°ÂèªåÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂ毠Pro Logic 解碼æ¹å¼Â以ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å 使ç¨ä¸Â央è²éÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âî¿ DTS æÂÂæ¾溠ç¡æ³Â以ç°ç¹Âè²é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Âè¨Âå® ç¶å¨æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Â模å¼Âä¸Âæ¶è½æÂÂï¼ æ¨å¯以é²ä¸Âæ¥調ç¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ ï¼Âä¸Â央寬度 ï¼Âç¯Âå åÂÂå ¨æ¯ã é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ C Width ︰ 3 Dimen. ︰ 0 Pnrm. ︰ Off 1 å¨æÂÂ毠Pro Logic II é³æ¨Â模å¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â C Width â ＠â Dimen. âÂÂæ â Pnrm. â ã â¢ C Width ï¼Âä¸Â央寬度＠ï¼Â使ä¸Â央è²éÂÂæ´寬 ï¼Âè¼Âé«Âè¨Âå®Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ´窠ï¼Âè¼Âä½Âè¨Âå®Â＠⢠Dimen. ï¼Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ï¼Â使 è² é³ æ´ é ï¼Â涠渠訠å®Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ´å ï¼Âå¢Âå è¨Âå®Â＠⢠Pnrm. ï¼Âå ¨æ¯＠＠åµé æ´廣éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè²空é 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè¨Âå®Âã ä¸Â央寬度å¯å¨ 0 å 7 ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âï¼ ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯ å¨ -3 å 3 ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯ÂãÂÂå ¨æ¯å¯å¨ On æ Off ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã 4 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã 以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ æ¨å¯以ç«Âé«Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æÂÂå¤Âè²éÂÂ＠模æ¾ æ¸ä½Âç æ æ¾ æºÂãÂÂç¶ æ æ¾å¤Âè² é æ æ¾ 溠æÂÂï¼ å¯éÂÂéÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂè³åÂÂ置左î¿å 置å³æ è² å¨以åÂÂ趠ä½Âé³æ è² å¨ å¾ÂèÂÂç¢ ç 章髠è²ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SURROUND ç´è³顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ â Stereo âÂÂã æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âå°Â被åÂÂæ¶Âã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED AUTO SURROUND MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 31 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 32 ChH ⢠æÂÂéÂÂç«Âé«Âè²åÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ¾é¸頠çÂÂ詳細說 æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Âä¸Âæ â 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æ æÂÂâ ã ç¨è³æ©Âæ¶è½ ç¶é£æÂ¥äºÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âåªæ Stereo ï¼Âé Âè¨Âï¼Âå Phones Surround ï¼Âè³æ©ÂèÂÂ捰ç¹Âè²ï¼Â模张æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âæ ADVANCED é¸æ â Phones Surround âÂÂæ æ SURROUND é¸æ â Stereo âÂÂã 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ é«Âç´Âç°繠è² æÂÂæÂÂå¯ç¨ æ¼å¤Âè² é æ ç«Âé«Âè² æ æ¾ æºÂï¼Â以ç²å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ種éÂÂå çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ æ ADVANCED é¸æÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¹Âæ æ ADVANCED ç¶å¾Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂï¹ ã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¾Â以ä¸Âé  ç®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠Adv. Music ï¼Â賦äºÂé³æ¨Â廳é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè²é³ ⢠Adv. Movie ï¼Â賦äºÂå½±é¢é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂè²é³ ⢠Expanded ï¼Âåµé 極寬廣çÂÂç«Âé«Âè²è²場 ⢠TV Surr. ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼å®è²éÂÂæÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»覠廣æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂæ¾溠MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ADV ANCED MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 32 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 33 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ Sports ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼é«Âè²ç¯Âç®åÂÂå ¶ä»Âè©Âè«Â篠ç® â¢ Game ï¼Âåµé è¦Âé »éÂÂæ²æÂÂæ¾æºÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² â¢ ExPwrSurr. ï¼Â趠強ç°ç¹Âè²＠ï¼Â賦äºÂç«Âé«Âè² æÂÂæ¾æºÂæ´大çÂÂè½éÂÂèÂÂ寬度 ⢠Virtual ï¼Âå åµé åºä¾ÂèªåÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç° ç¹Âè²æÂÂæ â¢ 5ch Stereo ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼å°Âç«Âé«Âè²é³æ¨ÂæÂÂæ¾ æºÂ帶ä¾Âå¼·åÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂSACD ã DVD å±ç¢Âå 96 kHz PCM æÂÂæ¾ æºÂ使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã â¢ æ¨å¯以å°Âä»»ä½Âé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂ使ç¨ä¸Â述任你ä¸Â種çÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼ÂãÂÂ給å®ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂå 你åÂÂèÂÂã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©Âæ ＠å Phones Surround é¸頠å¯ç¨ã 調ç¯Âé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´ æ¨å¯以 é¨ æ å°Âé«Âç´ ç° ç¹ è² 模å¼Âç æ æ é² è¡Â墠強æÂÂæ¸Âå¼± ãÂÂå°Âæ¼åÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模张ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å åÂ¥å°ÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´Âé²è¡Âè¨Âç½®ã 1 å¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Effect âÂÂã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯ÂæÂÂæÂÂç ç´Âã æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç´Âå¯以å¨ 10 ï¼ÂæÂÂå°Âï¼ è³ 90 ï¼ÂæÂÂ大＠习éÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âã 4 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã å¢Âå¼·å°Â話 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Dialog Off å°Â話墠強 Ã¥ÂÂè½è¨Â訠ç¨æ¼使 é» 覠æÂÂé»影 é³ 軠丠çÂÂå°Â話è²æ¯Âå ¶ä»ÂèÂÂæ¯è²æ´顯èÂÂã â¢ æ DIALOGUE é¸æÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼·çÂÂ大å°Âã åÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¾Â以ä¸Âé  ç®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠Dialog Off ï¼Âç¡å°Â話å¢Âå¼· ⢠Dialog Mid ï¼Âé©度çÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼· ⢠Dialog Max ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå°Â話å¢Âå¼· ⢠æ¨ç¡æ³Âå° SACD ã DVDå±ç¢Âå 96 kHz PCM æÂÂæ¾ æºÂ使ç¨å°Â話å¢Âå¼·åÂÂè½ã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED DIALOGUE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 33 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 34 ChH ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æ¶è½ ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Vir. SB Off ç¶以ç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âæ¶è½æ ＠å¯使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°繠è²åÂÂè½ä¾Â模æÂŽÂÂå çÂÂå¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²è²é ã å¨çÂÂæ£ çÂÂå½±é¢裡 ï¼ å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂ該ä½Âæ¼æ¨çÂÂæ£ å¾Âæ¹ï¼Â以åµé æ´å¤Âé£çºÂèÂÂé¼çÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ VIRTUAL SB å°Âå¨ â Vir. SB On â å â Vir. SB Off âÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ ç¶以 Stereo æ Virtual è½é³模å¼Âæ¶è½æ ＠æ¨ ç¡æ³Â使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°繠è²ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è²éÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²尠ä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ã â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³Âå°ÂSACD ã DVD å±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂ96 kHz PCM é³溠使ç¨èÂÂæ¬å¾Âç½®ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂã 使ç¨å®ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âè½é³模张⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Off å®ÂéÂÂæ¶è½ å è½å¯éÂÂä½ è²é³æ æ¾ 溠ä¸ÂéÂÂ夠ç 你é³æÂÂé«Âé³ ã å¦ÂæÂÂé³æ¨ÂæÂÂé»Âåºè³ä½Âæ¨æ´åÂÂæ¡è¼Âçº æÂÂæ»ÂçÂÂè²é³ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯以使ç¨該åÂÂè½ã åÂÂå¤Âæ¶è½ å è½è®Âæ¨è½ å¨ä½Âé³ é 素çÂÂæ 泠丠è½ å°é»影ä¸Â實éÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² ã 該æÂÂæÂÂèªåÂÂæ ¹æÂÂæ¨æ£ å¨æ¶è½çÂÂé³éÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ QUIET/MIDNIGHT å°Âå¨ â Quiet â ＠â Midnight âÂÂå â Off âÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½è¨Âå® å®ÂéÂÂî¿åÂÂå¤Âè½é³模å¼Âã â¢ è£Âå ¥ SACD æ DVD å±ç¢ÂæÂÂã TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED VIRTUAL SB MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 79 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED MIDNIGHT MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP 8 XV-DV900/700.book 34 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 35 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 調ç¯Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼Âé«Âé³＠0 ï¼Âä½Âé³＠0 使ç¨ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³æ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âå ¨é¨é³調 ã ç¶é åÂÂäºÂå®ÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Â模å¼Âå¾ ï¼ ç¡æ³Âé²è¡Âä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³ 調ç¯Âã 1 æ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Bass â æÂÂâ Treble â ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè²é³ã ä½Âé³åÂÂé«Âé³å¯å¨ -3 å° 3 ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Â調ç¯Âã 4 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã ç¶ æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âå¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½調篠é«Âé³î¿ä½Âé³ã â¢ éÂÂé³模å¼Âè¨Âçº ON æ â¢ è£Âå ¥ SACD æ DVD å±ç¢Âæ å¢Âå¼·ä½Âé³çÂÂç´ æ¨å¯以 使 ç¨ä¸Â種你é³模张侠墠強æÂÂæ¾ 溠丠ç ä½Âé³ã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ BASS MODE é¸æÂÂé©åÂÂæ¨æ£å¨æ¶è½ çÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂçÂÂé¸頠ã â¢ Music ï¼Âå¯ç¨æ¼é³æ¨Âï¼Â以帶ä¾Âè¼Âçºä½Âæ²Âç ä½Âé³ â¢ Cinema ï¼Âé©ç¨æ¼åÂÂä½ÂçÂÂæÂÂå ·æÂÂ許å¤Âè²é³ æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂé»影 ⢠P. Bass ï¼Âå¯ç¨æ¼é³æ¨ÂæÂÂæ¾溠＠以å¨æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹ ç¢çÂÂé³樠ï¼ÂæÂÂé³è»Âï¼ÂçÂÂç¯ÂæÂÂè² â¢ Off ⢠æ¨ç¡æ³Âå° SACD å DVD å±ç¢Â使ç¨ä½Âé³模张ã â¢ ç¶æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨ä½Âé³模å¼Âã MASTER VO L UME OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SOUND ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED BASS MODE MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 35 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
家åºÂå½±é¢çÂÂè²æ 04 36 ChH éÂÂé³ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨éÂÂè¦Âæ«æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ä¸ÂçÂÂè²é³ ï¼ è«Â使ç¨ MUTE æÂÂéÂÂã â¢ æ MUTE å·è¡ÂéÂÂé³ã è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂé³æÂÂ調ç¯Âé³éÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ次æ MUTE ã MASTER VO L UME DVD MENU RETURN SOUND MUTE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER MUTE XV-DV900/700.book 36 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 37 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 第 5 ç« æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç ä»Âç´¹ æ¬章ä»Âç´¹çÂÂ大é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½é½æ¡ç¨äºÂè¢å¹Â顯示 ã é æ¼å¦Âä½Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ說æÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 2 1 é  â 使ç¨ è¢å¹Â顯示â ã æ¬章ä»Âç´¹ç 大é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ é½é©ç¨æ¼ DVD 碠çÂÂå SACD ãÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDãÂÂCD å M P3/JPEG ç¢Âç ＠ç¡管堶 丠丠äºÂ實é æ 你æ é¨è£Âå ¥ 碠ç ç 種顠èÂÂçÂ¥æÂÂå·®ç°ã æÂÂ亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂå¶æÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂè½çÂÂ使ç¨ ï¼Âä¾Â妠＠é¨ æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã å¨æÂÂæ¾ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ç¡æ³Âå¨ PBC æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Â使ç¨ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è¦Â使ç¨å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè« éÂÂéÂÂæ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ²ç®ä¾ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ è¦Âé²堥éÂÂæ§å¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ綠è²顯示çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âè« å°Âæ»ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂå¾ MAIN 移è³ SUB ã 使ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ覽ç¢ÂçÂÂ堧容 使ç¨碠ç 尠åÂÂä¾Âç 覽 碠ç 堧容以 æ¾ å° æ¨ æ³æ æ¾çÂÂé¨å ã æ¨å¯以å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂ使ç¨碠çÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂã 1 æ HOME MENU ï¼Âå¾Âå±Âå¹ÂæÂÂ示ä¸Âé¸æ â Disc Navigator â ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã å¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂæ¯ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RWãÂÂCDãÂÂVCD ＠趠素VCD æ M P3/JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¹Âå¯以é¸æÂÂæ DVD MENU æÂÂéÂÂï¼Âå®Â使æ¨å¯ç´æÂ¥é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂå° åÂÂç«é¢ã 2 é¸æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂæ¾çÂÂé¨åÂÂã 根æÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂç 種é¡Âï¼Â碠çÂÂå°Âå ç«é¢çÂÂä¸Âå» çÂÂ¥ æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã DVD å½±ç¢ÂçÂÂç«é¢å¨左é¢顯示æ¨Âé¡ ï¼ å³é¢顯示章ã è«Âé¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âä¸ÂçÂÂç« ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±碠＠è«Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂå §çÂÂæ² ç®ã Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Title 1-10 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 DVD Disc Navigator Chapter 1-3 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Group 1-3 DVD - A u di o Disc Navigator Tr a c k 1-36 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 XV-DV900/700.book 37 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 38 ChH å°Âæ¼ SACDï¼Âè«Âé¸ æÂÂç¶å æÂÂæ¾åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå § çÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ² ç®ã å°Âæ¼ VR ï¼Âè¦Âé »éÂÂ製ï¼Â模å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ è«Âå¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âç Playlist ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表ï¼Âå Original ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂé¸æ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂæ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Âé Â覽æ¨Âé¡Âã â¢ å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç¡æ³Âå¨ Original ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âï¼ å Playlist ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表ï¼Âä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ 並éÂÂæÂÂæ VR æ ¼å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂé½堷æ Playlist ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表＠ã CD å V CD ï¼Â趠素VCD çÂÂç«é¢顯示æ²ç®åÂÂ表ã ï¼Â以ä¸Âç«é¢以 CD çºä¾Âï¼ MP3 碠ç ç 屠幠顯示ç« é¢ å¨ å·¦ é 顯示æÂʊȦ 夾 Ã¥ÂÂï¼Âå¨å³éÂÂ顯示æ²ç®å ï¼Âè«Â注æÂÂï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæ 16 Ã¥ÂÂ以ä¸Âç æ 件夾æÂÂæ² ç®åÂÂ稱 å å« éÂÂé³符 æ é 羠馬åÂÂ符 ï¼ åÂÂæ²ç®åÂÂæÂÂ件夾åÂÂå°Â以é¡Â屬åÂÂ顯示 ï¼ F_033 ï¼ T_035 çÂÂï¼ ã é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸ÂçÂÂæ²ç®ã æÂÂæ¾å°Âå¨æÂÂå ENTER å¾ÂéÂÂå§Âã â¢ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå è½åªæÂÂå¨ç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥å¾ÂæÂÂè½使 ç¨ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂ以 PBC 模å¼ÂæÂÂæ¾VCDï¼Â趠ç´ÂVCD ï¼ æÂÂè æ æ¾çÂÂæ¯ä¸Âå¼µæªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½å°Âç¡æ³Â使ç¨ã â¢ æÂÂ¥ æ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂç¹å®Âä½Âç½®çÂÂå¦ä¸Âæ¹æ³Âæ¯使ç¨æÂÂç´¢ 模å¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂä¸Â種ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 4 7 é  â æÂÂ索碠çÂÂâ ã æÂÂæÂÂç¢Âç æ¨å¯以使 ç¨ Ã¥ÂÂ種ä¸Âå çÂÂéÂÂ度 å å æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ å¿« é æÂÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ î æ î éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ ã 2 Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ以å 快æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ度ã â¢ MP3 æ²ç®åªè½ç¨ä¸Â種éÂÂ度æÂÂæÂÂã â¢ æÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ度å°Âè¢å¹Â顯示ã Tr ack 1-14 Tr a c k 001 Tr a c k 002 Tr a c k 003 Tr a c k 004 Tr a c k 005 Tr a c k 006 Tr a c k 007 Tr a c k 008 2ch Area Disc Navigator Title(1-3) 01. 3/31 FIRST LEA GUE 02. 4/28 SECOND LEA GUE 03. 4/29 FINAL R OUND Original Play List Disc Navigator DVD - RW Tr a c k 1-10 Tr a c k 01 Tr a c k 02 Tr a c k 03 Tr a c k 04 Tr a c k 05 Tr a c k 06 Tr a c k 07 Tr a c k 08 CD Disc Navigator Folder 1-17 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead 007. Thermo 008. Missing Man MP3 Disc Navigator Tr ack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube XV-DV900/700.book 38 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 39 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 3 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¨æÂÂæÂÂCDå±碠ã SACDå MP3ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¨è½è½覠è²é³ã â¢ ç¶æÂÂæÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDæÂÂM P3 çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®æ ＠æÂÂæ¾å°ÂèªåÂÂå¨該æ²ç®çÂÂèµ·é»ÂæÂÂçµÂé»ÂèÂÂé å§Âã â¢ æÂÂæÂÂDVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠ç´ÂVCDæ ＠æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³ 輸åºãÂÂæÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示ã â¢ æ ¹æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡Âå ＠å¨å°é DVDå½±ç¢Âä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°ç 章æÂÂå¯è½èªåÂÂæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã 栢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ¨è½夠以åÂÂ種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ ¢éÂÂæÂÂæ¾ DVD 影碠ã DVD- R/RW å V CD ï¼Â趠素VCD ãÂÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå DVD-R/RW éÂÂè½以堩種栢éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾ã 1 æÂÂæ¾æ ï¼Âæ î ï¼Âæ«åÂÂï¼ ï¼Âä¸Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ＠ã 2 æÂÂä½ îÂÂ/î æ îÂÂ/î ç´å°栢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾é å§Âã â¢ æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂ度è¢å¹Â顯示ã â¢ æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂè²é³輸åºã 3 Ã¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂæ¹è®Âæ ¢éÂÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂéÂÂ度ã â¢ æ ¢éÂÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂéÂÂ度è¢å¹Â顯示ã 4 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD å æ¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé²çÂÂæ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã â¢ æ ¢åÂÂä½ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂç«é¢質é æ²ÂæÂÂæ£常æÂÂæ¾ç 好ã â¢ æ ¹ æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âå¨å°éÂÂæ°çÂÂç« æÂÂå¯è½èªå æ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²î¿éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé æ¨å¯以éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾ DVD å½±ç¢Âæ VR æ ¼ å¼Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂå°Âæ¼ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âæ¨ å è½使ç¨éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé²æÂÂæ¾ã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ î ï¼Âæ«åÂÂï¼ ï¼Âä¸Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ＠ã 2 æ îÂÂ/î æ îÂÂ/î æ¯Â次åÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé²ä¸Âå¹ ã 3 æ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ï¼Âä¸Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ï¼Âæ¢復æ£ 常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ 使 ç¨éÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç«é¢質éÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂé² çÂÂ好ã â¢ æ ¹ æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âå°éÂÂæ°çÂÂç« ç¯ÂæÂÂå¯è½èªå æ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ DVD ç¢Âç ＠å¨æ¹è®ÂæÂÂæ¾æ¹åÂÂæ ＠ç«é¢æ 以ç¡æ³Âé ÂæÂÂçÂÂæ¹å¼ÂâÂÂ移åÂÂâ ãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ é ã XV-DV900/700.book 39 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 40 ChH 循ç°æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂä¸Â段 A-B éÂÂè¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½è®Âæ¨è½夠æÂÂå®Âæ²ç® ï¼ÂCD å V CDï¼ æÂÂæ¨Âé¡ ï¼ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âæ DVD-RWï¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂå ©åÂÂé» ï¼ÂA Ã¥ÂÂB ï¼ ï¼Â以形æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂ循ç°段ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢Âç ã DVD å±碠ã SACD ã 趠素VCDã PBC 模å¼Âä¸Âç VCD æÂÂæªæÂÂçµÂå®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨ A-B éÂÂè¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æ â A-B Repeat â ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 å¨â A ï¼ Start Point ï¼ â ＠A ï¼Âèµ·é»Âï¼ ï¼Âè æ ENTER ï¼Â以è¨Âå®Â循ç°起é»Âã 4 å¨â B ï¼ End Point ï¼ÂâÂÂï¼ B ï¼ÂçµÂé»Âï¼ ï¼Âè æ ENTER ï¼Â以è¨Âå®Â循ç°çµÂé»Âã å¨æ¨æ ENTER æÂÂéÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾跳åÂÂå°起é»ÂéÂÂ姠循ç°æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ æÂÂå°Â循ç°æÂÂéÂÂçº 2 秠éÂÂã 5 è¦Âæ¢復æ£常æÂÂæ¾＠è«Âå¨é¸å®ä¸Âé¸æÂÂâ Off â ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã 使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂé¸頠é¨è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂç° ï¼ æ¨习å¯以èÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ä¸Â起使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ ＠以éÂÂè¤Âæ æ¾編庠å 表ä¸ÂçÂÂæ² ç® î¿章＠諠åÂÂè¦Â第 4 3 é  â åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表â ＠ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ PBC 模å¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠素VCDæÂÂæªæÂÂçµ å®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âæ¨ç¡æ³Â使ç¨éÂÂè¤Âæ æ¾ã A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode A(Start Point) B(End Point) Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 40 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 41 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 使ç¨ OSD 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æ â Repeat â ï¼Âé è¤ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 é¸æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠ã å¦ÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾已æ¿Âæ´»ï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Program Repeat ï¼Â編庠é è¤Âï¼Â以éÂÂ褠æ æ¾ ç·¨åºÂå 表＠æÂÂé¸æ Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼Â以åÂÂ涠éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ã å°Âæ¼DVD å½±ç¢Âæ DVD-RWç¢Âç ＠é¸æ Title Repeat ï¼Â樠é¡ÂéÂÂè¤Âï¼Âæ Chapter Repeat ï¼Âç« é è¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼Âé¸æ Group Repeat ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ éÂÂè¤Âï¼Âæ Track Repeat ï¼Âæ²ç® éÂÂè¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ SACDãÂÂCD å VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âé¸æ Disc Repeat ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè¤Âï¼ æ Track Repeat ï¼Âæ²ç® éÂÂè¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âé¸æ Disc Repeat ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂé è¤Âï¼ ã Folder Repeat ï¼ÂæÂÂ件夾éÂÂè¤Âï¼ æ Track Repeat ï¼Âæ²ç®éÂÂè¤Âï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂè Repeat Off ï¼Âé è¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã 使ç¨顯示幠⢠ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ REPEAT é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¤Âæ æ¾é¸頠ã åÂÂè¦Âæ ç´ å°æ¨æÂÂ覠çÂÂéÂÂ褠æ æ¾ é¸頠顯 示 å¨ 顯 示å¹Âä¸Âã éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠è OSD ä¸ÂçÂÂé¸頠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ç¸ Ã¥ÂÂã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨已åµ建äºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼Âä¹Âå¯使ç¨ Program Repeat ã â¢ å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂé ＠æ¨å¯以æ CLR Ã¥ÂÂæ¶ÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Title Repeat Chapter Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Group Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Disc Repeat Folder Repeat Tr a c k Repeat Repeat Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 41 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 42 ChH ⢠æ¨ä¸Âè½åÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨éÂÂè¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¨éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂäºÂè¦Âè§Âï¼Âé è¤ÂæÂÂæ¾å°Â被åÂÂæ¶Âã 使ç¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ æ¨ å¯使ç¨ é¨ æ© æÂÂæ¾å è½ 以 é¨ æ©Âé Â庠æ æ¾ æ¨Âé¡ æÂÂç« ï¼ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ²ç® ï¼ÂDVD å±ç¢Âï¼ æÂÂæ²ç® ï¼ÂSACD ãÂÂC D ã VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD å M P3ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ ã æ¨ å¯以å¨ 碠ç æ£å¨æ æ¾ æ 被 Ã¥ÂÂæ¢æ æ¾ æ è¨Âå® é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠ã â¢ å°Âæ¼VR æ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂDVD-RWç¢Âç ã PBC模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ çÂÂV CD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂè ç¶ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®æ£ å¨顯示æÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ã 使ç¨ OSD 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦ éÂÂç åÂÂè½ Ã¥ÂÂ表丠é¸æ â Random â ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 é¸æÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾é¸頠ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Random Title ï¼Âé¨橠æÂÂæ¾æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âæ Random Chapter ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ ç« ï¼ ãÂÂæ Random Off ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Random Group ï¼Âé¨ æ©Âæ æ¾åÂÂçµ ï¼Âæ Random Track ï¼Âé¨橠æ æ¾ æ²ç®＠ãÂÂæ Random Off ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã å°Âæ¼ CD å VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âè«Âé¸æ On ï¼Âæ éÂÂï¼Âæ Off ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂï¼Â以æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ã Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Title Random Chapter Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Random Group Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode On Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 42 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 43 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Âé¸æ Random All ï¼Âé¨æ©Âæ æ¾堨é¨＠ï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ件夾＠æ Random Track ï¼Âé¨ æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æ²ç® ï¼ ï¼Âå éÂÂæ¼ç¶å æÂÂ件夾 ï¼ ã æ Random Off ï¼Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂï¼ ã ã â¢ æ¨ä¹Âå¯以使ç¨éÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç RANDOM æÂÂé ä¾Âé¸æÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼ÂãÂÂé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âå°Âå¨ 顯示å¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨å±Âç«é¢ä¸Â顯示ãÂÂå¯ç¨çÂÂé¨æ©Âæ æ¾模å¼Âè Play Mode é¸æÂÂãÂÂæ ENTER é¸ å®ä¸Âå¯é¸æÂÂçÂÂç¸åÂÂã â¢ è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ç¢ÂçÂÂ並åÂÂæ¶Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âè«Âæ î ï¼Âå æ¢＠ã â¢ è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âé¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½èÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âè«Âæ CLR æÂÂé ãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾è³çµÂå°¾ ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ ã â¢ å¨é¨æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾æ ＠î å î æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½èÂÂæ£常 çÂÂæ Âä¸ÂçÂ¥æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ︰ î è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°ç¶åÂÂæ²ç®î¿ ç« ç é 姠èÂÂãÂÂæ¨ç¡ æ³Âå é² ä¸ÂæÂÂ¥ è¿ åÂÂã î å¾Âå ¶é¤Âé¨åÂÂä¸Âé¨æ©Âé¸åÂÂå ¶ä»Âæ²ç®î¿章ã â¢ æ¨ç¡æ³ÂèÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾ä¸Â起使ç¨é¨ æ©ÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ã åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 æÂŒÂÂè½ è® æ¨ è½夠編 製 碠ç ä¸Âæ¨Âé¡ î¿ çµ î¿ ç« î¿ æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®çÂÂæÂÂæ¾é ÂåºÂã â¢ å°Âæ¼VR æ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂDVD-RWç¢Âç ã PBC 模å¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ çÂÂV CD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂæÂÂè ç¶ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® æ£å¨顯示æÂÂï¼Âæ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨編åºÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ã 使ç¨ OSD 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âï¼ ã 2 å¾Âå·¦ é ç åÂÂè½å 表ä¸Âé¸ æ â Program â ï¼Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 3 å¾Âç·¨åºÂé¸頠çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æÂÂâ Create/Edit â ï¼Âåµ建î¿編輯＠ã æÂÂ顯示 ç 編åºÂ編輯 ç«é¢根 æ 裠堥ç¢Âç ç 種 é¡ èÂÂç°ã ç«é¢ å·¦éÂÂæ¯ ç·¨ åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ï¼Âå³é æ¯æ¨Âé¡ å 表 ï¼Â妠æÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂæ¯ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥ çÂÂæ¯ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ ãÂÂæ² ç® ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ SACD ã CD å VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼ÂæÂÂè æ¯æÂÂ件夾åÂÂ表ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ MP3 碠çÂÂï¼ ãÂÂæÂÂå³éÂÂæ¯章ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ²ç®å 稱 ï¼Âå°Âæ¼ MP3ï¼ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã Random All Random T rack Random Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode XV-DV900/700.book 43 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 44 ChH 4 å¨ ç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表丠çºç¶å æÂ¥é©Âé¸ æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ ã 章ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂãÂÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂæ²ç®ã å°Âæ¼ DVD 影碠＠æ¨å¯以å°Âæ´åÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âå §ç 章添å è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂÂ該æ¨Âé¡Âã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å 章ï¼Âå Âé«Â亮顯示堶æÂÂå¨æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç¶徠æ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Â＠並å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç« ã å°Âæ¼ DVD å±碠＠æ¨å¯以å°Âæ´åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂå §ç æ²ç®添å è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å åÂÂçµÂï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂÂ該åÂÂçµÂã â¢ 覠添å æ²ç®ï¼Âè«Âå Âé«Â亮顯示åÂÂçµÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Â並å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®ã å°Âæ¼ SACDãÂÂCD æ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCDï¼Âé¸æÂÂä¸Âå æ²ç®以添å å°編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âã å°Âæ¼ MP3 ç¢Âç ＠æ¨å¯以å°Âæ´åÂÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂæÂÂ件夾 å §çÂÂæ²ç®添å è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âã â¢ è¦Âæ·»å æÂÂ件夾ï¼Âè«Âé¸æÂÂ該æÂÂ件夾ã Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1~38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1~4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Title 1-38 Title 01 Title 02 Title 03 Title 04 Title 05 Title 06 Title 07 Title 08 Chapter 1-4 Chapter 001 Chapter 002 Chapter 003 Chapter 004 Program Program Step 01. 01 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1~38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 Tr a c k 1~4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 01-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Group 1-38 Group 01 Group 02 Group 03 Group 04 Group 05 Group 06 Group 07 Group 08 T rack 1-4 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 Program Program Step 01. 04 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. T rack 1~12 T rack 01 T rack 02 T rack 03 T rack 04 T rack 05 T rack 06 T rack 07 T rack 08 Program Program Step 01. 001 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube Program XV-DV900/700.book 44 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 45 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ è¦Âæ·»å ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®ï¼Âå Âæ¾å°堶æÂÂ件夾ï¼Âç¶徠æ î ï¼Âå³堠樠ï¼Â並å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸ æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ² ç®åÂÂ稱ã æ ENTER é¸æÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ² ç®å¾Âï¼ÂæÂ¥é©ÂèÂÂå°ÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â移åÂÂä¸ÂæÂ¥ã 5 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠4 ï¼Â以建ç«Âç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表æÂÂå¤Âå¯以å å« 24 Ã¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿ Ã¥ÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®ã 6 è¦ÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂæÂÂé ã 編åºÂæÂÂæ¾å°Âä¿ÂæÂÂæ¿Âæ´»çÂÂæ  ï¼ ç´å°æ¨éÂÂéÂÂç·¨åºÂæ æ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ã åªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ã éÂÂåºç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå° DVD (CD) 以 å¤ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ã â¢ è¦Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨çÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表並éÂÂåº編åºÂ編輯ç«é¢ ä½Âä¸ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼Âè«Âæ HOME MENU ã ï¼Âè« å¿æ RETURN ï¼ÂéÂÂ樣 Ã¥ÂÂä¸Âè½ ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨ åºÂå 表＠ã â¢ ç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾æ ＠æ î å°Âè·³è³編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸Âç ä¸Âä¸ÂæÂ¥ã â¢ æÂÂæ¾æÂÂæ CLR å¯éÂÂéÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ ãÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂæ¢ æÂÂæÂÂ該æÂÂéÂÂå¯åªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã 使ç¨ OSD 編輯編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 å¨編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表åµ建徠ï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¢Âå ＠åªé¤æÂÂæ¹讠堶ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂ¥é©Âã 1 æÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode âÂÂã 2 å¾ å·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸宠â Program â ï¼Âç·¨ åºÂï¼ ã 3 å¾Âç·¨ åºÂé¸頠åÂÂ表丠é¸宠â Create/Edit â ï¼Âåµ建î¿編輯＠ã 4 覠渠é¤ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é©Âï¼Âè«Âé«Â亮顯示該æÂ¥é©ÂèÂÂ並 æ CLR ã 5 覠å¨編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ä¸ÂæÂÂå ¥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é©Âï¼Âè«Âé«Â亮æ ç®Âè®Âæ°æÂ¥é©Âåºç¾å¨該èÂÂçÂÂæÂ¥è ＠åÂÂé¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠å 堥çÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®ã æ ENTER å¾Âï¼Âæ°çÂÂæÂ¥é©Â被æÂÂå ¥åÂÂ表ã 6 覠å¨編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表æ«尾å¢Âå ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥é©Âï¼Âè«Âé«Â亮 顯示æ°æÂ¥é©Âè¦ÂæÂÂå ¥ä½Âç½®çÂÂæ¥驠＠åÂÂé¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠å¢Âå çÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章î¿åÂÂçµÂî¿æÂÂ件夾î¿æ²ç®ã â¢ 覠ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼ÂéÂÂåº編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表編輯ç«é¢ èÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âè«Âæ HOME MENU ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨æ³ä¸Âä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂä¿®æ¹並éÂÂåº編åºÂå 表編輯ç«é¢ï¼Âè«Âæ RETURN ã OSD ç·¨åºÂé¸å®çÂÂå ¶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¾模å¼Âé¸å® ï¼ æ¨é¤äºÂè½åµ建åÂÂ編輯編庠åÂÂ表ï¼ÂéÂÂè½夠éÂÂå§Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾＠åªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表åÂÂè¨Âæ¶編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã Program Step 01. 001-003 02. 03. 04. 05. 06. 07. 08. Program Folder 1-6 001. A CP 002. Nth Degree 003. Pf euti 004. Live 005. Glitc h music 006. CodHead T rack 1-10 001. Gra vity deluxe 002. T esla's patent 003. Bor der dispute 004. Dela yed by rain 005. Accident incident 006. Pigeon post 007. Outernational 008. V acuum tube XV-DV900/700.book 45 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 46 ChH 1 æ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode âÂÂã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸宠â Program â ï¼Âç·¨ åºÂï¼ ã 3 é¸å®Âç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂè½ã â¢ Create/Edit ï¼Âåµ 建 î¿ ç·¨ 輯＠ï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Âå 述堧容 ⢠Playback Start ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ å·²ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ⢠Playback Stop ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾＠ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂ編庠æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âä½Âä¸Âåªé¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ⢠Program Delete ï¼Âåªé¤編åºÂï¼ ï¼Âåªé¤編 åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表並éÂÂéÂÂç·¨åºÂæÂÂæ¾ â¢ Program Memory ï¼Âç·¨åºÂè¨Âæ¶＠ï¼Âå å°Âæ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ ï¼Âé¸宠On 以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂç 編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã ï¼Âé¸宠Off Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢Âç çÂÂç·¨åºÂè¨Âæ¶＠⢠å¯å°Âè£Âå ¥ç DVDç¢ÂçÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ã ç¶æ¨裠堥ä¸Âå¼µä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂï¼Âç·¨åºÂæ æ¾å°ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ æ¨å¯以ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âé 24 å¼µç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ã æ¤ å¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂæ©ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表å°Â被æÂÂæ°ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂç æÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表åÂÂ代ã 使ç¨æ¬æ©Â顯示幠åÂÂ管 OSD é©ç¨æ¼ SACDï¼ÂCD å M P3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âä½Â顯 示å¹Âä»Âæ 侠äºÂ堠足賠è¨Â以æ¹ 便 å° åµ建編 庠å 表 ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Âå ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ã 1 æ PROGRAM ã æÂÂ示æ¨å¨ ç·¨ åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表丠é¦Âå Â輸 å ¥ 丠é¦Âæ²ç® æ æ 件夾ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸Âé¦Âæ² ç®ï¼Âæ ENTER ã â¢ å é MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ è¦Âé¸æÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸ÂçÂÂå®åÂÂæ² ç®ï¼Âè« ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ æÂÂ件夾å¾Âï¼ æ î ï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸Âé¦Âæ²ç®ãÂÂæ ENTER ã å¨å®ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ種 é¸ æÂÂä¹Âå¾Âï¼ ç 徠顯 示å¹Âå° æ¨ ç æ 示ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æªæ£確æÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«Âæ CLR åªé¤æÂÂå¾ ä¸Â馠ï¼ÂæÂÂè¿Âä¸Âé¦Âï¼Âç·¨åºÂæ²ç®ã 3 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠2 åµ建編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ã ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表å¯å å«å¤Âé 24 é¦Âæ²ç®ã 4 è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表ï¼Âè«Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾＠ã 編åºÂæÂÂæ¾å°Âä¿ÂæÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´è³æ¨æÂÂ丠î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠＠渠é¤æÂÂæ¾åÂÂ表 ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ï¼ å½Âåºç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âçºæ¢ã 渠é¤編åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 è¦Â編製æ°çÂÂç·¨åºÂÃ¥ÂÂ表 ï¼ æ¨忠é Â渠é¤åÂÂæÂÂç·¨åºÂå 表ã 1 å¦ÂæÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸Âå¼µç¢Âç ＠è«Âæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠ã 2 æ CLR ã Create/Edit Playback Start Playback Stop Program Delete Program Memory î Off A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode P0 -0 0 0 0 P0 -1 5 3 7 XV-DV900/700.book 46 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 47 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æÂÂç´¢ç¢Âç æ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂç« èÂÂ碼æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå° DVD å½± ç¢Âç¢ÂçÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ ã 尠D VD å±ç¢Âå¯åÂÂçµÂæÂÂæÂÂæ²ç® æÂÂæÂÂé Â碼é²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ï¼Âå° SACDï¼ÂCD ï¼Â趠素VCD å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæ²ç®èÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ ï¼ å° V CD å¯éÂÂéÂÂæ²ç® èÂÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ ï¼ å° M P3 ç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯以éÂÂéÂÂæ 件夾æÂÂæ²ç®èÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂç´¢ã 1 å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âï¼Âæ HOME MENU é¸æ â Play Mode â ã 2 å¾Âå·¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½åÂÂ表ä¸Âé¸宠â Search Mode â ï¼ÂæÂÂ索模å¼Âï¼ ã 顯示çÂÂæÂÂç´¢é¸頠根æÂÂè£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂç° ãÂʊȴ ä¸Âç«é¢顯示亠DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂç´¢é¸頠ã 3 é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ索模å¼Âã 4 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂçµÂãÂÂç« ãÂÂæÂÂ件夾æ æ²ç®èÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè æ¯æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé Â碼ã â¢ å°ÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂç´¢ï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¨å¸ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ¢復你置çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç§Âæ¸輸堥å°ç¶åÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾çÂÂ樠顠ï¼ÂDVD 影碠/DVD-RWï¼ æÂÂæ²ç®ï¼ÂVCDï¼ ä¸Âã ä¾Âå¦Âï¼Âæ 4 ã 5 ã 0 ã 0 è®ÂæÂÂæ¾å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç 45 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂèÂÂèµ·éÂÂå§ÂãÂÂå° 1 å°Âæ 2 0 å 3 0 ç§Âï¼ è«Âæ 8 ã 0 ã 3 ã 0 ã â¢ æÂÂäºÂDVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂå¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂé Âé¢ ã è«Â輸 å ¥æ¨è¦ÂçÂÂé Â碼ã 5 æ ENTER éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ æ¨å è½å°ÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå VCDç¢ÂçÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂç´¢ Ã¥ÂÂè½ã â¢ è¦Â使ç¨æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂç´¢åÂÂè½ ï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå¿ é Âæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ ã â¢ å°Âæ¼ PBC 模å¼Âä¸Âç VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂæªæÂÂçµ å®ÂæÂÂç CD-R/RW ç¢ÂçÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂç´¢åÂÂè½ä¸Âå¯ç¨ã â¢ å°Âæ¼堩張以ä¸Âç SACD ç¢Âç ＠å¨第äºÂå¼µç¢Âç éÂÂå¾Âï¼Âæ¨å¯è½ç¡æ³Âé¸æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂé¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ²ç®ã æÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢Âç âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Ââ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂé¡Âå¤ÂçÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡ ï¼ éÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂé è¦Â4 ä½Âæ¸çÂÂå¯Â碼æÂÂè½ç²åÂÂãÂÂ詳æ åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂå¯Â碼＠è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂå è£ÂãÂÂç¶æ¨åÂÂ試æÂÂæ¾éÂÂéÂÂé¡ ï¼Âæ¾ æ¾æ©Âå°ÂèªåÂÂæÂÂ示æ¨輸堥å¯Â碼ã 1 使ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥 4 ä½Âæ¸å¯Â碼ã â¢ ä¹ å¯以éÂÂéÂÂé¸頠é¸å®輸堥å¯Â碼ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 69 é Âã åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ æÂÂ亠DVD å½±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂä¸Â種æÂÂå¤Â種èªÂè¨ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ幠＠碠çÂÂå 裠ç ä¸Âè¾ÂÂå çÂ¥æÂÂåª 亠å å¹ÂèªÂ訠å¯ 以 使 ç¨ãÂÂæ¨è½夠å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SUBTITLE é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Âé¸頠ã â¢ æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂåªå Â許æ¨å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ä¾Âæ¹è®ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂæ TOP MENU å¯é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ã Title Search Chapter Search Time Search A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode 0 0 1 Title Search Chapter Search Time Search Input Chapter A-B Repeat Repeat Random Program Search Mode Play Mode Subtitle English 1/2 Current / T otal XV-DV900/700.book 47 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 48 ChH ⢠è¦Âè¨Âç½®åÂÂå¹Âé¦Âé¸頠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 65 é  â Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ â ã åÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂ訠å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂæÂÂ堩種以ä¸ÂèªÂè¨Âå°Âç½ç DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂï¼ æ¨è½夠å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ AUDIO é¸å®Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âé¸頠ã â¢ æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂåªå Â許æ¨å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ä¾Âæ¹è®Âé³頻 èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂæ TOP MENU å¯é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ã â¢ è¦Âè¨Â置伴é³èªÂè¨Âé¦Âé¸頠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 5 é  â Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ â ã åÂÂæ DVD å±ç¢ÂçÂÂé³頻è²é 根æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¡Âå ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢ÂæÂÂæ¨å¯以åÂÂæÂÂè² éÂÂï¼Â詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂã 1 Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ AUDIO é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³頻è²éÂÂé¸頠ã ç¶æ¨æ¹è®Âé³頻è²éÂÂæ ＠æÂÂæ¾å°Âèªç¶åÂÂæ²ç®çÂÂèµ· å§ÂèÂÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂå§Âã â¢ æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂå 容許æ¨éÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®æ¹è®Âé³頻 è²é ã è«Âæ TOP MENU å¯é²堥ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ã â¢ è¦Âè¨Â置伴é³èªÂè¨Âé¦Âé¸頠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 5 é  â Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ â ã åÂÂæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD çÂÂé³頻 è²é ç¶æÂÂæ¾ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯以å¨ç«Âé«Âè²ã å 左è²éÂÂæÂÂå å³è²éÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ AUDIO é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé³頻è²éÂÂé¸頠ã æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ å¨欣賠DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ÂDVD å±ç¢Âæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD æÂÂï¼ æ¨è½夠å©ç¨æ¾大åÂÂè½å°Âç«é¢çÂÂä¸Âé¨åÂÂæ¾大 2å æ 4 å ã 1 å¨æÂÂæ¾ä¸Âç¨ ZOOM æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¾大åÂÂæ¸ã â¢ Normal ï¼Âæ£常＠⢠2x ⢠4x ⢠ç±æ¼ DVD 影碠＠DVD å±ç¢Âæ VCD ï¼Â趠素VCD ç å 辨çÂÂæ¯åºå®ÂçÂÂï¼Âå æ¤åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ丠éÂÂ＠尤堶æ¯以 4 å æ¾大æ ã ä½ÂéÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ é ã Au dio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH 1/2 Current /T otal Audio Linear PCM 192kHz24bit 1 2CH Digital Out Converted Au dio Stereo Zoom 2x Zoom 4x XV-DV900/700.book 48 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 49 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 2 ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¹è®Âæ¾大åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã æ¨å¯以 å¨ æ æ¾éÂÂ稠丠é¨ æ å°æ¹讠æ¾ 大 å æ¸å æ¾大åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå±Âå¹Âé Âé¨ç å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¹æ¡Âæ¶Â失＠諠åÂÂæ ZOOM 使堶顯示ã â¢ ç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢被æ¾大æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°ä¸Âè¦Â使ç¨ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®ï¼Âå çºæ¤æÂÂé¸å®é¸頠å°Âç¡泠é«Â亮顯示ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨顯示äºÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Âï¼Âç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢被æ¾大æ å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¶Â失ãÂÂç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢åÂÂå°æ£常大å°Âæ å®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ次åºç¾ã åÂÂæÂÂè¦Â觠æÂÂäºÂDVD å½±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂ以堩åÂÂ以ä¸Âè§Â度æÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç«é¢ ï¼Â詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂé±ç¢ÂçÂÂå è£ÂçÂÂã ç¶å¤Âè¦Âè§Âç«é¢被æÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼Âå±Âå¹Âä¸ÂæÂÂåºç¾ä¸Âå åÂÂæ¨Âï¼Â以è®Âæ¨çÂ¥éÂÂéÂÂå¯è§ÂçÂÂå ¶ä»Âè§Â度ç ç«é¢ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ¿æÂÂï¼Âä¹Âå¯éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé  åÂÂè½ï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Â第 6 7 é  â Angle Indicator ï¼Âè§Â度æÂÂ示 å¨＠â ã ã â¢ å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾ ï¼ÂæÂÂæ«åÂÂï¼ æ ＠æ ANGLE Ã¥ÂÂæ è¦Âè§Âã 顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠å¨æÂÂæ¾ DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ＠å±Âå¹Âä¸Âå¯顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ種 æ²ç®ï¼Âç« åÂÂæ¨Âé¡Âè³Âè¨Â以åÂÂè¦Âé »å³輸çÂÂã OSD ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠⢠è¦Â顯示î¿åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ顯示çÂÂè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âæ DISPLAY ã å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂ被æÂÂæ¾æ ï¼Âè³Âè¨Âåºç¾å¨å±Âå¹Âé Âé¨ãÂÂæÂÂä½ DISPLAY 以æ¹è®Â顯示çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã â¢ DVD å½±ç¢Â顯示 ⢠DVD å±ç¢Â顯示 ⢠VR 格张DVD-RW 顯示 ⢠SACD 顯示 ï¼Âå å¨å¤Âè²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âï¼ Audio French Dolby Digital 3/2.1CH Angle Subtitle English 1 Title Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Tr. Rate 8.6Mbps Chapter Play DVD î 2.05 1 1/38 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.57 Remain 7.02 T otal Audio 1 Linear PCM Angle Subtitle - - 1 T rack Play DVD-A udio î 3.20 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 2.41 Remain 6.01 T otal 192kHz 24bit 2/0CH Tr . Rate : 9.5Mbps Group Play DVD î 3.21 1/3 Current / T otal Elapsed 53.20 Remain 56.41 T otal -Audio Audio Dolb y Digital 2/0CH 1 Subtitle - - Title Play DVD-R W Original î 0.08 1/32 Current / T otal Elapsed 30.22 Remain 30.30 T otal Tr . Rate 4.3Mbps Chapter Play DVD-R W Original î 1/1 Current / T otal T rack Play SA CD î 0.13 1/14 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.21 Remain 4.34 T otal Audio 3/2.1CH T rack Play SA CD î 0.22 1/9 Current / T otal Elapsed 3.38 Remain 4.00 T otal Disc Play SA CD î 0.05 Elapsed 73.00 Remain 73.05 T otal XV-DV900/700.book 49 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 50 ChH ⢠CD å V CD 顯示 ⢠ï¼Âå å¨ PBC æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Â＠⢠趠素VCD 顯示 ⢠MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 ⢠JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 ⢠æ¨è½夠å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ä¸ÂçÂÂå°ç¢ÂçÂÂè³Â訠ï¼Âæ¨Âé¡Âî¿章ã æ²ç® ãÂÂçµÂã æÂÂ件夾çÂÂçÂÂæ¸ç®＠ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 3 7 é  â 使ç¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ覽ç¢Âç 堧容â ã T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed 4.40 Remain 5.47 T otal Disc Play CD î 28.00 Elapsed 30.20 Remain 58.20 T otal Play VCD î T rack Play CD î 1.07 2/16 Current / T otal Elapsed Play MP3 î T rack T rack Name Outernational 0.18 1/17 Current / T otal Elapsed 12.42 Remain 13.00 T otal Play MP3 î Folder Folder Name ACP 2/7 Current / T otal Play JPEG î File File Name FL000001 1/40 Current / T otal Play JPEG î Folder Folder Name Holiday 2/6 Current / T otal XV-DV900/700.book 50 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
æÂÂæ¾ç¢Âç 05 51 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 顯示å¹Âè³Â訠æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè³Âè¨Âä¹Âåºç¾å¨åÂÂé¢æ¿顯示å¹Â丠ã æ DISPLAY æ¹è®Â顯示çÂÂè³Âè¨Âã â¢ DVD å½±ç¢Âî¿ DVD-RW 顯示 æ¨Âé¡Âè 章è 已æÂÂæ¾æ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂé æ¨Âé¡Âè å©é¤Âæ¨Âé¡ÂæÂÂé æ¨Âé¡Âè 章è å©é¤Âç« æÂÂé â¢ DVD å±碠çµÂè æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé çµÂè æ²ç®è å©é¤Âæ²ç®æÂÂé çµÂè å©é¤ÂçµÂæÂÂé â¢ SACD/CD 顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé æ²ç®è å©é¤Âæ²ç®æÂÂé å©é¤Âç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé 22 8 4 9 2T T L 1 0 70 0 22 0 4 2 22 8 4 9 22 3 1 5 2 1 47 00 GRP 41 1 6 43 2 0 53 15 Disc ⢠VCD 顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé å©é¤Âç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂé æ²ç®è å©é¤Âæ²ç®æÂÂé â¢ 趠素VCD 顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé â¢ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 æ²ç®è 已æÂÂæ¾æ²ç®æÂÂé æ²ç®åÂÂ稱 æÂÂ件夾åÂÂ稱 ⢠JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂ顯示 æÂÂ件åÂÂ稱 æÂÂ件夾åÂÂ稱 41 1 1 6 53 15 Disc 43 2 0 41 1 6 20 3 5 EVE R YB O D BE S T _ O F_ TI G E R _ 0 1 ZO O _ TR I P XV-DV900/700.book 51 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç 06 52 ChH 第 6 ç« è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç æÂÂæ¾ JPEG ç¢Âç è£Âå ¥å«æ JPEG Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂç CD/CD-R/RW å¾ ï¼ æ î 徠碠çÂÂçÂÂ第 丠å æÂÂ件夾 î¿ 第 丠張åÂÂç é 姠éÂÂå¼µ æ¼Â示 ã æÂÂæ¾æ©Â以åÂÂæ¯Âé ÂåºÂ顯示åÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸ÂçÂÂå çÂÂã æ æ¾æ©Âæ èª å 調ç¯Âå ç 尺 寸 以ç¡å¯ è½ 使 Ã¥ÂÂç 堠滿æ´ å å±Âå¹ ï¼Âå¦Âæ å çÂÂçÂÂ縱 æ©« æ¯ÂèÂÂæ¨ çÂÂé» è¦Âæ©Âå±Âå¹Âä¸Âå ＠æ¨æÂÂç¼ç¾å±Âå¹Âå·¦å³æÂÂä¸Âä¸ÂæÂÂé» æ¢Âï¼ ã éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ æÂÂ︰ ⢠ç¶ç«é¢顯示 Loading ï¼Âæ£å¨è£Âè¼Âï¼ æ ＠î ã ANGLE å ZOOM æÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ã â¢ æ æ¾æ©Âè¼Âå ¥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂé¨æÂÂ件尺寸ç å¢Âå èÂÂå¢Âå ã â¢ ä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂå¤Âå¯æ 999 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件ä¾Âè§Âç ã 妠æ ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件æ¸趠éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¸ç®ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂåªæ åÂÂ9 99 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂ件å¯以è§ÂçÂÂã 使ç¨ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽 å¨ è¦ÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂʊȦ Ã¥ÂÂå¨èÂÂæ¼ æÂÂæ¾你置 ç ç¢ÂçÂÂ丠æ¾ å° ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¹å®ÂæÂÂ件夾æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂï¼Âè«Â使ç¨ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂå° åÂÂï¼Âè¦ÂéÂÂéÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂå¨æÂÂ件夾ä¸Âæ¾å°ä¸Âå¼µåÂÂçÂÂï¼ è«Â使ç¨åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ã 1 æ DVD MENU 顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âå ＠Disc Navigator ï¼Âç«é¢ã 左åÂÂ顯示ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件夾 ï¼ å³åÂÂ顯示æÂÂ件夾丠çÂÂæÂÂ件ã 2 ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂé ＠îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âé²è¡Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂã ç¶ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件被é«Â亮顯示æ ＠該æÂÂ件çÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂ尠顯示ã æÂÂé åÂÂè½ î æ«åÂÂéÂÂå¼µ æ¾æ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ä¸Â次éÂÂæ° é å§Âã î 顯示ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µåÂÂçÂÂã î 顯示ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µåÂÂçÂÂã ANGLE æ«åÂÂéÂÂå¼µ æ¾æ ï¼Â並尠ç¶åÂÂ顯示 ç åÂÂçÂÂé ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¹åÂÂæÂÂè½ 90ðãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂæ°éÂÂå§ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ã ZOOM æ«åÂÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ï¼Âæ¾大ç«é¢ ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ãÂÂæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂæ°é å§ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ã DVD MENU 顯示 ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ ï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â丠æÂÂï¼ ã FOLDER / FOLDER â æÂÂæ¾ JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂè·³è³ä¸Âä¸Âî¿åÂÂ丠æÂÂ件夾ã Folder 1-2 001. F_001 002. F_002 JPEG Disc Navigator File 1-40 001. FL000001 002. FL000002 003. FL000003 004. FL000004 005. FL000005 006. FL000006 007. FL000007 008. FL000008 XV-DV900/700.book 52 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è§Âç JPEG ç¢Âç 06 53 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ ç¶ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件夾被 é«Â亮顯示æ ＠æ¨å¯以æ ENTER çº該æÂÂ件夾æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ç«é¢ã éÂÂæ¼åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨使ç¨çÂÂæ´å¤Âè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠ä¸ÂæÂÂã 3 è¦Âå¾Âé«Â亮顯示ç æÂÂ件æ¢復éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ＠æ ENTER ã 使ç¨åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨å¾Âç¶åÂÂæÂÂ件夾ä¸Âä¸Â次顯示9 å¼µ 縮çÂÂ¥ Ã¥ÂÂã 1 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ä¸Âï¼Âé«Â亮ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â顯示çÂÂæ 件夾ç®éÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨ç«é¢æÂÂé ＠å 9 å¼µåÂÂçÂÂ以縮çÂ¥åÂÂ顯 示ã 2 ç¨å Âæ¨ÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âé«Â亮顯示ä¸Â幠縮çÂ¥åÂÂã â¢ ç¨æ²ç®跳èºÂæÂÂé ＠î å î ï¼Âè§ÂçÂÂä¸Â丠é Âî¿ä¸Âä¸Âé ÂçÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³跳éÂÂè¥干 é Âï¼Âè«ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂÂä¸Âæ¾ç´å°æ¨éÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂé£é Âåº ç¾å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¬ÂéÂÂã â¢ è¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°ç¢ÂçÂÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂç«é¢ï¼Âæ RETURN ã 3 è¦Â以堨 尺寸å¨ å±Âå¹Âä¸Â顯示 é¸å®Âç 縮çÂ¥åÂÂï¼ æ ENTER ã å¾ÂæÂÂé¸åÂÂçÂÂæ¢復éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ã æ¾大å±Âå¹Âç«é¢ ç¶è§Âç JPEG ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨è½夠å©ç¨æ¾大 Ã¥ÂÂè½å°Âç«é¢çÂÂä¸Âé¨åÂÂæ¾大 2 Ã¥ÂÂæ 4 å ã 1 å¨éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ æÂÂæ¾æÂÂç¨ ZOOM æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¾ 大åÂÂæ¸ã â¢ Normal ï¼Âæ£常＠⢠2x ⢠4x ⢠ç¶å±Âå¹Âç«é¢被æ¾大æÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂå¼µæ¾æ æ«åÂÂã â¢ ç±æ¼ JPEG Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ辨çÂÂæ¯åºå®Âç ＠åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質 éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂï¼Â尤堶æ¯以 4 å æ¾大æÂÂãÂÂä½ éÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ éÂÂã 2 ç¨å Â樠æÂÂé ＠îÂÂ/îÂÂ/îÂÂ/î ï¼Âæ¹讠æ¾ 大 å åÂÂã æ¨å¯以é¨æÂÂæ¹è®Âæ¾大åÂÂæ¸åÂÂæ¾大åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã 3 è¦Âæ¢復éÂÂå¼µæ¾æ ï¼Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂã Photo Browser 2 / 40 Live at Soft XV-DV900/700.book 53 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ 07 54 ChH 第 7 章使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ è¨Âç½®åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ 使 ç¨åÂÂé 宠æ å¨è¨Âç½® ç³» çµ± 以 å¨任你æ å éÂÂå é»æºÂ並éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã â¢ è¦Â使åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨æ£常工ä½Âï¼Âå¿ é Âå°ÂæÂÂéÂÂé² è¡ÂæºÂ確çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âç½® ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 19 é  â 訠置æÂÂéÂÂâ ＠ã 1 é¸æÂÂæ¨è¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã ä¾Â妠＠æ TUNER é¸æÂÂæ¶é³æ©Âä½Âçºæ¨çÂÂæÂÂæ¾溠ã 2 æºÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂã ä¾Âå¦Âï¼Â調諧åÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¨æÂÂéÂÂçÂÂ廣æÂÂéÂȏºã 3 è¨Âç½®é³éÂÂã 4 æÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK é²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ã 5 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Wake- Up? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 6 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â TimerEdit? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 7 è¨Âç½®éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂã ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¶徠æ ENTER ãÂÂ以 Ã¥ÂÂ樣çÂÂæ¹张è¨Âç½®å éÂÂï¼Âç¶æ¨宠æÂÂè¨Âç½®å¾Âï¼Âæ ENTER ã 8 è¨Âç½®éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂéÂÂã ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¨Âç½®å°ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¶徠æ ENTER ãÂÂ以 Ã¥ÂÂ樣çÂÂæ¹张è¨Âç½®å éÂÂï¼Âç¶æ¨宠æÂÂè¨Âç½®å¾Âï¼Âæ ENTER ã å¨æÂÂå¾Âä¸Â次æÂÂ丠ENTER ä¹Âå¾Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæÂÂ示å¨亮 起＠顯示å¹Âä¸Âå°ÂéÂÂå ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂé ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½＠DVD/ CD çÂÂï¼Â以åÂÂé³éÂÂé²è¡ÂäºÂ確èªÂã 9 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©Â模å¼Âã å¦ÂæÂÂ系統俠æ éÂÂå ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå é 宠æÂÂå¨尠丠起 ä½ ç¨＠ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM L1/L2 CLOCK TIMER/ DVD TUNER TV LINE ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER M ASTER V OLUME 9 MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 54 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ 07 55 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ æ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂæÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK å¨徠橠çÂÂæ Âä¸Â檢æÂ¥å®ÂæÂÂå¨è¨Âç½® ã ï¼ÂæÂÂä¸Â次 TIMER/ CLOCK å°Â顯示ç¶åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂãÂÂï¼ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨ å¦ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨èÂÂæ¼éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ  ï¼ å®Âå°Âæ¯Â天å¨æ¨ æÂÂè¨Âç½®çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂȎÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ系統ã 1 æÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK é²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Wake- Up? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Timer On? âÂÂæ â Timer Off? â ã â¢ æ¨忠é Âå°Âå®ÂæÂÂå¨é²è¡Âè¨Âç½® ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂ＠以é¸æ ON ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé å®ÂæÂÂå¨å°ÂæÂÂç §æ¨å ÂÃ¥ÂÂç è¨Âç½®å·è¡ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂä½Âã 4 æ ENTER ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ被復你＠åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨å°ÂèªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ涠ã XV-DV900/700.book 55 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
使ç¨å®ÂæÂÂå¨ 07 56 ChH è¨Âç½®ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ å¨è¦Âå®ÂæÂÂéÂÂå¾ ï¼Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨å°ÂéÂÂéÂÂ系統 ï¼ÂéÂÂ樣 æ¨就ç¡éÂÂæÂÂå¿Â系統èÂÂå®Âå¿Âå ¥ç¡ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¨åÂÂéÂÂå®ÂæÂÂå¨éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ Âä¸Âè¨Âç½®ç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¼Âæ©çÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂȌªå Âé²è¡Âã 1 æÂÂ堩次 TIMER/CLOCK é²堥å®ÂæÂÂå¨é¸å®ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Sleep? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæ éÂÂï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã å¨以ä¸Âé¸頠ä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âé¸æÂÂ＠⢠Sleep Auto ï¼Âå¨ç¶å SACD ã CDãÂÂVCD ï¼Â趠ç´ÂV CD æ MP3 ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾å®Âç¢ä¹Âå¾Âï¼Â系統èª Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep 90 ï¼Â系統å¨ 90 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep 60 ï¼Â系統å¨ 1 å°ÂæÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep 30 ï¼Â系統å¨ 30 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂéÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep Off ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¶Âç¡ç å®ÂæÂÂå¨ã 4 è¦Â檢æÂ¥å©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂé·度 ï¼ è«ÂéÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠1 å 2 ã å°Âæ«æÂÂ顯示å©é¤ÂæÂÂéÂÂã â¢ Sleep Auto å¨V CDï¼Â趠素VCD é²è¡ÂPBC æÂÂæ¾ æÂÂéÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂè å¨ CD éÂÂè¤ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂä¸Âèµ·ä½Âç¨ ã MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 78 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER CLOCK TIMER/ ENTER 9 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 56 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® 08 57 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 第 8 ç« ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® è¨Âå®Âç°ç¹Âè² æ¿éÂÂè¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ＠第 2 0 é  ï¼Âè¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼帶給æ¨丠åÂÂåºæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® ï¼ ä½Âæ¯æ¨ä»Âå¯以é²è¡Âæ´詳 ç´°çÂÂè¨Âç½®ï¼Â以æ¹åÂÂæ¨æ¶è½æ¿éÂÂå §çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã â¢ ç¶ æ¨æ¹讠æÂÂè²å¨ è·Âé¢å è²éÂÂé³å£Â訠å®ÂæÂÂï¼ é äºÂè¨Âå®Âå°Âè¦ÂèÂÂæ¨å¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âå®Âä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂçÂÂ訠å®Âã 1 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âé² è¡Â調ç¯ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ã ç¶æ¨ç 覽顯示 å¹ æ ï¼Âå°Â顯 示 Ã¥ÂÂé¸頠ç ç¶ å 訠置ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½®çÂÂå®Âæ´åÂÂ表åÂÂ說æÂÂã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè¨Âç½®ã 4 éÂÂè¤Âæ¥驠2 å 3 é²è¡Âå ¶å®Âè¨Âç½®ã 5 ç¶æ¨å®ÂæÂÂè¨Â置徠＠è«Âæ ENTER é¢éÂÂ系統訠å®Âé¸å®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå¨ 5 Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå §ä¸Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂ你＠系統è¨Âç½®é¸ å®å°ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂåºã 系統è¨Âå®Âé¸å®é¸頠以ä¸Âæ¯è¨Âå®Âé¸å®ä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¯é¸è¨Âç½® ã åÂÂé¨åÂÂç 第ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ訠置 çºé Âè¨Âç æ ÂãÂÂæ éÂÂè¨Âç½® ç é å 賠è¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂç« ç¯Âä¸ÂçÂÂ注æÂÂäºÂé  ã MASTER VO L UME ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TOP MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AU DIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYST E M MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO SURROUND ADV ANCED îÂÂî î î î ST TUNE TUNEâ STâ ENTER SETUP SYST E M ENTER 4 MAIN SUB ROOM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 57 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® 08 58 ChH Ã¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âç½® æÂÂå®Âå¾Âæ¨çÂÂæ¶è½ä½Âç½®å°åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢＠⢠Front 0.3 m â¼ Front 9 m ï¼Âå¯以 0.3 m çº å¢ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âè·Âé¢è¨Âç½®ãÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº 3 mã ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âç½® æÂÂå®Âå¾Âæ¨çÂÂæ¶è½ä½Âç½®å°ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢＠⢠Center 0.3 m â¼ Center 9 m ï¼Âå¯以 0.3 m çºå¢ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âè·Âé¢è¨Âç½®ãÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº 3 mã ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨è·Âé¢è¨Âç½® æÂÂå®Âå¾Âæ¨çÂÂæ¶è½ä½Âç½®å°åÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂè·Âé¢＠⢠Surr. 0.3 m â¼ Surr. 9 m ï¼Âå¯以 0.3 m çº å¢ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âè·Âé¢è¨Âç½®ãÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº 3 mã åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ å°ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS é³è»ÂæÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ調ç¯Â幠度＠⢠DRC Off ï¼Âç¡åÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂ調ç¯Âï¼Âç¶以è¼Âé«Âé³ éÂÂé²è¡Âæ¶è½æÂÂ使ç¨＠⢠DRC Mid ï¼Âä¸ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½® ⢠DRC High ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂä½ ï¼Âè¼Âé¿çÂÂè²é³ é³éÂÂéÂÂä½ÂèÂÂè¼Âå®ÂéÂÂçÂÂè²é³é³éÂÂå¢Âå ＠⢠該è¨Âç½®å å°ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂäºÂDTS é³è»ÂæÂÂæ ã å°Âæ¼堶å®ÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂï¼Âæ¨å¯以éÂÂéÂÂ使ç¨åÂÂå¤Â模 å¼ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 3 4 é  â 使ç¨å®ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¤Âè½ é³模å¼Ââ ï¼Âåµé é¡Âä¼¼çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã éÂÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂè¨Âç½® å°Â以éÂÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂ編碼çÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âæ DTS é³è»Âæ 宠æÂÂæ¾æ¹ å¼Âã æ¨ éÂÂå¯以 使ç¨該 è¨Â置尠éÂÂæÂÂ亠åÂÂç¨ç«Âé³è»Âç DVD-RW ç¢ÂçÂÂé²è¡Âè²éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂã â¢ L-Ch1 R-Ch2 ï¼Âå ©åÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè² å¨é²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ â¢ Ch1 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæ¾è²é 1 ⢠Ch2 Mono ï¼Âå æÂÂæ¾è²é 2 â¢ å¨ Ch1 Mono å Ch2 Mono è¨Â置丠＠è²é³ å å¾Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åº ï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂ以 STEREO 模å¼Âæ¶è½ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®æÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åº＠ã â¢ 該 è¨Âç½®å å°Â以éÂÂéÂÂå®è²éÂÂ編碼çÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸你æÂÂD TS é³è»ÂæÂÂæÂÂãÂÂæÂÂéÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂè³Âè¨Âï¼Âè«Âå è¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âå¥Âã LFE è¡°æ¸Âå¨è¨Âç½® æ æ¯Âæ¸你å DTS é³ é » æÂÂæ¾æºÂå æ¬ äºÂ趠ä½Âé³é³ 調 ãÂÂè«ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¦Âè¨Âç½® LFE è¡°æ¸Âå¨以é²æ¢趠ä½Âé³åº ç¾è²é³失çÂÂã â¢ LFE ATT 0 ï¼ÂL FE è²éÂÂ以ç¡衰æ¸ÂçÂÂæ Âé²è¡Âæ æ¾ ⢠LFE ATT 10 ï¼ÂL FE è²éÂÂ以 10dB é²è¡Â衰渠⢠LFE Off ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ LFE è²é XV-DV900/700.book 58 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
ç°ç¹Âè²è¨Âå® 08 59 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´ æ¨å¯以 çº å æ¶è½模 张訠置 èÂÂæ¨ç 主 覠æ¶ è½你置ç¸éÂÂçÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç´ ï¼ å ¶ä¸Âå æ¾ÂÂæÂÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè²以 Ã¥ÂÂé«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²模å¼Âã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨使ç¨æ¿éÂÂè¨Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ＠第 2 0 é  ï¼ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æ¶è½模å¼ÂçÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂç´Âå°Âé¨å³被è¨Âç½® ãÂÂä½Âæ¯＠æ¨ ä»Âå¯以æÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç´Âé²è¡Â微調ã 1 Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âæ SURROUND æ ADVANCED é¸æ æ¶è½模å¼Âã 2 å°ÂéÂÂæ§å¨åÂÂæÂÂè³ SUB ï¼ ç¶å¾Âæ TEST TONE æ¶è½測試é³ã 測試 é³ å°ÂæÂÂ以 丠é ÂåºÂ輸 åº ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶ å æ¶è½模 å¼ å¾ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åº＠＠⢠L ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ置左æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠C ï¼Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠R ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®å³æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠RS ï¼Âå³ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠LS ï¼Âå·¦ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ ⢠SW ï¼Â趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨ 3 ç¨ MASTER VOLUME /- æÂÂéÂÂå°Âé³éÂÂ調篠è³é©ç¶çÂÂç´Âã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂä¾Â次調ç¯Âæ è²å¨çÂÂç´Âã ç¶æ¨åÂÂå¨主è¦Âæ¶è½ä½Âç½®ä¸Âæ ＠æ¨æÂÂ該å¯以åÂÂ樣 çÂÂé³éÂÂè½å°åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ä¸Âå³åºçÂÂ測試é³ ã è²éÂÂç çÂÂç´Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºñ 10 dBã 5 ç¶æ¨å®ÂæÂÂè¨Â置徠＠è«Âæ ENTER éÂÂåº測試é³ è¨Âå®Âã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂæ CH LEVEL ï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠堠æ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âè²éÂÂçÂÂç´Âï¼Âå¯å¨æ¶è½任你æÂÂéÂÂè²é³æÂÂæ¾æºÂæÂÂå°Âæ è²å¨é³éÂÂé²è¡Â調 ç¯ÂãÂÂç¶ æ¨å®ÂæÂÂäºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ä¹Âå¾Âï¼Âè« ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ移è³ä¸Âä¸Â訠置ã â¢ 趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨å¯ç¢çÂÂ趠ä½Âé »çÂÂï¼Âå æ¤堶è² é³è½ä¸Âå»æ¯Â實éÂÂçÂÂè²é³è¦Âæ´çºå®ÂéÂÂã ST ANDBY/ON CD FM/AM OPEN CLOSE DISPLA Y DVD TUNER TV LINE L1/L2 î î î DVD MENU RETURN SOUND TV CONTROL CH V OL INPUT MUTE TEST TONE 123 ZOOM TO P MENU CH LEVEL DIMMER REPEA T AUDIO ANGLE RANDOM SUBTITLE PROGRAM 45 6 789 0 FOLDERâ CLR ENTER FOLDER MENU HOME SETUP SYS TEM MIDNIGHT QUIET/ CLOCK TIMER/ BASS MODE DIALOGUE VIRTUAL SB AUTO S URROUND îÂÂî î î î ENTER TEST TONE 5 SURROUND M ASTER V OLUME ADV ANCED MAIN SUB RO OM SETUP XV-DV900/700.book 59 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® 09 60 ChH 第 9 ç« è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Standard å¾ è¦Â頻調 篠ç« é¢æ¨å¯ 以 é¸ æ æ¨ÂæºÂ覠頻 顯 示æ è å®Â義æ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ã 1 æ HOME MENU å¾Âè¢å¹Â顯示é¸宠â Video Adjust â ï¼Âè¦Â頻調ç¯Âï¼ ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂé  è¨Âé  ã â¢ æ¨Â溠ï¼Âæ®é â¢ Memory1-2 ï¼Âè¨Âæ¶ 1-2 ï¼ ï¼Âç¨æ¼ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨èª å·±çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ 3 æ ENTER å®ÂæÂÂè¨Âç½®ï¼ÂéÂÂåº Video Adjust ï¼Âè¦Â頻調ç¯Âï¼Âç«é¢ã â¢ æ ¹æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ç£è¦Âå¨çÂÂé¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âæ¨å¯ è½ç¡æ³ÂçÂÂå°æÂÂ顯çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã åµ建æ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  æ¨æÂÂå¤Âåµ建äºÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨èª己çÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ã 1 é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âæ¶é Âè¨Âé  ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼ ã 2 æ î ï¼Âä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ é¸æ â Detailed Settings â ï¼Â詳細è¨Â置＠ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã 3 調ç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質éÂÂè¨Âç½®å¼ã â¢ ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® é  ã â¢ ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âç¶åÂÂ訠置ã â¢ æ DISPLAY å¨堨é¨顯示åÂÂå®åÂÂ顯示éÂÂå æÂÂã â¢ æ¨å¯以éÂÂé Recall Settings ï¼Â調ç¨è¨Â置＠é¸å®頠æ¹è®Âé Âè¨Âé  èÂÂ碼ã Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Standard V ideo Adjust Memory1 Detailed Settings Video Adjust Recall Settings Contrast Brightness Chroma Level Memory1 Memory1 min max min max min max XV-DV900/700.book 60 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
è¦Â頻調篠(Video Adjust) é¸å® 09 61 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¨å¯以調ç¯Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂä»»ä¸ÂæÂÂå ¨é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ質éÂÂè¨Â置頠＠⢠Contrast ï¼Âå°Âæ¯Â度＠ï¼Âå¨亮æÂÂéÂÂ調ç¯Âå°Â毠度ã â¢ Brightness ï¼Â亮度＠ï¼Â調ç¯Âæ´é«Â亮度ã â¢ Chroma Level ï¼Âè²度水平＠ï¼Â調ç¯Âé¡Âè² çÂÂ飽åÂÂç¨Â度ã 4 æ ENTER ä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂé Âè¨Âé  ï¼ éÂÂåºè¦Â頻調ç¯Âç«é¢ ã XV-DV900/700.book 61 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 62 ChH 第 10 ç« åÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 使ç¨åÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½®é¸å®è®Âæ¨è½夠å®Âå ¨æÂÂæ§DVD 系統çÂÂ訠置 ï¼Âå ¶ä¸Âå æ¬è¦Â頻輸åºè¨Â置頠ï¼Â家é·éÂÂå®Âè¨Âç½® é  çÂÂã å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¸頠åÂÂç°è² ＠表æÂÂæ¤æÂÂ該é¸頠ç¡æ³Âæ¹ è® ãÂÂéÂÂ常éÂÂæ¯å çºæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ£å¨æÂÂæ¾ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢該 ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ¹è®Âè¨Âç½®ã 1 æ HOME MENU ï¼Âå¾Âè¢å¹Â顯示ä¸Âé¸宠â Initial Settings â ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Â置＠ã 2 å¾Âå·¦åÂÂé¸å®Âè¨Âç½®é¡Âå¥ï¼Âç¶å¾Âå¾Âå³åÂÂä¸Âé¸宠頠ç®ã 3 é²è¡Âæ¨æÂÂè¦ÂçÂÂè¨Âç½®ã â¢ ä¸ÂæÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示åÂÂä¾Âä¸Â顯示çÂÂèªÂè¨Âé¸頠å¯è½ èÂÂç¨æ¼貴åÂÂæÂÂè²´å°åÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂã Digital Audio Mode Settings ï¼Âæ¸ä½Âé³頻模å¼Âè¨Âå®Âï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ å° å¤ÂæÂ¥çÂÂæ¸ ä½Âè¨Âå é£ æÂÂ¥ è³å Âå¸ æ¸ 你輸 åºï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Âé²è¡ÂéÂÂäºÂè¨Âå®ÂãÂÂè«Â注æÂÂï¼ÂDVD å±ç¢Âå SACD çÂÂé³頻並éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂ該å Âå¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸åºã Dolby Digital Out ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â輸åº＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Dolby Digital å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçºæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â堼容 ï¼ åÂÂå°Âæ¬訠å®Âè¨Âçº Dolby Digital ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âï¼ ï¼Âå¦åÂÂ訠çº Dolby Digital >PCM ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Â確å®Â該訠åÂÂæ¯å¦çºæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Â堼容 ï¼ è«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé¨該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ帶 çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã DTS Out ï¼ DTS 輸åº＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ DTS Play Mode Disc Navigator Initial Settings V ideo Adjust HOME MENU DVD Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Dolby Digital Dolby Digital > PCM Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out DTS DTS > PCM Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 62 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 63 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ·æÂÂ堧置张DTS 解碼å¨ ï¼ è« å°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº DTS ï¼Âå¦åÂÂè¨Âçº DTS>PCM ãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨ä¸Â確å®Â該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯å¦çº DTS 堼容 ï¼ è«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé¨ 該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ帶çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂå°Âæ¼éÂÂDTS 堼容è¨Âå ＠æ¨å°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº 亠DTS ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¶æ¨æÂÂæ¾ DTS ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå°Â輸åºåª é³ã â¢ ç¡è«Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âçº你＠DTS-CDå§ÂçµÂ輸åºDTSæ¸你é³頻ã Linear PCM Out ï¼Âç·Âæ§ PCM 輸åº＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Down Sample Off å¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂé«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣ç ï¼Â96 kHzï¼Âå ¼ 容ï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº Down Sample Off ï¼Âå¦ Ã¥ÂÂè¨Âçº Down Sample On ï¼Â96 kHz é³頻轠æÂÂçºæ´çº堼容ç 48 kHzï¼ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Â確å®Â該 è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¯å¦çº 96 kHz 堼容ï¼Âè«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé¨該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂé 帶çÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å³使æ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº Down Sample Off ï¼Âæ 亠ç¢ÂçÂÂä»Âå°ÂéÂÂéÂÂæ¸ä½Â輸åº端輸åºåÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣ç é³頻ï¼Âæ¨å è½éÂÂéÂÂ模æ¬輸åº端ç²åÂÂå ¨åÂÂ樣 çÂÂçÂÂé³頻＠ã Video Output settings ï¼Âè¦Âé » 輸åºè¨Â置＠TV Screen ï¼ TV å±Âå¹Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ 16:9 (Wide) å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬å±Âå ＠è«Âé¸æ 16:9 (Wide) ï¹ 16:9 ï¼Â寬å±Âï¼ ï¹ è¨Âå®Âï¼Â寬屠DVD è»Âé«Âå°Âç¨堨 å±Âé² è¡Â顯 示 ãÂÂå¨æÂÂæ¾ 以å³ çµ± ï¼Â4:3ï¼Âæ ¼ å¼Âé 製 çÂÂè» é«ÂæÂÂï¼Âæ¨é»è¦Âæ©Â丠çÂÂè¨Âç½®å°Â決å®Âç«é¢ 以你種æ¹ å¼Âå ç¾＠éÂÂæ¼ åª亠é¸頠å¯ç¨ çÂÂ詳 ç´°è³ è¨Âï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âæ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂéÂÂ帶çÂÂ說æÂÂæ¸ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯å³統å ＠è«Âé¸æ 4:3 (Letter Box) ï¹ 4:3 ï¼Â信箱＠﹠æ 4:3 (Pan & Scan) ï¹ 4:3 ï¼Âå ¨æ¯æÂÂæÂÂï¼ ï¹ ãÂÂå¨信箱模å¼Âä¸Âï¼Â寬å±Âè»Âé«Âå¨ å±Âå¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨顯示æÂÂé»Â梠ã èÂÂå ¨æ¯æÂÂæÂÂå°Âå å»寬å±Âç«é¢çÂÂå ©é ＠以使堶é©æ¼ 4:3 å±Âå¹ ï¼Âå æ¤ç¡管å±Âå¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂå½±åÂÂçÂÂä¸Âå»大亠＠ä½Â實éÂÂä¸Âæ¨ çÂÂå°çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ堧容æ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¾Âå°ÂäºÂï¼ ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 87 é  â å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Ââ ã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Dolby Digital Out DTS Out Linear PCM Out Down Sample On Down Sample Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out 4:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan&Scan) 16:9 (Wide) Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 63 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 64 ChH Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸åº＠å æ¬系統éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºèÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé£æÂ¥æÂÂï¼ æÂÂéÂÂè¦Âé²è¡ÂéÂÂé  è¨Âç½®ã â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Interlace å¦Âæ æ¨ç é»è¦Â橠堼容 é è¡Âæ æ ＠諠訠宠çº Progressive ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Â＠以ç²å¾Âç¡éÂÂçÂÂçÂÂè¦Â頻輸 åºãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨ç é» 覠橠丠堼容é 衠æ æ 覠頻信 èÂÂï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Â訠å®Âçº Interlace ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Âï¼ ãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ ç¡æ³Â確å®Âæ¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ ï¼ è«ÂæÂ¥çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé 帶çÂÂ說æÂÂæ¸ã å¦ÂæÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº Progressive ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Âï¼ ï¼Âæ¨忠é Â夠æÂÂä¸Â次 ENTER ï¼ÂæÂÂæ RETURN Ã¥ÂÂ涠)ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼ éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé »çÂÂéÂÂè¦Âè³Âè¨Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂã éÂÂæ¼éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé » ç¸è¼Âæ¼éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé » ï¼ éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé »çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æÂÂçÂÂæÂÂé«ÂäºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂéÂÂ樣çÂÂæÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ極çº穩宠＠毫ç¡éÂÂç ã éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Âé »å éÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Â頻輸åº æÂÂè½ç²å¾Âã â¢ ç¶ Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸 åº ï¼Âè« å 覠ä¸Âæ ＠被è¨Âå® çº Progressive ï¼Âé è¡Âï¼ æÂÂï¼ VIDEO å S- VIDEO æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡è¦Â頻信èÂÂ輸åº ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³å æÂÂå¨幾åÂÂç£è¦Âå¨ä¸Â顯示è¦Â頻信èÂÂï¼Âè«Â確誠該頠ç®被è¨Âå®Âçº Interlace ï¼ÂéÂÂè¡Âï¼ ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨é£æÂÂ¥ çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âä¸Â堼容éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¿¡ èÂÂï¼Âå» å°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂçºéÂÂè¡Â模å¼Âï¼Âæ¨å°Âå® å ¨çÂÂä¸Âå°åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã å¨ éÂÂ種æ æ³Âä¸Âï¼ è« æ î STANDBY/ON å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©Âï¼Âç¶徠æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠大素8 ç§ÂéÂÂç´ è³顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ Mem.Clr.? ãÂÂæÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ ä¸Âç VOLâ æ æÂÂéÂÂ＠顯 示幠ä¸Âåº ç¾ Interlace? ãÂÂæÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î æÂÂéÂÂ訠çºéÂÂè¡Âä¸ÂéÂÂæ°æÂÂéÂÂæ¬æ©Âã æ¬系統å°ÂéÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ æ¬æ©ÂèÂÂ帶 Macro Vision 系統æ·è²Âä¿Âè·æÂÂè¡Âç éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¦Â頻堼容ã æ¶Âè²»è è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠注æÂÂï¼Â並éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂçÂÂé«Â渠æ°度é»è¦Âæ©Âå®Âå ¨ 堼容换åÂÂï¼Âå¯è½å°Âè´åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂç°常信èÂÂ顯示ãÂÂå¦Âæ 525 éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂåºç¾åÂÂé¡Âï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è°ç¨æ¶å°Âé£æÂ¥å æÂÂå° âÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂ渠æ°度â ＠STANDARD DEFINITION ï¼Â輸 åºãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ¼æÂÂå ¬å¸é»è¦Âæ©ÂèÂÂæ¬ 525p DVD æÂÂæ¾橠堼容æ§çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«ÂèÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ客æ¶æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿Âè¯繫ã æ¬系 çµ± è ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå  éÂÂ顯示 å¨åÂÂç£ è¦Âå¨堼 容︰ PDP-503HDGï¼ÂPDP-433HDG éÂÂè¡Âæ æ 堼容é» 覠æ©Âã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Progressive Interlace Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 64 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 65 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ S-Video Out ï¼ S è¦Â頻輸åº＠å ç¶æ¬系統ç¨ S 覠頻é»çºÂèÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âé£æÂÂ¥ æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂè¦Âé²è¡ÂéÂÂé  è¨Âç½®ã â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ S2 ⢠å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç¼ç¾å¨é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ  S2 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂ伸 æÂÂæÂÂæ²ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ試å°Âè¨Âç½®æ¹çº S1 ã Language settings ï¼ÂèªÂè¨Â訠置＠Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ English æ¬è¨Â置頠è¨Âå®Âæ¨é¦Âé¸ç DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂ訠ã 妠æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂ製æÂÂæ¨å¨æ¤èÂÂæÂÂå®ÂçÂÂèªÂ訠＠æ¬系統 å°ÂèªåÂÂ以該èªÂè¨ÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂã DVD å½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼Âè½夠èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 136 種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨ÂãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂå®Âä¸Â種æªå¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºçÂÂèªÂ訠＠è«Âé¸ æ Other Language ï¼Âå ¶ä»ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå è¦Â第 8 7 é  â 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂè¨Ââ ã â¢ æ¨å¯以å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç¨ AUDIO æÂÂéÂÂå¨ DVD å½± ç¢Âä¸Âæ éÂÂèªÂ訠ä¹ÂéÂÂé² è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ã ï¼ÂéÂÂ丠影 é¿æ¬è¨Âç½®ãÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 4 8 é  â åÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Ââ ã â¢ ä¸Â亠DVD å½±ç¢Âå¨è£Âå ¥æÂÂæÂÂ忽çÂÂ¥ Audio Language ï¼Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âï¼ è¨Âç½®ï¼ÂèªåÂÂè¨Âå® ä¼´é³èªÂè¨Âã â¢ 帶 æÂÂ堩種以ä¸Âä¼´é³èªÂè¨ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â茯å¾Â碠ç é¸å®é¸ æÂÂä¼´é³ èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂè¦Âé² å ¥ç¢Âç é¸å®＠è«Âæ DVD MENU æÂÂéÂÂã Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ English æ¬è¨Â置頠è¨Âå®Âæ¨é¦Âé¸ç DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂ訠ã 妠æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂ製æÂÂæ¨å¨æ¤èÂÂæÂÂå®ÂçÂÂèªÂ訠＠æ¾ÂÂæ¾ æ©Âå°ÂèªåÂÂ以該èªÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂã DVD å½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼Âè½夠èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 136 種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèªÂ訠ã 妠æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂå®Âä¸Â種æªå¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºçÂÂèªÂ訠＠è«Âé¸ æ Other Language ï¼Âå ¶ä»ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 87 é  â 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂè¨Ââ ã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options S1 S2 Initial Settings TV Screen Component Out S-Video Out Aud io Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 65 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 66 ChH ⢠æ¨å¯以å¨æÂÂæ¾éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âç¨ SUBTITLE æÂÂéÂÂæ¹ è®ÂæÂÂéÂÂé DVD å½±ç¢Âä¸ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Âã ï¼ÂéÂÂä¸Âå½±é¿ æ¬è¨Âç½®ãÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 4 7 é  â åÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Ââ ã â¢ ä¸Â亠DVD å½±ç¢Âå¨è£Âå ¥æÂÂæÂÂ忽çÂÂ¥ Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ è¨Âç½®ï¼ÂèªåÂÂè¨Âå® åÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âã â¢ 帶æÂÂ堩種以ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Â茯å¾Â碠ç é¸å®é¸ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ èªÂè¨ÂãÂÂè¦Âé²堥碠çÂÂé¸å® ï¼ è«Âæ DVD MENU æÂÂéÂÂã DVD Menu Language ï¼ DVD é¸å®誠è¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ w/Subtitle Lang. ä¸ÂäºÂå¤ÂèªÂ種ç¢ÂçÂÂå ·æÂÂå¤Â種èªÂè¨ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® ã æ¬ è¨Â置頠æÂÂå®Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®çÂÂ顯示èªÂ訠ã ä¿ÂçÂÂé Âè¨Âç 栠ï¼Âé¸å®å°Â以è Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â誠è¨Âï¼ è¨Âç½® ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂï¼Âç¸åÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨Â顯示ã DVD å½±ç¢Âæ ¼å¼Âè½夠èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 136 種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂèªÂè¨ÂãÂÂ妠æÂÂæ¨æ³æÂÂå®Âä¸Â種æªå¨åÂÂ表ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºçÂÂèªÂ訠＠è«Âé¸ æ Other Language ï¼Âå ¶ä»ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 87 é  â 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂè¨Ââ ã Subtitle Display ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹Â顯示＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On ç¶è¨Âçº On æ ＠æÂÂæ¾æ©Âæ ¹æ Subtitle Language ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¹ÂèªÂè¨Âï¼ è¨Â置顯示åÂÂå¹ ãÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº Off Ã¥ÂÂé éÂÂå ¨é¨åÂÂå¹Âã Display settings ï¼Â顯示è¨Â置＠OSD Language ï¼ OSD èªÂè¨Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ English æ¬è¨Â置頠è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂè¢å¹Â顯示èªÂè¨Âã On Screen Display ï¼Âè¢å¹Â顯示＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD M e n u Lang. Subtitle Display w/Subtitle Lang. English French Spanish Chinese Other Language Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Au dio Language Subtitle Language DVD Menu Lang. Subtitle Display On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options English fran ais Español OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 66 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 67 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¬頠ç®è¨Âå®ÂæÂÂä½Â顯示æ¯å¦å¨è¢幠ä¸Âåºç¾ ï¹ Play ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾＠＠Resume ï¼Âæ¢復＠＠Scan ï¼Âæ æÂÂï¼ çÂÂï¹ ã Angle Indicator ï¼Âè§Â度æÂÂ示å¨＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Âæ³å¨æÂÂæ¾DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂå¤Âè¦Âè§Âç«é¢æÂÂå¨ å±Âå¹Âä¸ÂçÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂå½±æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樠＠è«Âå°Âæ¬è¨Âç½®æ¹çº Off ã Options ï¼Âé¸頠＠Parental Lock ï¼Â家é·éÂÂå®Â＠⢠é»ÂèªÂç´Âå¥︰ Off ⢠é»ÂèªÂå¯Â碼︰ ç¡ â¢ é»ÂèªÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼︰ us ï¼ 2119 ï¼ ä¸Â亠DVD å½±ç¢ÂæÂÂ家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂæÂÂæ¾ æ©Âè¨Âå®ÂçÂÂç´Âå¥è¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂä½ ï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âç¡æ³ÂæÂÂæ¾ã é 樣＠æ¨就å¯以é©ç¶æ§å¶å©åÂÂå¨ DVD 系統ä¸ÂçÂÂ觠çÂÂ堧容ã ä¸ÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼åÂÂè½ ã 根æÂÂæ¨æÂÂè¨Âå® çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼 ï¼ æÂÂæ¾æ©Âå°Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾éÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæ äºÂç«é¢ã å¨è¨Âå®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼å ＠æ¨忠é Âå  çÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯Â碼 ãÂÂä½Âçºå¯Â碼æÂÂæÂÂè ＠æ¨å¯以é¨æ æ¹è®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼 ã æ¨ä¹Âè½æ¹è®Â寠碼ã â¢ 並 éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¨èªÂçºä¸Âé©åÂÂæ¼å©åÂÂè§ÂçÂÂçÂÂç¢Âç é½ å ·æÂÂ家é·éÂÂå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ãÂÂéÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂè¦Â輸 å ¥å¯Â碼就è½æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ 妠æÂÂæ¨å¿Âè¨ÂäºÂå¯Â碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂéÂÂç½® çº工廠è¨Âå® ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 7 é  â éÂÂç½®æ¬系 çµ±â ＠ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂçÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼ã çÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼 å¨æ¨æ¹è®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´Âå¥æÂÂ輸堥åÂÂ家代碼å ＠æ¨ å¿ é Âå ÂçÂȎÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯Â碼ã 1 é¸宠â Password â ï¼Âå¯Â碼＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥ä¸Âå 4 ä½Âæ¸å¯Â碼ã æ¨輸堥çÂÂæ¸åÂÂå¨è¢å¹Âä¸Â以æÂÂè ï¼Â*ï¼Â顯示ã OSD Language On Screen Display Angle Indicator On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: Register Code Number Initial Settings ** * * Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 67 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 68 ChH 3 æ ENTER çÂȎÂÂ該å¯Â碼並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸å®ç« é¢ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¿Âè¨ÂäºÂå¯Â碼 ï¼Âå¯以éÂÂç½®æÂÂæ¾æ©Âï¼ ç¶å¾Âç» éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼 ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼å¦Âä½ÂéÂÂç½®æÂÂæ¾æ©Âï¼ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第7 7 é  â éÂÂç½®æ¬系統â ã æ¹è®Âæ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼 è¦Âæ¹è®Âæ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼＠è«Âå Â確èªÂæ¨ç¶åÂÂçÂÂå¯Â碼＠å 輸堥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°å¯Â碼ã 1 é¸宠â Password Change â ï¼Âæ¹è®Âå¯Â碼＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸å æÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨ ç¶åÂÂçÂÂå¯Â碼 ï¼ å æ ENTER ã ç¶æ¨輸堥æ¸åÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ以æÂÂèÂÂ顯示ã 3 輸堥ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°çÂÂå¯Â碼ã 4 æ ENTER çÂȎÂÂæ°å¯Â碼並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸å®ç« é¢ã è¨Âç½®î¿æ¹è®Â家é·éÂÂå®Âç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 1 é¸宠â Level Change â ï¼Âæ¹è®Âç´Âå¥＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ°çÂÂç´Âå¥ã åÂÂè¦Âæ î ï¼Âå·¦å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂéÂÂä½Âæ´å¤Âç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ ï¼Âæ´å¤Âç ç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè¦Âå¯Â碼＠ï¼Âæ î ï¼Âå³å Âæ¨Âï¼Â解éÂÂç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ ã æ¨ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂå®Âç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ 1ã 4 æ ENTER è¨Âå®Âæ°çÂÂç´Âå¥並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸å®ç« é¢ã Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock: P assword Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock: P asswor d Change Initial Settings ** * * ** ** Pas sw ord New P assword Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Aut o D isc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pass word Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Parental Loc k : Level Change ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Pa rental Lock : Le vel Change Initial Settings ** * * Pas s wo rd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 off Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options XV-DV900/700.book 68 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 69 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¨Âç½®î¿æ¹è®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼 æ¨å¯è½éÂÂè¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 8 8 é  â åÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代 碼åÂÂ表â ã 1 é¸宠â Country Code â ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼＠ã 2 ç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥æ¨çÂÂå¯Â碼ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ENTER ã 3 é¸æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼ã æÂÂ堩種æ¹æ³Âå¯é¸æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼ã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂ代碼åÂÂæ¯Âé²è¡Âé¸æÂÂ︰ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠å Âæ¨Âï¼Âæ¹è®ÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼ã â¢ éÂÂéÂÂ代碼æ¸åÂÂé²è¡Âé¸æÂÂ︰æ î ï¼Âå³堠æ¨Âï¼ ï¼Âç¶å¾Âç¨æ¸åÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ輸堥 4 ä½Âæ¸çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家 代碼 ã ï¼Âæ¨å¯以åÂÂè¦Â第 88 é Ââ åÂÂ家 ( å° å ) 代碼åÂÂ表â ãÂÂï¼ 4 æ ENTER è¨Âå®Âæ°çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家代碼並åÂÂå°é¸頠é¸ å®ç«é¢ã â¢ å° åÂÂ家代碼è¨Âç½®çÂÂè®Âæ´ç´å°ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂ裠堥 ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè£Âï¼Âå¾ÂæÂÂçÂÂæÂÂã Bonus Group ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂé¡Âå¤Âç âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂâÂÂé¡Âï¼Â該顠éÂÂ覠4 ä½ æ¸å¯Â碼 ã æÂÂéÂÂ詳æ åÂÂå¯Â碼è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢Âç å è£Âã Par e nt al Lock Bonus Group Au to Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer Pas sw ord Change Level Change Country Code Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k Change: Country Code ** * * Pas s wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 P arental Loc k: Country Code ** * * Pass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Initial Settings Country Code List Code us 2 1 1 9 Parental Loc k: Country Code ** * * P ass wo rd Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer î Off (us) î On î Single î DVD-A udio î 2ch Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Bonus Group : Key Number Input Initial Settings _ _ _ _ XV-DV900/700.book 69 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 70 ChH ç¶æ¨æÂÂæ¾堷æÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âç DVD å±ç¢Âæ ＠å¯Â碼輸堥 ç« é¢å°Âèª å 顯 示ãÂÂæ¨ ä¹ å¯以å¨ æ¤ è é² å ¥ 該ç« é¢ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨éÂÂåºç¢ÂçÂÂãÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾橠çÂÂé»æºÂç·Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦ÂéÂÂæ°輸堥å¯Â碼ã Auto Disc Menu ï¼ÂèªåÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å®＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On 該 è¨Âå®Âæ 宠ç¢ÂçÂÂ裠堥 å¾Âé¸å® ï¼Âé Â層 é¸å®ï¼Âæ¯ å¦èªåÂÂ顯示ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨æ³è¦Âé¸å®èªåÂÂ顯示ï¼Âè¨Âçº On ï¼ÂæÂÂè å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ä¸Âæ³è¦Â堶顯示ï¼Âè¨Âçº Off ã â¢ å°Âæ¼æÂÂ亠DVD ç¢Âç ＠ç¡è«Â該è¨Âå®Âçº你＠é½尠èªåÂÂ顯示é¸å® ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂè£Âå ¥æÂÂæ î ＠æ¬è¨Âå®Âå°Â被忽çÂ¥ã Group Playback ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ¾＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Single DVD å±ç¢Âå¯堷æÂÂå¤Âé 9 Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂçÂÂæ²ç®ãÂÂç¶æ¬訠å®Âè¨Âçº Single ï¼Âå®çµÂï¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂé¸çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼Âç¶ å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢ï¼ÂæÂÂè è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°é¸å®ç«é¢ã è«Â使ç¨æ 索åÂÂè½ ï¼Â第 47 é  ï¼Âé¸æÂÂè¦ÂæÂÂæ¾çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂã ï¼Âå¨ æ¬模å¼Â丠＠æ¨ä¸Âè½使ç¨æ²ç®跳躠î / î æ æÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé î / î ãÂÂï¼ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨è¦Âé£çºÂæÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ ï¼ è«Âè¨Âçº All ï¼Âå ¨é¨＠ã â¢ å³使æ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Â被è¨Âçº All ï¼Âå ¨é¨＠ä½ÂèÂ¥æ¨ å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂé¸å® ä¸Âé¸æÂÂäºÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂ以é²è¡Âæ æ¾＠åÂÂå 該åÂÂçµÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾ ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨åÂÂæ¢æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ å ç¶æ¨éÂÂæ°éÂÂå§ÂæÂÂæ¾æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçµÂå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂ次 æÂÂæ¾ã DVD Playback Mode ï¼ DVD æÂÂæ¾ 模 å¼Â＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ DVD-Audio Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer On Off Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer All Single Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer DV D-Audio DV D-Video Initial Settings XV-DV900/700.book 70 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
Ã¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âç½® (Initial Settings) é¸å® 10 71 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âé¤ DVD é³頻å¤ÂéÂÂå å« DVD è¦Â頻堧 容ãÂÂå°Âæ¬è¨Âå®Âè¨Âçº DVD-Video ï¼ÂDVD è¦Âé »ï¼Âå¯ 以象 DVD å½±ç¢Âé£樣æÂÂæ¾ DVD å±ç¢ÂãÂÂè«Â注æ ï¼Âæ¤ æÂÂï¼Âå ç¢ÂçÂÂç DVD è¦Âé »é¨åÂÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ ç¶åÂÂè½æ¹è®ÂãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¤被æÂÂéÂÂæÂÂè é»æºÂ被 Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©Â模å¼Âæ ＠æ¬è¨Âå®Âå°Âè½ÂæÂÂçº DVD- Audio ï¼ÂDVD é³頻＠ã SACD Playback ï¼ SACD æÂÂæ¾＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ Multi-ch Area SACD ç¢ÂçÂÂå¯ 以被åÂÂçº夠åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå åÂÂï¼Âç«Âé« è²é³頻 ï¼ 2ch Area ï¼ ãÂÂå¤Âè² é é³ é » ï¼ Multi- ch Area ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼éÂÂ層 SACD ç æ¨Â溠CD é³頻 ï¼ CD Area ï¼ ãÂÂè«Âé¸æÂÂæ¨è¦Âæ¶è½çÂÂé¨åÂÂã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂæ¨é¸æÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âå å°ÂæÂÂæ¾堶ä»ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂä¾Âå¦Âï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨é¸æÂÂæ¨Â溠CD é³頻ï¼Âä½ÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âæ¯éÂÂ層 SACD ï¼ åÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾ç«Âé«Âè² SACD Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ On 妠æÂÂæ¨è£Âå ¥ç ç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå æ¬ MP3 é³ é » æÂÂ件å JPEG Ã¥ÂÂçÂÂæÂÂ件ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ該頠è¨Â置就åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¦Âã é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ  On 使æ¨å è½è§ÂçÂÂæ¤é¡Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂJPEG æÂÂ件ãÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº Off å°Âè½夠æÂÂæ¾ MP3 é³頻æÂÂ件ã â¢ å° åÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨è¨Âç½®çÂÂè®Âæ´ç´å°ä¸Âä¸Âå¼µç¢Âç è£Âå ¥ ï¼ÂæÂÂç¶åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂè£Âï¼Âå¾ÂæÂÂçÂÂæÂÂã Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Disc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer 2ch Area Multi-ch Area CD Area Initial Settings Digital Audio Mode Video Output Language Display Options On Off Initial Settings Parental Loc k Bonus Group Aut o Di sc Menu Group Playbac k DV D Playback Mode SACD Pla yback Photo Viewer XV-DV900/700.book 71 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 72 ChH 第 11 ç« å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天締å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天締è«Â使ç¨ 5-6 ç±³çÂÂä¹Âç¯çµÂç·£é»ç·Â並å¨室堧æÂÂ室夠é²è¡Âå®Âè£ÂãÂÂä¿Âæ AM ç°形天ç·ÂçÂÂé£æÂ¥ã å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締è«Â使ç¨ä¸Âæ ¹ 75 ⦠åÂÂ軸é»çºÂé¤ä½Âå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天ç·Âã é£æÂ¥è¼Âå©è¨Âå 該系統堼åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²模æ¬輸堥èÂÂ輸åº端 ＠亦堷å ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸堥端åÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸åº端ã è«Â使ç¨éÂÂäºÂ端åÂÂé£æÂ¥å¤ÂæÂ¥è¨Âå ＠ä¾Âå¦Âæ¨ç VCR ï¼ MD æÂÂè CD-R éÂÂ製æ©Âã â¢ å° TV æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³æ¨é»è¦Âæ© ï¼Âæ VCR ï¼ çÂÂé³ 頻輸åº端ã éÂÂ使æ¨è½éÂÂéÂÂæ¬系統ä¾Âæ¶è½é»è¦Âæ© ï¼Âæ VCRï¼ ã è«Â使ç¨ RCA è¯æÂÂé ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ã 諠åÂÂ樣åÂÂè¦Â第 73 é  â éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé» å¹³â ã ENNA BAL AM LOOP ANTENNA 5âÂÂ6 m ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L INE1 L INE1 OUT TV IN VIDEO L R AUDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT XVâÂÂDV900/XVâÂÂDV700 XV-DV900/700.book 72 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 73 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ â¢ å° LINE1 ï¼ IN ï¼ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨æÂÂæ¾è¨Âå çÂÂ模æ¬輸åº端ã 堶ä¸Âå æ¬諸妠VCR æÂÂéÂÂé³æ©Âä¹Âé¡ÂçÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂã è«Â使 ç¨R CA è¯æÂÂé ÂçÂÂç«Âé«Âè²é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣 Ã¥ÂÂè¦Âä¸Âæ â éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé»平â ã â¢ å° LINE 1 ï¼ OUT ï¼ æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨éÂÂé³訠åÂÂçÂÂ模æ¬輸堥端ã 堶ä¸Âå æ¬諸å¦ÂéÂÂé³æ©ÂãÂÂVCR ãÂÂMD æÂÂå ·æÂÂ模æ¬輸 堥端çÂÂå ¶å®ÂéÂÂ製橠ã è«Â使ç¨ RCA è¯æÂÂé ÂçÂÂç«Âé« è²é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ã â¢ å°Âå¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT æ åÂÂé£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨éÂÂé³è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸堥端ã â¢ å°Âå¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âç LINE1 ï¼ OPTICAL IN ï¼Âæ å é£æÂ¥è³å¤Âé¨æÂÂæ¾è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå Âå¸æ¸ä½Â輸åº端ã 堶ä¸Âå æ¬諸妠MD æÂÂæ¾æ©Âï¼Âæ¸ä½Âè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæ²系 çµ±ä¹Âé¡ÂçÂÂæ¸ä½Âè¨Âå ã è«Â使ç¨å Âå¸æ¸ä½Âé»çºÂï¼Âæª é¨æ©ÂæÂÂä¾Âï¼Âé²è¡Âé£æÂ¥ã éÂÂä½Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç·Â路信èÂÂé»平 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ ATT 6dB æÂÂäºÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂå¯è½ç¢çÂÂå¾Âé«ÂçÂÂä¿¡èÂÂçÂÂ素＠並å¯è½ å¼Âèµ·æÂÂè²å¨ç¼åºé£è½çÂÂè²é³失ç ã å¨éÂÂ種æ 泠ä¸Âï¼ æ¨å¯è½éÂÂè¦ÂéÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¡°æ¸Âå¨ä¾ÂéÂÂä½Âè¼Âå©æ æ¾溠ï¼ÂæÂÂé£æÂ¥ç TV æ LINE1 æ LINE2 模æ¬ 輸堥ï¼ÂçÂÂä¿¡èÂÂçÂÂç´Âã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â TV ATT? âÂÂæ â LINE1 ATT? âÂÂæ â LINE2 ATT? â ＠ç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â ATT Off âÂÂï¼ â ATT 6dB âÂÂæ â ATT 10dB â ã å¦Âæ ATT 6dB è¨Âç½®ä»Âç¶å°Âè´è²é³失çÂÂï¼Âè«Âå 試 ATT 10dB è¨Âç½®ã 5 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã C AL T AL N S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT L R LINE1 LINE1 OUT TV IN A UDIO VIDEO L R AU D LINE1 IN LINE2 IN AUDIO OUTPUT AUDIO INPUT XV -DV900/XV -DV700 OPTICAL DIGIT AL OUT LINE2 OPTICAL DIGIT AL IN LINE1 XV-DV900/700.book 73 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 74 ChH éÂÂé³模张éÂÂé³模 å¼ è®Âæ¨è½ 夠éÂÂé LINE1 ï¼ OUT ï¼ æÂÂå é²è¡Â模æÂŽÂÂé³ã ç¶éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂé³模å¼Â徠＠大å¤Âæ¸èÂÂè²é³ç¸éÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼Âå æ¬ SURROUND ï¼ ADVANCED ï¼ AUTO ï¼ SYSTEM SETUP ï¼ å°ÂèÂÂæ¼æªåÂÂç¨çÂÂæ  ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ 試åÂÂå¨éÂÂé³模å¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ使ç¨æÂÂä¸Â被ç¦ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å 顯示å¹Âå°Âç°¡çÂÂéÂÂç RecMode On ã ç¶éÂÂé³模å¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂæ ＠å¾Â模æ¬輸åº端å³åºçÂÂé³頻 å¯è½被ä¸Âæ·ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ決æ¼æÂÂä½Âæ¬身ã 1 æ SOUND ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Rec Mode? âÂÂã 3 æ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â R.Mode On âÂÂæ â R.Mode Off â ã â¢ ç¶éÂÂé³模å¼Âè¨Âçº On æ ＠å¤Âè²é DVD å±ç¢Âå SACDç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ··åÂÂç«Âé«Âè²å¾ÂæÂÂè²å¨åÂÂ模 掳頻æÂÂå£輸åº . 諠注æÂÂï¼Âå°Âæ¼æÂÂ亠DVD å±碠＠å åÂÂ置左î¿å³è²éÂÂ輸åº ã ç¶è¨Âçº Off æ ＠å¤Âè²é DVD å±ç¢Âå SACD ç¢ÂçÂÂéÂÂéÂÂæÂÂæ æÂÂè²å¨æÂÂæ¾ï¼Âä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂ置左î¿å³é³頻å¾Â模掳 é »æÂÂå£輸åºã â¢ å¨æÂÂæ¾ SACD æÂÂèÂ¥é¸æ R.Mode On ï¼ æ¬æ©Â尠端éÂÂæÂÂè²å¨SW輸åº ï¼ ä½Âé³å°Âè®Âå¾Âç¡æ³Âè½覠ã 使ç¨ S è¦Â頻輸åº端é²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â帶æ S 覠頻輸堥端 ï¼ åÂÂæ¨å¯以 使ç¨該輸堥端ä¾Â代æ¿æ¨ÂæºÂè¦Â頻信èÂÂ輸åº端 ＠以 ç²å¾Â質éÂÂæ´好çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨ S è¦Âé »é»纠ï¼Âæªé¨æ©ÂæÂÂä¾Âï¼ å° S-VIDEO OUT é£æÂ¥è³æ¨é»è¦Âæ©Âä¸Âç S è¦Â頻輸堥端ã å¨æÂÂå ¥é»çºÂä¹Âå ＠è«Âå°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âæ¹çÂÂå°Âä¸Âè§Âå°Â溠æÂÂé Âä¸ÂçÂÂå°Âä¸Âè§Âã â¢ S覠頻輸åº端å¯å¨ S1 å S2 æ ¼å¼Âä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡Âå æÂÂ以åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â堼容 ã æÂÂéÂÂ堶詳細說æ ＠è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 6 5 é  â S-Video Out ï¼ÂS è¦Â頻輸 åº＠â ã S-VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT E1 N E1 U T TV IN VIDEO L R A UDIO LINE1 IN LINE2 IN FM UNBAL 75 AM L ANT E ANTENNA P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT XV -DV900/XV -DV700 S-VIDEO INPUT XV-DV900/700.book 74 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
å ¶å®Âé£æÂÂ¥ 11 75 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 使ç¨è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â帶æÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â頻輸堥端 ï¼ åÂÂæ¨å¯ 以使ç¨ é 亠輸堥端 侠代 æ¿ æ¨ÂæºÂ覠頻 ä¿¡ è 輸åº 端 ï¼Â以å°Âæ¬系é£æÂ¥è³æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âã å¨ä¸Â種å¯é¸ çÂÂè¦Â頻輸åºæ¹å¼Â丠＠éÂÂæÂÂ給æ¨帶ä¾ÂæÂÂä½³çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå 質éÂÂã â¢ 使ç¨ è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âé »é»çºÂï¼ æª é¨橠æÂÂä¾ ï¼ å° COMPONENT VIDEO OUT é£ æÂ¥è³æ¨ é» è¦Âæ© ä¸ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçµÂ份éÂÂ輸堥端ã â¢ 份éÂÂè¦Â頻輸åº端å¯å¨éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ ¼å¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂè¡ æ ¼å¼Âä¹ÂéÂÂé²è¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂãÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ堶詳細說æÂÂï¼Âè« åÂÂè¦Â第 6 4 é  â Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂ輸 åº＠â ã AUDIO E1 N LINE2 IN P R P B Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT ANTENNA FM UNBAL 75 AM LOOP ANTENNA COMPONENT INPUT XV -DV900/XV -DV700 XV-DV900/700.book 75 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 76 ChH 第 12 ç« éÂÂå è³Â訠éÂÂéÂÂæ¼Â示 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Demo On 該系統堷æÂÂèªåÂÂæ¼Â示åÂÂè½ ï¼ ç¶系統第ä¸Â次æÂ¥é é»æºÂæÂÂï¼Â該åÂÂè½éÂÂå§ÂéÂÂè¡Âã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Demo Mode? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æÂÂâ Demo Off? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã â¢ å¨è¨Âç½®æÂÂéÂÂä¹Âå¾Âï¼Âæ¼Â示模å¼ÂèªåÂÂéÂÂéÂÂãÂÂä½ æ¯ï¼Â妠æÂÂæ¨徠é»æºÂæ 座ä¸Âæ·éÂÂç³» çµ±é»溠＠æ¼Â示模å¼Âå°Âè¿Âå Demo On ï¼Âä¸ÂæÂÂéÂÂå°Â被 復ä½Âï¼ ã 童é â¢ é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ Lock Off 該系統堷æÂÂç«¥éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ ï¼ å¯使åÂÂé¢æ¿æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ§å¶ æÂÂéÂÂ失å»ä½Âç¨ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Child Lock? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â Lock On? âÂÂæ â Lock Off? âÂÂã 5 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã æ¹è®ÂæÂÂéÂÂ格张⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ 12-Hour æ¨å¯以é¸æ 12 æ 24 å°ÂæÂÂæ ¼å¼ÂçÂÂæÂÂéÂÂ顯示ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â 12/ 24 Hour? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â 12- Hour? âÂÂæ â 24-Hour? âÂÂã 5 æ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂçÂÂ素⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ FM 100 AM 10 å¦ÂæÂÂç¼ç¾æ¨ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°調諧éÂȏº ï¼ åÂÂ該頻çÂÂç ç´Âå¯è½ä¸Âé©åÂÂæ¨æÂÂå¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ家î¿å°åÂÂã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM AM Step? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ÂæÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â FM 50 AM 9? âÂÂæ â FM100 AM 10? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã XV-DV900/700.book 76 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 77 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¨Âç½®é»è¦Âå¶张⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âï¼ AUTO æ¬系統çÂÂé Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âçº AUTO ï¼ é¤éÂÂæ¨å¨æÂÂæ¾æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂç¼ç¾åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ失ç ＠å¦åÂÂæÂÂ好è®Âå ¶ä¿Âæ AUTO é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ  ã å¦ÂæÂÂå°Âæ¼æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂåºç¾ 失ç ï¼Âè«Âè¨Âç½®é»è¦Âå¶å¼Â＠以èÂÂæ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂ家æÂÂå° Ã¥ÂÂæ¡ç¨çÂÂå¶å¼Âç¸符 ã ç¶èÂÂéÂÂ樣åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂéÂÂå¶æ äºÂç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂè§Âç ã ä¸Â表表æÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¨Âç½® ï¼ AUTO ã PAL å NTSC ï¼ÂèÂÂåªäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容ã 1 å°Â系統åÂÂæÂÂè³徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æ SYSTEM SETUP ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³å Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ â TV System? â ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ ENTER ã 4 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿ä¸Âå Âæ¨Âï¼ æÂÂéÂÂé¸æ Auto ã PAL æ NTSC ç¶å¾Âæ ENTER é²è¡Â確èªÂã å¨ PAL å¶é»è¦Âæ© ï¼ MOD.PAL ï¼ ä¸Âè§Âç NTSC ç¯Âç® å¤Âæ¸æ¡ç¨æ°éÂÂç¼çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ頻张PAL é»è¦Âå¶å¼ÂçÂÂé» è¦Âæ©Âè½夠檢測 50 Hz ï¼ÂPALï¼Â/60 Hz ï¼ÂNTSCï¼ ä¿¡èÂÂï¼Â並èªåÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´幠度ï¼Âå¾ÂèÂÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´ æ¹åÂÂç¡æ¶縮çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç¶èÂÂï¼Âå¨æÂÂäºÂæ æ³Âä¸Âï¼ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡è²ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç PAL é»è¦Âæ©Âæ²Âæ V-Hold ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç´ä¿ÂæÂÂï¼ æ§ å¶åÂÂè½ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç±æ¼ å å 滾 å æ¨å¯è½ ç¡ 泠觠ç NTSC ç¢Âç ã å¦ÂæÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Â帶æ V-Hold æ§å¶åÂÂè½ ï¼ è«Âå°Âå ¶é²è¡Â調ç¯Âç´è³åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢滾åÂÂã å¨æÂÂäºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âä¸Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç´æ¶縮 ï¼Âå¨屠å¹Âé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨çÂÂä¸Âé»Âé ãÂÂéÂÂä¸Âæ¯æ éÂÂï¼ÂèÂÂæ¯ç± NTSC å° PAL çÂÂè½ÂæÂÂé æÂÂçÂÂã éÂÂç½®æ¬系統 éÂÂéÂÂä¸Âè¿°æ¥驠＠æ¬系統çÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨Âç½® ( é» èºè¨Âæ¶ é¤夠) å° éÂÂç½®çº工廠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Âã 1 å°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå°徠æ©ÂçÂÂæ Âã 2 æÂÂä½ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î î î î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠æÂÂéÂÂ大素8 秠éÂÂç´è³顯示å¹Âä¸Âåºç¾ â Mem.Clr.? âÂÂã 3 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î æÂÂéÂÂã ç¾å¨æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨Âç½®å¼é½已被éÂÂç½® ï¼ æ¨å°Âè½ 夠çÂÂå° âÂÂWelcome to Pioneer DVD!( æ¡è¿Â使 ç¨å Âé DVD! ) âÂÂç«é¢ã 調ç¯Â顯示å¹Â亮度 ⢠é Âè¨ÂçÂÂæ Â︰ 3 æ¬顯示å¹Âå ·æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ亮度ç´ÂÃ¥ÂÂ¥ ï¼ 1-3 ï¼ ã 1 æ DIMMER æ¹è®Â顯示å¹ÂçÂÂ亮度ç´Âå¥ã ç¢Âç æÂÂæ¾æ©Âè¨Âç½® é¡Âå 格张NTSC P AL AUTO DVD NTSC NTSC MOD.PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL Video CD NTSC NTSC MOD.PAL NTSC PAL NTSC PAL PAL CD î¿ç¡碠â â â â NTSC PAL æ NTSC PAL XV-DV900/700.book 77 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 78 ChH 使ç¨åÂÂä¿ÂèÂ።Âç æ¨Âé¡Âï¼Âç« åÂÂæ²ç® DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âè¬被åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçºä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âé¡ÂãÂÂæ¨Âé¡ å¯被é²ä¸Âæ¥細åÂÂçº章ã DVD å±ç¢Âä¸Âè¬被åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçºä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂå¤ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ ãÂÂæ¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂçµ å¯è½å æ¬許å¤Âæ²ç®ã CDãÂÂSACD å V CD ï¼Â趠素VCD 被åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçºæ²ç®ã CD-ROM å æ¾ÂÂ件夾åÂÂæÂÂ件 ã MP3 æÂÂ件被稱çºæ² ç®ãÂÂæÂÂ件夾å¯è½å æ¬ä¸Âä¸Âç´ÂæÂÂ件夾ã DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂå æÂÂæ DVD å½±ç¢Âé½å¨堶ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂçÂÂæÂÂèÂÂå°æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ樠èªÂï¼ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ÂèªÂæÂÂæÂÂ該ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂåªäºÂå°å 堼容ã æ¨ç DVD 系統ä¹ÂæÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨ÂèªÂï¼ æ¨å¯ 以å¨å¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸Âæ¾å°宠ã ä¾ÂèªéÂÂ堼容åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç¢Âç ç¡ æ³Âå¨æ¬ æÂÂæ¾橠ä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ãÂÂ樠æ ALL ï¼ÂæÂÂæ å åÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂå¯以å¨任æÂÂä¸ÂèºæÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸ÂæÂÂæ¾ã ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂ顯示堨ä¸ÂçÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå DVD Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .mp3 .jpg .jpg XV-DV900/700.book 78 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 79 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ æ¿åÂÂç¢Âç æ¿åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂï¼Â注æÂÂä¸Âè¦Âå¨ç¢ÂçÂÂ表é¢çÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂå°＠ç°塵æÂÂå®ç ã æÂÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå ¶éÂÂç·£æÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂå éÂÂç·£ã åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå¼Âé«ÂçÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂå½±é¿æÂÂæ¾æ§è½ ã åÂÂ樣æÂÂ注 æÂÂä¸Âè¦Âå®åÂ።ÂçÂÂçÂÂæ¨Â籤é¢ ï¼ éÂÂç¶æ¤é¢ä¸Âå¦ÂéÂÂ製 é¢æÂÂå æ ï¼Âä½Âæ¯ å® ç ä»Âå¯è½ å° è´ 碠ç ç¡æ³Â使 ç¨ã å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ²¾ä¸ÂæÂÂå° ï¼Âç°塵çÂÂ＠使ç¨æÂÂè»ÂçÂÂ乾帠渠æ½Âï¼Âå¦Â丠å æ 示 ç± ä¸Âå¿Âå 夠緣 è¼ è¼ æ¦æÂÂ碠çÂÂã æÂÂç´ç·Âè»Âè·¡å¾Âç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂéÂÂå§Âè¼Âè¼Âå°æ¦æÂÂã å¿沿åÂÂå¨è»Âè·¡æÂÂè½Âæ¦æÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ表é¢ã å¦ÂæÂÂå¿ è¦Âï¼Âç¨è¸ Ã¥ÂÂé Âç²¾ çÂÂå¸Âæ å¸Âå®ç CD/DVD 渠æ½Â工堷徹åºÂ渠æ½Âç¢Âç ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿使ç¨è¯＠ç¨ÂéÂÂå æÂÂå ¶ä»Â渠æ½Âå ＠å æ¬è¨Âè¨Âç¨æ¼渠æ½Âä¹Âç¯å±ç¢Âç ç¢åÂÂã åÂÂå²ç¢Âç éÂÂç¶ CD å DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂæ¯Âä¹Âç¯å±ç¢Âæ´çºèÂÂç¨ï¼Âæ¨ ä»ÂéÂÂ注æÂÂé²è¡Âæ£確æ¿æ¾åÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç¨æÂÂï¼ æÂÂæ¾åÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂä¸Âè±Âç«Âæ¾置 ã è«Âé¿å Âå°Âç¢ÂçÂÂç½®æ¼ é å·ï¼Âé æ¿ÂæÂÂé ç± çÂÂç°墠丠ï¼Âå æŽ½堠ç´ å° çÂÂç°å¢Âï¼ ã è«Âå¿å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç²Âè²¼ç´Âå¼µæÂÂç²Â貼素＠æÂÂå°Â堶使ç¨ éÂÂç ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç çÂÂæÂÂå ¶ä»Â帶æÂÂå°Â端çÂÂæ¸寫工堷ãÂÂå¦ Ã¥ÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå£Âç¢ÂçÂÂã æÂÂéÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂä¿Âé¤ÂçÂÂæ´å¤Âä¿¡æ¯ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âç¢ÂçÂÂ說æÂÂã è«Âå¿å¨æÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè£Âå ¥å¤Âå¼µç¢ÂçÂÂã ä¸Âå¯使ç¨çÂÂç¢Âç ç¢ÂçÂÂå¨æÂÂæ¾æ©Âå §å°Âé²è¡Âé«ÂéÂÂæÂÂè½ ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç¼ç¾ ç¢ÂçÂÂç ´è£Âï¼Âç ´æ ï¼Âæ²翹æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°堶ä»ÂæÂÂå£Âï¼Âè«Âå¿ Ã¥ÂÂéªå¨æ¬æ©Â堧使ç¨ï¼Âå¦åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå£Âæ¬æ©Âã æ¬æ©Âå é©åÂÂ使ç¨常è¦ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå½¢ç¢Âç ã åÂÂå¿å¨æ¬橠ä¸Â使ç¨ç°形ç¢Âç ã å°Âæ¼å 使ç¨ç°形ç¢ÂçÂÂèÂÂå°Âè´ çÂÂä»»ä½Âå¾ÂæÂÂï¼Âå ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸ä¸Âæ¿æÂÂä»»ä½Â責任ã XV-DV900/700.book 79 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 80 ChH æ¬系統æ£確å®Âè£ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¶Âè· å®Âè£ÂæÂÂ示 æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¡·å¿Âå¸ÂæÂÂæ¬æ©Âè½é·习å°çºæ¨æÂÂå ＠æÂÂ以ç¶ æ¨ é¸æÂÂå é© ç å®Âè£Âä½ ç½® æ 諠åÂÂå¿ éµ 循 以 ä¸Âå¹¾ ï¼ é» è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ忠⦠î å¨éÂÂ風è¯好çÂÂæ¿éÂÂ堧使ç¨ã î æ¾置å¨堠åº ï¼ å¹³æ´çÂÂ水平表é¢丠＠å¦Âæ¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ æ±æ¶æÂÂç«Âé«Âè²æ©Âæ¶ä¸Âã è«Âå¿â¦ î æ¾置å¨é«Â溫æÂÂé«Âæ¿Âå ´æÂÂï¼Âå æ¾£ç±å¨æÂÂå ¶ ä»Âç¼ç±å¨堷éÂÂè¿Âã î æ¾置å¨çªÂèºæÂÂå ¶ä»Â使æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂå°é½å Âç´尠çÂÂå°æ¹ã î å¨å¤Â塵æÂÂæ½®æ¿Âç°å¢Âä¸Â使ç¨ã î ç´æÂ¥æ¾置å¨æ¾大å¨æÂÂç«Âé«Âè²系統ä¸ÂçÂÂ堶仠å¨使ç¨æÂÂæÂÂç¼ç±çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé Âé¨ã î æ¾置å¨é»è¦Âæ©ÂæÂÂ顯è¦Âå¨ï¼Â尤堶æ¯使ç¨室堧 天ç·ÂçÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âï¼ÂéÂÂè¿Âï¼Âå¦åÂÂå¯è½æÂÂç¢çÂÂå¹² æ¾ã î æ¾置å¨å»Âæ¿æÂÂå ¶ä»ÂæÂÂ使æÂÂæ¾æ©Â置身æ¼ç Âé§ æÂÂè¸汽çÂÂå ´æÂÂã î æ¾置å¨åÂÂéÂÂçÂÂå°毯æÂÂå¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âï¼ÂæÂÂè ç¨å¸Âå¹ å°Âæ¬æ©Âè¦ÂèÂÂä½ÂãÂÂå çºéÂÂ樣ï¼ÂæÂÂ妨ç¤Âæ¬æ©Âæ£ ç±ã î æ¾置å¨ä¸Â平穩çÂÂ表é¢æÂÂè é¢ç©Âä¸Â足以æ¯æ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ©Âè ³çÂÂ表é¢ä¸Âã 渠æ½Âæ¾åÂÂé  DVD æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂæ¾åÂÂé Âå¨æ£常使ç¨æ æ³Âä¸ÂæÂÂä¸Âæ è®Âé« ï¼ ä½Âæ¯å¦ÂæÂÂåºæ¼æÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂå å ç°塵æÂÂé«Â污è åºç¾æ éÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂå¨詢é°è¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿Âã éÂÂç¶å¸Âé¢ä¸Âå®æÂÂæ¾åÂÂé Â渠æ½Âå ＠ä½Âæ¯æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ建è° ä¸Âè¦Â使ç¨éÂÂé¡Âç¢å ＠å çºæÂÂäºÂ渠æ½ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂæ å£Âæ¾åÂÂé Âã éÂÂæ¼çµÂé²åÂÂé¡ å¦ÂæÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå¾Â室å¤Âæ¬堥溫æÂÂçÂÂæ¿é ＠æÂÂè æ¿ éÂÂ溫度åÂÂé«Â太快ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå §é¨å¯è½æÂÂæÂÂçµÂé²ã éÂÂç¶çµÂé²ä¸ÂæÂÂæÂÂå£ÂæÂÂæ¾橠＠ä½ÂæÂÂæ«æÂÂå½±é¿æÂÂæ¾ æ©ÂçÂÂæ§è½ ãÂÂéÂÂæ¼éÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå ＠æÂÂå°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âå¨溫æ 溫度ä¸Âæ¾置ä¸Âå°ÂæÂÂå·¦å³ï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ©Â使ç¨ã æ¬移æ¬橠å¦Âæ æ¨éÂÂ覠æ¬移æ¬ æ©Âï¼Âè«Âå Âæ åÂÂé¢æ¿ ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON ï¼ å°ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂéÂÂé ã è«ÂçÂÂè³ Good Bye å¾Â顯示å¹Âä¸Âæ¶Â失å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂä¸Âé»æºÂç· ã åÂÂå¿å¨ æÂÂæ¾æÂÂæÂÂèµ·æÂÂæ¬移æ¬橠ãÂÂå çºæ¤æÂÂï¼ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Â以 é«ÂéÂÂæÂÂè½Âï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå°æÂÂå£Âã â¢ å¨ Good Bye æ¶Â失ä¹ÂÃ¥ÂÂè«Âå¿éÂÂéÂÂæ¬æ©Âï¼Âå¦ Ã¥ÂÂæ¬系統æÂÂè¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂè³åº廠è¨Âç½®ã XV-DV900/700.book 80 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 81 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ é»æºÂç·Â注æÂÂäºÂé  è«ÂæÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé Âé¨åÂÂæÂÂæÂÂé»æºÂç· ã æÂÂæÂÂé ÂæÂÂè«Âå¿æ æ¯é»締ãÂÂç¶æ¨éÂÂæÂÂæ½®æ¿ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿觸碰é»æºÂç·Âï¼ å¦ Ã¥ÂÂå¯è½æÂÂå¼Âèµ·çÂÂè·¯æÂÂéÂȾ ãÂÂè«Âå¿å°Âæ¬æ©Âï¼Â家堷 æÂÂ堶仠ç© é« æ¾ ç½® å¨é»溠締丠ï¼ÂæÂÂè 締å£Âé»溠締ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¿使é»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂçµÂï¼ æÂÂè èÂÂå ¶ä»Âé»ç·ÂæÂÂå¨ ä¸Âèµ· ãÂÂé»æºÂç·ÂçÂÂå¸Âç·ÂæÂÂ使堶ç¡æ³Â被踩å° ãÂÂæÂÂ壠çÂÂé»æºÂç·ÂæÂÂå¼Âèµ·ç«ç½æÂÂéÂȾÂÂäºÂæ ã è«Âå®ÂæÂÂ檢æÂ¥é»æºÂç· ã å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨ç¼ç¾é»æºÂç·ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ＠è«Â就迠è¯ 繫 å ÂéÂÂæ 欠æ å ä¸Âå¿Âæ 綠é· å äºÂ以 æ´æÂÂã XV-DV900/700.book 81 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 82 ChH æ éÂÂæÂÂé¤ ä¸Âæ£確çÂÂæÂÂä½ÂéÂÂ常æÂÂå¼Âèµ·æ éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ失éÂÂãÂÂå¦ÂæÂÂæ¨èªÂçº該è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂåºäºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âï¼Âè«Â檢æ¥以ä¸Â堧容ãÂÂæÂÂæÂÂå æ éÂÂå¯è½ä½Âæ¼å¦ä¸Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸ÂãÂÂè«Â檢æ¥堶å®ÂæÂÂ使ç¨çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂȌ¨ãÂÂå³使å·è¡ÂäºÂå¦Âä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ檢æÂ¥ï¼Âä» ä¸Âè½解決æ éÂÂï¼Âè«Âè¯繫éÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂè æ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·åÂÂ以é²è¡Âä¿®çÂÂå·¥ä½Âã â¢ 妠æÂÂç±æ¼éÂÂéÂȍÂÂ夠é¨影é¿èÂÂ使 系統ç¡æ³Âæ£ 常工ä½Âï¼Âè«Âå°Âé»æºÂæ é Âå¾ÂæÂÂ座è æ·éÂÂï¼Â並åÂÂ次æ 堥è¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ£常工ä½ÂçÂÂæ Âã ä¸Âè¬ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ é»æºÂç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ å°Âé»æºÂæÂÂé Âé£æÂ¥è³é»æºÂæÂÂ座ã â¢ å°Âé»æºÂæÂÂé Âå¾ÂæÂÂ座ä¸Âæ·éÂÂï¼Â並åÂÂ次æÂÂå ¥ã â¢ è«Â確ä¿ÂæÂÂè²å¨é»ç·Âä¸Âæ²ÂæÂÂé¬ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂç·Âé ÂèÂÂå¾Âé¢æ¿æ¥觸ã å¦åÂÂå¯è½å°Âè´系統èª Ã¥ÂÂéÂÂéÂÂã ç¶é¸æ äºÂæ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ æÂÂï¼ æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³輸åºã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨使ç¨äºÂç·Â路輸堥ï¼Âè«Â確ä¿Âè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ£確é£æÂÂ¥ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 72 é  â é£æÂÂ¥ è¼Âå©è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂâ ï¼Âã â¢ è«ÂæÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨ä¸Âç MUTE 以éÂÂéÂÂéÂÂé³ã â¢ 調篠VOLUME ï¼Âé³éÂÂï¼ ã æÂÂæ¾ç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ²Âæ åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ輸 åºã â¢ è«Â確ä¿Âé»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ£確é£æÂÂ¥ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ è«Âå°Âè¦Â頻輸åº復ä½Âè³éÂÂè¡ÂæÂÂæ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 64 é  â Component Out ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂé 輸åº＠â ã æ²ÂæÂÂè²é³å¾Âç°繠è²æÂÂè² å¨æÂÂä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ ä¸Âå³ åºã â¢ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠第 5 9é Ââ è¨Âç½®è²éÂÂçÂÂç´Ââ 以檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨çÂÂç´Âã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥æ¨æ¯å¦é¸æÂÂ亠STEREO è²é³模å¼Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 30 é Ââ ç¨ç°ç¹Âè²é²衠æ¶è½â ï¼Âã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥æ¯å¦éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂäºÂèÂÂæ¬模张ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 32 é Ââ 使ç¨é«Âç´Âç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂæÂÂâ ＠ã â¢ è«Âæ£確é£æÂ¥åÂÂæÂÂè²å¨ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂä½ÂéÂÂæ§å¨ã â¢ è«Âæ´æÂÂé»池ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ å¨7 米＠30ðçÂÂç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂå §å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæÂÂçªÂé²è¡ÂæÂÂä½Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Â裠æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ è«Â移åÂȾÂÂæÂÂéÂÂç¤Âç©æÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä½Âç½®é²è¡ÂæÂÂä½Âã â¢ è«Âé¿å Âå°ÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂéÂÂæ§å¨æÂÂæÂÂçªÂæ´é²å¨ç´å°Âå Âä¸Âã æ²ÂæÂÂ顯示 ⢠è«Â確ä¿ÂæÂÂæÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé£æÂ¥æ£確ã XV-DV900/700.book 82 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 83 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ DVD/CD/VCD æÂÂæ¾橠å®ÂæÂÂå¨æÂÂ示å¨éÂÂç ï¼Â丠系統ç¡æ³ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ è«Âæ·éÂÂæ¬æ©Âé»æºÂï¼Âç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂ¥éÂÂãÂÂçÂÂå¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂå¾ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂã â¢ è«Â確ä¿Âæ¬橠AMP é¨åÂÂçÂÂ風æÂÂæ²ÂæÂÂ被堵ä½Âã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥æÂÂè²å¨已æ£確é£æÂ¥ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Âä»Âç¶åÂÂå¨ ï¼ è«ÂæÂÂå®Â帶è³éÂÂè¿ÂçÂÂå ÂéÂÂæÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Âå¿ÂæÂÂè æ¨çÂÂç¶Âé·å èÂÂé²è¡Âä¿®çÂÂã åÂÂé¡ æªæ½ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ ç¢ÂçÂÂå¨è£Âå ¥å¾Âèªå 彠åºã â¢ è«Â渠æ½Âç¢ÂçÂÂã â¢ è«Âå°Âç¢ÂçÂÂæ£確å°ÂæºÂç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âè»Âã â¢ å¦Âæ DVD å½±ç¢ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂç·¨èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©Âä¸Âå¹é Âï¼Âç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âç¡æ³Â使ç¨ ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 8é Ââ DVD å½±ç¢ÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂâ ï¼Âã â¢ è«Âç 徠ä¸Â段æ éÂÂ使æÂÂæ¾橠堧é¨çÂÂçµÂé² è¸ç¼ãÂÂè«Âé¿堠å¨空調éÂÂ迠使ç¨æÂÂæ¾ æ©Âã ç¡æ³Âé²è¡ÂæÂÂæ¾ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂè£ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âè«Âå°Âæ¨Â籤é¢æÂÂä¸ÂéÂÂæ°è£Âå ¥ç¢ÂçÂÂã åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂæ¾åÂÂæ¢ï¼Âä¸Âç¡ 泠使ç¨æÂÂä½ÂæÂÂéÂÂã â¢ è«Âæ î ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¢＠ï¼Âç¶å¾Âæ î ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾ï¼ÂéÂÂå§ÂéÂÂæ°æÂÂæ¾ã â¢ è«ÂéÂÂéÂÂé»æºÂä¸Â次 ï¼ ç¶å¾ÂÃ¥ÂÂ次使ç¨åÂÂé¢æ¿ä¸Âç î STANDBY/ON æÂÂéÂÂé²è¡Âé åÂÂã è¨Â置被åÂÂæ¶Âã â¢ å åÂÂéÂȾÂÂé»æºÂç·Â被æÂÂåºèÂÂ使é»æºÂ被åÂÂæ·ï¼Âè¨Âç½®å°Â被åÂÂæ¶Âã æ²ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿æ²ÂæÂÂé¡Âè²ã â¢ è«Â檢æÂ¥åÂÂé  é£æÂ¥æ¯å¦æ£確ï¼ÂæÂÂé Âæ¯å¦å®Âå ¨æÂÂå ¥ã â¢ è«Â檢 æÂ¥é»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ ç£è¦Âå¨çÂÂæ å°ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ以確 ä¿Âé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ ç£è¦Âå¨é²衠äºÂæ£確ç è¨Âç½®ã â¢ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ç£è¦Âå¨使ç¨ Sè¦Âé »é»çºÂé²è¡Âé£æÂÂ¥ ï¼ åÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ試æ¹è®ÂSè¦Â頻輸 åºè¨Âå® ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 65 é  â S-Video Out ï¼ÂS è¦Â頻輸åº＠â ãÂÂã ç«é¢被æÂÂé·æÂÂ縱橫毠æª æ¹è®Âã â¢ TV Screen ï¼ TV å±Âå¹ ï¼ è¨Âç½®ä¸Âæ£確 ãÂÂè«Âè¨Âç½®é»è¦Âæ©Âå±Âå¹Âé¸頠以å¹é Âæ¨æÂÂ使ç¨ çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âî¿ç£è¦Âå¨ ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 3 é  â TV Screen ï¼ÂTV å±Âå¹Âï¼ â ãÂÂã ç¶å¨ VCR ä¸ÂéÂÂé³æÂÂç¶Âé AV é¸æÂÂå¨æ ＠å¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ æ¾ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂå¨干æ¾ã â¢ æ¬系統æ¡ç¨é²æ·è²ÂæÂÂè¡ ï¼ å¯å¨é£æÂ¥æ VCR æ AV é¸æÂÂå¨æÂÂé²æ¢éÂÂé³æÂÂè å¼Âèµ· Ã¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡ÂãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã XV-DV900/700.book 83 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 84 ChH MP3/JPEG ç¢Âç å¨æÂÂæ¾æÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå åÂÂå°干 æ¾æÂÂè è®ÂæÂÂã â¢ æÂÂæ¾æ©Âè Macro-Vision 系統çÂÂé²æ·è²Â堼容 ã æÂÂäºÂç¢ÂçÂÂå«æÂÂé²æ·è²Âä¿¡è ＠ç¶ æÂÂæ¾éÂÂé¡Âç¢Âç æÂÂï¼Âå¯è½æÂÂçÂÂå°åÂÂå çÂÂä¸ÂäºÂé¨åÂÂä¸Âåºç¾梠ç´ÂçÂÂæ æ³Âï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ決 æ¼é»è¦Âæ©ÂçÂÂæ æ³ÂãÂÂèÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã â¢ ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âç¹æ®ÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂè½æÂÂä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂãÂÂç¶å·è¡Â該åÂÂè½æ ＠å¯è½å°Âè´ç«é¢ç æÂÂéÂÂè®Âé»ÂæÂÂè¼ å¾®æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂéÂÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¡Â主覠æ¸å æ¼ç¢ÂçÂÂä¹ÂéÂÂ以 Ã¥ÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂ堧容ä¹ÂéÂÂçÂʌᨍ°ï¼Â並éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂæ éÂÂã DVD å CD é³éÂÂåºç¾顯èÂʌᨍ°ã â¢ DVD å CD 使ç¨ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂéÂÂ製æ¹æ³ÂãÂÂéÂÂ並éÂÂæ éÂÂã æ¶è½ DVD å±ç¢ÂæÂÂï¼Âè³橠輸åºçÂÂè²é³ä¸Âå®Âæ´ã â¢ æÂÂäºÂå¤Âè²é DVD å±ç¢ÂéÂÂéÂÂè³æ©Âå 輸åºåÂÂç½®î¿å³置è²éÂÂã åÂÂé¡ æªæ½ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ æ¬系統ç¡æ³ÂèÂÂCD-ROM 碠çÂÂã â¢ 確ä¿Â使ç¨以 ISO 9660 ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼ÂéÂÂ製ç CD-ROMã æÂÂéÂÂå ¶å®Âç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§çÂÂè³ è¨Âï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 9 é  â ä¸Âè¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§ â ã æÂÂ件å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂå°Âå î¿åÂÂç çÂÂ覽å¨ä¸Âä¸Â顯示ã â¢ ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件忠é Â以æ£確çÂÂæÂÂ件æ´å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂå½åÂÂ︰ MP3 æÂÂ件çº .mp3 ï¼ JPEG æÂÂ件 çº .jpg ï¼Â大å°Â寫åÂÂå¯＠ã æÂÂéÂÂå ¶ä»Âç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§çÂÂè³Â訠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 9 é  â 丠è¬ç¢ÂçÂÂ堼容æ§â ã JPEG æÂÂ件顯示ï¼Âä½ MP3 æÂÂ件ä¸Â顯示ã â¢ å°ÂÃ¥ÂÂå§Âè¨Âå®Âé¸å®ä¸ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨é¸å®é¸頠è¨Âç½®çº Off 以è½訪å MP3 æÂÂ件 ã è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 71 é  â PhotoViewer ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂçÂÂ覽å¨＠â ã XV-DV900/700.book 84 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 85 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ 調諧å¨ é¯誤è¨Âæ¯ Ã¥ÂÂé¡ æªæ½ ç¡ç·Âé»廣æÂÂæÂÂ大é åª é³ã â¢ è«Âæ£確é£æ¥天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ã â¢ è«Âå®Â堨伸屠FM æÂÂç·Â天ç·Âï¼Âç½®æ¼æÂÂä½³æÂ¥æ¶ä½Â置並åºå®Âå¨çÂÂä¸Âã â¢ è«Âé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ ¹å¤ÂæÂÂ¥ FM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 72 é  â é£æÂ¥å¤Âæ¥天ç·Ââ ï¼Âã â¢ è«Â調ç¯Âæ¹åÂÂèÂÂä½Â置以ç²å¾ÂæÂÂä½³æÂ¥æ¶ã â¢ è«Âé£æÂ¥ä¸Âæ ¹éÂÂå çÂÂ室堧æÂÂå¤ÂæÂÂ¥ AM 天締ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âå®Âè£ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå 第 72 é  â é£æÂÂ¥ å¤Âæ¥天ç·Ââ ï¼Âã â¢ è«ÂéÂÂéÂÂä»»ä½Âå ¶å®Âå¯è½å°Âè´åªé³çÂÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂè å°Âå®Âé é¢主æ©Âæ¾置ã â¢ 調諧éÂÂéÂÂä¸Â符åÂÂæ¨æÂÂå¨åÂÂ家æÂÂå°åÂÂãÂÂè«Â試èÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ調諧éÂÂé ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 76 é Ââ æ¹è®Âé »çÂÂçÂÂç´Ââ ï¼Âã èªåÂÂ調諧ç¡æ³ÂæÂÂç´¢å° æ äºÂéÂȏºã â¢ ç¡ç·Âé»信èÂÂè¼Âå¼±ã èªåÂÂ調諧å°Âå åµ測å°信èÂÂè¯好çÂÂ廣æÂÂéÂȏºã å¦ÂæÂÂè¦Âç²徠éÂÂæÂÂ度é«ÂçÂÂ調諧æÂÂæÂÂï¼Âè«Âé£æÂ¥ä¸Â根室å¤Â天ç·Âã è²é³åªæÂÂå®è²éÂÂæÂÂæÂÂã â¢ è«Â檢æ¥調諧å¨æ¯å¦è¨Âç½®çº FM å®è²éÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 28 é Ââ æ¹åÂÂä¸Âè¯ç FM æÂÂ¥ æ¶â ï¼Âã è¨Âæ¯ 說æ Child Lock ⢠ç¶童éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂï¼Âå¦ÂæÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂäºÂÃ¥ÂÂé¢æ¿çÂÂæÂÂéÂÂï¼ åÂÂåºç¾該è¨Âæ¯ãÂÂæÂÂéÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂî¿ éÂÂéÂÂå Âç«¥éÂÂå®ÂçÂÂ詳細說æÂÂï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 6 é  â 童éÂÂâ ã Rec Mode On ⢠ç±æ¼éÂÂé³模å¼ÂçÂÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂèÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂ＠該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 秠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 7 4é Ââ éÂÂé³模å¼Ââ ï¼Âã Phones In ⢠ç±æ¼é£æÂ¥æÂÂè³æ©ÂèÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Â該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 ç§Âã 96K Stereo ⢠ç±æ¼æÂÂæ¾æºÂçºæ¸你88.2 æ 96kHz PCM èÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½Âæ ＠該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2秠ã No Surr. SP ⢠ç±æ¼æ²ÂæÂÂç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨輸åºèÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½ÂæÂÂï¼Â該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 ç§Âã Muting ⢠ç±æ¼è²é³被éÂÂé³èÂÂç¦Âæ¢æÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂä½Âæ ＠該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂç 2 秠ï¼Âè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 36 é  â éÂÂé³â ï¼Âã Exit ⢠å¨çÂÂæ«éÂÂæÂÂä¹Âå¾ÂæÂÂä¸Âé¸å®èªåÂÂéÂÂåºæÂÂï¼Âç°¡çÂÂåºç¾該è¨Âæ¯ã XV-DV900/700.book 85 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 86 ChH DVD-AUDIO ⢠è£Âå ¥ DVD å±ç¢Âå¾Âï¼Âç¶以ä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂçÂÂã â¢AUTO â¢SURROUND â¢ADVANCED â¢DIALOGUE â¢VIRTUAL SB â¢BASS MODE SACD ⢠è£Âå ¥ SACD å±ç¢Âå¾Âï¼Âç¶以ä¸ÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂéÂÂæÂÂä¸ÂæÂÂ該è¨Âæ¯快éÂÂéÂÂçÂÂã â¢AUTO â¢SURROUND â¢ADVANCED â¢DIALOGUE â¢VIRTUAL SB â¢BASS MODE è¨Âæ¯ 說æ XV-DV900/700.book 86 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 87 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ å±Âå¹Â尺寸åÂÂ碠çÂÂ格张DVDå½±ç¢Âå¯é©ç¨æ¼幾種 ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå±Âå¹Â縱橫毠ï¼Âå¾ é»è¦Âç¯Âç® ï¼Âä¸Â荺 4:3 æ ¼å¼Âï¼ è³C inemaScope 系統ç 寬 å± é» å½± ï¼Â縱 æ©«æ¯ÂæÂÂé«Âé 7:3ï¼ ã é»è¦Âæ©Âä¹Âå¯使ç¨ä¸Âå çÂÂ縱橫毠＠æ¨Â溠4:3 å 寬屠16:9ã 寬å±Âé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬 å±ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âç TV Screen ï¼Â第 6 3 é Âï¼Â訠置æÂÂè¨Âå®Âçº 16:9 ï¼ Wide ï¼ ã ç¶æ¨è§ÂçÂÂ以4:3 æ ¼å¼Âé 製çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂæ ＠æ¨å¯以使 ç¨é»è¦Âæ©Âæ§å¶æÂÂéÂÂä¾ é¸å®Âç«é¢çÂÂ顯示æ¹张ã æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âå¯以æÂÂä¾ ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ縮æ¾åÂÂæÂÂ伸é¸ 頠＠詳æ è«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Âé»è¦Âæ© éÂÂ帶çÂÂ說æÂÂæ¸ã è«Â注æ ＠æÂÂäºÂé»影縱橫 æ¯Â大æ¼ 16:9ï¼ÂæÂÂ以å³ 使æ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯寬屠ç ＠ç¢ÂçÂÂä»Â以信箱格张æÂÂæ¾ ï¼ å¨å±Âå¹ÂçÂÂé Âé¨å åºÂé¨顯示æÂÂé»Âæ¢Âã æ¨ÂæºÂé»è¦Âæ©Âç¨æ¶ å¦ÂæÂÂæ¨çÂÂé»è¦Âæ©Âæ¯樠æºÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼Âæ¾ÂÂæ¾æ©Âç TV Screen ï¼Â第 6 3 é Â＠訠置å¯æÂÂç §æ¨çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ好訠å®Âçº 4:3 ï¼ Letter Box ï¼ æ 4:3 ï¼ Pan&Scan ï¼ ã è¨Âçº 4:3 ï¼ Letter Box ï¼ æ ï¼Â寬å±Âç¢ÂçÂÂæ å¨å±Âå¹ÂçÂÂé Âé¨åÂÂåºÂé¨ 顯示é»Âæ¢Âã è¨Âçº 4:3 ï¼ Pan&Scan ï¼ æÂÂï¼Â寬 å±Âç¢ÂçÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥Âȍ«é¢ç 堩é ã éÂÂç¶åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂ起侠大亠＠ä½Âæ¨æÂÂçÂÂå°çÂÂ並 ä¸Âæ¯æ´åÂÂç«é¢ã è«Â注æ ＠許å¤Â寬å±Âç¢Âç æÂÂ忽çÂ¥æÂÂæ¾æ©ÂçÂÂè¨Â宠＠以è³ç¡è«Âè¨Âå®Âçº你＠å 以信箱格å¼Â顯示ã â¢ å°Âæ¨Â溠4:3 é»è¦Âæ© è¨Âçº 16:9 ï¼ Wide ï¼ ï¼ÂæÂÂå°Â寬 å±Âé»覠æ©Âè¨Âçº ä»» ä½Âä¸Â種 4:3 æ ¼å¼Âï¼ é½æÂÂå° è´ç«é¢ 失 çÂÂã 使ç¨èªÂè¨Â代碼 Ã¥ÂÂ表é¸æÂÂèªÂ訠æÂÂäºÂèªÂè¨Âé¸頠ã 諠å è¦Â第 6 5 é Ââ Language settings ï¼Â誠訠訠置＠â ãÂÂå¯è®Âæ¨è½夠徠第8 8 é  â èªÂè¨Â代碼å 表â ä¸Âä»»é¸ 136 種èªÂ訠ä¹Â丠ä½Âçºæ¨é¦Âé¸çÂÂ誠è¨Âã 1 é¸宠â Other Language â ï¼Âå ¶ 仠誠è¨Âï¼ ã 2 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âå·¦î¿å³ å  æ¨Âï¼Âé¸ æ æ¯ 使 ç¨ 代 碼åÂÂæ¯ÂéÂÂæ¯代碼æ¸å ã 3 ç¨ îÂÂ/î ï¼Âä¸Âî¿丠堠æ¨Âï¼Âé¸ æÂʊȣ 碼 å 毠æÂÂ代碼æ¸åÂÂã éÂÂæ¼ èªÂè¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂ代碼çÂÂå® æ´ Ã¥ÂÂ表ï¼Âè«Âå è¦Â第 8 8 é Ââ èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表â ã XV-DV900/700.book 87 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 88 ChH èªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 èªÂ訠ï¼ÂèªÂè¨Â代碼åÂÂæ¯Âï¼ ï¼ èªÂè¨Â代碼 Japanese (ja), 1001 English (en), 0514 French (fr), 0618 German (de), 0405 Italian (it), 0920 Spanish (es), 0519 Dutch (nl), 1412 Russian (ru), 1821 Chinese (zh), 2608 Korean (ko), 1115 Greek (el), 0512 Afar (aa), 0101 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Amharic (am), 0113 Arabic (ar), 0118 Assamese (as), 0119 Aymara (ay), 0125 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Bihari (bh), 0208 Bislama (bi), 0209 Bengali (bn), 0214 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Breton (br), 0218 Catalan (ca), 0301 Corsican (co), 0315 Czech (cs), 0319 Welsh (cy), 0325 Danish (da), 0401 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Estonian (et), 0520 Basque (eu), 0521 Persian (fa), 0601 Finnish (fi), 0609 Fiji (fj), 0610 Faroese (fo), 0615 Frisian (fy), 0625 Irish (ga), 0701 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 Galician (gl), 0712 Guarani (gn), 0714 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Hausa (ha), 0801 Hindi (hi), 0809 Croatian (hr), 0818 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Armenian (hy), 0825 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Indonesian (in), 0914 Icelandic (is), 0919 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Javanese (jw), 1023 Georgian (ka), 1101 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Cambodian (km), 1113 Kannada (kn), 1114 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Latin (la), 1201 Lingala (ln), 1214 Laothian (lo), 1215 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Latvian (lv), 1222 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Maori (mi), 1309 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Marathi (mr), 1318 Malay (ms), 1319 Maltese (mt), 1320 Burmese (my), 1325 Nauru (na), 1401 Nepali (ne), 1405 Norwegian (no), 1415 Occitan (oc), 1503 Oromo (om), 1513 Oriya (or), 1518 Panjabi (pa), 1601 Polish (pl), 1612 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 Portuguese (pt), 1620 Quechua (qu), 1721 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Kirundi (rn), 1814 Romanian (ro), 1815 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 Sangho (sg), 1907 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Slovak (sk), 1911 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Samoan (sm), 1913 Shona (sn), 1914 Somali (so), 1915 Albanian (sq), 1917 Serbian (sr), 1918 Siswati (ss), 1919 Sesotho (st), 1920 Sundanese (su), 1921 Swedish (sv), 1922 Swahili (sw), 1923 Tamil (ta), 2001 Telugu (te), 2005 Tajik (tg), 2007 Thai (th), 2008 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Turkmen (tk), 2011 Tagalog (tl), 2012 Setswana (tn), 2014 Tonga (to), 2015 Turkish (tr), 2018 Tsonga (ts), 2019 Tatar (tt), 2020 Twi (tw), 2023 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Urdu (ur), 2118 Uzbek (uz), 2126 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Volap?k (vo), 2215 Wolof (wo), 2315 Xhosa (xh), 2408 Yoruba (yo), 2515 Zulu (zu), 2621 Ã¥ÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代碼åÂÂ表 Ã¥ÂÂ家 ( å° å ) ã åÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代 碼ã åÂÂ家 ( å°å ) 代 碼åÂÂ毠é¿根廷 , 0118 , ar 澳洲 , 0121 , au 奧å°å© , 0120 , at æ¯Âå©æ , 0205 , be 巴西 , 0218 , br å æ¿大 , 0301 , ca æºå© , 0312 , cl ä¸Âå , 0314 , cn 丹麥 , 0411 , dk 菠, 0609 , fi æ³Âå , 0618 , fr å¾·å , 0405 , de é¦Â港 , 0811 , hk å°度 , 0914 , in å°度尼西亠, 0904 , id 義大å© , 0920 , it æ崾 , 1016 , jp éÂÂå , 1118 , kr 馬ä¾Â西亠, 1325 , my 墨西åÂÂ¥ , 1324 , mx è·è , 1412 , nl ç´Â西è , 1426 , nz æª娠, 1415 , no å·´åºæ¯å¦ , 1611 , pk è²å¾Âè³ , 1608 , ph è¡èÂÂç , 1620 , pt ä¿Âç¾ æ¯è¯é¦ , 1821 , ru æ°å å¡ , 1907 , sg 西çÂÂç , 0519 , es çÂÂ士 , 1905 , se çÂÂå ¸ , 0308 , ch èºç£ , 2023 , tw æ³°å , 2008 , th è±å , 0702 , gb ç¾Âå , 2119 , us XV-DV900/700.book 88 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 89 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ é Âè¨Â代碼åÂÂ表 è«Â注æÂÂï¼Âå¯è½å¨åÂÂé ÂäºÂæ£確çÂÂé Âè¨Â代碼å¾Âåªè½æ§å¶é¨åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè½ï¼Âä¹ÂæÂÂå¯è½åÂÂ表ä¸ÂçÂÂ製é åÂÂ代碼尠æ¨使ç¨çÂÂæ©ÂÃ¥ÂÂç¡æÂÂã 製é å 代碼 ACURA 644 ADMIRAL 631 AIWA 660 AKAI 632, 635, 642 AKURA 641 ALBA 607, 639, 641, 644 AMSTRAD 642, 644, 647 ANITECH 644 ASA 645 ASUKA 641 AUDIOGONIC 607, 636 BASIC LINE 641, 644 BAUR 631, 607, 642 BEKO 638 BEON 607 BLAUPUNKT 631 BLUE SKY 641 BLUE STAR 618 BPL 618 BRANDT 636 BTC 641 BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647, 656 CASCADE 644 CATHAY 607 CENTURION 607 CGB 642 CIMLINE 644 CLARIVOX 607 CLATRONIC 638 CONDOR 638 CONTEC 644 CROSLEY 632 CROWN 638, 644 CRYSTAL 642 CYBERTRON 641 DAEWOO 607, 644, 656 DAINICHI 641 DANSAI 607 DAYTON 644 DECCA 607, 648 DIXI 607, 644 DUMONT 653 ELIN 607 ELITE 641 ELTA 644 EMERSON 642 ERRES 607 FERGUSON 607, 636, 651 FINLANDIA 635, 643, 655 FINLUX 632, 607, 645, 648, 653, 654, 655 FIRSTLINE 640, 644 FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645 FORMENTI 632, 607, 642 FRONTECH 631, 642, 646 FRONTECH / PROTECH 632 FUJITSU 648, 629 FUNAI 640, 646, 658 GBC 632, 642 GE 601, 608, 607, 610, 617, 602, 628, 618 GEC 607, 634, 648 GELOSO 632, 644 GENEXXA 631, 641 GOLDSTAR 610, 623, 621, 602, 607, 650 GOODMANS 607, 639, 647, 648, 656 GORENJE 638 GPM 641 GRAETZ 631, 642 GRANADA 607, 635, 642, 643, 648 GRADIENTE 630, 657 GRANDIN 618 GRUNDIG 631, 653 HANSEATIC 607, 642 HCM 618, 644 HINARI 607, 641, 644 HISAWA 618 HITACHI 631, 633, 634, 636, 642, 643, 654, 606, 610, 624, 625, 618 HUANYU 656 HYPSON 607, 618, 646 ICE 646, 647 IMPERIAL 638, 642 INDIANA 607 INGELEN 631 INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642 INTERVISION 646, 649 ISUKAI 641 ITC 642 ITT 631, 632, 642 JEC 605 JVC 613, 623 KAISUI 618, 641, 644 KAPSCH 631 KENDO 642 KENNEDY 632, 642 KORPEL 607 KOYODA 644 LEYCO 607, 640, 646, 648 LIESENK & TTER 607 LOEWE 607 LUXOR 632, 642, 643 M - ELECTRONIC 631, 644, 645, 654, 655, 656, 607, 636, 651 MAGNADYNE 632, 649 MAGNAFON 649 MAGNAVOX 607, 610, 603, 612, 629 MANESTH 639, 646 MARANTZ 607 MARK 607 MATSUI 607, 639, 640, 642, 644, 647, 648 MCMICHAEL 634 MEDIATOR 607 MEMOREX 644 METZ 631 MINERVA 631, 653 MITSUBISHI 609, 610, 602, 621, 631 MULTITECH 644, 649 NEC 659 NECKERMANN 631, 607 NEI 607, 642 NIKKAI 605, 607, 641, 646, 648 NOBLIKO 649 NOKIA 632, 642, 652 NORDMENDE 632, 636, 651, 652 OCEANIC 631, 632, 642 ORION 632, 607, 639, 640 OSAKI 641, 646, 648 OSO 641 OSUME 648 OTTO VERSAND 631, 632, 607, 642 PALLADIUM 638 PANAMA 646 PANASONIC 631, 607, 608,642, 622 PATHO CINEMA 642 PAUSA 644 PHILCO 632, 642 PHILIPS 631, 607, 634, 656 PHOENIX 632 PHONOLA 607 PROFEX 642, 644 PROTECH 607, 642, 644, 646, 649 QUELLE 631, 632, 607, 642, 645, 653 R -LINE 607 RADIOLA 607 RADIOSHACK 610, 623, 621, 602 RBM 653 RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662, 609 REDIFFUSION 632, 642 REX 631, 646 ROADSTAR 641, 644, 646 SABA 631, 636, 642, 651 SAISHO 639, 644, 646 SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643 SAMBERS 649 SAMSUNG 607, 638, 644, 646 SANYO 635, 645, 648, 621, 614 SBR 607, 634 SCHAUB LORENZ 642 SCHNEIDER 607, 641, 647 SEG 642, 646 SEI 632, 640, 649 SELECO 631, 642 SHARP 602, 619, 627 SIAREM 632, 649 SIEMENS 631 SINUDYNE 632, 639, 640, 649 SKANTIC 643 SOLAVOX 631 SONOKO 607, 644 SONOLOR 631, 635 XV-DV900/700.book 89 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 90 ChH SONTEC 607 SONY 604 SOUNDWAVE 607 STANDARD 641, 644 STERN 631 SUSUMU 641 SYSLINE 607 TANDY 631, 641, 648 TASHIKO 634 TATUNG 607, 648 TEC 642 TELEAVIA 636 TELEFUNKEN 636, 637, 652 TELETECH 644 TENSAI 640, 641 THOMSON 636, 651, 652, 663 THORN 631, 607, 642, 645, 648 TOMASHI 618 TOSHIBA 605, 602, 626, 621, 653 TOWADA 642 ULTRAVOX 632, 642, 649 UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646, 654, 655 VESTEL 607 VICTOR 613 VOXSON 631 WALTHAM 643 WATSON 607 WATT RADIO 632, 642, 649 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607 YOKO 607, 642, 646 ZENITH 603, 620 PIONEER 600, 631, 632, 607, 636, 642, 651 XV-DV900/700.book 90 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 91 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¡Â誠模掳頻 ç´æ¥表ç¾è²é³çÂÂé»信è ã è«ÂèÂÂå¯以çºé»信èÂÂä½ å°Âè²é³ é æÂÂ¥ 表 ç¾ çÂÂæ¸你é³ é » ç¸ 毠è¼ÂãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â æ¸ä½Âé³頻â ã 縱橫毠é»è¦Âå±Âå¹Â寬度ç¸å°Âé«Â度çÂÂ毠ã å³統é»è¦Â縱橫毠çº4 :3 ï¼ÂæÂÂè¨Âä¹Âï¼Âå±Âå¹ÂæÂ¥è¿Âæ¼æ£æ¹形＠ï¼Â寬 å± é»è¦Âæ©Âçº 16:9ï¼Âå±Âå¹ÂçÂÂ寬幾ä¹Âæ¯é«ÂçÂÂå ©åÂÂï¼ ã éÂÂéÂÂé¡ ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æ âÂÂéÂÂéÂÂâÂÂé¡Âï¼Â該é¡ÂéÂÂè¦Â寠碼æÂÂè½ç²åÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂè¦Â第 6 9 é  â Bonus Group ï¼ÂéÂÂéÂÂé¡Âï¼ â ã å¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂç ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD å±ç¢Âå ·æÂÂ該åÂÂè½＠使ç¨æ¶å¨æÂÂæ¾é³頻 æÂÂå¯ç 覽 éÂÂ製å¨ 碠çÂÂä¸Âç é åÂÂãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠â å çÂÂæ¾æ â ã æ¸ä½Âé³頻 éÂÂéÂÂæ¸åÂÂå°Âè²é³éÂÂæ¥表ç¾ ãÂÂéÂÂ製éÂÂç¨Âä¸Âï¼Âè²é³ éÂÂéÂÂ模 æ¸ è½ÂæÂÂå¨ 以é¢æ£ ç éÂÂéÂÂé² 衠測宠ï¼ÂCD é³頻çºæ¯Â秠44,100 次＠ï¼ÂçÂÂæÂÂæ¸åÂÂæµÂãÂÂæÂÂæ¾ æÂÂï¼Âæ¸模轠æ å¨ å 根 æÂÂéÂÂ亠æ¸ å ç æ 模æ¬信 èÂÂãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â åÂÂ樣頻çÂÂâ åÂÂâ 模掳頻â ã æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸你1 æ¡ç¨æÂÂå¤Âçº 5.1 è²éÂÂçÂÂé³頻＠éÂÂ種é«Â質éÂÂçÂÂç° ç¹Âè²系統被æÂÂç¨æ¼ä¸ÂçÂÂä¸Â許å¤Âé«Âç´Âé»影é¢ä¸Âã è¢å¹Â顯示å¯表æÂÂåªä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂæ£å¨使ç¨丠＠ä¾Â妠顯示 3/2.1 æÂÂï¼Â3 çº堩åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè²éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂä¸Â央è²éÂÂï¼ 2çº ç°ç¹Âè²è²éÂÂï¼Â1 æ¯ L FE è²éÂÂã æÂÂæ¯Âå°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯î¿å°Âæ¥ÂéÂÂ輯 II ç©é£解碼系統å¯èª 2 å è²éÂÂæÂÂæ¾æºÂä¸ÂæÂÂå 4.1 ï¼ÂæÂÂ毠尠楠é 輯ï¼Âæ è 5 .1 ï¼Âæ 毠尠楠é 輯 IIï¼Âè²éÂÂç°ç¹Âè²ã DTS DTS 代表 Digital Theater System ï¼Âæ¸ä½Âå½±é¢ 系統＠ãÂÂDTS æ¯ä¸Â種ä¸ÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¼æÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½ÂçÂÂç°ç¹Âè² 系統 ï¼ å®Â已綠æ çºé»影ä¸Âè¼Âæ® å çÂÂç°ç¹Âè²格 å¼Âã åÂÂæ Âç¯Âå é³頻信 è ä¸ÂæÂÂé¿è² é³åÂÂæ 輠è² é³ä¹Âé ç 差 å¼ ï¼Âæ²Âæ 失çÂÂæÂÂæ²Âæ å¨åªè²ä¸Âæ 失＠ãÂÂæ æ¯Âæ¸你åÂÂD TS è²éÂÂé½æÂÂå¾Â寬çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ Âç¯ÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ è½夠ç¢çÂÂå½± é¢ç´ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ ÂæÂÂæÂÂã R XV-DV900/700.book 91 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 92 ChH EXIF ï¼Âå¯交æÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件＠éÂÂæ¯ç± Fuji Photo Film éÂÂç¼çÂÂä¸Â種ç¨æ¼æ¸你ç¸æ©ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件格张ã 許å¤Âå» åÂÂçÂÂç¢çÂÂæ¸ä½Âç¸æ©Âé½ 使ç¨éÂÂ種å£Â縮çÂÂæÂÂ件格å¼Âï¼ å®Â帶æÂÂæÂ¥æÂÂï¼ÂæÂÂé åÂÂ縮çÂ¥åÂÂè³Âè¨Â以åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂæ¸æÂÂã æÂÂ件æ´å±Âå å å¨ æÂÂ件æ« å°¾ ç 樠籤 ï¼Â表示 æÂʊȦ ç é¡ÂÃ¥ÂÂãÂÂä¾ å¦Âï¼ âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂ表示 MP3 æÂÂ件ã ISO 9660 格张CD-ROM ç¢ÂçÂÂ容éÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂ件çµÂæ§ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂéÂÂæ¨ÂæºÂã JPEG éÂÂå ï¼Âå¦Âç §çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ÂçÂÂæÂÂ件格å¼ÂãÂÂJPEG æ 件以 âÂÂ.jpgâÂÂæ âÂÂ.JPGâÂÂæ´å±Âå è åÂ¥ãÂÂçµÂ大 é¨åÂÂçÂÂæ¸ä½Âç¸æ©Âé½æ¡ç¨éÂÂ種格å¼Âã MP3 MP3 ï¼ÂMPEG1 é³頻層 3ï¼Âæ¯ä¸Â種å£Â縮çÂÂé³頻æ 件格å¼ÂãÂÂæÂÂ件以 âÂÂ.mp3âÂÂæ âÂÂ.MP3âÂÂæ´å±Âå èÂÂå¥ã MLP î¿å£Â縮 PCM ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å±ç¢Âï¼ éÂÂæ¯ä¸Â種ç¡æÂÂçÂÂå£Â縮格张＠å¯使 DVD å±ç¢Âä¸Âä¿ åÂÂç PCM é³頻æ¯Âå ¶ä»Âæ¹å¼ÂæÂÂä¿ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂå¤Âã MPEG é³頻 ç¨æ¼ VCD Ã¥ÂÂä¸Â亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂä¸Â種é³頻格张ã æ¬ æ©Âå¯以尠MPEG é³頻è½ÂæÂÂæ PCM æ ¼å¼Âï¼Â以æ´好 å°èÂÂæ¸ä½ÂéÂÂ製è¨ÂÃ¥ÂÂå AV æ¾大å¨堼容ãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â PCM ï¼ÂèÂÂ碼調å¶＠â ã MPEG è¦Âé » ç¨æ¼ VCD å D VD ç¢ÂçÂÂçÂÂä¸Â種è¦Â頻格张ãÂÂVCD æ¡ ç¨è¼Âæ©ç MPEG-1 æ¨ÂæºÂï¼Âè DVD æ¡ç¨æ´æ°ï¼Â質 éÂÂæ´好ç MPEG-2 æ¨ÂæºÂã PBC ï¼ÂæÂÂæ¾æ§å¶＠ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ VCD/ 趠素VCD ï¼ é éÂÂéÂÂ製 å¨ç¢ÂçÂÂä¸Âç è¢å¹Â顯示é¸ å®çÂÂ覽 VCD/ 趠素VCD çÂÂä¸Â種系統 ã 尤堶é©ç¨æ¼ä¸Âæ¯ä¸Â次徠é ÂçÂÂå°尾çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂï¼Âä¾Âå¦Âå¡æ OK ç¢ÂçÂÂã PCM ï¼ÂèÂÂ碼調å¶＠CD å D AT ä¸ÂæÂÂ常è¦ÂçÂÂæ¸ä½Âé³頻編碼系統ãÂÂ質 éÂÂçµÂä½³ï¼Âä½Âæ¯èÂÂæÂÂæ¯Âæ¸ä½Âå MPEG é³頻çÂÂ格张ç¸毠＠éÂÂè¦Â大éÂÂçÂÂæ¸æ ã å¯åÂÂ覠â æ¸ä½Âé³頻 â ã åÂÂå ï¼Âå ç¨æ¼ DVD å½±ç¢Âï¼ å°Âç¢ÂçÂÂå æ æ¾æ©ÂèÂÂ丠çÂÂä¸Âç ç¹ å® åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂè¯ 繫 å¨ ä¸Âèµ·ãÂÂæ¬æ©Âå æÂÂæ¾堷æÂÂ堼容åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代碼çÂÂç¢ÂçÂÂã æ¨å¯以å¨å¾Âé¢æ¿ä¸ÂçÂÂå°æ¬æ©ÂçÂÂÃ¥ÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ代碼 ã æÂÂç ç¢ÂçÂÂè 丠æ¢丠åÂÂçÂÂå åÂÂ堼容 ï¼ÂæÂÂè æÂÂæÂÂå å 堼容＠ã S1 S è¦Â頻輸åº 該S 覠頻信èÂÂæ ¼å¼Âå¨è¦Â頻信èÂÂä¸Âå å«縱橫æ¯Âè³ è¨Âï¼ 4 : 3 æ 16:9 ï¼ ã S2 S è¦Â頻輸åº S2 æ¯ S è¦Âé »çÂÂå¢Âå¼·çÂÂï¼ å®Âé¤äºÂ縱橫æ¯Âè³Âè¨Âå¤Âï¼ éÂÂå å« letterbox/pan & scan è³Âè¨ÂãÂÂè S2 S è¦Â頻堼容 ç 寬å±Âé»覠æ©Âå¯根 æ 信 èÂÂèªå å æ è³åÂÂé©çÂÂ模å¼Âã XV-DV900/700.book 92 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 93 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ åÂÂ樣頻ç è½ÂæÂÂæÂÂæ¸ä½Âé³頻æ¸æÂÂæÂÂè²é³çÂÂ測éÂÂé »ç ã 頻ç è¶Âé«Âï¼Âé³質 趠好 ï¼Âä½Âæ¯ å° ç æ æ´ 夠ç æ¸ä½Âè³ è¨ÂãÂÂæ¨Â溠CD é³頻çÂÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣頻çÂÂçº 44.1kHzï¼Âå³ æÂÂæ¯Âç§ÂÃ¥ÂÂ樣 ï¼Â測éÂÂï¼Â44,100 次 ãÂÂå¯åÂÂ覠â æ¸ ä½Âé³頻â ã åÂÂçÂÂæ¾æ ＠DVD ã VCD/ 趠素VCD ï¼ æÂÂ亠DVD ç¢ÂçÂÂå VCD/ 趠素VCD å ·æÂÂ該åÂÂè½＠å¯使é 製 å¨ ç¢ÂçÂÂ丠ç é å å¨æÂÂæ¾ é³ é » æ èªå 循ç°æÂÂæ¾ãÂÂè«ÂÃ¥ÂÂ覠âÂÂå¯çÂÂ覽åÂÂçÂÂâ ã 趠ç´Âé³頻 ï¼ SACD ＠趠ç´Âé³頻 CD æ¯ä¸Â種é«Â質éÂÂçÂÂé³頻ç¢ÂçÂÂæ ¼å¼Âï¼ å¯å¨å 丠張 ç¢ÂçÂÂ丠容 ç´ é« åÂÂ樣頻 ç 章髠è²å å¤Âè²éÂÂé³頻ï¼Â以åÂÂ常覠CD é³頻ã XV-DV900/700.book 93 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 94 ChH è¦Âæ ¼ æ¾大å¨é¨å é£çºÂÃ¥ÂÂç ï¼ÂRMSï¼Â................ 75W î¿è²é ................... (1 kHz, THD 10%, 6 ⦠) ç¢ÂçÂÂé¨å æ¸ä½Âé³頻 ç¹æ§ .............. DVD fs: 96 kHz, 24 ä½Âå  é¡Âå ......DVD 系統ï¼ÂVCD 系統å CD æ¸ä½Âé³頻 系統 é »çÂÂé¿æ 48 kHz Ã¥ÂÂ樣 ................ 4 Hz-22 kHz 96 kHz Ã¥ÂÂ樣 ................ 4 Hz-44 kHz 192 kHz Ã¥ÂÂ樣 ............... 4 Hz-88 kHz ä¿¡åª毠............................. 108 dB Ã¥ÂÂæ Âç¯Âå ............................ 95 dB 總諧波失ç ........................ 0.005 % æÂÂæÂÂç ........................... 測éÂÂéÂÂå¶ ï¼Âñ 0.001 % W.PEAKï¼ÂæÂÂ以丠ï¼ÂJEITAï¼ FM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå ...................... 87.5-108MHz 天締........................ 75 ⦠ï¼ÂéÂÂ平衡 AM 調諧å¨é¨å 頻çÂÂç¯Âå ....531 kHz è³ 1,602 kHz ï¼Â使ç¨ 9 kHz çÂÂç´Âï¼ ...530 kHz è³ 1,700 kHz ï¼Â使ç¨ 10 kHz çÂÂç´Â＠天締............................. ç°形天締堶仠é»æºÂè¦Âæ± ...AC 110-120 V/220-230 V/240 Vï¼Â50/60 Hz Ã¥ÂÂè ................................172 W å¾ æ©Â模å¼Â丠åÂÂè ............................... 0.55 W 尺寸＠DVD/CD 調諧å¨ ...... 360 ï¼Â寬＠à74 ï¼Âé«Â＠à270 ï¼Âæ·±ï¼Âmm 顯示幠. 274 ï¼Â寬＠à44 ï¼Âé«Â＠à35 ï¼Âæ·±ï¼Âmm éÂÂéÂÂ︰ DVD/CD 調諧å¨ ...................... 3.2 kg 顯示幠............................. 0.2 kg éÂÂ件 æÂÂä½Â說æÂÂæ¸ .............................. 1 è¨Âç½® 系統 ................................1 顯示幠..................................1 éÂÂæ§å¨ ..................................1 é»æºÂç· ..................................1 è¦Âé »é»纠ï¼Âé»Âè²æÂÂé Âï¼ ....................1 顯示å¹Âé»纠ï¼Âç°è²æÂÂé Âï¼ ..................1 æ§å¶é»纠A ï¼ èÂÂè²æÂÂé Âï¼ ..................1 æ§å¶é»纠B ï¼ é»Âè²æÂÂé Âï¼ ..................1 FM 天締.................................1 AM ç°形天締............................. 1 ä¹¾é»池ï¼ÂAA/R6ï¼Â......................... 2 æÂÂè²å¨é»纠ï¼Â5 米＠......................3 æÂÂè²å¨é»纠ï¼Â10 米＠.....................2 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨＠ï¼Âå é S-DV700STï¼ ....................3 é²æ»Â墠ï¼Â趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨＠..................4 æÂÂè²å¨æ¯æ¶ ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨＠........4 æÂÂè²å¨æ¯æ¶ ï¼Âä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨＠ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ....................1 大èº絲 ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ................8 ä¸Âèº絲 ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ................2 å°Âèº絲 ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ...............16 èÂÂæ¿ ï¼Âå é S-DV900STï¼ ..................4 è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨系統 ï¼ S-DV700ST ï¼ å°ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂé²ç£Âå¼ æÂÂè²å¨ ..................... 8.7 cm ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ ........................... 5.2 cm ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ é¡Âå®ÂéÂȾ ............................. 6 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå ..................... 80-20,000 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥 .................... 75 W ï¼ÂJEITAï¼ åÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ...... 110 ï¼Â寬＠à59 ï¼Â深＠à284 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé ............................... 0.7 kg ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ...... 284 ï¼Â寬＠à59 ï¼Â深＠à110 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé ............................... 0.7 kg XV-DV900/700.book 94 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 95 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ è¡ÂæÂÂæÂÂè²å¨系統 ï¼ S-DV900ST ï¼ é¡Âå ........................ å¹³æ¿å¼Âæ¸æ¶å æÂÂè²å¨ æ¯è©å¨ ............ 2.5 cm æ¯è©å¨ à3 é«Âé³æÂÂè²å¨ ...... 2.6 cm ï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂçÂÂé Â形＠é¡Âå®ÂéÂȾ ............................ 6 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå ................. 100 - 35,000 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥 ................... 75 W ï¼ÂJEITAï¼ åÂÂç½®î¿ç°ç¹Âè²æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ..... 120 ï¼Â寬＠à30 ï¼Â深＠à450 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé .............................. 0.9 kg ä¸Âç½®æÂÂè²å¨ 尺寸 ..... 420 ï¼Â寬＠à32 ï¼Â深＠à120 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé .............................. 0.9 kg æÂÂæºÂ趠ä½Âé³æÂÂè²å¨ ï¼ S-DV700SW/S-DV900SW ï¼ é¡Âå .............. ä½Âé³åÂÂå°Âå°é¢åÂÂï¼Âé²ç£Âå¼ æÂÂè²å¨ ..................... 18 cm ï¼ÂéÂÂÃ¥ÂÂï¼ é¡Âå®ÂéÂȾ ............................ 6 ⦠頻çÂÂç¯Âå ..................... 25-2,300 Hz æÂÂ大輸堥 ................... 75 W ï¼ÂJEITA＠尺寸 .... 192 ï¼Â寬＠à436 ï¼Â深＠à395 ï¼Âé«Âï¼Âcm éÂÂé ............................. 12.5 kg ⢠å ç¢åÂÂæ¹é²ï¼Âè¦Âæ ¼èÂÂè¨Âè¨ÂèÂ¥æÂÂè®Âæ´æÂÂä¸Âå¦ è¡ÂéÂÂçÂ¥ã æ¢åÂÂå æ¬ NEC å ¬å¸æÂÂæ¬Â使ç¨ç FontAvenue  Ã¥ÂÂé«Âã FontAvenue æ¯ NEC å ¬å¸çÂÂ註åÂÂÃ¥ÂÂæ¨Âã æÂ¥æ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸åºç çÂÂ欠ï 2003 æÂ¥æ¬å ÂéÂÂå ¬å¸ çÂÂæ¬ÂæÂÂæ XV-DV900/700.book 95 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 96 ChH XV-DV900/700.book 96 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
éÂÂå è³Â訠12 97 ChH Italiano Français Nederlands Español Deutsch ä¸Âæ XV-DV900/700.book 97 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ
<TWKCW/03G00001> Printed in <ARC7496-A> PIONEER CORPORATION 4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: (905) 479-4411 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 656-472-1111 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V. Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F . 1 1000 TEL: 55-9178-4270 XV-DV900/700.book 98 ãÂÂã¼ã¸ ï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âï¼Âå¹´ï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂæÂ¥ãÂÂæ¨æÂÂæÂ¥ãÂÂÃ¥ÂÂå¾Âï¼ÂæÂÂï¼Âï¼ÂÃ¥ÂÂ